P. 1
RTN 910 IDU Hardware Description V100R003C03 01

RTN 910 IDU Hardware Description V100R003C03 01

|Views: 121|Likes:
Published by integrador_local

More info:

Published by: integrador_local on Jun 04, 2013
Copyright:Attribution Non-commercial

Availability:

Read on Scribd mobile: iPhone, iPad and Android.
download as PDF, TXT or read online from Scribd
See more
See less

01/06/2014

pdf

text

original

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System V100R003C03

IDU Hardware Description
Issue Date 01 2011-10-30

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address: Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China http://www.huawei.com support@huawei.com

Website: Email:

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

About This Document

About This Document
Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document. Product Name OptiX RTN 910 iManager U2000 Version V100R003C03 V100R006C00

Intended Audience
This document is intended for: l l l l l l Network planning engineer Hardware installation engineer Installation and commissioning engineer Field maintenance engineer Data configuration engineer System maintenance engineer

Before reading this document, you need to be familiar with the following: l l Basics of digital microwave communication Basics of the OptiX RTN 910

Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol Description Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ii

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

About This Document

Symbol

Description Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.

General Conventions
The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Times New Roman Boldface Italic Courier New Description Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman. Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. For example, log in as user root. Book titles are in italics. Examples of information displayed on the screen are in Courier New.

Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Boldface Italic [] { x | y | ... } Description The keywords of a command line are in boldface. Command arguments are in italics. Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional. Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

About This Document

Convention [ x | y | ... ] { x | y | ... }*

Description Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected. Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all items can be selected. Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]*

GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Boldface > Description Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK. Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Update History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Thus, the latest document issue contains all updates made in previous issues.

Updates in Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Based on Product Version V100R003C03
This document is the first issue for the V100R003C03 product version.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iv

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

Contents

Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii 1 Introduction....................................................................................................................................1
1.1 Network Application..........................................................................................................................................2 1.2 Components........................................................................................................................................................3 1.3 Configuration Modes..........................................................................................................................................7

2 Chassis.............................................................................................................................................8
2.1 Chassis Structure................................................................................................................................................9 2.2 Installation Mode................................................................................................................................................9 2.3 Air Flow..............................................................................................................................................................9 2.4 IDU Labels.......................................................................................................................................................10

3 Boards............................................................................................................................................13
3.1 Board Appearance............................................................................................................................................15 3.2 Board List.........................................................................................................................................................16 3.3 CSTA................................................................................................................................................................23 3.3.1 Version Description.................................................................................................................................23 3.3.2 Functions and Features............................................................................................................................23 3.3.3 Working Principle....................................................................................................................................27 3.3.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................30 3.3.5 DIP Switches and CF Card......................................................................................................................39 3.3.6 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................41 3.3.7 Board Feature Code.................................................................................................................................42 3.3.8 Types of SFP Modules............................................................................................................................42 3.3.9 Board Parameter Settings........................................................................................................................42 3.3.10 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................43 3.4 CSHA/CSHB/CSHC........................................................................................................................................46 3.4.1 Version Description.................................................................................................................................46 3.4.2 Functions and Features............................................................................................................................47 3.4.3 Working Principle....................................................................................................................................56 3.4.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................59 3.4.5 DIP Switches and CF Card......................................................................................................................73 3.4.6 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................75 3.4.7 Board Feature Code.................................................................................................................................76 Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

Contents

3.4.8 Types of SFP Modules............................................................................................................................76 3.4.9 Board Parameter Settings........................................................................................................................78 3.4.10 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................79 3.5 CSHD/CSHE....................................................................................................................................................87 3.5.1 Version Description.................................................................................................................................87 3.5.2 Functions and Features............................................................................................................................88 3.5.3 Working Principle....................................................................................................................................96 3.5.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................100 3.5.5 DIP Switches and CF Card....................................................................................................................113 3.5.6 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................115 3.5.7 Board Feature Code...............................................................................................................................116 3.5.8 Types of SFP Modules..........................................................................................................................116 3.5.9 Board Parameter Settings......................................................................................................................118 3.5.10 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................118 3.6 IF1...................................................................................................................................................................125 3.6.1 Version Description...............................................................................................................................125 3.6.2 Functions and Features..........................................................................................................................125 3.6.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................................127 3.6.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................132 3.6.5 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................134 3.6.6 Board Parameter Settings......................................................................................................................134 3.6.7 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................135 3.7 IFU2................................................................................................................................................................136 3.7.1 Version Description...............................................................................................................................136 3.7.2 Functions and Features..........................................................................................................................137 3.7.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................................139 3.7.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................143 3.7.5 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................145 3.7.6 Board Parameter Settings......................................................................................................................145 3.7.7 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................146 3.8 IFX2................................................................................................................................................................148 3.8.1 Version Description...............................................................................................................................148 3.8.2 Functions and Features..........................................................................................................................148 3.8.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................................151 3.8.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................155 3.8.5 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................157 3.8.6 Board Parameter Settings......................................................................................................................158 3.8.7 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................159 3.9 ISU2................................................................................................................................................................161 3.9.1 Version Description...............................................................................................................................161 3.9.2 Functions and Features..........................................................................................................................161 3.9.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................................164 Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vi

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

Contents

3.9.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................168 3.9.5 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................170 3.9.6 Board Parameter Settings......................................................................................................................171 3.9.7 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................171 3.10 ISX2..............................................................................................................................................................175 3.10.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................175 3.10.2 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................175 3.10.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................178 3.10.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................182 3.10.5 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................185 3.10.6 Board Parameter Settings....................................................................................................................185 3.10.7 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................186 3.11 EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA....................................................................................................................191 3.11.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................191 3.11.2 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................191 3.11.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................195 3.11.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................197 3.11.5 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................204 3.11.6 Types of SFP Modules........................................................................................................................204 3.11.7 Board Parameter Settings....................................................................................................................206 3.11.8 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................207 3.12 EMS6............................................................................................................................................................212 3.12.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................212 3.12.2 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................212 3.12.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................216 3.12.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................219 3.12.5 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................223 3.12.6 Types of SFP Modules........................................................................................................................224 3.12.7 Board Parameter Settings....................................................................................................................225 3.12.8 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................225 3.13 EFP8.............................................................................................................................................................227 3.13.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................227 3.13.2 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................227 3.13.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................231 3.13.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................233 3.13.5 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................236 3.13.6 Board Parameter Settings....................................................................................................................237 3.13.7 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................237 3.14 SL1D/SL1DA...............................................................................................................................................238 3.14.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................238 3.14.2 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................238 3.14.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................240 Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

Contents

3.14.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................242 3.14.5 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................244 3.14.6 Board Feature Code.............................................................................................................................245 3.14.7 Board Parameter Settings....................................................................................................................245 3.14.8 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................245 3.15 ML1/MD1.....................................................................................................................................................247 3.15.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................247 3.15.2 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................247 3.15.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................249 3.15.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................252 3.15.5 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................255 3.15.6 Board Feature Code.............................................................................................................................256 3.15.7 Board Parameter Settings....................................................................................................................256 3.15.8 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................256 3.16 SP3S/SP3D...................................................................................................................................................257 3.16.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................257 3.16.2 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................257 3.16.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................258 3.16.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................261 3.16.5 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................265 3.16.6 Board Feature Code.............................................................................................................................266 3.16.7 Board Parameter Settings....................................................................................................................266 3.16.8 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................266 3.17 PIU................................................................................................................................................................267 3.17.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................267 3.17.2 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................268 3.17.3 Working Principle................................................................................................................................268 3.17.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................269 3.17.5 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................271 3.17.6 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................271 3.18 FAN..............................................................................................................................................................271 3.18.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................271 3.18.2 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................272 3.18.3 Working Principle................................................................................................................................272 3.18.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................273 3.18.5 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................274 3.18.6 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................275

4 Accessories..................................................................................................................................276
4.1 E1 Panel..........................................................................................................................................................277 4.2 PDU................................................................................................................................................................279 4.2.1 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................279 4.2.2 Functions and Working Principle..........................................................................................................280 Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. viii

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

Contents

4.2.3 Power Distribution Mode......................................................................................................................281

5 Cables...........................................................................................................................................283
5.1 Power Cable....................................................................................................................................................285 5.2 PGND Cable...................................................................................................................................................285 5.2.1 IDU PGND Cable..................................................................................................................................285 5.2.2 E1 Panel PGND Cable...........................................................................................................................286 5.3 IF Jumper........................................................................................................................................................287 5.4 XPIC Cable.....................................................................................................................................................288 5.5 Fiber Jumper...................................................................................................................................................289 5.6 STM-1 Cable..................................................................................................................................................291 5.7 E1 Cables........................................................................................................................................................292 5.7.1 E1 Cable Connected to the External Equipment...................................................................................292 5.7.2 E1 Cable Connected to the E1 Panel.....................................................................................................296 5.8 Orderwire Cable.............................................................................................................................................298 5.9 Network Cable................................................................................................................................................298

A Parameters Description...........................................................................................................302
A.1 Parameters for Network Management...........................................................................................................303 A.1.1 Parameters for NE Management...........................................................................................................303 A.1.1.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching.........................................................................................303 A.1.1.2 Parameter Description: NE Creation...........................................................................................308 A.1.1.3 Parameter Description: Attribute_Changing NE IDs..................................................................310 A.1.1.4 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization.....................................................................311 A.1.1.5 Parameter Description: Localization Management of the NE Time............................................314 A.1.1.6 Parameter Description: Standard NTP Key Management...........................................................315 A.1.1.7 Parameter Description: License Management.............................................................................316 A.1.1.8 Parameter Description: Automatic Disabling of the Functions of NEs.......................................317 A.1.2 Parameters for Communications Management.....................................................................................318 A.1.2.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting..................................................318 A.1.2.2 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Rate Configuration.......................................319 A.1.2.3 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Transparent Transmission Management.......321 A.1.2.4 Parameter Description: ECC Management_Ethernet Port Extended ECC..................................323 A.1.2.5 Parameter Description: NE ECC Link Management...................................................................324 A.1.2.6 Parameter Description: ECC Link Management_Availability Test............................................325 A.1.2.7 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management........................327 A.1.2.8 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management Creation.........328 A.1.2.9 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_Availability Test.................................329 A.1.2.10 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_OSPF Parameter Settings.................330 A.1.2.11 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack_Proxy ARP.............................................................335 A.1.2.12 Parameter Description: Management of Multiple OSPF Areas.................................................336 A.1.2.13 Parameter Description: Management of Multiple OSPF Areas_Adding OSPF Areas..............337 A.1.2.14 Parameter Description: Management of Multiple OSPF Areas_Adding Routes to Be Manually Aggregated................................................................................................................................................338 Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ix

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

Contents

A.1.2.15 Parameter Description: Port OSPF Setting................................................................................339 A.1.2.16 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Network Layer Parameter......................................339 A.1.2.17 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Routing Table........................................................340 A.1.2.18 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Tunnel............................................................341 A.1.2.19 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Port Parameters..............................................345 A.1.2.20 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Bandwidth Management......................................346 A.1.2.21 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Port Setting..........................................................347 A.1.2.22 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Access Control.....................................................347 A.1.2.23 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Packet Control.....................................................348 A.1.2.24 Parameter Description: L2 DCN Management..........................................................................349 A.1.2.25 Parameter Description: Access Control.....................................................................................350 A.1.3 Parameters for Network Security Management....................................................................................351 A.1.3.1 Parameter Description: NE User Management............................................................................351 A.1.3.2 Parameter Description: NE User Management_Creation............................................................351 A.1.3.3 Parameter Description: LCT Access Control..............................................................................354 A.1.3.4 Parameter Description: RADIUS Configuration_Creation.........................................................355 A.1.3.5 Parameter Description: RADIUS Configuration_RADIUS Server.............................................356 A.1.3.6 Parameter Description: Enabling/Disabling the RADIUS Function...........................................357 A.2 Radio Link Parameters..................................................................................................................................358 A.2.1 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC Workgroup_Creation...........................................358 A.2.2 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC..............................................................................363 A.2.3 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection_Create...................................................................................370 A.2.4 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection................................................................................................371 A.2.5 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection_Create................................................................................373 A.2.6 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection............................................................................................376 A.2.7 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_Creating a PLA Group...................................................380 A.2.8 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_PLA................................................................................380 A.2.9 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration......................................................................381 A.3 Multiplex Section Protection Parameters......................................................................................................391 A.3.1 Parameter Description: Linear MSP_Creation.....................................................................................391 A.3.2 Parameter Description: Linear MSP.....................................................................................................395 A.4 SDH/PDH Service Parameters......................................................................................................................399 A.4.1 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation............................................................399 A.4.2 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_SNCP Service Creation....................................401 A.4.3 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Converting Normal Services Into SNCP Services ........................................................................................................................................................................405 A.4.4 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration............................................................................409 A.4.5 Parameter Description: SNCP Service Control....................................................................................411 A.4.6 Parameter Description: TU_AIS Insertion...........................................................................................414 A.5 Parameters for Board Interfaces....................................................................................................................415 A.5.1 Parameter Description: Working Modes of Ports.................................................................................415 A.5.2 PDH Port Parameters............................................................................................................................416 A.5.2.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Basic Attributes..................................................................416 Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. x

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

Contents

A.5.2.2 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Advanced Attributes...........................................................417 A.5.3 Parameters for the Ports on Ethernet Boards........................................................................................421 A.5.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes.......................................................421 A.5.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control...........................................................425 A.5.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes...................................................427 A.5.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Layer 3 Attributes...........................................................431 A.5.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes...............................................432 A.5.4 Serial Port Parameters...........................................................................................................................435 A.5.4.1 Parameter Description: Serial Port_Basic Attributes..................................................................435 A.5.4.2 Parameter Description: Serial Port_Creation of Serial Ports.......................................................436 A.5.5 Microwave Interface Parameters..........................................................................................................437 A.5.5.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes..................................................437 A.5.5.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes...............................................438 A.5.5.3 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 3 Attributes...............................................440 A.5.5.4 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes...........................................442 A.5.6 IF Board Parameters.............................................................................................................................445 A.5.6.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute........................................................................445 A.5.6.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute.................................................................453 A.5.6.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid_AM Configuration_Advanced Attributes.................................455 A.5.6.4 Parameter Description: ATPC Adjustment Records...................................................................456 A.5.6.5 Parameter Description: PRBS Test..............................................................................................457 A.5.7 ODU Parameters...................................................................................................................................458 A.5.7.1 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Radio Frequency Attribute...........................................458 A.5.7.2 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Power Attributes..........................................................459 A.5.7.3 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Equipment Information................................................463 A.5.7.4 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Advanced Attributes....................................................464 A.5.8 Parameters for SDH Interface Boards..................................................................................................465 A.5.8.1 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces.......................................................................................466 A.5.8.2 Parameter Description: Automatic Laser Shutdown...................................................................467 A.5.9 Parameters for PDH Interface Boards..................................................................................................468 A.5.9.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports..............................................................................................468 A.5.9.2 Parameter Description: PRBS Test..............................................................................................471 A.5.10 Parameters for Overhead....................................................................................................................472 A.5.10.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead............................................................472 A.5.10.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs..........................................................................................473 A.5.10.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs........................................................................................475 A.5.11 Parameter Description: Ethernet Virtual Interfaces............................................................................476 A.6 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features on the Packet Plane...............................................479 A.6.1 Parameters for Ethernet Services..........................................................................................................479 A.6.1.1 Parameter Description: E-Line Service_Creation........................................................................479 A.6.1.2 Parameter Description: E-Line Service.......................................................................................500 A.6.1.3 Parameter Description: VLAN Forwarding Table Items for E-Line Services_Creation.............511 Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xi

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

Contents

A.6.1.4 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service_Creation.......................................................................512 A.6.1.5 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service......................................................................................518 A.6.1.6 Parameter Description: QinQ Link_Creation..............................................................................529 A.6.1.7 Parameter Description: E-AGGR Services_Creation..................................................................529 A.6.1.8 Parameter Description: E-AGGR Services..................................................................................537 A.6.2 Parameters for Ethernet Protocols........................................................................................................542 A.6.2.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_Creation................................................................542 A.6.2.2 Parameter Description: ERPS Management................................................................................545 A.6.2.3 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Creation...........................................551 A.6.2.4 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Configuration..................................553 A.6.2.5 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_ Bridge Parameters.............................................553 A.6.2.6 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_CIST Parameters................................................559 A.6.2.7 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Running Information About the CIST...............561 A.6.2.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation Management_LAG Creation.....................569 A.6.2.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Link Aggregation......................................577 A.6.2.10 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Point-to-Point LPT................................................578 A.6.2.11 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creating Point-to-Point LPT.................................580 A.6.2.12 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Point-to-Multipoint LPT.......................................580 A.6.2.13 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creating Point-to-Multipoint LPT........................583 A.6.3 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM........................................................................................................587 A.6.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Domain Creation ..................................................................................................................................................................587 A.6.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Association Creation ..................................................................................................................................................................588 A.6.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MEP Creation............................589 A.6.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Remote MEP Creation..............590 A.6.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MIP Creation.............................591 A.6.3.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LB Enabling..............................592 A.6.3.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LT Enabling..............................593 A.6.3.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Enabling Service Loopback Detection............595 A.6.3.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Parameter.............................596 A.6.3.10 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Error Frame Monitoring ..................................................................................................................................................................598 A.6.4 QoS Parameters....................................................................................................................................599 A.6.4.1 Parameter Description: Diffserv Domain Management..............................................................599 A.6.4.2 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Management_Create.................................................605 A.6.4.3 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Applied Port_Modification.......................................612 A.6.4.4 Parameter Description: Policy Management...............................................................................614 A.6.4.5 Parameter Description: Port Policy.............................................................................................620 A.6.4.6 Parameter Description: Port Policy_Traffic Classification Configuration..................................627 A.6.4.7 Parameter Description: Port Shaping Management_Creation.....................................................638 A.7 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features on the EoS/EoPDH Plane.....................................640 A.7.1 Parameters for Ethernet Services..........................................................................................................640 Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xii

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

Contents

A.7.1.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Line Service_Creation.............................................................640 A.7.1.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Line Service_Creating QinQ-Based Ethernet Line Services ..................................................................................................................................................................644 A.7.1.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Line Service.............................................................................648 A.7.1.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet LAN Service_Creation of Ethernet LAN Services Based on IEEE 802.1d/802.1q Bridge...............................................................................................................................650 A.7.1.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet LAN Service_Creating IEEE 802.1ad Bridge-Based Ethernet LAN Service......................................................................................................................................................654 A.7.1.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet LAN Service............................................................................659 A.7.1.7 Parameter Description: VLAN Filtering Table_Creation............................................................665 A.7.1.8 Parameter Description: Aging Time of MAC Address Table Entries.........................................666 A.7.2 Parameters for Ethernet Protocols........................................................................................................667 A.7.2.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_Creation................................................................667 A.7.2.2 Parameter Description: ERPS Management................................................................................670 A.7.2.3 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Protocol Enabling.........................................................676 A.7.2.4 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Bridge Parameters........................................................677 A.7.2.5 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Port Parameters.............................................................678 A.7.2.6 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Bridge Running Information........................................680 A.7.2.7 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Port Running Information............................................681 A.7.2.8 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Point-to-Point Attribute................................................682 A.7.2.9 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Enabling......................................................683 A.7.2.10 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Creation of Static Multicast Table Entries ..................................................................................................................................................................684 A.7.2.11 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Aging Time of Multicast Table Entries ..................................................................................................................................................................685 A.7.2.12 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Creation of LAGs...................................686 A.7.2.13 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Link Aggregation....................................688 A.7.2.14 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation of Point-to-Point Service LPT................689 A.7.2.15 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation of Point-to-Multipoint Service LPT.......690 A.7.2.16 Parameter Description: Port Mirroring_Creation......................................................................691 A.7.3 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM........................................................................................................692 A.7.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MDs.............................................692 A.7.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MAs.............................................693 A.7.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MPs..............................................694 A.7.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Enabling LB....................................................696 A.7.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Enabling LT....................................................697 A.7.3.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM_OAM Parameter...................................................698 A.7.3.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM_OAM Error Frame Monitoring.............................699 A.7.3.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM_Remote OAM Parameter......................................700 A.7.4 QoS Parameters....................................................................................................................................701 A.7.4.1 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of Flows....................................................701 A.7.4.2 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of CAR.....................................................703 A.7.4.3 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of CoS......................................................705 A.7.4.4 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of CAR/CoS.............................................707 Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xiii

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

Contents

A.7.4.5 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Shaping Management of Egress Queues................707 A.7.4.6 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Port Shaping............................................................709 A.7.5 Parameters for the Ports on Ethernet Boards........................................................................................710 A.7.5.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_External Port...................................................................710 A.7.5.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Internal Port....................................................................717 A.7.5.3 Parameter Description: Type Field of QinQ Frames...................................................................723 A.8 RMON Parameters.........................................................................................................................................724 A.8.1 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_Statistics Group...........................................................724 A.8.2 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Group..............................................................725 A.8.3 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Control Group.................................................726 A.8.4 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_RMON Setting.............................................................727 A.9 Parameters for MPLS/PWE3 Services..........................................................................................................728 A.9.1 MPLS Tunnel Parameters.....................................................................................................................729 A.9.1.1 Parameter Description: Basic Configurations of MPLS Tunnels................................................729 A.9.1.2 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Static Tunnel..........................................730 A.9.1.3 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Creation of Unidirectional Tunnels.......734 A.9.1.4 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Creation of Bidirectional Tunnels.........738 A.9.1.5 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_OAM Parameters...................................742 A.9.1.6 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_FDI.........................................................747 A.9.1.7 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_LSP Ping................................................748 A.9.1.8 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_LSP Traceroute......................................751 A.9.1.9 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Management......................................................754 A.9.1.10 Parameter Description: PW Management_MS-PW Creation....................................................759 A.9.1.11 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW OAM...............................................................770 A.9.1.12 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Ping.................................................................774 A.9.1.13 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Traceroute.......................................................777 A.9.1.14 Parameter Description: MPLS APS Protection Management...................................................779 A.9.1.15 Parameter Description: Tunnel Protection Group_Creation......................................................782 A.9.1.16 Parameter Description: PW APS Protection Group_Creation...................................................787 A.9.1.17 Parameter Description: Slave Protection Pair of a PW APS Protection Group_Creation.........798 A.9.2 CES Parameters....................................................................................................................................804 A.9.2.1 Parameter Description: CES Service Management.....................................................................804 A.9.2.2 Parameter Description: CES Service Management_Creation.....................................................813 A.9.3 ATM Parameters...................................................................................................................................826 A.9.3.1 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Group Management.............................826 A.9.3.2 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_Bound Path Configuration............................831 A.9.3.3 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Group Status........................................833 A.9.3.4 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Link Status...........................................834 A.9.3.5 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_ATM Interface Management........................834 A.9.3.6 Parameter Description: Configuration of ATM Service Class Mapping Table...........................836 A.9.3.7 Parameter Description: Configuration of ATM Service Class Mapping Table_Creation...........838 A.9.3.8 Parameter Description: ATM Policy Management.....................................................................840 Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xiv

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

Contents

A.9.3.9 Parameter Description: ATM Policy Management_Creation......................................................844 A.9.3.10 Parameter Description: ATM Service Management..................................................................849 A.9.3.11 Parameter Description: ATM Service Management_Creation..................................................858 A.9.3.12 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_Segment and End Attributes.....................870 A.9.3.13 Parameter Description: ATM OMA Management_CC Activation Status................................874 A.9.3.14 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_Remote End Loopback Status...................877 A.9.3.15 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_LLID.........................................................880 A.10 Clock Parameters.........................................................................................................................................881 A.10.1 Parameter Description: Frequency Selection Mode...........................................................................881 A.10.2 Physical Clock Parameters.................................................................................................................882 A.10.2.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table................................................................882 A.10.2.2 Parameter Description: Priority Table for the PLL Clock Source of the External Clock Port ..................................................................................................................................................................884 A.10.2.3 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Subnet....................................................886 A.10.2.4 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Quality...................................................889 A.10.2.5 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_SSM Output Control........................................892 A.10.2.6 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_Clock ID Enabling Status.................................893 A.10.2.7 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Restoration Parameters.........894 A.10.2.8 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching..............................896 A.10.2.9 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching Conditions...........897 A.10.2.10 Parameter Description: Output Phase-Locked Source of the External Clock Source.............898 A.10.2.11 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status............................................................901 A.10.3 CES ACR Clock Parameters..............................................................................................................902 A.10.3.1 Parameter Description: ACR Clock Source..............................................................................903 A.10.3.2 Parameter Description: Clock Domain......................................................................................903 A.10.3.3 Parameter Description: Clock Domain_Creation......................................................................904 A.10.4 PTP Clock Parameters........................................................................................................................905 A.10.4.1 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Attribute.........................................................905 A.10.4.2 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Attribute_Creation of PTP Clock Ports.........915 A.10.4.3 Parameter Description: Setting of a PTP Clock Subnet_Clock Subnet.....................................916 A.10.4.4 Parameter Description: Setting of a PTP Clock Subnet_BMC.................................................917 A.10.4.5 Parameter Description: External Time Port_Basic Attributes...................................................918 A.10.4.6 Parameter Description: External Time Port_BMC....................................................................919 A.10.4.7 Parameter Description: External Time Port_Cable Transmission Distance..............................921 A.10.5 Parameter Description: Auxiliary Ports..............................................................................................922 A.11 Parameters for the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces...............................................................................923 A.11.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General.......................................................................................923 A.11.2 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced....................................................................................925 A.11.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port................................................................................926 A.11.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port....................................................................926 A.11.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface...............................................................927

B Board Loopback Types............................................................................................................931
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xv

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

Contents

C Indicators of Boards.................................................................................................................933 D Weight and Power Consumption of Each Board................................................................953 E Glossary......................................................................................................................................955
E.1 0-9..................................................................................................................................................................956 E.2 A-E.................................................................................................................................................................956 E.3 F-J...................................................................................................................................................................965 E.4 K-O.................................................................................................................................................................970 E.5 P-T..................................................................................................................................................................976 E.6 U-Z.................................................................................................................................................................985

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xvi

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

1 Introduction

1
About This Chapter

Introduction

The OptiX RTN 910 is a product in the OptiX RTN 900 radio transmission system series. 1.1 Network Application The OptiX RTN 900 is a new generation TDM/Hybrid/Packet integrated microwave transmission system developed by Huawei. It provides a seamless microwave transmission solution for mobile communication network or private networks. 1.2 Components The OptiX RTN 910 adopts a split structure. The system consists of the IDU 910 and the ODU. Each ODU is connected to the IDU through an IF cable. 1.3 Configuration Modes The OptiX RTN 910 supports different configuration modes in which different system control, switching, and timing boards, IF boards, and ODUs are configured, suited for various microwave application scenarios.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

1 Introduction

1.1 Network Application
The OptiX RTN 900 is a new generation TDM/Hybrid/Packet integrated microwave transmission system developed by Huawei. It provides a seamless microwave transmission solution for mobile communication network or private networks.

OptiX RTN 900 Product Family
There are three types of OptiX RTN 900 products: OptiX RTN 910, OptiX RTN 950, and OptiX RTN 980. Users can choose the product best suited for their site. l l l The IDU of the OptiX RTN 910 is 1U high and supports one or two IF boards. The IDU of the OptiX RTN 950 is 2U high and supports one to six IF boards. The IDU of the OptiX RTN 980 is 5U high and supports one to fourteen IF boards.
NOTE

All the products in the OptiX RTN 900 series use the same types of IF and service interface boards.

The OptiX RTN 900 series provide a variety of service interfaces and can be installed easily and configured flexibly. The OptiX RTN 900 series provide a solution that can integrate TDM microwave, Hybrid microwave, and Packet microwave technologies according to the networking scheme for the sites, achieving smooth upgrade from TDM microwave to Hybrid microwave, and from Hybrid microwave to Packet microwave. This solution is able to adapt to changing service scenarios brought about by evolutions in radio mobile networks. Therefore, this solution meets the transmission requirements of 2G and 3G networks while also allowing for integration with future LTE and 4G networks.

OptiX RTN 910
The OptiX RTN 910 is microwave equipment deployed at the access layer. Figure 1-1 shows the microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 910. Figure 1-1 Microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 910

FE FE E1 E1

E1 E1 E1/ STM-1 Regional TDM Network

E1/ STM-1

FE/GE FE/GE E1 FE FE E1 Regional Packet Network FE/GE

OptiX RTN 910

MSTP

NodeB

BTS

RNC

BSC

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

1 Introduction

NOTE

l In this solution, the OptiX RTN 910 is connected to an RNC and BSC directly or through a regional backhaul network. l The OptiX RTN 910 provides a wide range of interfaces and service bearer technologies to adapt to the regional backhaul network. The regional backhaul network can be a time-division multiplexing (TDM) network or packet switching network (PSN). l The OptiX RTN 910 supports the Ethernet over SDH (EoSDH) function and Ethernet over PDH (EoPDH) function. Therefore, packet services can be backhauled through a TDM network. l The OptiX RTN 910 supports the pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) technology. Therefore, TDM, ATM, and Ethernet services can be backhauled through a PSN. l The OptiX RTN 910 supports the VLAN sub-interface function. Therefore, MPLS packet services can be backhauled through a Layer 2 network. l When three or more microwave directions are required, cascade several sets of the OptiX RTN 910 or use the OptiX RTN 950 or OptiX RTN 980 that provides more powerful functions and supports more microwave directions.

1.2 Components
The OptiX RTN 910 adopts a split structure. The system consists of the IDU 910 and the ODU. Each ODU is connected to the IDU through an IF cable.

IDU 910
The IDU 910 is the indoor unit for an OptiX RTN 910 system. It receives and multiplexes services, performs service processing and IF processing, and provides the system control and communications function. Table 1-1 lists the basic features of the IDU 910. Table 1-1 Features of the IDU 910 Item Chassis height Pluggable Number of microwave directions RF configuration mode Description 1U Supported 1 or 2 1+0 non-protection configuration 2+0 non-protection configuration 1+1 protection configuration N+1 protection configuration (N = 1) XPIC configuration

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

1 Introduction

Figure 1-2 Appearance of the IDU 910

ODU
The ODU is the outdoor unit for the OptiX RTN 900. It converts frequencies and amplifies signals. The OptiX RTN 900 product series can use the RTN 600 ODU and RTN XMC ODU, covering the entire frequency band from 6 GHz to 38 GHz.
NOTE

Unlike the other frequency bands that use 14 MHz, 28 MHz, or 56 MHz channel spacing, the 18 GHz frequency band uses 13.75 MHz, 27.5 MHz, or 55 MHz channel spacing.

Table 1-2 RTN 600 ODUs that the OptiX RTN 910 supports Item Description Standard Power ODU ODU type Frequency band SP, SPA 7/8/11/13/15/18/23/ 26/38 GHz (SP ODU) 6/7/8/11/13/15/18/2 3 GHz (SPA ODU) Microwave modulation scheme QPSK/16QAM/ 32QAM/64QAM/ 128QAM/256QAM High-Power ODU HP, HPA 6/7/8/10/10.5/11/13/ 15/18/23/26/28/32/3 8 GHz (HP ODU) 7/8/11/13/15/18/23 GHz (HPA ODU) QPSK/16QAM/ 32QAM/64QAM/ 128QAM/256QAM QPSK/16QAM Low Capacity for PDH ODU LP 7/8/11/13/15/18/23 GHz (LP ODU)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

1 Introduction

Item

Description Standard Power ODU High-Power ODU 7/14/28/40/56 MHz (6/7/8/10/11/13/15/1 8/23/26/28/32/38 GHz) 7/14/28 MHz (10.5 GHz) Low Capacity for PDH ODU 3.5/7/14/28 MHz

Channel spacing

3.5/7/14/28 MHz

Table 1-3 RTN XMC ODUs that the OptiX RTN 910 supports Item Description High-Power ODU ODU type Frequency band Microwave modulation scheme Channel spacing XMC-2 7/8/11/13/15/18/23/26/38 GHz QPSK/16QAM/32QAM/ 64QAM/128QAM/256QAM 7/14/28/40/56 MHz Low Capacity for PDH ODU XMC-1 7/8/11/13/15/18/23 GHz QPSK/16QAM 3.5/7/14/28 MHz

There are two methods for mounting the ODU and the antenna: direct mounting and separate mounting. l The direct mounting method is generally adopted when a small- or medium-diameter and single-polarized antenna is used. In this situation, if one ODU is configured for one antenna, the ODU is directly mounted at the back of the antenna. If two ODUs are configured for one antenna, an RF signal combiner/splitter (hence referred to as a hybrid coupler) must be mounted to connect the ODUs to the antenna. Figure 1-3 illustrates the direct mounting method. The direct mounting method can also be adopted when a small- or medium-diameter and dual-polarized antenna is used. Two ODUs are mounted onto an antenna using an orthomode transducer (OMT). The method for installing an OMT is similar to that for installing a hybrid coupler.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

1 Introduction

Figure 1-3 Direct mounting

l

The separate mounting method is adopted when a large- or medium-diameter and singleor dual-polarized antenna is used. Figure 1-4 shows the separate mounting method. In this situation, a hybrid coupler can be mounted (two ODUs share one feed boom). Figure 1-4 Separate mounting

NOTE

The OptiX RTN 910 provides an antenna solution that covers the entire frequency band, and supports single-polarized antennas and dual-polarized antennas with diameters of 0.3 m to 3.7 m along with the corresponding feeder system.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

1 Introduction

1.3 Configuration Modes
The OptiX RTN 910 supports different configuration modes in which different system control, switching, and timing boards, IF boards, and ODUs are configured, suited for various microwave application scenarios. Table 1-4 Configuration modes that the OptiX RTN 910 supports Configuration Mode Control, Switching, and Timing Board CSTA IF Board ODU Application

PDH microwave equipment

IF1

Low capacity for PDH ODU

Provides a radio link with capacity not higher than 16 x E1. Provides an STM-1 radio link or a highcapacity PDH radio link. Provides one or two STM-1 radio links. Provides a Integrated IP radio link.

SDH microwave equipment

CSTA

IF1

Standard power ODU or high power ODU

CSTA

ISU2 ISX2

Standard power ODU or high power ODU Standard power ODU or high power ODU

Integrated IP microwave equipment

CSHA CSHB CSHC CSHD CSHE

IFU2 ISU2

XPIC Integrated IP microwave equipment

CSHA CSHB CSHC CSHD CSHE

IFX2 ISX2

Standard power ODU or high power ODU

Provides a Integrated IP radio link of the super capacity.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

2 Chassis

2
About This Chapter

Chassis

The IDU of the OptiX RTN 910 is a 1U chassis. It can be deployed in a variety of scenarios and on several different types of racks, cabinets, and surfaces. 2.1 Chassis Structure The dimensions (H x W x D) of the IDU 910 chassis are 44 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm. The IDU 910 chassis has a two-layered structure that is air cooled. 2.2 Installation Mode The IDU 910 can be deployed in a variety of scenarios and on several different types of racks, cabinets, and surfaces. 2.3 Air Flow An IDU 910 chassis is air-cooled with air in on the left side and air out on the right side. 2.4 IDU Labels Product nameplate labels, qualification card labels, ESD protection labels, grounding labels, laser safety class labels, high temperature warning labels, and operation warning labels, and other types of labels are affixed in their respective positions on the IDU chassis or boards. Adhere to the warnings and instructions on the labels when performing various types of tasks in order to avoid bodily injury or damage to the equipment.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

2 Chassis

2.1 Chassis Structure
The dimensions (H x W x D) of the IDU 910 chassis are 44 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm. The IDU 910 chassis has a two-layered structure that is air cooled. Figure 2-1 shows the chassis structure of the IDU 910. Figure 2-1 Chassis structure of the IDU 910

H D W

2.2 Installation Mode
The IDU 910 can be deployed in a variety of scenarios and on several different types of racks, cabinets, and surfaces. The IDU 910 can be installed: l l l l l l l l In a 300 mm European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI) cabinet In a 600 mm ETSI cabinet In a 450 mm 19-inch cabinet In a 600 mm 19-inch cabinet In a 19-inch open rack In an outdoor cabinet for wireless equipment On a wall On a table

2.3 Air Flow
An IDU 910 chassis is air-cooled with air in on the left side and air out on the right side. Figure 2-2 shows the air flow in an IDU 910 chassis.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

2 Chassis

Figure 2-2 Air flow in an IDU 910 chassis

2.4 IDU Labels
Product nameplate labels, qualification card labels, ESD protection labels, grounding labels, laser safety class labels, high temperature warning labels, and operation warning labels, and other types of labels are affixed in their respective positions on the IDU chassis or boards. Adhere to the warnings and instructions on the labels when performing various types of tasks in order to avoid bodily injury or damage to the equipment.

Label Description
Table 2-1 provides the description of the labels on the IDU chassis and boards. Actual labels may vary depending on the configurations of the chassis and boards. Table 2-1 Description of the IDU labels Label Label Name ESD protection label Description Indicates that the equipment is sensitive to static electricity. Indicates the grounding position of the IDU chassis.

Grounding label

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

2 Chassis

Label

Label Name Fan warning label

Description Warns you not to touch fan leaves when the fan is rotating. Indicates that the board surface temperature may exceed 70°C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55°C. Wear protective gloves to handle the board. Instructs you to read related instructions before performing any power-related tasks. For details, see Labels in 3.17.4 Front Panel.

High temperature warning label

Power caution label

合 格证/ QUALIFICATION CARD

Qualification card label

Indicates that the equipment has been quality checked.

HUAWEI
华为技术有限公司
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.

中国制造
MADE IN CHINA

RoHS label

Indicates that the equipment complies with the related requirements specified in the RoHS directive.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

2 Chassis

Label

Label Name Product nameplate label

Description Indicates the product name and certification.

Operation guidance label
PULL

Instructs you to slightly pull the switch lever outwards before setting the switch to the "I" or "O" position.

Label Position
Figure 2-3 shows the positions of the labels on the chassis of the IDU 910. Figure 2-3 Positions of the IDU 910 labels
合 格证/ QUALIFICATION CARD

HUAWEI
华为技术有限公司
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.

50

中国制造
MADE IN CHINA

!

! W A R N IN G -48V O U T PU T T U R N O FF P O W ER B EF O R E D ISC O N N EC TIN G IF C AB LE

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

12

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

3
About This Chapter

Boards

The IDU 910 supports the following types of boards: system control, switching, and timing boards, IF boards, Ethernet boards, SDH boards, PDH boards, power supply boards, and fan boards. 3.1 Board Appearance The dimensions (H x W x D) of the board in the extended slot of the IDU 910 chassis are 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm. The dimensions (H x W x D) of the system control, switching, and timing board in the IDU 910 chassis are 20.60 mm x 388.40 mm x 266.79 mm. 3.2 Board List The IDU 910 provides various functions with different boards inserted. 3.3 CSTA The CSTA is an integrated TDM system control, switching, and timing board. 3.4 CSHA/CSHB/CSHC The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC is the integrated Hybrid system control, switching, and timing board. The CSHA, CSHB, and CSHC differ from each other with regard to the types and number of service ports. 3.5 CSHD/CSHE The CSHD/CSHE is the integrated Hybrid system control, switching, and timing board. The difference between the CSHD and CSHE is that the GE ports on the CSHD support pluggable SFP optical/electrical modules, while the GE ports on the CSHE are fixed electrical ports. 3.6 IF1 The IF1 is a medium-capacity SDH IF board. The IF1 uses the DC-I power distribution mode. 3.7 IFU2 The IFU2 is a universal IF board that supports the Integrated IP radio mode. The IFU2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode. 3.8 IFX2 The IFX2 is a universal IF board that supports the XPIC function in Integrated IP radio mode. The IFX2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode. 3.9 ISU2
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 13

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

The ISU2 is a universal IF board that supports the Integrated IP radio mode and SDH radio mode at the same time. The ISU2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode. 3.10 ISX2 The ISX2 is a universal XPIC IF board and provides the XPIC function for signals transmitted/ received in Integrated IP radio mode and SDH radio mode. The ISX2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode. 3.11 EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA The EM6T/EM6F/EM6TA/EM6FA is an FE/GE interface board, which provides four FE electrical ports and two GE ports. The EM6T/EM6TA has similar functions to the EM6F/ EM6FA. The only difference is as follows: The GE ports on the EM6T/EM6TA use fixed electrical ports whereas the GE ports on the EM6F/EM6FA use the SFP modules and therefore can function as two FE/GE optical or GE electrical ports. The GE electrical ports on the EM6F/EM6FA and the EM6T/EM6TA are compatible with the FE electrical ports. 3.12 EMS6 The EMS6 is an FE/GE EoSDH processing board providing the L2 switching function. It provides four FE electrical ports and two GE ports using small form-factor pluggable (SFP) optical/electrical modules. 3.13 EFP8 The EFP8 is an 8-port FE EoPDH processing board. The EFP board is connected to the packet plane through its bridging GE port. 3.14 SL1D/SL1DA The SL1D/SL1DA is a 2xSTM-1 optical interface board. The SL1D/SL1DA can also provide STM-1 electrical ports by using SFP electrical modules. Besides all the functions provided by the SL1D, the SL1DA supports the K byte pass-through function. 3.15 ML1/MD1 The ML1 is a 16xSmart E1 service processing board. The MD1 is a 32xSmart E1 service processing board. 3.16 SP3S/SP3D The SP3S is a 16xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm tributary board. The SP3D is a 32xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm tributary board. 3.17 PIU The PIU is the power interface board and can access two -48 V DC or -60 V DC power supplies. 3.18 FAN The FAN is a fan board that dissipates heat generated in the chassis through air cooling.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

14

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

3.1 Board Appearance
The dimensions (H x W x D) of the board in the extended slot of the IDU 910 chassis are 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm. The dimensions (H x W x D) of the system control, switching, and timing board in the IDU 910 chassis are 20.60 mm x 388.40 mm x 266.79 mm.
NOTE

The depth of the board refers to the distance between the front panel and the end of the PCB.

Board Appearance
Figure 3-1 shows the appearance of an ISU2 board in an IDU 910 chassis. Figure 3-1 Appearance of an ISU2 board

H D W

Bar Code
The front panel of a board has two ejector levers and two captive screws. The ejector levers help you remove or insert a board. The captive screws fasten a board to the chassis. A board bar code (as shown in Figure 3-2) is attached to one of the ejector levers. Figure 3-2 Bar code
Bar code

0514721055000015-SL91EM6F01

③ ④

① ② ③ ④

Internal code Board version Board name Board feature code

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

15

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

NOTE

Only the bar codes of some boards contain board feature codes, which further classify boards. For example, the feature codes of some boards using SFP modules (such as EM6F) indicate the type of SFP module being used, and the feature codes of some other boards providing E1 ports (such as SP3S) indicate the impedance of E1 ports.

3.2 Board List
The IDU 910 provides various functions with different boards inserted. Figure 3-3 IDU slot layout
Slot 5 Slot 6 (PIU) (FAN) Slot 3 (EXT) Slot 4 (EXT)

Slot 1 (CSTA/CSHA/CSHB/CSHC/CSHD)

NOTE

"EXT" represents an extended slot, which can house any type of IF board or interface board.

Table 3-1 List of the IDU boards Board Acronym CSTA Board Name TDM control, switching, and timing board Valid Slot Slot 1 Description l Provides full time division cross-connections for VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services equivalent to 8x8 VC-4s. l Performs system communication and control. l Provides the clock processing function and supports one external clock input/output function. l Provides sixteen 75-ohm or 120-ohm TDM E1 interfaces. l Uses the SFP module to provide two STM-1 optical/electrical interfaces. l Provides one Ethernet NM interface, one NM serial interface, and one NE cascading interface. l Provides one orderwire interface, one asynchronous data interface, one synchronous data interface, and three-input and one-output external alarm interfaces. l Provides one outdoor monitoring interface that shares a port with the external clock interface.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

16

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Board Acronym CSHA

Board Name Hybrid control, switching, and timing board

Valid Slot Slot 1

Description l Provides full time division cross-connections for VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services equivalent to 8x8 VC-4s. l Provides the 4.2 Gbit/s packet switching capability. l Performs system communication and control. l Provides the clock processing function and supports one external clock input/output function and one external time input/output function. The external time interface shares a port with the external clock interface. l Provides sixteen 75-ohm or 120-ohm TDM E1 interfaces. l Provides two FE electrical interfaces. l Provides two GE electrical interfaces that are compatible with the FE electrical interface. l Provides one Ethernet NM interface, one NM serial interface, and one NE cascading interface. l Provides one orderwire interface, one asynchronous data interface, one synchronous data interface, and three-input and one-output external alarm interfaces. l Provides one outdoor monitoring interface that shares a port with the external clock interface.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

17

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Board Acronym CSHB

Board Name Hybrid control, switching, and timing board

Valid Slot Slot 1

Description l Provides full time division cross-connections for VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services equivalent to 8x8 VC-4s. l Provides the 4.2 Gbit/s packet switching capability. l Performs system communication and control. l Provides the clock processing function and supports one external clock input/output function and one external time input/output function. The external time interface shares a port with the external clock interface. l Provides thirty-two 75-ohm or 120-ohm TDM E1 interfaces. l Provides two FE electrical interfaces. l Provides two GE electrical interfaces that are compatible with the FE electrical interface. l Provides one Ethernet NM interface, one NM serial interface, and one NE cascading interface. l Provides one orderwire interface, one asynchronous data interface, one synchronous data interface, and three-input and one-output external alarm interfaces. l Provides one outdoor monitoring interface that shares a port with the external clock interface.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

18

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Board Acronym CSHC

Board Name Hybrid control, switching, and timing board

Valid Slot Slot 1

Description l Provides full time division cross-connections for VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services equivalent to 8x8 VC-4s. l Provides the 4.2 Gbit/s packet switching capability. l Performs system communication and control. l Provides the clock processing function and supports one external clock input/output function and one external time input/output function. The external time interface shares a port with the external clock interface. l Provides sixteen 75-ohm or 120-ohm TDM E1 interfaces. l Uses the SFP module to provide two STM-1 optical/electrical interfaces. l Provides two FE electrical interfaces. l Uses the SFP module to provide two GE/FE optical interfaces or GE electrical interfaces. The GE electrical interfaces are compatible with the FE electrical interfaces. l Provides one Ethernet NM interface, one NM serial interface, and one NE cascading interface. l Provides one orderwire interface, one asynchronous data interface, and three-input and one-output external alarm interfaces. l Provides one outdoor monitoring interface that shares a port with the external clock interface.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

19

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Board Acronym CSHD

Board Name Hybrid control, switching, and timing board

Valid Slot Slot 1

Description l Provides full time division cross-connections for VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services equivalent to 8x8 VC-4s. l Provides the 4.4 Gbit/s packet switching capability. l Performs system communication and control. l Provides the clock processing function and time processing function, supports one external clock input/output and two external time inputs/outputs. The first external time interface shares a port with the external clock interface. l Provides sixteen 75-ohm or 120-ohm TDM/Smart E1 interfaces. Supports Native E1, CES E1, ATM/ IMA E1, and Fractional E1. l Provides four FE electrical interfaces. l Uses the SFP module to provide two GE/FE optical interfaces or GE electrical interfaces. The GE electrical interfaces are compatible with the FE electrical interfaces. l Provides one Ethernet NM interface, one NM serial interface, and one NE cascading interface. l Provides one orderwire interface, one asynchronous data interface, one synchronous data interface, and three-input and one-output external alarm interfaces. l Provides one outdoor monitoring interface that shares a port with the orderwire phone interface and the second external time interface.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

20

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Board Acronym CSHE

Board Name Hybrid control, switching, and timing board

Valid Slot Slot 1

Description l Provides full time division cross-connections for VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services equivalent to 8x8 VC-4s. l Provides the 4.4 Gbit/s packet switching capability. l Performs system communication and control. l Provides the clock processing function and time processing function, supports one external clock input/output and two external time inputs/outputs. The first external time interface shares a port with the external clock interface. l Provides sixteen 75-ohm or 120-ohm TDM/Smart E1 interfaces. Supports Native E1, CES E1, ATM/ IMA E1, and Fractional E1. l Provides four FE electrical interfaces. l Provides two GE electrical interfaces. The GE electrical interfaces are compatible with the FE electrical interfaces. l Provides one Ethernet NM interface, one NM serial interface, and one NE cascading interface. l Provides one orderwire interface, one asynchronous data interface, one synchronous data interface, and three-input and one-output external alarm interfaces. l Provides one outdoor monitoring interface that shares a port with the orderwire phone interface and the second external time interface.

ISU2

Universal IF board

Slot 3/4

l Provides one IF interface. l Supports integrated IP microwave and SDH microwave. The supported service modes are Native E1+Ethernet, Native STM-1+Ethernet or SDH (1xSTM-1 or 2xSTM-1). l Supports the AM function. l Supports Ethernet frame header compression. l Supports the physical link aggregation (PLA) function.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

21

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Board Acronym ISX2

Board Name Universal XPIC IF board

Valid Slot Slot 3/4

Description l Provides one IF interface. l Supports integrated IP microwave and SDH microwave. The supported service modes are Native E1+Ethernet, Native STM-1+Ethernet or SDH (1xSTM-1 or 2xSTM-1). l Supports the XPIC function. l Supports the AM function. l Supports Ethernet frame header compression. l Supports the physical link aggregation (PLA) function.

IF1

SDH IF board

Slot 3/4

l Provides one IF interface. l Supports the TU-based PDH microwave solution and the STM-1-based SDH microwave solution.

IFU2

Universal IF board

Slot 3/4

l Provides one IF interface. l Supports integrated IP microwave. l Supports the AM function.

IFX2

Universal XPIC IF board

Slot 3/4

l Provides one IF interface. l Supports integrated IP microwave. l Supports the XPIC function. l Supports the AM function.

SL1D SL1DA EM6T/EM6TA

2xSTM-1 interface board 2xSTM-1 interface board 6-port RJ45 Ethernet/ Gigabit Ethernet interface board 4-port RJ45 + 2port SFP Fast Ethernet/ Gigabit Ethernet interface board 8-port RJ45 FE EoPDH processing board with the switching function

Slot 3/4 Slot 3/4 Slot 3/4

Uses the SFP module to provide two STM-1 optical/ electrical interfaces. Uses the SFP module to provide two STM-1 optical/ electrical interfaces. l Provides four FE electrical interfaces. l Provides two GE electrical interfaces that are compatible with the FE electrical interface.

EM6F/EM6FA

Slot 3/4

l Provides four FE electrical interfaces. l Uses the SFP module to provide two GE/FE optical interfaces or GE electrical interfaces. The GE electrical interfaces are compatible with the FE electrical interfaces.

EFP8

Slot 3/4

l Provides eight FE electrical interfaces. l Bridges to the packet plane through one internal GE interface. l Supports the processing of EoPDH services. l Supports Ethernet transparent transmission services and Layer 2 switching services.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

22

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Board Acronym EMS6

Board Name 4-port RJ45 and 2-port SFP FE/ GE EoSDH processing board with the switching function 16xE1 (Smart) tributary board

Valid Slot Slot 3/4

Description l Provides four FE electrical interfaces. l Uses the SFP module to provide two GE optical or electrical interfaces. The GE electrical interfaces are compatible with the FE electrical interfaces. l Supports the processing of EoSDH services. l Supports Ethernet transparent transmission services and Layer 2 switching services.

ML1

Slot 3/4

l Provides sixteen 75-ohm or 120-ohm Smart E1 interfaces. l Supports CES E1, ATM/IMA E1, and Fractional E1.

MD1

32xE1 (Smart) tributary board

Slot 3/4

l Provides thirty-two 75-ohm or 120-ohm Smart E1 interfaces. l Supports CES E1, ATM/IMA E1, and Fractional E1.

SP3S SP3D PIU FAN

16xE1 tributary board 32xE1 tributary board Power board Fan board

Slot 3/4 Slot 3/4 Slot 5 Slot 6

Provides sixteen 75-ohm or 120-ohm TDM E1 interfaces. Provides thirty-two 75-ohm or 120-ohm TDM E1 interfaces. Provides two -48 V/-60 V DC power inputs. Cools and ventilates the IDU.

3.3 CSTA
The CSTA is an integrated TDM system control, switching, and timing board.

3.3.1 Version Description
The functional version of the CSTA is SLA1.

3.3.2 Functions and Features
The CSTA provides full time division cross-connection, system control and communication, and clock processing functions. The CSTA provides PDH/SDH service ports, auxiliary ports, and management ports. Table 3-2 to Table 3-4 list the functions and features that the CSTA supports.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

23

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-2 Functions and features Function and Feature Basic functions Cross-connect capacity System control and communication Clock Clock synchronization at the physical layer Description Supports full time division cross-connections (equivalent to 8x8 VC-4s) at the VC-12, VC-3, or VC-4 level. Manages, monitors, and controls the running status of the IDU, and works as a communication service unit between the NMS and boards to help the NMS to control and manage the NE. Provides the system clock and frame headers for service signals and overhead signals for the other boards when tracing an appropriate clock source. The traced clock source can be any of the following: l External clock l SDH line clock l PDH tributary clock l Radio link clock Clock protection Supports the following clock protection schemes: l Protection based on clock source priorities l Protection by running the SSM protocol l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol External clock port DCN Outband DCN 1 Supports a maximum of seven DCCs. See Table 3-3. See Table 3-4. 1 1 1 1 1 The transmission rate of the port is equal to or less than 19.2 kbit/s and the interfacing level complies with RS-232.

SDH service functions PDH service functions Auxiliary ports and management ports Ethernet NM port NM serial port NE cascading port Orderwire phone port Asynchronous data port

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

24

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature Synchronous data port

Description 1 The transmission rate of the port is 64 kbit/s and its specifications comply with ITU-T G.703. Three inputs and one output 1 The specifications of port comply with RS-485. Supported Supported Supported

External alarm port Port for monitoring an outdoor cabinet OM Warm reset and cold reset In-service FPGA loading Board manufacturing information query Board power consumption information query Board temperature detection Board voltage detection Detection of indicators on the other boards Pluggable CF card

Supported

Supported

Supported Supported

Supported

Table 3-3 provides details about the SDH service functions that the CSTA supports. Table 3-3 SDH service functions Function and Feature Basic functions Port specifications Protection
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Description Receives and transmits 2xSTM-1 optical signals.

Linear MSP

Supported
25

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature SNCP Clock Clock source Clock protection

Description Supported Each SDH line port provides one SDH line clock signal. Supports the following clock protection schemes: l Protection based on clock source priorities l Protection by running the SSM protocol l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol

DCN

Outband DCN

Each SDH line port can provide one DCC that is composed of three DCC bytes, nine DCC bytes, or twelve DCC bytes. Supports the following loopback types: l Outloops at optical ports l Inloops at optical ports l Outloops on VC-4 paths l Inloops on VC-4 paths

OM

Loopback

Setting of the on/off state of a laser Automatic laser shutdown (ALS) functiona Detection and query of SFP optical module information Warm reset and cold reset

Supported

Supported

Supported

Supported

NOTE

a: The ALS function is implemented as follows: l When the optical module detects the R_LOS alarm at the receive port and the alarm persists for 500 ms, the laser at the specific transmit port is automatically shut down. l The laser starts to launch laser pulses at a specified interval; that is, the laser emits light for two seconds and stops emission for 60 seconds. l After the R_LOS alarm is cleared, the laser works properly and emits continuous light.

Table 3-4 provides details about the PDH service functions that the CSTA supports.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

26

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-4 PDH service functions Function and Feature Basic functions Port specifications Clock 75-ohm/120ohm E1 port Clock source Clock protection E1 retiming function OM Loopback Warm reset and cold reset PRBS tests at E1 ports Description Receives and transmits E1 signals. 16 Supports a tributary clock source extracted from the first or fifth E1 signal. Supports clock protection based on clock source priorities. Supported Supports inloops and outloops at E1 tributary ports. Supported Supported

3.3.3 Working Principle
The CSTA consists of the system control and communication unit, cross-connect unit, clock unit, service processing unit, auxiliary interface unit, and power supply unit.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

27

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Functional Block Diagram
Figure 3-4 Functional block diagram of the CSTA
STM-1 signal processing unit VC-4 signal VC-4 signal Cross-connect unit VC-4 signal Backplane

SDH signal

TDM service board

E1 signal

E1 signal processing unit

Control bus Ethernet NM port NM serial port NE cascading port Clock signal received from other boards Clock unit Clock signal provided to other boards

System control and communication unit

Auxiliary interface unit

Asynchronous/ Synchronous data port External alarm port

Monitoring signal

Orderwire phone port Port for monitoring an outdoor cabinet/Clock port

Clock signal received from the service unit on the board External clock signal

Clock signal provided to the other units on the board

Power supplied to the other units on the board

Power supply unit

-48 V1 -48 V2 +3.3 V power supplied to other boards +12 V power supplied to fans

System Control and Communication Unit
The system control and communication unit consists of the CPU unit and logic control unit. The system control and communication unit performs the following functions: l l l l l l l The CPU unit controls and manages the other units on the board and collects alarms and performance events using the control bus. The CPU unit controls and manages the other boards in the IDU and collects alarms and performance events using the control bus. The CPU unit controls and manages the ODU by transmitting the ODU control signal to the SMODEM unit in the IF board over the control bus in the backplane. The CPU unit processes network management messages in DCCs using the logic control unit. The CPU unit communicates with the NMS by its Ethernet NM port and NE cascading port. The CPU unit implements software loading by reading information from the CF card with the bus. The CPU unit monitors and manages an outdoor cabinet by reading the outdoor cabinet monitoring signal with the bus.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 28

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

l l

The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit and enables FPGA loading. The logic control unit cross-connects the overheads between the auxiliary interface unit, the CPU unit, and other boards. This helps to achieve the following purposes: – Adding or dropping DCC information processed by the CPU unit – Adding or dropping orderwire and asynchronous data services – Exchanging the orderwire bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes between different lines

Cross-Connect Unit
The cross-connect unit grooms services over the entire system using the higher order crossconnect module and the lower order cross-connect module. Figure 3-5 shows the functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit. Figure 3-5 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit
Source TDM service unit SinkTDM service unit

Higher order cross-connect module HOXC

Lower order cross-connect module LOXC

The source TDM service unit transmits VC-4 signals to the higher order cross-connect module over VC-4 buses. If the VC-4 signals carry only VC-4 services, the higher order cross-connect module processes the VC-4 signals and then transmits the signals to the sink TDM service unit. If the VC-4 signals include VC-12 or VC-3 services, the higher order cross-connect module grooms the VC-12 or VC-3 services to the lower order cross-connect module. The lower order cross-connect module processes the VC-12 or VC-3 services and then transmits the services back to the higher order cross-connect module. The higher order cross-connect module processes the services and then transmits the services to the sink TDM service unit.

E1 Signal Processing Unit
The E1 signal processing unit allows access of, codes/decodes, and maps/demaps E1 electrical signals and processes clock overheads. Signal processing on this unit is the same as that on the SP3S/SP3D. For details, see 3.16.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.

STM-1 Signal Processing Unit
The STM-1 signal processing unit allows access of STM-1 signals, extracts clock signals, restores data, scrambles/descrambles data, and processes overheads and pointers. Signal
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 29

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

processing on the STM-1 signal processing unit is the same as that on the SL1D. For details, see 3.14.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.

Clock Unit
The clock unit selects an appropriate clock source from external clock sources or service clock sources at service ports based on clock priorities. Locking the clock source by means of the phase-locked loop, the clock unit provides the system clock and frame headers for service signals and overhead signals to other units on the system control, switching, and timing board and the other boards.

Auxiliary Interface Unit
The auxiliary interface unit processes inputs and outputs of the orderwire phone port, asynchronous data port, synchronous data port, and external alarm port. The port for monitoring an outdoor cabinet and the clock/time port share one port.

Power Supply Unit
The power supply unit performs the following functions: l l l Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the power supply required by the chips of the other units on the local board. Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +3.3 V power supply required by the other boards in the IDU. Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +12 V power supply required by the fan.

3.3.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, service ports, management ports, auxiliary ports, buttons, and labels on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-6 Front panel of the CSTA
CSTA

1
STAT PROG SYNC SRV LOS1 LOS2

2 E1 1~16

STM-1 CF RCV RST NMS/COM EXT CLK/TOD F1/S1 ALMI/ALMO PHONE

1

2

3

4

5

1. Indicators 4. STM-1 ports

2. Buttons 5. E1 (1-16) ports

3. Clock ports, auxiliary ports, and management ports -

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

30

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Indicators
Table 3-5 Status explanation for indicators on the CSTA Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working properly. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board. PROG Blinks on (green) and off at 100 ms intervals Blinks on (green) and off at 300 ms intervals On (green) Software is being loaded to the board during the power-on or resetting process of the board. The board software is in BIOS boot state during the power-on or resetting process of the board. l When the board is being powered on or being reset, the upper layer software is being initialized. l When the board is running, the software is running normally. Blinks on (red) and off at 100 ms intervals On (red) The BOOTROM self-check fails during the power-on or resetting process of the board. l The memory self-check fails or loading upper layer software fails during the power-on or resetting process of the board. l The logic file or upper layer software is lost during the running process of the board. l The pluggable storage card is faulty. SYNC On (green) On (red) SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) The clock is working properly. The clock source is lost or a clock switchover occurs. The system is working properly. A critical or major alarm occurs in the system. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the system.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

31

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Indicator

State Off

Meaning There is no power supplied to the system. The first STM-1 port on the line is reporting the R_LOS alarm. The first STM-1 port on the line is free of R_LOS alarms. The second STM-1 port on the line is reporting the R_LOS alarm. The second STM-1 port on the line is free of R_LOS alarms.

LOS1

On (red) Off

LOS2

On (red) Off

Clock Ports, Auxiliary Ports, and Management Ports
Table 3-6 Description of the clock ports, auxiliary ports, and management ports Port NMS/COM EXT CLK/TOD Description Ethernet NM port/NM serial port NE cascading port External clock port (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz), port for monitoring an outdoor cabinet, or wayside E1 port Synchronous/Asynchronous data port Alarm input/output port Orderwire phone port Connector Type

RJ45

F1/S1 ALMI/ALMO PHONE

NOTE

l The external clock port, outdoor cabinet monitoring port, and wayside E1 port share one port physically. This port can also transparently transmit DCC bytes, orderwire overhead bytes, and synchronous/ asynchronous data overhead bytes. This port, however, can implement only one of the preceding functions at one time. l The 64 kbit/s synchronous data port can transparently transmit one orderwire byte. This port, however, can transmit 64 kbit/s synchronous data or transparently transmit one orderwire byte at one time. l Time ports TOD are reserved for running the high-precision time protocol (IEEE 1588 protocol) and are not used in this product version.

Auxiliary ports and management ports use RJ45 connectors. The pin assignments for the ports, however, are different. Figure 3-7 shows the front view of the RJ45 connector.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

32

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Figure 3-7 Front view of the RJ45 connector

87654321

Table 3-7 Pin assignments for the NMS/COM port Port Pin 1 2 3 NMS/COM 4 5 6 7 8 Signal Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) Receiving data (+) Grounding end of the NM serial port Receive end of the NM serial port Receiving data (-) Not defined Transmit end of the NM serial port

Table 3-8 Pin assignments for the EXT port Port Pin 1 2 EXT 3 6 4, 5, 7, 8 Signal Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) Receiving data (+) Receiving data (-) Not defined

NOTE

The EXT port supports the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes; that is, the EXT port can transmit data through pins 3 and 6 and receive data through pins 1 and 2.

The RJ45 connector has two indicators. Table 3-9 provides status explanation for these indicators.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

33

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-9 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector Indicator LINK (green) State On Off ACT (yellow) On or blinking Off Meaning The link is working properly. The link is interrupted. The port is transmitting or receiving data. The port is not transmitting or receiving data.

NOTE

The NMS/COM port and the EXT port are equivalent to two ports on a hub. This means that no external Ethernet link should be configured between the two ports during the networking process; otherwise, an Ethernet loop will be formed. As a result, a broadcast storm is generated on the network, leading to repeated resetting of NEs.

Figure 3-8 shows the two common incorrect connections. Figure 3-8 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM port and the EXT port

CSTA

STAT PROG SYNC SRV

MAJ LOS1 LOS2

CRIT MAJ MIN

CF RCV

RST

NMS/COM

EXT

CLK/TOD

F1/S1

ALMI/ALMO

PHONE

E1 1~16

LAN
CSTA
STAT PROG SYNC SRV MAJ LOS1 LOS2 CRIT MAJ MIN

CF RCV

RST

NMS/COM

EXT

CLK/TOD

F1/S1

ALMI/ALMO

PHONE

E1 1~16

The clock port (CLK) and port for monitoring an outdoor cabinet share the CLK/TOD port physically but use different pins of the CLK/TOD port. Table 3-10 provides details about the pin assignments for the CLK/TOD port. Table 3-10 Pin assignments for the CLK/TOD port Pin Working Mode External Clock 1 2 Signal input (-) Signal input (+) Port for Monitoring an Outdoor Cabinet Not defined Not defined

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

34

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Pin

Working Mode External Clock Port for Monitoring an Outdoor Cabinet Outdoor cabinet monitoring signal input (-) (RS-422 level)

3

Not defined

4 5 6

Signal output (-) Signal output (+) Not defined

Grounding end Grounding end Outdoor cabinet monitoring signal input (+) (RS-422 level)

7

Not defined

Outdoor cabinet monitoring signal output (-) (RS-422 level)

8

Not defined

Outdoor cabinet monitoring signal output (+) (RS-422 level)

NOTE

The pin assignment when the CLK/TOD port functions as a wayside E1 service port is the same as that when the CLK/TOD port functions as a clock port.

Table 3-11 provides the pin assignments for the F1/S1 port. Table 3-11 Pin assignments for the F1/S1 port Port F1/S1 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal Transmitting asynchronous data signals Grounding end Receiving asynchronous data signals Transmitting synchronous data signals (TIP) Transmitting synchronous data signals (RING) Grounding end Receiving synchronous data signals (TIP) Receiving synchronous data signals (RING)

Table 3-12 provides the pin assignments for the ALMI/ALMO port.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 35

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-12 Pin assignments for the ALMI/ALMO port Port ALMI/ ALMO Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal The first external alarm input signal Grounding end for the first alarm input signal The second external alarm input signal The third external alarm input signal Grounding end for the third alarm input signal Grounding end for the second alarm input signal Alarm output signal (+) Alarm output signal (-)

Table 3-13 provides the pin assignments for the PHONE port. Table 3-13 Pin assignments for the PHONE port Port PHONE Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RING TIP Not defined Signal Not defined

Buttons
Table 3-14 Buttons Button CF RCV Name CF configuration restoration button Description After this button is pressed and held for eight seconds, the board automatically restores the NE database from the CF card.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

36

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Button RST

Name Warm reset button

Description After this button is pressed, a warm reset is performed on the board.

Service Ports
Table 3-15 Description of the service ports on the CSTA Port STM-1 (1) STM-1 (2) E1 (1-16) Description The first STM-1 port The second STM-1 port The first to sixteenth E1 signal ports Connector Type l SFP optical module: LC l SFP electrical module: SAA straight/female Anea 96

SFP optical modules are used to provide STM-1 optical ports; one SFP optical module provides one TX port and one RX port. For details, see Figure 3-9, in which TX represents the transmit port and RX represents the receive port. Figure 3-9 Ports of the SFP optical module

TX

RX

The E1 port uses the Anea 96 socket connector. Figure 3-10 shows the front view of an Anea 96 connector and Table 3-16 provides the pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector. Figure 3-10 Front view of an Anea 96 connector
POS.1

POS.96

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

37

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-16 Pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Signal The first received E1 differential signal (+) The first received E1 differential signal (-) The second received E1 differential signal (+) The second received E1 differential signal (-) The third received E1 differential signal (+) The third received E1 differential signal (-) The fourth received E1 differential signal (+) The fourth received E1 differential signal (-) The fifth received E1 differential signal (+) The fifth received E1 differential signal (-) The sixth received E1 differential signal (+) The sixth received E1 differential signal (-) The seventh received E1 differential signal (+) The seventh received E1 differential signal (-) The eighth received E1 differential signal (+) The eighth received E1 differential signal (-) The ninth received E1 differential signal (+) The ninth received E1 differential signal (-) Pin 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 Signal The first transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The first transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The second transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The second transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The third transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The third transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The fourth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The fourth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The fifth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The fifth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The sixth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The sixth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The seventh transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The seventh transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The eighth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The eighth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The ninth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The ninth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

38

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Pin 19 20 21 22 23 24 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56

Signal The tenth received E1 differential signal (+) The tenth received E1 differential signal (-) The eleventh received E1 differential signal (+) The eleventh received E1 differential signal (-) The twelfth received E1 differential signal (+) The twelfth received E1 differential signal (-) The thirteenth received E1 differential signal (+) The thirteenth received E1 differential signal (-) The fourteenth received E1 differential signal (+) The fourteenth received E1 differential signal (-) The fifteenth received E1 differential signal (+) The fifteenth received E1 differential signal (-) The sixteenth received E1 differential signal (+) The sixteenth received E1 differential signal (-)

Pin 43 44 45 46 47 48 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80

Signal The tenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The tenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The eleventh transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The eleventh transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The twelfth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The twelfth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The thirteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The thirteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The fourteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The fourteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The fifteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The fifteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The sixteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The sixteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)

3.3.5 DIP Switches and CF Card
This board has a set of DIP switches and a pluggable CF (compact flash) card. NE databases, system parameters (including NE-IP, NE-ID, and subnet mask), software packages, and NE logs are stored on the CF card. After you press the CRV button on the system control, switching, and timing board and hold it for eight seconds, the data stored on the CF card will be loaded to the board. To synchronize the NE databases, system parameters, and NE logs on the system control, switching, and timing board to the CF card, enable the regular backup function.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

39

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
NOTE

3 Boards

The software packages on the CF card are synchronized with those on the system control, switching, and timing board during package diffusion. Therefore, automatic backup mechanisms or manual operations are not needed to synchronize software packages on the system control, switching, and timing board and the CF card. If the system control, switching, and timing board and the CF card have different software packages or data, the SWDL_PKGVER_MM alarm will be reported.

Figure 3-11 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card

2

1

1. DIP switches

2. CF card

Table 3-17 Setting DIP switches Setting of DIP Switchesa 1 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 1 3 0 0 1 1 0 4 0 1 0 1 0 Indicates that the board works with the watchdog enabled. The value is reserved. Indicates that a memory self-check is running. Indicates that the board is being debugged. Indicates that the board works with the watchdog disabled and a full memory check is running. Meaning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1 2 3 4

ON DIP

40

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Setting of DIP Switchesa 1 0 0 0 2 1 1 1 3 0 1 1 4 1 0 1

Meaning

Indicates the BIOS holdover state. Indicates the BIOS exhibition state. The value is reserved. (By default, this value indicates that the board works with the watchdog enabled.) The value is reserved. (By default, this value indicates that the board works with the watchdog enabled.) Restores the data of the CF card. Erases data in the system parameter area. Erases databases. Erases NE software, including patches. Erases databases and NE software, including patches. Erases all data in the file system. Erases all the data except for the board manufacturing information.

1

0

0

0

1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0 0 0 1 1 1 1

0 1 1 0 0 1 1

1 0 1 0 1 0 1

NOTE

a: When a DIP switch is set to the side with the numbers "1, 2, 3, 4", it represents binary digit 1. When a DIP switch is set to the side with the letters "ON DIP", it represents binary digit 0.

3.3.6 Valid Slots
The CSTA is inserted in slot 1 of the IDU chassis. Slot 1 occupies the space of two ordinary slots. For the NMS to manage function units on the CSTA, the function units are mapped into specific logical boards and allocated proper logical slots on the NMS. Figure 3-12 Slot for the CSTA in the IDU chassis
Slot 5 (PIU) Slot 6 (FAN) Slot 3 (EXT) Slot 1 (CSTA) Slot 4 (EXT)

According to the function units, the CSTA is mapped into the logical system control and communication board (CSTA), logical auxiliary management board (AUX), and logical service boards (SL1D and SP3S) on the NMS.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 41

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Figure 3-13 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSTA
Slot 5 (PIU) Slot 6 (FAN) Slot 3 (EXT) Slot 1 (CSTA) Slot 10 (AUX) Slot 4 (EXT) Slot 8 (SL1D) Slot 9 (SP3S)

3.3.7 Board Feature Code
The board feature code of the CSTA indicates the E1 port impedance. The board feature code refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code. Table 3-18 Board feature code of the CSTA Board Feature Code A B Port Impedance (Ohm) 120 75

3.3.8 Types of SFP Modules
The STM-1 ports on the CSTA board support four types of SFP optical modules. Table 3-19 Types of SFP modules Part Number 34060287 34060276 34060281 34060282 34100104 Type Ie-1 S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2 STM-1e

3.3.9 Board Parameter Settings
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CSTA.

Related References
A.1.2.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting A.10.2.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table A.10.2.11 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status A.11.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 42

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

A.11.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port A.11.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port A.11.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface A.10.5 Parameter Description: Auxiliary Ports

3.3.10 Technical Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including the cross-connection capability, performance of SDH ports, E1 ports, clocks, and auxiliary ports, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

Cross-Connection Capability
The CSTA supports full time division cross-connections (equivalent to 8x8 VC-4s) at the VC-12, VC-3, or VC-4 level.

STM-1 Optical Interface Performance
The performance of the STM-1 optical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.957/G.825. The following table provides the typical performance of the interface. Table 3-20 STM-1 optical interface performance Item Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Classification code Fiber type Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength (nm) Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Performance 155520 Ie-1 Multi-mode fiber 2 1270 to 1380 -19 to -14 -30 -14 10 S-1.1 Single-mode fiber 15 1261 to 1360 -15 to -8 -28 -8 8.2 L-1.1 Single-mode fiber 40 1263 to 1360 -5 to 0 -34 -10 10 L-1.2 Single-mode fiber 80 1480 to 1580 -5 to 0 -34 -10 10

NOTE

The OptiX RTN 910 uses SFP optical modules for providing optical interfaces. You can use different types of SFP optical modules to provide optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

43

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

STM-1 Electrical Interface Performance
The performance of the STM-1 electrical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.703. The following table provides the typical performance of the interface. Table 3-21 STM-1 electrical interface performance Item Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Code type Wire pair in each transmission direction Impedance (ohm) Performance 155520 CMI One coaxial wire pair 75

NOTE

The OptiX RTN 910 uses SFP electrical modules to provide electrical interfaces.

E1 Interface Performance
Table 3-22 E1 interface performance Item Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Code pattern Impedance (ohm) Wire pair in each transmission direction Performance 2048 HDB3 75 One coaxial wire pair 120 One symmetrical wire pair

Orderwire Interface Performance
Table 3-23 Orderwire interface performance Item Transmission path Orderwire type Wire pair in each transmission direction Impedance (ohm) Performance Uses the E1 and E2 bytes in the SDH overhead or the Huaweidefined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame. Addressing call One symmetrical wire pair 600

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

44

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
NOTE

3 Boards

The OptiX RTN equipment also supports the orderwire group call function. For example, when OptiX RTN equipment calls 888, the orderwire group call number, all the OptiX RTN equipment orderwire phones in the orderwire subnet ring until a phone is answered. Then, a point-to-point orderwire phone call is established.

Synchronous Data Interface Performance
Table 3-24 Synchronous data interface performance Item Transmission path Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Interface type Interface characteristics Performance Uses the F1 byte in the SDH overhead or the Huawei-defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame. 64 Codirectional Meets the ITU-T G.703 standard.

Asynchronous Data Interface
Table 3-25 Asynchronous data interface performance Item Transmission path Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Interface characteristics Performance Uses the user-defined byte of the SDH overhead or the Huawei-defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame. ≤ 19.2 Meets the RS-232 standard.

Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance
Clock timing and synchronization performance meets related ITU-T Recommendations. Table 3-26 Clock timing and synchronization performance Item External synchronization source Frequency accuracy Pull-in and pull-out ranges Noise generation Noise tolerance
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 45

Performance 2048 kbit/s (compliant with ITU-T G.703 §9), or 2048 kHz (compliant with ITU-T G.703 §13) Compliant with ITU-T G.813

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Item Noise transfer Transient response and holdover performance

Performance

Wayside Service Interface Performance
Table 3-27 Wayside service interface performance Item Transmission path Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Impedance (ohm) Interface characteristics Performance Uses the Huawei-defined bytes in the overhead of the microwave frame. 2048 120 Meets the ITU-T G.703 standard.

Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-28 Mechanical behavior Item Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight Performance 20.60 mm x 388.40 mm x 266.79 mm 1.08 kg

Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 13.6 W

3.4 CSHA/CSHB/CSHC
The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC is the integrated Hybrid system control, switching, and timing board. The CSHA, CSHB, and CSHC differ from each other with regard to the types and number of service ports.

3.4.1 Version Description
The functional version of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC is SLA1.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

46

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

3.4.2 Functions and Features
The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC provides 4.2 Gbit/s packet switching, full time division crossconnection, system control and communication, and clock processing functions. The CSHA/ CSHB/CSHC provides FE/GE service ports, PDH/SDH service ports, auxiliary ports, and management ports. Table 3-29 lists the functions and features that the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC supports. Table 3-29 Functions and features that the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC supports Function and Feature Description CSHA Basic functions Switching capability Cross-connect capacity System control and communication Clock Clock synchronization at the physical layer CSHB CSHC

Supports 4.2 Gbit/s packet switching function. Supports full time division cross-connections (equivalent to 8x8 VC-4s) at the VC-12, VC-3, or VC-4 level. Manages, monitors, and controls the running status of the IDU, and works as a communication service unit between the NMS and boards to help the NMS to control and manage the NE. Provides the system clock and frame headers for service signals and overhead signals for the other boards when tracing an appropriate clock source. The traced clock source can be any of the following: l External clock l SDH line clock l PDH tributary clock l Radio link clock l Synchronous Ethernet clock

Clock protection

Supports the following clock protection schemes: l Protection based on clock source priorities l Protection by running the SSM protocol l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol

IEEE 1588v2 External clock port External time port DCN Outband DCN

Processes IEEE 1588v2 messages. 1 1 Supports a maximum of five DCCs. Supports a maximum of five DCCs. Supports a maximum of seven DCCs.
47

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature

Description CSHA CSHB CSHC

Inband DCN MPLS/PWE3 functions

Supports the inband DCN function. The DCN bandwidth is configurable. Supported Supported Supported

For details, see Table 3-30. QoS functions Supported Supported Supported

For details, see Table 3-31. Ethernet service functions Supported Supported Supported

For details, see Table 3-32. SDH service functions Not supported Not supported Supported

For details, see Table 3-33. PDH service functions Supported Supported Supported

For details, see Table 3-34. Auxiliary ports and management ports Ethernet NM port NM serial port NE cascading port Orderwire phone port Asynchronous data port 1 1 1 1 1 The transmission rate of the port is equal to or less than 19.2 kbit/s and the interfacing level complies with RS-232. 1 The transmission rate of the port is 64 kbit/s and its specifications comply with ITU-T G.703. Three inputs and one output 1 The specifications of port comply with RS-485. Supported

Synchronous data port

External alarm port Port for monitoring an outdoor cabinet OM Warm reset and cold reset

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

48

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature

Description CSHA CSHB CSHC

In-service FPGA loading Board manufacturing information query Board power consumption information query Board temperature detection Board voltage detection Detection of indicators on the other boards Pluggable CF card

Supported Supported

Supported

Supported

Supported Supported

Supported

The packet switching unit of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC works with its service interface unit or a service board to implement MPLS/PWE3 functions. Table 3-30 provides details about these functions. Table 3-30 MPLS/PWE3 functions Function and Feature MPLS tunnel Setup mode VLAN subinterface Protection OAM Description Static LSPs Supported 1:1 MPLS tunnel APS Supports the following OAM functions: l MPLS OAM that complies with ITU-T Y. 1710 and ITU-T Y.1711 l LSP ping and LSP traceroute functions PWE3 TDM PWE3 Encapsulatio n mode Supports the following encapsulation modes: l SAToP l CESoPSN
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 49

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature Packet loading time Jitter compensatio n buffering time ATM PWE3 Mapping mode

Description 125 μs to 5000 μs 375 μs to 16000 μs

l ATM N-to-one VCC cell encapsulation l ATM N-to-one VPC cell encapsulation l ATM one-to-one VCC cell encapsulation l ATM one-to-one VPC cell encapsulation

Transparentl Supported y transmitted ATM service Maximum number of concatenated cells ETH PWE3 Encapsulatio n mode Service type 31

l Raw mode l Tagged mode Supports E-Line services. l E-Line l E-Aggr

Setup mode Numbers of PWs Protection OAM

Static PWs Supports a maximum of 1024 PWs. 1:1 PW APS Supports the following OAM functions: l VCCV l PW OAM that complies with ITU-T Y. 1710 and ITU-T Y.1711 l PW ping and PW traceroute functions l Intelligent service fault diagnosis, that is, one-click PWE3 service fault locating

MS-PW Configurable bandwidth

Supported Supported

The packet switching unit of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC works with its service processing unit or a service board to implement QoS functions. Table 3-31 provides details about these functions.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 50

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-31 QoS functions Function and Feature DiffServ Description Supports simple traffic classification by specifying PHB service classes for service flows based on their QoS information (C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN priorities, DSCP values, or MPLS EXP values) carried by the packets. Supports traffic classification based on C-VLAN IDs, S-VLAN IDs, C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN priorities, C-VLAN IDs + C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN IDs + S-VLAN priorities, or DSCP values carried by packets. Provides the CAR function for traffic flows at ports. Provides traffic shaping for a specific port, prioritized queue, or traffic flow. Supports the following queue scheduling policies: l SP l WRR l SP+WRR

Ethernet complex traffic classification

CAR Shaping Queue scheduling policies

The Ethernet service interface unit of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC works with its packet switching unit to implement Ethernet service functions. Table 3-32 provides details about these functions. Table 3-32 Ethernet service functions Function and Feature Description CSHA Basic functions CSHB CSHC

Receives/Transmits FE/GE service signals and works with the packet switching unit to process the received FE/GE service signals. FE electrical port: 10/100BASE-T (X) GE electrical port (fixed): 10/100/1000BA SE-T(X) 2 2 2

Port specifications

2

2

Not supported

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

51

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature

Description CSHA CSHB Not supported CSHC Provides two ports by using small formfactor pluggable (SFP) modules of any of the following types: l Dual-fiber bidirectional FE/GE optical module l Colored CWDM GE optical module l Single-fiber bidirectional FE/GE module l 10/100/1000 BASE-T(X) GE electrical module

FE/GE port: SFP module

Not supported

Port attributes

Working mode

l The FE ports support 10M full-duplex, 10M halfduplex, 100M full-duplex, 100M half-duplex, and auto-negotiation. l The FE optical ports support 100M full-duplex and auto-negotiation. l The GE electrical ports support 10M full-duplex, 10M half-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 100M halfduplex, 1000M full-duplex, and auto-negotiation. l The GE optical ports support 1000M full-duplex and auto-negotiation.

TAG attribute

l Sets and queries the TAG attribute of an Ethernet port. l The TAG attribute can be set to tag aware, access, or hybrid.

Jumbo frame Traffic control function

Supports jumbo frames with a maximum frame length of 9600 bytes. Supports the port-based traffic control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

52

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature

Description CSHA CSHB CSHC

Services

E-Line services

Supports the following types of E-Line services: l E-Line services based on ports l E-Line services based on port+VLAN l E-Line services based on port+QinQ

E-LAN services

Supports the following types of E-LAN services: l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridges l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges

LAG

Inter-board LAG Intra-board LAG

Supported Supported Supports the ERPS function that complies with ITU-T G.8032/Y.1344. Supports the MSTP protocol that generates only the CIST. The MSTP protocol provides functions equivalent to that of the RSTP protocol. Supported

ERPS Spanning tree protocol

LPT ETH-OAM Ethernet service OAM

l Supports IEEE 802.1ag-compliant ETH-OAM function. l Supports the packet loss, delay, and delay variation monitoring function that complies with ITU-T Y. 1731.

Ethernet port OAM Remote monitoring (RMON) Clock Clock source

Supports IEEE 802.3ah-compliant ETH-OAM function. Supported Synchronous Ethernet Synchronous Ethernet Synchronous Ethernet (not supported by the SFP electrical module)

Clock protection

Supports the following clock protection schemes: l Protection based on clock source priorities l Protection by running the SSM protocol l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol

IEEE 1588v2

Receives and transmits IEEE 1588v2 messages at Ethernet ports but not at SFP electrical ports.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

53

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature

Description CSHA CSHB CSHC

DCN OAM

Inband DCN Loopback

Each FE/GE port provides one inband DCN channel. Supports the following loopback types: l Inloops at the PHY layer of Ethernet ports l Inloops at the MAC layer of Ethernet ports

Warm reset Query of SFP module information

Supported Not supported Not supported Supported

Table 3-33 provides details about the SDH service functions that the CSHC supports. Table 3-33 SDH service functions that the CSHC supports Function and Feature Basic functions Port specifications Protection Linear MSP SNCP Clock Clock source Clock protection Supported Supported Each line port provides one SDH line clock signal. Supports the following clock protection schemes: l Protection based on clock source priorities l Protection by running the SSM protocol l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol DCN Outband DCN Each SDH line port can provide one DCC that is composed of three DCC bytes, nine DCC bytes, or twelve DCC bytes. Supports the following loopback types: l Outloops at optical ports l Inloops at optical ports l Outloops on VC-4 paths l Inloops on VC-4 paths Setting of the on/off state of a laser ALS functiona
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Description Receives and transmits 2xSTM-1 optical signals.

OM

Loopback

Supported

Supported
54

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature Detection and query of SFP optical module information Warm reset and cold reset

Description Supported

Supported

NOTE

a: The ALS function is implemented as follows: l When the optical module detects the R_LOS alarm at the receive port and the alarm persists for 500 ms, the laser at the specific transmit port is automatically shut down. l The laser starts to launch laser pulses at a specified interval; that is, the laser emits light for two seconds and stops emission for 60 seconds. l After the R_LOS alarm is cleared, the laser works properly and emits continuous light.

Table 3-34 provides details about the PDH service functions that the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC supports. Table 3-34 PDH service functions that the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC supports Function and Feature Description CSHA Basic functions Port specifications Clock 75-ohm/120ohm E1 port Clock source Clock protection E1 retiming function OM Loopback Warm reset and cold reset PRBS tests at E1 ports CSHB CSHC

Receives and transmits E1 signals. 16 32 16

Supports a tributary clock source extracted from the first or fifth E1 signal. Supports clock protection based on clock source priorities. Supported Supports inloops and outloops at E1 tributary ports. Supported Supported

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

55

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

3.4.3 Working Principle
The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC consists of the system control and communication unit, packet switching unit, cross-connect unit, clock unit, service interface unit, and auxiliary interface unit.
NOTE

In this section, the CSHC is used as an example to describe the working principle of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC.

Functional Block Diagram
Figure 3-14 Functional block diagram
Backplane

FE/GE signal

Ethernet signal access unit

GE bus

Packet switching unit

GE bus

Ethernet service board

STM-1 signal

STM-1 signal processing unit E1 signal processing unit

VC-4 signal VC-4 signal Cross-connect unit VC-4 signal TDM service board

E1 signal

Control bus Ethernet NM port NM serial port NE cascading port Asynchronous/Synchrono us data port External alarm port Orderwire phone port Port for monitoring an outdoor cabinet/Clock port System control and communication unit Clock unit

Clock signal received from other boards Clock signal provided to other boards

Monitoring signal External clock signal Power supplied to the other units on the board

System Control and Communication Unit
The system control and communication unit consists of the CPU unit and logic control unit. The system control and communication unit performs the following functions: l The CPU unit controls and manages the other units on the board and collects alarms and performance events using the control bus.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 56

Auxiliary interface unit

Clock signal received from the service units on the board

Clock signal provided to the other units on the board

Clock signal received from the service units on the board

Power supply unit

-48 V1 -48 V2 +3.3 V power supplied to other boards +12 V power supplied to fans

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

l l l l l l l l l l

The CPU unit controls and manages the other boards in the IDU and collects alarms and performance events using the control bus. The CPU unit controls and manages the ODU by transmitting the ODU control signal to the SMODEM unit in the IF board over the control bus in the backplane. The CPU unit enables the packet switching unit using the control bus to groom Ethernet service packets. The CPU unit processes Ethernet protocol packets from the packet switching unit using the control bus. The CPU unit processes network management messages in DCCs using the logic control unit. The CPU unit communicates with the NMS by its Ethernet NM port and NE cascading port. The CPU unit implements software loading by reading information from the CF card with the bus. The CPU unit monitors and manages an outdoor cabinet by reading the outdoor cabinet monitoring signal with the bus. The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit and enables FPGA loading. The logic control unit cross-connects the overheads between the auxiliary interface unit, the CPU unit, and other boards. This helps to achieve the following purposes: – Adding or dropping DCC information processed by the CPU unit – Adding or dropping orderwire and asynchronous data services – Exchanging the orderwire bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes between different lines

Packet Switching Unit
The packet switching unit grooms services and processes protocols for Ethernet services (including Native Ethernet services and MPLS/PWE3 packets carried over Ethernet). l After receiving Ethernet services from the Ethernet interface unit on the board or an Ethernet board, the packet switching unit grooms the Ethernet services based on the configurations that are delivered by the system control and communication unit. After receiving protocol packets from the Ethernet interface unit on the board or an Ethernet board, the packet switching unit transmits the protocol packets to the system control and communication unit for processing. After processing, the system control and communication unit sends the protocol packets back to the packet switching unit. The packet switching unit transmits the protocol packets to the Ethernet interface unit or the Ethernet board.

l

Cross-Connect Unit
The cross-connect unit grooms services over the entire system using the higher order crossconnect module and the lower order cross-connect module. Figure 3-15 shows the functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

57

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Figure 3-15 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit
Source TDM service unit SinkTDM service unit

Higher order cross-connect module HOXC

Lower order cross-connect module LOXC

The source TDM service unit transmits VC-4 signals to the higher order cross-connect module over VC-4 buses. If the VC-4 signals carry only VC-4 services, the higher order cross-connect module processes the VC-4 signals and then transmits the signals to the sink TDM service unit. If the VC-4 signals include VC-12 or VC-3 services, the higher order cross-connect module grooms the VC-12 or VC-3 services to the lower order cross-connect module. The lower order cross-connect module processes the VC-12 or VC-3 services and then transmits the services back to the higher order cross-connect module. The higher order cross-connect module processes the services and then transmits the services to the sink TDM service unit.

Ethernet Signal Access Unit
The Ethernet signal access unit transmits/receives FE/GE signals and works with the Layer 2 switching module to implement the Layer 2 switching function. l In the receive direction, after restructuring, decoding, and performing serial/parallel conversion for electrical signals, the Ethernet signal access unit performs frame delimitation and preamble processing, extracts Ethernet frames, and performs cyclic redundancy check (CRC) and Ethernet performance measurement. If optical signals are received, the Ethernet signal access unit performs O/E conversion before performing the preceding operations. In the transmit direction, after performing frame delimitation, preamble addition, CRC code computation, and Ethernet performance measurement, the Ethernet signal access unit performs serial/parallel conversion for signals, encodes the signals, and transmits the signals to the Ethernet port. In the case of an optical port, after performing the preceding operations, the Ethernet signal access unit needs to perform E/O conversion before transmitting signals through the optical port.

l

E1 Signal Processing Unit
The E1 signal processing unit allows access of, codes/decodes, and maps/demaps E1 electrical signals and processes clock overheads. Signal processing on this unit is the same as that on the SP3S/SP3D. For details, see 3.16.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

58

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

STM-1 Signal Processing Unit
The STM-1 signal processing unit allows access of STM-1 signals, extracts clock signals, restores data, scrambles/descrambles data, and processes overheads and pointers. Signal processing on the STM-1 signal processing unit is the same as that on the SL1D. For details, see 3.14.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.

Clock Unit
The clock unit selects an appropriate clock source from external clock sources or service clock sources at service ports based on clock priorities. Locking the clock source by means of the phase-locked loop, the clock unit provides the system clock and frame headers for service signals and overhead signals to other units on the system control, switching, and timing board and the other boards.

Auxiliary Interface Unit
The auxiliary interface unit processes inputs and outputs of the orderwire phone port, asynchronous data port, synchronous data port, and external alarm port. The port for monitoring an outdoor cabinet and the clock/time port share one port.

Power Supply Unit
The power supply unit performs the following functions: l l l Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the power supply required by the chips of the other units on the local board. Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +3.3 V power supply required by the other boards in the IDU. Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +12 V power supply required by the fan.

3.4.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, service ports, management ports, auxiliary ports, buttons, and labels on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-16 Front panel of the CSHA
CSHA PROG STAT SYNC SRV

CF RCV RST

NMS/COM

EXT

CLK/TOD

F1/S1

ALMI/ALMO

PHONE

FE1

FE2

GE1

GE2

E1 1~16

1

2

3

4

5

6

1. Indicators 4. FE service ports

2. Buttons 5. GE electrical service ports

3. Clock ports, auxiliary ports, and management ports 6. E1 (1-16) ports

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

59

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Figure 3-17 Front panel of the CSHB
CSHB PROG STAT SYNC SRV

CF RCV RST

NMS/COM

EXT

CLK/TOD

F1/S1

ALMI/ALMO PHONE

FE1

FE2

GE1

GE2

E1 1~16

E1 17~32

1

2

3

4

5

6

1. Indicators 4. FE service ports

2. Buttons 5. GE electrical service ports

3. Clock ports, auxiliary ports, and management ports 6. E1 (1-32) ports

Figure 3-18 Front panel of the CSHC
CSHC STAT PROG SYNC SRV LINK1 ACT1 LINK2 ACT2 LOS1 LOS2

1 21 2 G E 1G E 2STM-1 CF RCV RST RSTNMS/COM CF RCV EXT NE CLK/TIME CLK/TOD F1/S1 ALMI/ALMO PHONE FE1 FE2 ETH GE STM-1 STM-1

E1(1~16)

E1 1~16

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

1. Indicators 4. FE service ports

2. Buttons 5. FE/GE optical/electrical service ports (using SFP modules) -

3. Clock ports, auxiliary ports, and management ports 6. STM-1 ports (using SFP optical modules) -

7. E1 (1-16) ports

Indicators
Table 3-35 Status explanation for indicators on the CSHA/CSHB Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working properly. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

60

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Indicator PROG

State Blinks on (green) and off at 100 ms intervals Blinks on (green) and off at 300 ms intervals On (green)

Meaning Software is being loaded to the board during the power-on or resetting process of the board. The board software is in BIOS boot state during the power-on or resetting process of the board. l When the board is being powered on or being reset, the upper layer software is being initialized. l When the board is running, the software is running normally.

Blinks on (red) and off at 100 ms intervals On (red)

The BOOTROM self-check fails during the power-on or resetting process of the board. l The memory self-check fails or loading upper layer software fails during the power-on or resetting process of the board. l The logic file or upper layer software is lost during the running process of the board. l The pluggable storage card is faulty.

SYNC

On (green) On (red)

The clock is working properly. The clock source is lost or a clock switchover occurs. The system is working properly. A critical or major alarm occurs in the system. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the system. There is no power supplied to the system.

SRV

On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off

Table 3-36 Status explanation for indicators on the CSHC Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red) Meaning The board is working properly. The board hardware is faulty.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

61

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Indicator

State Off

Meaning l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board.

PROG

Blinks on (green) and off at 100 ms intervals Blinks on (green) and off at 300 ms intervals On (green)

Software is being loaded to the board during the power-on or resetting process of the board. The board software is in BIOS boot state during the power-on or resetting process of the board. l When the board is being powered on or being reset, the upper layer software is being initialized. l When the board is running, the software is running normally.

Blinks on (red) and off at 100 ms intervals On (red)

The BOOTROM self-check fails during the power-on or resetting process of the board. l The memory self-check fails or loading upper layer software fails during the power-on or resetting process of the board. l The logic file or upper layer software is lost during the running process of the board. l The pluggable storage card is faulty.

SYNC

On (green) On (red)

The clock is working properly. The clock source is lost or a clock switchover occurs. The system is working properly. A critical or major alarm occurs in the system. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the system. There is no power supplied to the system. The connection at a specific port is working properly. The connection at a specific port is interrupted.

SRV

On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off

LINK1

On (green) Off

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

62

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Indicator ACT1

State On or blinking (yellow) Off

Meaning Data is being transmitted or received. No data is being transmitted or received. The port connection is normal. The port connection is interrupted. Data is being transmitted or received. No data is being transmitted or received. The first port on the line is reporting the R_LOS alarm. The first port on the line is free of R_LOS alarms. The second port on the line is reporting the R_LOS alarm. The second port on the line is free of R_LOS alarms.

LINK2

On (green) Off

ACT2

On or blinking (yellow) Off

LOS1

On (red) Off

LOS2

On (red) Off

Clock Ports, Auxiliary Ports, and Management Ports
Table 3-37 Description of the clock ports, auxiliary ports, and management ports Port NMS/COM EXT CLK/TOD Description Ethernet NM port/NM serial port NE cascading port External clock port (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz), external time port, port for monitoring an outdoor cabinet, or wayside E1 port Synchronous/Asynchronous data port Alarm input/output port Orderwire phone port Connector Type

RJ45

F1/S1 ALMI/ALMO PHONE

NOTE

l The external clock port, external time port, outdoor cabinet monitoring port, and wayside E1 port share one port physically. This port can also transparently transmit DCC bytes, orderwire overhead bytes, and synchronous/asynchronous data overhead bytes. This port, however, can implement only one of the preceding functions at a time. l The 64 kbit/s synchronous data port can transparently transmit one orderwire byte. This port, however, can transmit 64 kbit/s synchronous data or transparently transmit one orderwire byte at one time.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

63

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Auxiliary ports and management ports use RJ45 connectors. The pin assignments for the ports, however, are different. Figure 3-19 shows the front view of the RJ45 connector. Figure 3-19 Front view of the RJ45 connector

87654321

Table 3-38 Pin assignments for the NMS/COM port Port Pin 1 2 3 NMS/COM 4 5 6 7 8 Signal Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) Receiving data (+) Grounding end of the NM serial port Receive end of the NM serial port Receiving data (-) Not defined Transmit end of the NM serial port

Table 3-39 Pin assignments for the EXT port Port Pin 1 2 EXT 3 6 4, 5, 7, 8 Signal Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) Receiving data (+) Receiving data (-) Not defined

NOTE

The EXT port supports the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes; that is, the EXT port can transmit data through pins 3 and 6 and receive data through pins 1 and 2.

The RJ45 connector has two indicators. Table 3-40 provides status explanation for these indicators.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 64

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-40 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector Indicator LINK (green) State On Off ACT (yellow) On or blinking Off Meaning The link is working properly. The link is interrupted. The port is transmitting or receiving data. The port is not transmitting or receiving data.

NOTE

The NMS/COM port and the EXT port are equivalent to two ports on a hub. This means that no external Ethernet link should be configured between the two ports during the networking process; otherwise, an Ethernet loop will be formed. As a result, a broadcast storm is generated on the network, leading to repeated resetting of NEs.

Figure 3-20 shows the two common incorrect connections. Figure 3-20 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM port and the EXT port

CSHA

STAT

PROG

SYNC

SRV

CF RCV RST

NMS/COM

EXT

CLK/TOD

F1/S1

ALMI/ALMO PHONE

FE1

FE2

GE1

GE2

E1 1~16

LAN
CSHA

STAT

PROG

SYNC

SRV

CF RCV RST

NMS/COM

EXT

CLK/TOD

F1/S1

ALMI/ALMO PHONE

FE1

FE2

GE1

GE2

E1 1~16

The clock port (CLK), high-precision time port (TOD), and port for monitoring an outdoor cabinet share the CLK/TOD port physically but use different pins of the CLK/TOD port. Table 3-41 provides details about the pin assignments for the CLK/TOD port.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

65

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-41 Pin assignments for the CLK/TOD port Pin Working Mode Extern al Clock External Time Input (1PPS + Time Information ) External Time Output (1PPS + Time Informatio n) Not defined Not defined External Time Input (DCLS) External Time Output (DCLS) Port for Monitori ng an Outdoor Cabinet

1 2

Signal Not defined input (-) Signal input (+) Not defined Not defined

Not defined Not defined DCLS time signal input (-) (RS-422 level)

Not defined Not defined DCLS time signal output (-) (RS-422 level)

Not defined Not defined Outdoor cabinet monitoring signal input (-) (RS-422 level)

3

1PPS signal input (-) (RS-422 level)

1PPS signal output (-) (RS-422 level)

4

Signal output (-) Signal output (+) Not defined

Grounding end Grounding end 1PPS signal input (+) (RS-422 level)

Grounding end Grounding end 1PPS signal output (+) (RS-422 level)

Grounding end Grounding end DCLS time signal input (+) (RS-422 level)

Grounding end Grounding end DCLS time signal output (+) (RS-422 level)

Grounding end Grounding end Outdoor cabinet monitoring signal input (+) (RS-422 level)

5

6

7

Not defined

Time information input (-) (RS-422 level)

Time information output (-) (RS-422 level)

Not defined

Not defined

Outdoor cabinet monitoring signal output (-) (RS-422 level)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

66

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Pin

Working Mode Extern al Clock External Time Input (1PPS + Time Information ) Time information input (+) (RS-422 level) External Time Output (1PPS + Time Informatio n) Time information output (+) (RS-422 level) External Time Input (DCLS) External Time Output (DCLS) Port for Monitori ng an Outdoor Cabinet

8

Not defined

Not defined

Not defined

Outdoor cabinet monitoring signal output (+) (RS-422 level)

NOTE

The pin assignment when the CLK/TOD port functions as a wayside E1 service port is the same as that when the CLK/TOD port functions as a clock port.

Table 3-42 provides the pin assignments for the F1/S1 port. Table 3-42 Pin assignments for the F1/S1 port Port F1/S1 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal Transmitting asynchronous data signals Grounding end Receiving asynchronous data signals Transmitting synchronous data signals (TIP) Transmitting synchronous data signals (RING) Grounding end Receiving synchronous data signals (TIP) Receiving synchronous data signals (RING)

Table 3-43 provides the pin assignments for the ALMI/ALMO port.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

67

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-43 Pin assignments for the ALMI/ALMO port Port ALMI/ ALMO Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal The first external alarm input signal Grounding end for the first alarm input signal The second external alarm input signal The third external alarm input signal Grounding end for the third alarm input signal Grounding end for the second alarm input signal Alarm output signal (+) Alarm output signal (-)

Table 3-44 provides the pin assignments for the PHONE port. Table 3-44 Pin assignments for the PHONE port Port PHONE Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RING TIP Not defined Signal Not defined

Buttons
Table 3-45 Buttons Button CF RCV Name CF configuration restoration button Description After this button is pressed and held for eight seconds, the board automatically restores the NE database from the CF card.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

68

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Button RST

Name Warm reset button

Description After this button is pressed, a warm reset is performed on the board.

Service Ports
Table 3-46 Description of service ports on the CSHA/CSHB Port FE1 FE2 GE1 GE2 E1 (1-16) E1 (17-32) The first to sixteenth E1 signal ports The seventeenth to thirty-second E1 signal ports a Anea 96 GE electrical port Description FE port RJ45 Connector Type

NOTE

a. Only the CSHB provides 32 E1 signal ports. The CSHA provides only 16 E1 signal ports.

Table 3-47 Description of service ports on the CSHC Port FE1 FE2 GE1 GE2 STM-1(1) STM-1(2) E1 (1-16) FE/GE optical port or FE/GE electrical port The first STM-1 port The second STM-1 port The first to sixteenth E1 signals LC (SFP optical module) or SFP electrical module l SFP optical module: LC l SFP electrical module: SAA straight/female Anea 96 Description FE port Connector Type RJ45

NOTE

On the NMS, FE1 and FE2 correspond to PORT1 and PORT2 respectively; GE1 and GE2 correspond to PORT3 and PORT4 respectively.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

69

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

When the GE SFP ports and STM-1 SFP ports on the CSHC function as optical ports, optical modules are required. l When dual-fiber bidirectional SFP optical modules are used to provide GE ports, one SFP optical module, like an STM-1 SFP optical module, provides one TX port and one RX port. For details, see Figure 3-21, in which TX represents the transmit port and RX represents the receive port. One optical fiber is connected to each port. When single-fiber bidirectional optical modules are used to provide GE ports, one optical module provides only the port on the left. This port is an optical port that can receive and transmit service signals. One optical fiber is connected to this port.

l

Figure 3-21 Ports of an SFP optical module

TX

RX

The FE ports and GE electrical ports support the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes. Table 3-48 and Table 3-49 provide the pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in different modes. Table 3-48 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI mode Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) Signal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TX+ TXRX+ Reserved Reserved RXReserved Reserved Function Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) Receiving data (+) Receiving data (-) 1000BASE-T Signal BIDA+ BIDABIDB+ BIDC+ BIDCBIDBBIDD+ BIDDFunction Bidirectional data wire A (+) Bidirectional data wire A (-) Bidirectional data wire B (+) Bidirectional data wire C (+) Bidirectional data wire C (-) Bidirectional data wire B (-) Bidirectional data wire D (+) Bidirectional data wire D (-)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

70

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-49 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI-X mode Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) Signal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RX+ RXTX+ Reserved Reserved TXReserved Reserved Function Receiving data (+) Receiving data (-) Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) 1000BASE-T Signal BIDB+ BIDBBIDA+ BIDD+ BIDDBIDABIDC+ BIDCFunction Bidirectional data wire B (+) Bidirectional data wire B (-) Bidirectional data wire A (+) Bidirectional data wire D (+) Bidirectional data wire D (-) Bidirectional data wire A (-) Bidirectional data wire C (+) Bidirectional data wire C (-)

The RJ45 connector has two indicators. The status explanation for the two indicators is the same as that for the indicators on the RJ45 connector of the NMS/COM port. The E1 port uses the Anea 96 socket connector. Figure 3-22 shows the front view of an Anea 96 connector and Table 3-50 provides the pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector. Figure 3-22 Front view of an Anea 96 connector
POS.1

POS.96

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

71

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-50 Pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Signal The first received E1 differential signal (+) The first received E1 differential signal (-) The second received E1 differential signal (+) The second received E1 differential signal (-) The third received E1 differential signal (+) The third received E1 differential signal (-) The fourth received E1 differential signal (+) The fourth received E1 differential signal (-) The fifth received E1 differential signal (+) The fifth received E1 differential signal (-) The sixth received E1 differential signal (+) The sixth received E1 differential signal (-) The seventh received E1 differential signal (+) The seventh received E1 differential signal (-) The eighth received E1 differential signal (+) The eighth received E1 differential signal (-) The ninth received E1 differential signal (+) The ninth received E1 differential signal (-) Pin 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 Signal The first transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The first transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The second transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The second transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The third transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The third transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The fourth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The fourth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The fifth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The fifth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The sixth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The sixth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The seventh transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The seventh transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The eighth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The eighth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The ninth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The ninth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

72

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Pin 19 20 21 22 23 24 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56

Signal The tenth received E1 differential signal (+) The tenth received E1 differential signal (-) The eleventh received E1 differential signal (+) The eleventh received E1 differential signal (-) The twelfth received E1 differential signal (+) The twelfth received E1 differential signal (-) The thirteenth received E1 differential signal (+) The thirteenth received E1 differential signal (-) The fourteenth received E1 differential signal (+) The fourteenth received E1 differential signal (-) The fifteenth received E1 differential signal (+) The fifteenth received E1 differential signal (-) The sixteenth received E1 differential signal (+) The sixteenth received E1 differential signal (-)

Pin 43 44 45 46 47 48 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80

Signal The tenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The tenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The eleventh transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The eleventh transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The twelfth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The twelfth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The thirteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The thirteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The fourteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The fourteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The fifteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The fifteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The sixteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The sixteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)

3.4.5 DIP Switches and CF Card
This board has a set of DIP switches and a pluggable CF (compact flash) card. NE databases, system parameters (including NE-IP, NE-ID, and subnet mask), software packages, and NE logs are stored on the CF card. After you press the CRV button on the system control, switching, and timing board and hold it for eight seconds, the data stored on the CF card will be loaded to the board. To synchronize the NE databases, system parameters, and NE logs on the system control, switching, and timing board to the CF card, enable the regular backup function.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

73

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
NOTE

3 Boards

The software packages on the CF card are synchronized with those on the system control, switching, and timing board during package diffusion. Therefore, automatic backup mechanisms or manual operations are not needed to synchronize software packages on the system control, switching, and timing board and the CF card. If the system control, switching, and timing board and the CF card have different software packages or data, the SWDL_PKGVER_MM alarm will be reported.

Figure 3-23 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card

2

1

1. DIP switches

2. CF card

Table 3-51 Setting DIP switches Setting of DIP Switchesa 1 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 1 3 0 0 1 1 0 4 0 1 0 1 0 Indicates that the board works with the watchdog enabled. The value is reserved. Indicates that a memory self-check is running. Indicates that the board is being debugged. Indicates that the board works with the watchdog disabled and a full memory check is running. Meaning

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1 2 3 4

ON DIP

74

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Setting of DIP Switchesa 1 0 0 0 2 1 1 1 3 0 1 1 4 1 0 1

Meaning

Indicates the BIOS holdover state. Indicates the BIOS exhibition state. The value is reserved. (By default, this value indicates that the board works with the watchdog enabled.) The value is reserved. (By default, this value indicates that the board works with the watchdog enabled.) Restores the data of the CF card. Erases data in the system parameter area. Erases databases. Erases NE software, including patches. Erases databases and NE software, including patches. Erases all data in the file system. Erases all the data except for the board manufacturing information.

1

0

0

0

1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0 0 0 1 1 1 1

0 1 1 0 0 1 1

1 0 1 0 1 0 1

NOTE

a: When a DIP switch is set to the side with the numbers "1, 2, 3, 4", it represents binary digit 1. When a DIP switch is set to the side with the letters "ON DIP", it represents binary digit 0.

3.4.6 Valid Slots
The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC is inserted in slot 1 of the IDU chassis. Slot 1 occupies the space of two ordinary slots. For the NMS to manage function units on the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC, the function units are mapped into specific logical boards and allocated proper logical slots on the NMS. Figure 3-24 Slot for the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC in the IDU chassis
Slot 5 (PIU) Slot 6 (FAN) Slot 3 (EXT) Slot 1 (CSHA/CSHB/CSHC) Slot 4 (EXT)

The CSHA, CSHB, and CSHC are mapped into different logical boards on the NMS.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

75

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Figure 3-25 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHA
Slot 5 (PIU) Slot 6 (FAN) Slot 3 (EXT) Slot 1 (CSHA) Slot 10 (AUX) Slot 4 (EXT) Slot 7 (EM4T) Slot 9 (SP3S)

Figure 3-26 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHB
Slot 5 (PIU) Slot 6 (FAN) Slot 3 (EXT) Slot 1 (CSHB) Slot 10 (AUX) Slot 4 (EXT) Slot 7 (EM4T) Slot 9 (SP3D)

Figure 3-27 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHC
Slot 5 (PIU) Slot 3 (EXT) Slot 4 (EXT) Slot 6 (FAN) Slot 1 (CSHC) Slot 10 (AUX) Slot 7 (EM4F) Slot 8 (SL1D) Slot 9 (SP3S)

3.4.7 Board Feature Code
The board feature code of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC indicates the E1 port impedance. The board feature code refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code. Table 3-52 Board feature code of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC Board Feature Code A B Port Impedance (Ohm) 120 75

3.4.8 Types of SFP Modules
The FE/GE ports and STM-1 ports on the CSHC support multiple types of small form-factor pluggable (SFP) modules.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

76

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-53 Types of SFP modules that the FE/GE port supports Category Part Number Type Wavelength and Transmission Distance 850 nm, 0.5 km 1310 nm, 10 km 1310 nm, 40 km 1550 nm, 40 km 1000BASE-ZX 1000BASE-CWDM 1550 nm, 80 km 1471 nm, 40 km 1491 nm, 40 km 1511 nm, 40 km 1531 nm, 40 km 1551 nm, 40 km 1571 nm, 40 km 1591 nm, 40 km 1611 nm, 40 km 1471 nm, 80 km 1491 nm, 80 km 1511 nm, 80 km 1531 nm, 80 km 1551 nm, 80 km 1571 nm, 80 km 1591 nm, 80 km 1611 nm, 80 km 1000BASE-BX-D Transmit: 1490 nm; receive: 1310 nm 10 km 34060470 1000BASE-BX-U Transmit: 1310 nm; receive: 1490 nm 10 km 34060540 1000BASE-BX-D Transmit: 1490 nm; receive: 1310 nm 40 km

Dual-fiber bidirectional GE module

34060286 34060473 34060298 34060513 34060360 34060416 34060417 34060418 34060419 34060420 34060421 34060422 34060423 34060483 34060481 34060479 34060482 34060478 34060476 34060477 34060480

1000Base-SX 1000Base-LX 1000BASE-VX

Single-fiber bidirectional GE module

34060475

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

77

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Category

Part Number

Type

Wavelength and Transmission Distance Transmit: 1310 nm; receive: 1490 nm 40 km

34060539

1000BASE-BX-U

Dual-fiber bidirectional FE module

34060287 34060276 34060281 34060282

100BASE-FX 100BASE-LX 100BASE-VX 100BASE-ZX 100BASE-BX-D

1310 nm, 2 km 1310 nm, 15 km 1310 nm, 40 km 1550 nm, 80 km Transmit: 1550 nm; receive: 1310 nm 15 km

Single-fiber bidirectional FE module

34060364

34060363

100BASE-BX-U

Transmit: 1310 nm; receive: 1550 nm 15 km

Electrical module

34100052

10/100/1000BASE-T (X)

-

NOTE

For the specifications for each type of optical module, see Table 3-55-Table 3-61 in CSHA/CSHB/CSHC Technical Specifications.

Table 3-54 Types of SFP modules that the STM-1 port supports Part Number 34060287 34060276 34060281 34060282 34100104 Type Ie-1 S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2 STM-1e

3.4.9 Board Parameter Settings
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC.

Related References
A.1.2.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 78

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

A.10.2.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table A.10.2.11 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status A.11.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General A.11.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port A.11.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port A.11.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface A.10.4.5 Parameter Description: External Time Port_Basic Attributes A.10.4.6 Parameter Description: External Time Port_BMC A.10.4.7 Parameter Description: External Time Port_Cable Transmission Distance A.10.5 Parameter Description: Auxiliary Ports A.5.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes A.5.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control A.5.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes A.5.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Layer 3 Attributes A.5.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes A.5.8.1 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces A.5.10.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead A.5.10.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs A.5.9.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports A.5.10.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs

3.4.10 Technical Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including the packet switching capacity, crossconnection capability, performance of Ethernet ports, SDH optical ports, E1 ports, clocks, and auxiliary ports, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

Packet Switching Capacity
The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC supports a 4.2 Gbit/s packet switching capacity.

Cross-Connection Capability
The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC supports full time division cross-connections (equivalent to 8x8 VC-4s) at the VC-12, VC-3, or VC-4 level.

Ethernet Port Performance
Ethernet port performance complies with IEEE 802.3. The following tables provide the specifications of FE/GE optical ports (supported only by the CSHC), GE electrical ports, and FE electrical ports.
NOTE

The OptiX RTN 910 uses SFP modules to provide GE optical interfaces. Users can use different types of SFP modules to provide GE optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

79

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-55 GE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional, short-distance transmission) Item Classification code Nominal wavelength (nm) Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) Fiber type Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength (nm) Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Performance 1000BASE-SX (0.5 km) 850 1000 Multi-mode 0.5 770 to 860 -9 to -3 -17 0 9.5 Single-mode 10 1270 to 1355 -9 to -3 -20 -3 9.5 1000BASE-LX (10 km) 1310

Table 3-56 GE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional, long-haul transmission) Item Classification code Nominal wavelength (nm) Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) Fiber type Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength (nm) Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Performance 1000BASE-VX (40 km) 1310 1000 Single-mode 40 1270 to 1350 -5 to 0 -23 -3 9 1000BASE-VX (40 km) 1550 1000 Single-mode 40 1480 to 1580 -5 to 0 -22 -3 9 1000BASE-ZX (80 km) 1550 1000 Single-mode 80 1500 to 1580 -2 to +5 -22 -3 9

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

80

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-57 GE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional, CWDM) Item Classification code Nominal wavelength (nm) Performance 1000BASE-CWDM (40 km) l Channel 1: 1471 l Channel 2: 1491 l Channel 3: 1511 l Channel 4: 1531 l Channel 5: 1551 l Channel 6: 1571 l Channel 7: 1591 l Channel 8: 1611 Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) Fiber type Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength (nm) Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) 1000 Single-mode 40 Nominal wavelength ±6.5 0 to +5 -19 0 8.2 1000BASE-CWDM (80 km) l Channel 1: 1471 l Channel 2: 1491 l Channel 3: 1511 l Channel 4: 1531 l Channel 5: 1551 l Channel 6: 1571 l Channel 7: 1591 l Channel 8: 1611 1000 Single-mode 80 Nominal wavelength ±6.5 0 to +5 -28 -9 8.2

Table 3-58 GE optical interface performance (single-fiber bidirectional) Item Performance 1000BASEBX-D (10 km) Nominal wavelength (nm) Tx: 1490 Rx: 1310 Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) Fiber type Transmission distance (km) 1000 Multi-mode 10 1000BASEBX-U (10km) Tx: 1310 Rx: 1490 1000 Multi-mode 10 1000BASEBX-D (40 km) Tx: 1490 Rx: 1310 1000 Single-mode 40 1000BASEBX-U (40km) Tx: 1310 Rx: 1490 1000 Single-mode 40

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

81

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Item

Performance 1000BASEBX-D (10 km) 1000BASEBX-U (10km) Tx: 1260 to 1360 Rx: 1480 to 1500 -9 to -3 -19.5 -3 6 1000BASEBX-D (40 km) Tx: 1260 to 1360 Rx: 1480 to 1500 -3 to +3 -23 -3 6 1000BASEBX-U (40km) Tx: 1480 to 1500 Rx: 1260 to 1360 -3 to +3 -23 -3 6

Operating wavelength (nm)

Tx: 1480 to 1500 Rx: 1260 to 1360

Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)

-9 to -3 -19.5 -3 6

Table 3-59 FE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional) Item Performance 100BASEFX (2 km) Nominal wavelength (nm) Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) Fiber type Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength (nm) Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) 1310 100 Single-mode 2 1270 to 1380 -19 to -14 -30 -14 10 100BASELX (15 km) 1310 100 Single-mode 15 1261 to 1360 -15 to -8 -28 -8 8.2 100BASEVX (40 km) 1310 100 Single-mode 40 1263 to 1360 -5 to 0 -34 -10 10 100BASEZX (80 km) 1550 100 Single-mode 80 1480 to 1580 -5 to 0 -34 -10 10.5

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

82

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-60 FE optical interface performance (single-fiber bidirectional) Item Classification code Nominal wavelength (nm) Performance 100BASE-BX-D (15 km) Tx: 1550 Rx: 1310 Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) Fiber type Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength (nm) 100 Single-mode 15 Tx: 1480 to 1580 Rx: 1260 to 1360 Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) -15 to -8 -32 -8 8.5 100BASE-BX-U (15 km) Tx: 1310 Rx: 1550 100 Single-mode 15 Tx: 1260 to 1360 Rx: 1480 to 1580 -15 to -8 -32 -8 8.5

Table 3-61 GE electrical interface performance Item Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) Performance 10 (10BASE-T) 100 (100BASE-TX) 1000 (1000BASE-T) Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T) MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX) 4D-PAM5 encoding signal (1000BASE-T) Interface type RJ45

Table 3-62 FE electrical interface performance Item Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) Performance 10 (10BASE-T) 100 (100BASE-TX) Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T) MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 83

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Item Interface type

Performance RJ45

STM-1 Optical Interface Performance
The performance of the STM-1 optical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.957/G.825. The following table provides the typical performance of the interface. Table 3-63 STM-1 optical interface performance Item Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Classification code Fiber type Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength (nm) Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Performance 155520 Ie-1 Multi-mode fiber 2 1270 to 1380 -19 to -14 -30 -14 10 S-1.1 Single-mode fiber 15 1261 to 1360 -15 to -8 -28 -8 8.2 L-1.1 Single-mode fiber 40 1263 to 1360 -5 to 0 -34 -10 10 L-1.2 Single-mode fiber 80 1480 to 1580 -5 to 0 -34 -10 10

NOTE

The OptiX RTN 910 uses SFP optical modules for providing optical interfaces. You can use different types of SFP optical modules to provide optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.

STM-1 Electrical Interface Performance
The performance of the STM-1 electrical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.703. The following table provides the typical performance of the interface. Table 3-64 STM-1 electrical interface performance Item Nominal bit rate (kbit/s)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Performance 155520
84

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Item Code type Wire pair in each transmission direction Impedance (ohm)

Performance CMI One coaxial wire pair 75

NOTE

The OptiX RTN 910 uses SFP electrical modules to provide electrical interfaces.

E1 Interface Performance
Table 3-65 E1 interface performance Item Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Code pattern Impedance (ohm) Wire pair in each transmission direction Performance 2048 HDB3 75 One coaxial wire pair 120 One symmetrical wire pair

Orderwire Interface Performance
Table 3-66 Orderwire interface performance Item Transmission path Orderwire type Wire pair in each transmission direction Impedance (ohm) Performance Uses the E1 and E2 bytes in the SDH overhead or the Huaweidefined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame. Addressing call One symmetrical wire pair 600

NOTE

The OptiX RTN equipment also supports the orderwire group call function. For example, when OptiX RTN equipment calls 888, the orderwire group call number, all the OptiX RTN equipment orderwire phones in the orderwire subnet ring until a phone is answered. Then, a point-to-point orderwire phone call is established.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

85

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Synchronous Data Interface Performance
Table 3-67 Synchronous data interface performance Item Transmission path Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Interface type Interface characteristics Performance Uses the F1 byte in the SDH overhead or the Huawei-defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame. 64 Codirectional Meets the ITU-T G.703 standard.

Asynchronous Data Interface
Table 3-68 Asynchronous data interface performance Item Transmission path Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Interface characteristics Performance Uses the user-defined byte of the SDH overhead or the Huawei-defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame. ≤ 19.2 Meets the RS-232 standard.

Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance
Clock timing and synchronization performance meets related ITU-T Recommendations. Table 3-69 Clock timing and synchronization performance Item External synchronization source Frequency accuracy Pull-in and pull-out ranges Noise generation Noise tolerance Noise transfer Transient response and holdover performance Performance 2048 kbit/s (compliant with ITU-T G.703 §9), or 2048 kHz (compliant with ITU-T G.703 §13) Compliant with ITU-T G.813

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

86

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Wayside Service Interface Performance
Table 3-70 Wayside service interface performance Item Transmission path Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Impedance (ohm) Interface characteristics Performance Uses the Huawei-defined bytes in the overhead of the microwave frame. 2048 120 Meets the ITU-T G.703 standard.

Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-71 Mechanical behavior Item Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight Performance 20.60 mm x 388.40 mm x 266.79 mm CSHA: 1.11 kg CSHB: 1.16 kg CSHC: 1.13 kg

Power Consumption
Power consumption of the CSHA: < 18.0 W Power consumption of the CSHB: < 22.7 W Power consumption of the CSHC: < 19.6 W

3.5 CSHD/CSHE
The CSHD/CSHE is the integrated Hybrid system control, switching, and timing board. The difference between the CSHD and CSHE is that the GE ports on the CSHD support pluggable SFP optical/electrical modules, while the GE ports on the CSHE are fixed electrical ports.

3.5.1 Version Description
The functional version of the CSHD/CSHE is SLA1.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

87

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

3.5.2 Functions and Features
The CSHD/CSHE provides 4.4 Gbit/s packet switching, full time division cross-connection, system control and communication, and clock processing functions. The CSHD/CSHE provides FE/GE service ports, E1 service ports, auxiliary ports, and management ports. Table 3-72 lists the functions and features that the CSHD/CSHE supports. Table 3-72 Functions and features that the CSHD/CSHE supports Function and Feature Basic functions Switching capability Cross-connect capacity System control and communication Clock Clock synchronization at the physical layer Description Supports 4.4 Gbit/s packet switching function. Supports full time division cross-connections (equivalent to 8x8 VC-4s) at the VC-12, VC-3, or VC-4 level. Manages, monitors, and controls the running status of the IDU, and works as a communication service unit between the NMS and boards to help the NMS to control and manage the NE. Provides the system clock and frame headers for service signals and overhead signals for the other boards when tracing an appropriate clock source. The traced clock source can be any of the following: l External clock l SDH line clock l PDH tributary clock l Radio link clock l Synchronous Ethernet clock Clock protection Supports the following clock protection schemes: l Protection based on clock source priorities l Protection by running the SSM protocol l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol ACR IEEE 1588v2 External clock port External time port DCN Outband DCN Inband DCN Supported Processes IEEE 1588v2 messages. 1 2 Supports a maximum of five DCCs. Supports the inband DCN function. The DCN bandwidth is configurable.
88

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature MPLS/PWE3 functions

Description Supported See Table 3-73.

QoS functions

Supported See Table 3-74.

Ethernet service functions

Supported See Table 3-75.

E1 service functions

Supported See Table 3-76.

Auxiliary ports and management ports

Ethernet NM port NM serial port NE cascading port Orderwire phone port Asynchronous data port

1 1 1 1 1 The transmission rate of the port is equal to or less than 19.2 kbit/s and the interfacing level complies with RS-232. 1 The transmission rate of the port is 64 kbit/s and its specifications comply with ITU-T G.703. Three inputs and one output 1 The specifications of port comply with RS-485. Supported Supported Supported

Synchronous data port

External alarm port Port for monitoring an outdoor cabinet OM Warm reset and cold reset In-service FPGA loading Board manufacturing information query

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

89

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature Board power consumption information query Board temperature detection Board voltage detection Detection of indicators on the other boards Pluggable CF card

Description Supported

Supported

Supported Supported

Supported

The packet switching unit of the CSHD/CSHE works with its service interface unit or a service board to implement MPLS/PWE3 functions. Table 3-73 provides details about these functions. Table 3-73 MPLS/PWE3 functions Function and Feature MPLS tunnel Setup mode VLAN subinterface Protection OAM Description Static LSPs Supported 1:1 MPLS tunnel APS Supports the following OAM functions: l MPLS OAM that complies with ITU-T Y. 1710 and ITU-T Y.1711 l LSP ping and LSP traceroute functions PWE3 TDM PWE3 Encapsulatio n mode Supports the following encapsulation modes: l SAToP l CESoPSN Packet loading time Jitter compensatio n buffering time 125 μs to 5000 μs 375 μs to 16000 μs

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

90

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature ATM PWE3 Mapping mode

Description l ATM N-to-one VCC cell encapsulation l ATM N-to-one VPC cell encapsulation l ATM one-to-one VCC cell encapsulation l ATM one-to-one VPC cell encapsulation Transparentl Supported y transmitted ATM service Maximum number of concatenated cells 31

ETH PWE3

Encapsulatio n mode Service type

l Raw mode l Tagged mode Supports E-Line services. l E-Line l E-Aggr

Setup mode Numbers of PWs Protection OAM

Static PWs Supports a maximum of 1024 PWs. 1:1 PW APS Supports the following OAM functions: l VCCV l PW OAM that complies with ITU-T Y. 1710 and ITU-T Y.1711 l PW ping and PW traceroute functions l Intelligent service fault diagnosis, that is, one-click PWE3 service fault locating

MS-PW Configurable bandwidth

Supported Supported

The packet switching unit of the CSHD/CSHE works with its service interface unit or a service board to implement QoS functions. Table 3-74 provides details about these functions.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

91

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-74 QoS functions Function and Feature DiffServ Description Supports simple traffic classification by specifying PHB service classes for service flows based on their QoS information (C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN priorities, DSCP values, or MPLS EXP values) carried by the packets. Supports traffic classification based on C-VLAN IDs, S-VLAN IDs, C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN priorities, C-VLAN IDs + C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN IDs + S-VLAN priorities, or DSCP values carried by packets. Provides the CAR function for traffic flows at ports. Provides traffic shaping for a specific port, prioritized queue, or traffic flow. Supports the following queue scheduling policies: l SP l WRR l SP+WRR

Ethernet complex traffic classification

CAR Shaping Queue scheduling policies

The Ethernet service interface unit of the CSHD/CSHE works with its packet switching unit to implement Ethernet service functions. Table 3-75 provides details about these functions. Table 3-75 Ethernet service functions Function and Feature Basic functions Description Receives/Transmits FE/GE service signals and works with the packet switching unit to process the received FE/GE service signals. Fixed FE electrical port FE/GE port: SFP module (CSHD) Provides four 10/100BASE-T(X) ports. Provides two ports by using SFP modules of any of the following types: l Dual-fiber bidirectional FE/GE optical module l Colored CWDM GE optical module l Single-fiber bidirectional FE/GE module l 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) GE electrical module Fixed FE/GE electrical port (CSHE) Provides two fixed 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) electrical ports.

Port specifications

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

92

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature Port attributes Working mode

Description l The FE ports support 10M full-duplex, 100M fullduplex, and auto-negotiation. l The FE optical ports support 100M full-duplex and auto-negotiation. l The GE electrical ports support 10M full-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 1000M full-duplex, and autonegotiation. l The GE optical ports support 1000M full-duplex and auto-negotiation. (CSHD)

TAG attribute

l Sets and queries the TAG attribute of an Ethernet port. l The TAG attribute can be set to tag aware, access, or hybrid.

Jumbo frame Traffic control function Services E-Line services

Supports jumbo frames with a maximum frame length of 9600 bytes. Supports the port-based traffic control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x. Supports the following types of E-Line services: l E-Line services based on ports l E-Line services based on port+VLAN l E-Line services carried by QinQ links l E-Line services carried by PWs

E-LAN services

Supports the following types of E-LAN services: l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridges l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges

LAG

Inter-board LAG Intra-board LAG

Supported Supported Supports the ERPS function that complies with ITU-T G.8032/Y.1344. Supports the MSTP protocol that generates only the CIST. The MSTP protocol provides functions equivalent to that of the RSTP protocol. Supported

ERPS Spanning tree protocol

LPT

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

93

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature ETH OAM Ethernet service OAM

Description l Supports IEEE 802.1ag OAM. l Supports the packet loss, delay, and delay variation monitoring function that complies with ITU-T Y. 1731. Supports IEEE 802.3ah OAM. Supported

Ethernet port OAM RMON Clock Clock source Clock protection

Synchronous Ethernet (not supported by the SFP electrical module) Supports the following clock protection schemes: l Protection based on clock source priorities l Protection by running the SSM protocol l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol

IEEE 1588v2 DCN OAM Inband DCN Loopback

Receives and transmits IEEE 1588v2 messages at Ethernet ports but not at SFP electrical ports. Each FE/GE port provides one inband DCN channel. Supports the following loopback types: l Inloops at the PHY layer of Ethernet ports l Inloops at the MAC layer of Ethernet ports

Warm reset Query of SFP module information

Supported Supported

The E1 service interface unit of the CSHD/CSHE works with its packet switching unit to implement E1 service functions. Table 3-76 provides details about these functions. Table 3-76 E1 service functions Function and Feature Basic functions E1 service categories Description Receives and transmits E1 signals, and supports flexible configuration of E1 service categories. Supports the following E1 service categories: l Native E1 l CES E1 l ATM/IMA E1

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

94

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature Port specifications Fractional E1 Native E1 Transport mode Retiming ATM/IMA Maximum number of ATM services Maximum number of ATM connections ATM traffic management ATM encapsulation mode 75-ohm/120ohm E1 port

Description 16 Supported Transported in the TDM plane Supported 64

256

Supported Supports the following ATM encapsulation modes: l N-to-one VPC l N-to-one VCC l One-to-one VPC l One-to-one VCC

Maximum number of concatenated ATM cells ATM OAM

31

Supports F4 OAM (VP level) and F5 OAM (VC level), including the following functions: l Alarm indication signal (AIS)/Remote defect indication (RDI) l Continuity check test l Loopback test

IMA protection CES Maximum number of services Encapsulation mode

Supported 16

Supports the following encapsulation modes: l CESoPSN l SAToP

Service category

Point-to-point services

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

95

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature Compression of vacant slots Jitter buffering time (us) Packet loading time (us) CES ACR Retiming Clock Clock source Clock protection OM Loopback Cold reset and warm reset PRBS tests at E1 ports

Description Supported (applicable to CESoPSN only) 375-16000 125-5000 Supported Supported Supports a tributary clock source extracted from the first or fifth E1 signal. Supports clock protection based on clock source priorities. Supports inloops and outloops at E1 tributary ports. Supported Supported

3.5.3 Working Principle
The CSHD/CSHE consists of the system control and communication unit, packet switching unit, cross-connect unit, clock unit, service interface unit, and auxiliary interface unit.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

96

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Functional Block Diagram
Figure 3-28 Functional block diagram of the CSHD/CSHE
Backplane GE bus

FE/GE signal

Ethernet signal access unit GE bus

Packet switching unit

Service board

E1 signal

E1 signal processing unit VC-4 signal

Cross-connect unit

VC-4 signal

TDM service unit

Control bus Ethernet NM port NM serial port NE cascading port Asynchronous data port Synchronous data port External alarm port Orderwire phone port Port for monitoring an outdoor cabinet/Clock port Monitoring signal External clock signal Power supplied to the other units on the board System control and communication unit Auxiliary interface unit Clock unit Clock signal received from other boards Clock signal provided to other boards

Clock signal received from the service unit on the board

Clock signal provided to the other units on the board -48 V1 -48 V2 +3.3 V power supplied to other boards +12 V power supplied to fans

Power supply unit

System Control and Communication Unit
The system control and communication unit consists of the CPU unit and logic control unit. The system control and communication unit performs the following functions: l l l l l l l The CPU unit controls and manages the other units on the board and collects alarms and performance events using the control bus. The CPU unit controls and manages the other boards in the IDU and collects alarms and performance events using the control bus. The CPU unit controls and manages the ODU by transmitting the ODU control signal to the SMODEM unit in the IF board over the control bus in the backplane. The CPU unit enables the packet switching unit using the control bus to groom Ethernet service packets. The CPU unit processes Ethernet protocol packets from the packet switching unit using the control bus. The CPU unit processes network management messages in DCCs using the logic control unit. The CPU unit communicates with the NMS by its Ethernet NM port and NE cascading port.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 97

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

l l l l

The CPU unit implements software loading by reading information from the CF card with the bus. The CPU unit monitors and manages an outdoor cabinet by reading the outdoor cabinet monitoring signal with the bus. The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit and enables FPGA loading. The logic control unit cross-connects the overheads between the auxiliary interface unit, the CPU unit, and other boards. This helps to achieve the following purposes: – Adding or dropping DCC information processed by the CPU unit – Adding or dropping orderwire and asynchronous data services – Exchanging the orderwire bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes between different lines

Packet Switching Unit
The packet switching unit grooms services and processes protocols for Ethernet services (including Native Ethernet services and MPLS/PWE3 packets carried over Ethernet). l After receiving Ethernet services from the Ethernet interface unit on the board or an Ethernet board, the packet switching unit grooms the Ethernet services based on the configurations that are delivered by the system control and communication unit. After receiving protocol packets from the Ethernet interface unit on the board or an Ethernet board, the packet switching unit transmits the protocol packets to the system control and communication unit for processing. After processing, the system control and communication unit sends the protocol packets back to the packet switching unit. The packet switching unit transmits the protocol packets to the Ethernet interface unit or the Ethernet board.

l

Cross-Connect Unit
The cross-connect unit grooms services over the entire system using the higher order crossconnect module and the lower order cross-connect module. Figure 3-29 shows the functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit. Figure 3-29 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit
Source TDM service unit SinkTDM service unit

Higher order cross-connect module HOXC

Lower order cross-connect module LOXC

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

98

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

The source TDM service unit transmits VC-4 signals to the higher order cross-connect module over VC-4 buses. If the VC-4 signals carry only VC-4 services, the higher order cross-connect module processes the VC-4 signals and then transmits the signals to the sink TDM service unit. If the VC-4 signals include VC-12 or VC-3 services, the higher order cross-connect module grooms the VC-12 or VC-3 services to the lower order cross-connect module. The lower order cross-connect module processes the VC-12 or VC-3 services and then transmits the services back to the higher order cross-connect module. The higher order cross-connect module processes the services and then transmits the services to the sink TDM service unit.

Ethernet Signal Access Unit
The Ethernet access unit receives/transmits FE/GE signals, and works with the Layer 2 switching unit to provide Layer 2 switching functions. In addition, the Ethernet signal access unit receives IEEE 1588v2 messages (not supported by SFP electrical modules), adds timestamps to the messages, and sends the messages to the clock unit. l In the receive direction, after restructuring, decoding, and performing serial/parallel conversion for electrical signals, the Ethernet signal access unit performs frame delimitation and preamble processing, extracts Ethernet frames, and performs cyclic redundancy check (CRC) and Ethernet performance measurement. If optical signals are received, the Ethernet signal access unit performs O/E conversion before performing the preceding operations. In the transmit direction, after performing frame delimitation, preamble addition, CRC code computation, and Ethernet performance measurement, the Ethernet signal access unit performs serial/parallel conversion for signals, encodes the signals, and transmits the signals to the Ethernet port. In the case of an optical port, after performing the preceding operations, the Ethernet signal access unit needs to perform E/O conversion before transmitting signals through the optical port.

l

E1 Signal Processing Unit
The E1 signal processing unit transmits/receives and processes E1 electrical signals, and works with the packet switching unit and cross-connect unit to transport various signals. l In the receive direction, the E1 signal processing unit performs the following functions: – Implements the functions of impedance matching, signal equalization, level conversion, clock recovery, de-jitter, and decoding for received E1 signals. – If the received E1 signals need to be transmitted through the TDM plane in form of native E1 signals, the E1 signal processing unit maps the E1 signals into VC-4s, performs pointer processing, and sends the signals to the cross-connect unit for grooming. – If the received E1 signals need to be transmitted through the packet switched plane in form of packet services, the E1 signal processing unit performs PWE3 encapsulation for a required service category such as ATM service, IMA service, and CES service, and sends the encapsulated packets to the packet switching unit for grooming. l In the transmit direction, the E1 signal processing unit performs the following functions: – For the VC-4 signals from the cross-connect unit, the E1 signal processing unit implements the functions of clock processing, demapping, and overhead processing, and extracts E1 signals.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

99

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

– For the PWE3 packets from the packet switching unit, the E1 signal processing unit implements the functions of protocol processing, PWE3 decapsulation, queue scheduling, and other QoS processing, and sends out E1 signals. – For output E1 signals, the interface part of the E1 signal processing unit implements the functions of encoding, de-jitter, pulse shaping, and line driving, and sends the signals to an E1 port.

Clock Unit
The clock unit selects an appropriate clock source from external clock sources or service clock sources at service ports based on clock priorities. Locking the clock source by means of the phase-locked loop, the clock unit provides the system clock and frame headers for service signals and overhead signals to other units on the system control, switching, and timing board and the other boards. The clock unit receives IEEE 1588v2 messages from the FE signal access unit and GE signal access unit on the local board or from other Ethernet service boards, and performs protocol processing to implement clock/time synchronization.

Auxiliary Interface Unit
The auxiliary interface unit processes inputs and outputs of the orderwire phone port, asynchronous data port, synchronous data port, port for monitoring an outdoor cabinet, and external alarm port. The port for monitoring an outdoor cabinet and the clock/time port share one port.

Power Supply Unit
The power supply unit performs the following functions: l l l Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the power supply required by the chips of the other units on the local board. Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +3.3 V power supply required by the other boards in the IDU. Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +12 V power supply required by the fan.

3.5.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, service ports, management ports, auxiliary ports, buttons, and labels on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-30 Front panel of the CSHD
CSHD
STAT PROG SYNC SRV LINK1 ACT1 LINK2 ACT2

TX RX 1 2 CF RCV RST NMS/COM EXT CLK/TOD1 F1/S1 ALMI/ALMO TEL/ MON / TOD2 FE1 FE2 FE3 FE4 GE

E1 1~16

1

2

3

4

5

6

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

100

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Figure 3-31 Front panel of the CSHE
CSHE
STAT PROG SYNC SRV

16 1 CF RCV RST NMS/COM EXT CLK/TOD1 F1/S1 ALMI/ALMO TEL/ MON / TOD2 FE1 FE2 FE3 FE4 GE1 GE2

1

2

3

4

5

6

1. Indicators 4. FE service ports

2. Buttons 5. l CSHD: FE/GE optical/ electrical service ports (using SFP modules) l CSHE: fixed GE electrical service port

3. Clock ports, auxiliary ports, and management ports 6. E1 (1-16) ports

Indicators
Table 3-77 Status explanation for indicators on the CSHD/CSHE Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working properly. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board. PROG Blinks on (green) and off at 100 ms intervals Blinks on (green) and off at 300 ms intervals On (green) Software is being loaded to the board during the power-on or resetting process of the board. The board software is in BIOS boot state during the power-on or resetting process of the board. l When the board is being powered on or being reset, the upper layer software is being initialized. l When the board is running, the software is running normally. Blinks on (red) and off at 100 ms intervals The BOOTROM self-check fails during the power-on or resetting process of the board.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

101

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Indicator

State On (red)

Meaning l The memory self-check fails or loading upper layer software fails during the power-on or resetting process of the board. l The logic file or upper layer software is lost during the running process of the board. l The pluggable storage card is faulty.

SYNC

On (green) On (red)

The clock is working properly. The clock source is lost or a clock switchover occurs. The system is working properly. A critical or major alarm occurs in the system. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the system. There is no power supplied to the system. The connection at the GE1 port is working properly. The connection at the GE1 port is interrupted. Data is being transmitted or received at the GE1 port. No data is being transmitted or received at the GE1 port. The connection at the GE2 port is working properly. The connection at the GE2 port is interrupted. Data is being transmitted or received at the GE2 port. No data is being transmitted or received at the GE2 port.

SRV

On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off

LINK1a

On (green) Off

ACT1a

On or blinking (yellow) Off

LINK2a

On (green) Off

ACT2a

On or blinking (yellow) Off

NOTE

a: The LINK1, LINK2, ACT1, and ACT2 indicators are available only on the CSHD and indicate optical port status.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

102

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Clock Ports, Auxiliary Ports, and Management Ports
Table 3-78 Description of the clock ports, auxiliary ports, and management ports Port NMS/COM EXT CLK/TOD1 F1/S1 ALMI/ALMO TEL/MON/ TOD2 Description Ethernet NM port/NM serial port NE cascading port External clock port(2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz), external time port 1 or wayside E1 port Synchronous/Asynchronous data port Alarm input/output port Orderwire phone port, port for monitoring an outdoor cabinet, or time port 2 Connector Type

RJ45

NOTE

l External clock port, external time port 1, and wayside E1 port share one port physically. This port can also transparently transmit DCC bytes, orderwire overhead bytes, and synchronous/asynchronous data overhead bytes. This port, however, can implement only one of the preceding functions at a time. l The 64 kbit/s synchronous data port can transparently transmit one orderwire byte. This port, however, can transmit 64 kbit/s synchronous data or transparently transmit one orderwire byte at one time. l Orderwire phone port, external time port 2 and the outdoor cabinet monitoring port share one port physically. This port, however, can implement only one of the preceding functions at a time.

Auxiliary ports and management ports use RJ45 connectors. The pin assignments for the ports, however, are different. Figure 3-32 shows the front view of the RJ45 connector. Figure 3-32 Front view of the RJ45 connector

87654321

Table 3-79 Pin assignments for the NMS/COM port Port Pin 1 NMS/COM 2 3
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Signal Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) Receiving data (+)
103

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Port

Pin 4 5 6 7 8

Signal Grounding end of the NM serial port Receive end of the NM serial port Receiving data (-) Not defined Transmit end of the NM serial port

Table 3-80 Pin assignments for the EXT port Port Pin 1 2 EXT 3 6 4, 5, 7, 8 Signal Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) Receiving data (+) Receiving data (-) Not defined

NOTE

The EXT port supports the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes; that is, the EXT port can transmit data through pins 3 and 6 and receive data through pins 1 and 2.

The RJ45 connector has two indicators. Table 3-81 provides status explanation for these indicators. Table 3-81 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector Indicator LINK (green) State On Off ACT (yellow) On or blinking Off Meaning The link is working properly. The link is interrupted. The port is transmitting or receiving data. The port is not transmitting or receiving data.

NOTE

The NMS/COM port and the EXT port are equivalent to two ports on a hub. This means that no external Ethernet link should be configured between the two ports during the networking process; otherwise, an Ethernet loop will be formed. As a result, a broadcast storm is generated on the network, leading to repeated resetting of NEs.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

104

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Using the CSHD as an example, Figure 3-33 shows the two common incorrect connections. Figure 3-33 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM port and the EXT port

CSHD

STAT PROG SYNC SRV LINK1 ACT1 LINK2 ACT2

TX RX 1 2 CF RCV RST NMS/COM EXT CLK/TOD1 F1/S1 ALMI/ALMO TEL/ MON / TOD2 FE1 FE2 FE3 FE4 GE

E1 1~16

LAN

CSHD

STAT PROG SYNC SRV LINK1 ACT1 LINK2 ACT2

TX RX 1 2 CF RCV RST NMS/COM EXT CLK/TOD1 F1/S1 ALMI/ALMO TEL/ MON / TOD2 FE1 FE2 FE3 FE4 GE

E1 1~16

The clock port (CLK) and the high-precision time port (TOD1) use different pins of the same RJ45 connector. The pin assignments for the CLK/TOD1 port are provided in Table 3-82. The CLK/TOD1 port can work only in one mode at one time and does not support two or more modes at the same time. Table 3-82 Pin assignments for the CLK/TOD1 port Pin Working Mode External Clock External Time Input (1PPS + Time Informati on) 1 2 3 Signal input (-) Signal input (+) Not defined Not defined Not defined 1PPS signal input (-) (RS-422 level) 4 5 Signal output (-) Signal output (+) Grounding end Grounding end External Time Output (1PPS + Time Information ) Not defined Not defined 1PPS signal output (-) (RS-422 level) Grounding end Grounding end Not defined Not defined DCLS time signal input (-) (RS-422 level) Grounding end Grounding end External Time Input (DCLS) External Time Output (DCLS)

Not defined Not defined DCLS time signal output (-) (RS-422 level) Grounding end Grounding end

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

105

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Pin

Working Mode External Clock External Time Input (1PPS + Time Informati on) External Time Output (1PPS + Time Information ) 1PPS signal output (+) (RS-422 level) Time information output (-) (RS-422 level) Time information output (+) (RS-422 level) Not defined Not defined DCLS time signal input (+) (RS-422 level) Not defined External Time Input (DCLS) External Time Output (DCLS)

6

Not defined

1PPS signal input (+) (RS-422 level)

DCLS time signal output (+) (RS-422 level) Not defined

7

Not defined

Time information input (-) (RS-422 level)

8

Not defined

Time information input (+) (RS-422 level)

NOTE

The pin assignment when the CLK/TOD1 port functions as a wayside E1 service port is the same as that when the CLK/TOD1 port functions as a clock port.

Table 3-83 provides the pin assignments for the F1/S1 port. Table 3-83 Pin assignments for the F1/S1 port Port F1/S1 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Signal Transmitting asynchronous data signals Grounding end Receiving asynchronous data signals Transmitting synchronous data signals (TIP) Transmitting synchronous data signals (RING) Grounding end Receiving synchronous data signals (TIP) Receiving synchronous data signals (RING)
106

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-84 provides the pin assignments for the ALMI/ALMO port. Table 3-84 Pin assignments for the ALMI/ALMO port Port ALMI/ ALMO Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal The first external alarm input signal Grounding end for the first alarm input signal The second external alarm input signal The third external alarm input signal Grounding end for the third alarm input signal Grounding end for the second alarm input signal Alarm output signal (+) Alarm output signal (-)

The orderwire phone port, time port, and port for monitoring an outdoor cabinet share the TEL/ MON/TOD2 port physically. The pin assignments for the TEL/MON/TOD2 port are provided in Table 3-85. Table 3-85 Pin assignment of the TEL/MON/TOD2 port Pin Working Mode PHONE External Time Input (1PPS + Time Informa tion) 1 2 3 Not defined Not defined Not defined Not defined Not defined 1PPS signal input (-) (RS-422 level) External Time Output (1PPS + Time Informati on) Not defined Not defined 1PPS signal output (-) (RS-422 level) External Time Input (DCLS) External Time Output (DCLS) Port for Monitorin g an Outdoor Cabinet

Not defined Not defined DCLS time signal input (-) (RS-422 level)

Not defined Not defined DCLS time signal output (-) (RS-422 level)

Not defined Not defined Outdoor cabinet monitoring signal input (-) (RS-422 level)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

107

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Pin

Working Mode PHONE External Time Input (1PPS + Time Informa tion) External Time Output (1PPS + Time Informati on) Grounding end Grounding end 1PPS signal output (+) (RS-422 level) External Time Input (DCLS) External Time Output (DCLS) Port for Monitorin g an Outdoor Cabinet

4 5 6

RING TIP Not defined

Groundin g end Groundin g end 1PPS signal input (+) (RS-422 level)

Grounding end Grounding end DCLS time signal input (+) (RS-422 level)

Grounding end Grounding end DCLS time signal output (+) (RS-422 level)

Grounding end Grounding end Outdoor cabinet monitoring signal input (+) (RS-422 level)

7

Not defined

Time informati on input (-) (RS-422 level)

Time information output (-) (RS-422 level)

Not defined

Not defined

Outdoor cabinet monitoring signal output (-) (RS-422 level)

8

Not defined

Time informati on input (+) (RS-422 level)

Time information output (+) (RS-422 level)

Not defined

Not defined

Outdoor cabinet monitoring signal output (+) (RS-422 level)

Buttons
Table 3-86 Buttons Button CF RCV Name CF configuration restoration button Description After this button is pressed and held for eight seconds, the board automatically restores the NE database from the CF card.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

108

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Button RST

Name Warm reset button

Description After this button is pressed, a warm reset is performed on the board.

Service Ports
Table 3-87 Description of the service ports on the CSHD/CSHE Port FE1 FE2 FE3 FE4 GE1 GE2 E1 (1-16) l CSHD: FE/GE optical/ electrical ports l CSHE: GE electrical ports The first to sixteenth E1 signal ports l CSHD: LC SFP optical module or SFP electrical module l CSHE: RJ45 Anea 96 Description FE port Connector Type RJ45

NOTE

On the NMS, FE1 to FE4 correspond to PORT1 to PORT4 respectively; GE1 and GE2 correspond to PORT5 and PORT6 respectively.

When the SFP ports on the CSHD function as optical ports, optical modules are required. l When dual-fiber bidirectional SFP optical modules are used to provide ports, one SFP optical module provides one TX port and one RX port. For details, see Figure 3-34, in which TX represents the transmit port and RX represents the receive port. One optical fiber is connected to each port. When single-fiber bidirectional optical modules are used to provide ports, one optical module provides only the port on the left. This port is an optical port that can receive and transmit service signals. One optical fiber is connected to this port.

l

Figure 3-34 Ports of an SFP optical module

TX

RX

The FE electrical ports and GE electrical ports support the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDIX modes. Table 3-88 and Table 3-89 provide the pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in different modes.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 109

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-88 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI mode Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) Signal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TX+ TXRX+ Reserved Reserved RXReserved Reserved Function Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) Receiving data (+) Receiving data (-) 1000BASE-T Signal BIDA+ BIDABIDB+ BIDC+ BIDCBIDBBIDD+ BIDDFunction Bidirectional data wire A (+) Bidirectional data wire A (-) Bidirectional data wire B (+) Bidirectional data wire C (+) Bidirectional data wire C (-) Bidirectional data wire B (-) Bidirectional data wire D (+) Bidirectional data wire D (-)

Table 3-89 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI-X mode Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) Signal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 RX+ RXTX+ Reserved Reserved TXReserved Function Receiving data (+) Receiving data (-) Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) 1000BASE-T Signal BIDB+ BIDBBIDA+ BIDD+ BIDDBIDABIDC+ Function Bidirectional data wire B (+) Bidirectional data wire B (-) Bidirectional data wire A (+) Bidirectional data wire D (+) Bidirectional data wire D (-) Bidirectional data wire A (-) Bidirectional data wire C (+)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

110

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Pin

10/100BASE-T(X) Signal Function -

1000BASE-T Signal BIDCFunction Bidirectional data wire C (-)

8

Reserved

The RJ45 connector has two indicators. The status explanation for the two indicators is the same as that for the indicators on the RJ45 connector of the NMS/COM port. The E1 port uses the Anea 96 socket connector. Figure 3-35 shows the front view of an Anea 96 connector and Table 3-90 provides the pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector. Figure 3-35 Front view of an Anea 96 connector
POS.1

POS.96

Table 3-90 Pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal The first received E1 differential signal (+) The first received E1 differential signal (-) The second received E1 differential signal (+) The second received E1 differential signal (-) The third received E1 differential signal (+) The third received E1 differential signal (-) The fourth received E1 differential signal (+) The fourth received E1 differential signal (-) Pin 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Signal The first transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The first transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The second transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The second transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The third transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The third transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The fourth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The fourth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)
111

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Pin 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 49 50 51

Signal The fifth received E1 differential signal (+) The fifth received E1 differential signal (-) The sixth received E1 differential signal (+) The sixth received E1 differential signal (-) The seventh received E1 differential signal (+) The seventh received E1 differential signal (-) The eighth received E1 differential signal (+) The eighth received E1 differential signal (-) The ninth received E1 differential signal (+) The ninth received E1 differential signal (-) The tenth received E1 differential signal (+) The tenth received E1 differential signal (-) The eleventh received E1 differential signal (+) The eleventh received E1 differential signal (-) The twelfth received E1 differential signal (+) The twelfth received E1 differential signal (-) The thirteenth received E1 differential signal (+) The thirteenth received E1 differential signal (-) The fourteenth received E1 differential signal (+)

Pin 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 73 74 75

Signal The fifth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The fifth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The sixth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The sixth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The seventh transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The seventh transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The eighth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The eighth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The ninth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The ninth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The tenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The tenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The eleventh transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The eleventh transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The twelfth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The twelfth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The thirteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The thirteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The fourteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

112

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Pin 52 53 54 55 56

Signal The fourteenth received E1 differential signal (-) The fifteenth received E1 differential signal (+) The fifteenth received E1 differential signal (-) The sixteenth received E1 differential signal (+) The sixteenth received E1 differential signal (-)

Pin 76 77 78 79 80

Signal The fourteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The fifteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The fifteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The sixteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The sixteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)

3.5.5 DIP Switches and CF Card
This board has a set of DIP switches and a pluggable CF (compact flash) card. NE databases, system parameters (including NE-IP, NE-ID, and subnet mask), software packages, and NE logs are stored on the CF card. After you press the CRV button on the system control, switching, and timing board and hold it for eight seconds, the data stored on the CF card will be loaded to the board. To synchronize the NE databases, system parameters, and NE logs on the system control, switching, and timing board to the CF card, enable the regular backup function.
NOTE

The software packages on the CF card are synchronized with those on the system control, switching, and timing board during package diffusion. Therefore, automatic backup mechanisms or manual operations are not needed to synchronize software packages on the system control, switching, and timing board and the CF card. If the system control, switching, and timing board and the CF card have different software packages or data, the SWDL_PKGVER_MM alarm will be reported.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

113

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Figure 3-36 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card

2

1

1. DIP switches

2. CF card

Table 3-91 Setting DIP switches Setting of DIP Switchesa 1 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 1 3 0 0 1 1 0 4 0 1 0 1 0 Indicates that the board works with the watchdog enabled. The value is reserved. Indicates that a memory self-check is running. Indicates that the board is being debugged. Indicates that the board works with the watchdog disabled and a full memory check is running. Indicates the BIOS holdover state. Indicates the BIOS exhibition state. The value is reserved. (By default, this value indicates that the board works with the watchdog enabled.) Meaning

0 0 0

1 1 1

0 1 1

1 0 1

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1 2 3 4

ON DIP

114

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Setting of DIP Switchesa 1 1 2 0 3 0 4 0

Meaning

The value is reserved. (By default, this value indicates that the board works with the watchdog enabled.) Restores the data of the CF card. Erases data in the system parameter area. Erases databases. Erases NE software, including patches. Erases databases and NE software, including patches. Erases all data in the file system. Erases all the data except for the board manufacturing information.

1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0 0 0 1 1 1 1

0 1 1 0 0 1 1

1 0 1 0 1 0 1

NOTE

a: When a DIP switch is set to the side with the numbers "1, 2, 3, 4", it represents binary digit 1. When a DIP switch is set to the side with the letters "ON DIP", it represents binary digit 0.

3.5.6 Valid Slots
The CSHD/CSHE is inserted in slot 1 of the IDU chassis. Slot 1 occupies the space of two ordinary slots. For the NMS to manage function units on the CSHD, the function units are mapped into specific logical boards and allocated proper logical slots on the NMS. Figure 3-37 Slot for the CSHD/CSHE in the IDU chassis
Slot 5 (PIU) Slot 6 (FAN) Slot 3 (EXT) Slot 1 (CSHD/CSHE) Slot 4 (EXT)

The CSHD/CSHE is mapped into different logical boards on the NMS. Figure 3-38 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHD
Slot 5 (PIU) Slot 6 (FAN) Slot 3 (EXT) Slot 1 (CSHD) Slot 10 (AUX) Slot 4 (EXT) Slot 7 (EM6X) Slot 9 (MP1)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

115

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Figure 3-39 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHE
Slot 5 (PIU) Slot 6 (FAN) Slot 3 (EXT) Slot 1 (CSHE) Slot 10 (AUX) Slot 4 (EXT) Slot 7 (EM6TB) Slot 9 (MP1)

3.5.7 Board Feature Code
The board feature code of the CSHD/CSHE indicates the E1 port impedance. The board feature code refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code. Table 3-92 Board feature code of the CSHD/CSHE Board Feature Code A B Port Impedance (Ohm) 75 120

3.5.8 Types of SFP Modules
The FE/GE SFP port on the CSHD supports multiple types of SFP modules. Table 3-93 Types of SFP modules that the FE/GE port supports Category Part Number Type Wavelength and Transmission Distance 850 nm, 0.5 km 1310 nm, 10 km 1310 nm, 40 km 1550 nm, 40 km 1000BASE-ZX 1000BASE-CWDM 1550 nm, 80 km 1471 nm, 40 km 1491 nm, 40 km 1511 nm, 40 km 1531 nm, 40 km 1551 nm, 40 km 1571 nm, 40 km 1591 nm, 40 km
116

Dual-fiber bidirectional GE module

34060286 34060473 34060298 34060513 34060360 34060416 34060417 34060418 34060419 34060420 34060421 34060422

1000Base-SX 1000Base-LX 1000BASE-VX

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Category

Part Number

Type

Wavelength and Transmission Distance 1611 nm, 40 km 1471 nm, 80 km 1491 nm, 80 km 1511 nm, 80 km 1531 nm, 80 km 1551 nm, 80 km 1571 nm, 80 km 1591 nm, 80 km 1611 nm, 80 km

34060423 34060483 34060481 34060479 34060482 34060478 34060476 34060477 34060480 Single-fiber bidirectional GE module 34060475 1000BASE-BX-D

Transmit: 1490 nm; receive: 1310 nm 10 km

34060470

1000BASE-BX-U

Transmit: 1310 nm; receive: 1490 nm 10 km

34060540

1000BASE-BX-D

Transmit: 1490 nm; receive: 1310 nm 40 km

34060539

1000BASE-BX-U

Transmit: 1310 nm; receive: 1490 nm 40 km

Dual-fiber bidirectional FE module

34060287 34060276 34060281 34060282

100BASE-FX 100BASE-LX 100BASE-VX 100BASE-ZX 100BASE-BX-D

1310 nm, 2 km 1310 nm, 15 km 1310 nm, 40 km 1550 nm, 80 km Transmit: 1550 nm; receive: 1310 nm 15 km

Single-fiber bidirectional FE module

34060364

34060363

100BASE-BX-U

Transmit: 1310 nm; receive: 1550 nm 15 km

Electrical module

34100052

10/100/1000BASE-T (X)

-

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

117

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

NOTE

For the specifications for each type of optical module, see Table 3-94-Table 3-100 in 3.5.10 Technical Specifications.

3.5.9 Board Parameter Settings
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CSHD/CSHE.

Related References
A.1.2.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting A.10.2.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table A.10.2.11 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status A.11.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General A.11.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port A.11.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port A.11.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface A.10.4.5 Parameter Description: External Time Port_Basic Attributes A.10.4.6 Parameter Description: External Time Port_BMC A.10.4.7 Parameter Description: External Time Port_Cable Transmission Distance A.10.5 Parameter Description: Auxiliary Ports A.5.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes A.5.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control A.5.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes A.5.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Layer 3 Attributes A.5.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes A.5.8.1 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces A.5.10.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead A.5.10.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs A.5.9.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports A.5.10.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs A.5.1 Parameter Description: Working Modes of Ports A.5.2.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Basic Attributes A.5.2.2 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Advanced Attributes

3.5.10 Technical Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including the packet switching capacity, crossconnection capability, performance of Ethernet ports, E1 ports, clocks, and auxiliary ports, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

Packet Switching Capacity
The CSHD/CSHE supports a 4.4 Gbit/s packet switching capacity.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 118

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Cross-Connection Capability
The CSHD/CSHE supports full time division cross-connections (equivalent to 8x8 VC-4s) at the VC-12, VC-3, or VC-4 level.

Ethernet Port Performance
Ethernet port performance complies with IEEE 802.3. The following tables provide the specifications of FE/GE optical ports (supported only by the CSHD), GE electrical ports, and FE electrical ports.
NOTE

The OptiX RTN 910 uses SFP modules to provide GE optical interfaces. Users can use different types of SFP modules to provide GE optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.

Table 3-94 GE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional, short-distance transmission) Item Classification code Nominal wavelength (nm) Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) Fiber type Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength (nm) Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Performance 1000BASE-SX (0.5 km) 850 1000 Multi-mode 0.5 770 to 860 -9 to -3 -17 0 9.5 Single-mode 10 1270 to 1355 -9 to -3 -20 -3 9.5 1000BASE-LX (10 km) 1310

Table 3-95 GE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional, long-haul transmission) Item Classification code Nominal wavelength (nm) Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) Fiber type Performance 1000BASE-VX (40 km) 1310 1000 Single-mode 1000BASE-VX (40 km) 1550 1000 Single-mode 1000BASE-ZX (80 km) 1550 1000 Single-mode

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

119

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Item Classification code Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength (nm) Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)

Performance 1000BASE-VX (40 km) 40 1270 to 1350 -5 to 0 -23 -3 9 1000BASE-VX (40 km) 40 1480 to 1580 -5 to 0 -22 -3 9 1000BASE-ZX (80 km) 80 1500 to 1580 -2 to +5 -22 -3 9

Table 3-96 GE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional, CWDM) Item Classification code Nominal wavelength (nm) Performance 1000BASE-CWDM (40 km) l Channel 1: 1471 l Channel 2: 1491 l Channel 3: 1511 l Channel 4: 1531 l Channel 5: 1551 l Channel 6: 1571 l Channel 7: 1591 l Channel 8: 1611 Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) Fiber type Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength (nm) Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) 1000 Single-mode 40 Nominal wavelength ±6.5 0 to +5 -19 0 8.2 1000BASE-CWDM (80 km) l Channel 1: 1471 l Channel 2: 1491 l Channel 3: 1511 l Channel 4: 1531 l Channel 5: 1551 l Channel 6: 1571 l Channel 7: 1591 l Channel 8: 1611 1000 Single-mode 80 Nominal wavelength ±6.5 0 to +5 -28 -9 8.2

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

120

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-97 GE optical interface performance (single-fiber bidirectional) Item Performance 1000BASEBX-D (10 km) Nominal wavelength (nm) Tx: 1490 Rx: 1310 Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) Fiber type Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength (nm) 1000 Multi-mode 10 Tx: 1480 to 1500 Rx: 1260 to 1360 Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) -9 to -3 -19.5 -3 6 1000BASEBX-U (10km) Tx: 1310 Rx: 1490 1000 Multi-mode 10 Tx: 1260 to 1360 Rx: 1480 to 1500 -9 to -3 -19.5 -3 6 1000BASEBX-D (40 km) Tx: 1490 Rx: 1310 1000 Single-mode 40 Tx: 1260 to 1360 Rx: 1480 to 1500 -3 to +3 -23 -3 6 1000BASEBX-U (40km) Tx: 1310 Rx: 1490 1000 Single-mode 40 Tx: 1480 to 1500 Rx: 1260 to 1360 -3 to +3 -23 -3 6

Table 3-98 FE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional) Item Performance 100BASEFX (2 km) Nominal wavelength (nm) Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) Fiber type Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength (nm) Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) 1310 100 Single-mode 2 1270 to 1380 -19 to -14 -30 -14 100BASELX (15 km) 1310 100 Single-mode 15 1261 to 1360 -15 to -8 -28 -8 100BASEVX (40 km) 1310 100 Single-mode 40 1263 to 1360 -5 to 0 -34 -10 100BASEZX (80 km) 1550 100 Single-mode 80 1480 to 1580 -5 to 0 -34 -10

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

121

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Item

Performance 100BASEFX (2 km) 100BASELX (15 km) 8.2 100BASEVX (40 km) 10 100BASEZX (80 km) 10.5

Minimum extinction ratio (dB)

10

Table 3-99 FE optical interface performance (single-fiber bidirectional) Item Classification code Nominal wavelength (nm) Performance 100BASE-BX-D (15 km) Tx: 1550 Rx: 1310 Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) Fiber type Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength (nm) 100 Single-mode 15 Tx: 1480 to 1580 Rx: 1260 to 1360 Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) -15 to -8 -32 -8 8.5 100BASE-BX-U (15 km) Tx: 1310 Rx: 1550 100 Single-mode 15 Tx: 1260 to 1360 Rx: 1480 to 1580 -15 to -8 -32 -8 8.5

Table 3-100 GE electrical interface performance Item Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) Performance 10 (10BASE-T) 100 (100BASE-TX) 1000 (1000BASE-T) Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T) MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX) 4D-PAM5 encoding signal (1000BASE-T) Interface type RJ45

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

122

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-101 FE electrical interface performance Item Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) Performance 10 (10BASE-T) 100 (100BASE-TX) Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T) MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX) Interface type RJ45

E1 Interface Performance
Table 3-102 E1 interface performance Item Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Code pattern Impedance (ohm) Wire pair in each transmission direction Performance 2048 HDB3 75 One coaxial wire pair 120 One symmetrical wire pair

Orderwire Interface Performance
Table 3-103 Orderwire interface performance Item Transmission path Orderwire type Wire pair in each transmission direction Impedance (ohm) Performance Uses the E1 and E2 bytes in the SDH overhead or the Huaweidefined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame. Addressing call One symmetrical wire pair 600

NOTE

The OptiX RTN equipment also supports the orderwire group call function. For example, when OptiX RTN equipment calls 888, the orderwire group call number, all the OptiX RTN equipment orderwire phones in the orderwire subnet ring until a phone is answered. Then, a point-to-point orderwire phone call is established.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

123

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Synchronous Data Interface Performance
Table 3-104 Synchronous data interface performance Item Transmission path Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Interface type Interface characteristics Performance Uses the F1 byte in the SDH overhead or the Huawei-defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame. 64 Codirectional Meets the ITU-T G.703 standard.

Asynchronous Data Interface
Table 3-105 Asynchronous data interface performance Item Transmission path Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Interface characteristics Performance Uses the user-defined byte of the SDH overhead or the Huawei-defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame. ≤ 19.2 Meets the RS-232 standard.

Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance
Clock timing and synchronization performance meets related ITU-T Recommendations. Table 3-106 Clock timing and synchronization performance Item External synchronization source Frequency accuracy Pull-in and pull-out ranges Noise generation Noise tolerance Noise transfer Transient response and holdover performance Performance 2048 kbit/s (compliant with ITU-T G.703 §9), or 2048 kHz (compliant with ITU-T G.703 §13) Compliant with ITU-T G.813

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

124

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-107 Mechanical behavior Item Performance CSHD Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight CSHE

20.60 mm x 388.40 mm x 266.79 mm 1.00 kg 1.00 kg

Power Consumption
Power consumption of the CSHD: < 32.2 W Power consumption of the CSHE: < 31.7 W

3.6 IF1
The IF1 is a medium-capacity SDH IF board. The IF1 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.

3.6.1 Version Description
The functional version of the IF1 is SL91.

3.6.2 Functions and Features
The IF1 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. Table 3-108 lists the functions and features that the IF1 supports. Table 3-108 Functions and features that the IF1 supports Function and Feature Basic functions Description l Receives and transmits one IF signal. l Provides management channels to the ODU. l Supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. Radio type Radio work mode Protection 1+1 HSB/FD/ SD protection N+1 protection
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

TU/STM-1-based radio See Technical Specifications of the IF1. Supported Supported
125

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature SNCP License K byte pass-through Clock Clock source Clock protection

Description Supported Supports control on the air interface capacity by using the license file. Supported Clock at the air interface Supports the following clock protection schemes: l Protection based on clock source priorities l Protection by running the SSM protocol (supported only in SDH radio mode) l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol (supported only in SDH radio mode)

DCN

Inband DCN Outband DCN

Not supported l The PDH radio mode supports one DCC that is composed of one DCC byte if the capacity is less than 16xE1. l The PDH radio mode supports one DCC that is composed of three DCC bytes if the capacity is equal to or more than 16xE1. l The SDH radio mode supports one DCC that is composed of three DCC bytes, nine DCC bytes, or twelve DCC bytes.

OM

Loopback

Supports the following loopback types: l Inloops at IF ports l Outloops at IF ports l Inloops at composite ports l Outloops at composite ports

Warm reset and cold reset In-service FPGA loading Board manufacturing information query Board power consumption information query

Supported Supported Supported

Supported

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

126

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature Board temperature detection Board power detection

Description Supported

Supported

3.6.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
This section describes how to process one IF signal, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IF1.

Functional Block Diagram
Figure 3-40 Functional block diagram of the IF1
Backplane

SMODEM unit ODU control signal

HSM signal bus

Paired board

Logic processing unit

Service bus

MUX/DEMUX unit

IF processing unit

IF

Cross-connect unit System control and communication unit

Combiner Interface unit

Microwave MODEM unit frame signal

Overhead bus

Control bus

System control and communication unit Logic control unit

-48 V power supplied to the ODU +3.3 V power supplied to the other units on the board

Power supply unit

-48 V +3.3 V

Clock signal provided to the other units on the board

Clock unit

System clock signal

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

127

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Signal Processing in the Receive Direction
Table 3-109 Signal processing in the receive direction of the IF1 Step 1 2 Function Unit Combiner interface unit SMODEM unit Processing Flow Divides the received IF signals into ODU control signals and microwave service signals. l Demodulates ODU control signals. l Transmits the ODU control signals to the system control and communication unit. 3 IF processing unit l Controls the level of service signals through the automatic gain control (AGC) circuit. l Filters signals. l Performs A/D conversion. 4 MODEM unit l Performs digital demodulation. l Performs time domain adaptive equalization. l Performs FEC decoding and generates specific alarms.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

128

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Step 5

Function Unit MUX/DEMUX unit (for SDH microwave signal processing)

Processing Flow l Synchronizes frames and detects R_LOS and R_LOF alarms. l Performs descrambling. l Checks B1 and B2 bytes and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Checks link IDs and generates specific alarms. l Checks the M1 byte and bits 6-8 of the K2 byte, and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte and reports the SSM status to the system control and communication unit. l Detects changes in ATPC messages and returned microwave messages and reports the changes to the system control and communication unit over the control bus. l Extracts orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes including F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes, and transmits the overhead signal to the logic processing unit. l Extracts wayside service bytes to form another 2 Mbit/ s overhead signal and transmits the 2 Mbit/s overhead signal to the logic processing unit. l Adjusts AU pointers and generates specific performance events. l Checks higher order path overheads and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Transmits pointer indication signals and VC-4 signals to the logic processing unit.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

129

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Step

Function Unit MUX/DEMUX unit (for PDH microwave signal processing)

Processing Flow l Detects microwave frame headers in PDH radio mode and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames in PDH radio mode and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Checks link IDs in microwave frames in PDH radio mode and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Detects changes in ATPC messages and returned microwave messages in PDH radio mode and reports the changes to the system control and communication unit over the control bus. l Extracts orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes including F1 and SERIAL bytes, and DCC bytes in microwave frames in PDH radio mode and transmits the overhead signals to the logic processing unit. l Adjusts TU pointers. l Maps TU-12s in microwave frames in PDH radio mode to the specific positions in VC-4s.

6

Logic processing unit

l Processes clock signals. l Transmits overhead signals to the system control and communication unit. l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals to the cross-connect unit.

NOTE

In 1+1 FD/SD mode, the MUX/DEMUX unit transmits service signals over the HSM bus to the MUX/DEMUX unit of the paired board. The main MUX/DEMUX unit selects the higher quality signals for subsequent processing.

Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction
Table 3-110 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the IF1 Step 1 Function Unit Logic processing unit Processing Flow l Processes clock signals. l Demultiplexes 2 Mbit/s overhead signals from 8 Mbit/ s overhead signals. l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals from the cross-connect unit.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

130

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Step 2

Function Unit MUX/DEMUX unit (for SDH microwave signal processing)

Processing Flow l Sets higher order path overheads. l Sets AU pointers. l Sets multiplex section overhead bytes. l Sets regenerator section overhead bytes. l Performs scrambling.

MUX/DEMUX unit (for PDH microwave signal processing) 3 MODEM unit

l Demaps TU-12s from the VC-4 signals. l Sets the microwave frame overheads in PDH radio mode. l Performs FEC coding. l Performs digital modulation.

4

IF processing unit

l Performs D/A conversion. l Performs analog modulation.

5 6

SMODEM unit Combiner interface unit

Modulates the ODU control signals transmitted from the system control and communication unit. Combines the ODU control signals, microwave service signals, and -48 V power supplies and transmits the combined signals to the IF cable.

Control Signal Processing
The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication unit. The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board over the control bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to the CPU unit over the control bus. The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system control and communication unit.

Power Supply Unit
The power supply unit performs the following functions: l Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power supply bus in the backplane and supplies -48 V power to the ODU after performing DCDC conversion. Receives the +3.3 V power from the power supply bus in the backplane and supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board.

l

Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock signals to the other units on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 131

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

3.6.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, an IF port, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-41 Front panel of the IF1
ODU-PWR

IF1

-48V OUTPUT TURN OFF POWER BEFORE DISCONNECTING IF CABLE

I
PULL

O

Indicators
Table 3-111 Status explanation for indicators on the IF1 Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working properly. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board. SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) LINK On (green) On (red) ODU On (green) On (red) The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The radio link is normal. The radio link is faulty. The ODU is working properly. l The ODU is reporting critical or major alarms. l There is no power supplied to the ODU. On (yellow) The ODU is reporting minor alarms.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

STAT SRV LINK ODU RMT ACT

IF

WARNING

IF1

132

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Indicator

State Blinks on (yellow) and off at 300 ms intervals

Meaning The antennas are not aligned. The remote equipment is reporting defects. The remote equipment is free of defects. l In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the active one. l In an unprotected system, the board has been activated.

RMT

On (yellow) Off

ACT

On (green)

Off

l In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the standby one. l In an unprotected system, the board is not activated.

Ports
Table 3-112 Description of the Ports Port IF ODU-PWRa Description IF port ODU power switch Connector Type TNC Corresponding Cable IF jumperb -

NOTE

a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To turn on or turn off the switch, you need to first pull the switch lever slightly outwards. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is open. When the switch is set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed. b: A 5D IF cable is connected to an IF board; therefore, an IF jumper is not required.

Labels
There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance label on the front panel. The high temperature warning label indicates that the board surface temperature may exceed 70°C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55°C. If surface temperature reaches this level, you need to wear protective gloves before handling the board.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 133

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

The operation warning label indicates that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off before the IF cable is removed. The operation guidance label indicates that the switch must be pulled slightly outwards before the switch is set to the "I" or "O" position.

3.6.5 Valid Slots
The IF1 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the IF1 on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. Figure 3-42 Slots for the IF1 in the IDU chassis
Slot 5 (PIU) Slot 6 (FAN) Slot 3 (IF1) Slot 1 Slot 4 (IF1)

An ODU is not allocated a physical slot but it has a logical slot on the NMS. The logical slot number of the ODU is equal to the logical slot number of the IF board that is connected to the ODU plus 20. Figure 3-43 Logical slots of the IF1 on the NMS
Slot 23 (ODU) Slot 24 (ODU)

Slot 5 (PIU)

Slot 6 (FAN)

Slot 3 (IF1) Slot 1 Slot 10 Slot 7

Slot 4 (IF1) Slot 8 Slot 9

Table 3-113 Slot allocation Item Slot allocation priority Description Slot 3 > Slot 4

3.6.6 Board Parameter Settings
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IF1.

Related References
A.5.6.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute A.5.6.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute A.5.10.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 134

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

3.6.7 Technical Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including radio work modes, IF performance, modem performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

Radio Work Modes
Table 3-114 SDH/PDH microwave work modes (IF1 board) Service Capacity 4xE1 4xE1 8xE1 8xE1 16xE1 16xE1 22xE1 26xE1 35xE1 44xE1 53xE1 STM-1 Modulation Scheme QPSK 16QAM QPSK 16QAM QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM Channel Spacing (MHz) 7 3.5 14 (13.75) 7 28 (27.5) 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5)

NOTE

The channel spacings supported by the OptiX RTN 910 comply with ETSI standards. Channel spacings 3.5/7/14/28/40/56 MHz apply to most frequency bands; but channel spacings 3.5/7/13.75/27.5/40/55 MHz apply to the 18 GHz frequency band.

IF Performance
Table 3-115 IF performance Item IF signal Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) ODU O&M signal Modulation scheme Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Performance 350 140 ASK 5.5
135

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Item Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) Interface impedance (ohm)

Performance 10 50

Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem
Table 3-116 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem Item Encoding mode Performance l Reed-Solomon (RS) encoding for PDH microwave signals l Trellis-coded modulation (TCM) and RS two-level encoding for SDH microwave signals Adaptive timedomain equalizer for baseband signals Supported

Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-117 Mechanical behavior Item Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight Performance 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm 0.72 kg

Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 12 W

3.7 IFU2
The IFU2 is a universal IF board that supports the Integrated IP radio mode. The IFU2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.

3.7.1 Version Description
The functional version of the IFU2 is SL91.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

136

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

3.7.2 Functions and Features
The IFU2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. Table 3-118 lists the functions and features that the IFU2 supports. The IFU2 needs to work with the packet switching unit to implement Ethernet service functions. Table 3-118 Functions and features that the IFU2 supports Function and Feature Basic functions Description l Receives and transmits one IF signal. l Provides management channels to the ODU. l Supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. Radio type Integrated IP radio
NOTE The Integrated IP radio is compatible with the Hybrid radio and the Packet radio.

Service categories

Native E1 + Ethernet
NOTE Ethernet services can be native Ethernet services or packet services that are encapsulated into PWE3 packets.

AM E1 priority Radio work mode Protection 1+1 HSB/FD/ SD protection N+1 protection SNCP for TDM services License Air interface capacity license AM license Clock at the physical layer Clock source Clock protection

Supported Supported only in Integrated IP radio mode with native TDM services being E1 services See Technical Specifications of the IFU2. Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Clock at the air interface Supports the following clock protection schemes: l Protection based on clock source priorities l Protection by running the SSM protocol l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol

IEEE 1588v2 clock

Time synchronization

Supported

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

137

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature Frequency synchronization Clock mode DCN Inband DCN

Description Not supported Supports the OC mode and BC mode. Supported. The DCN bandwidth is configurable.

Outband DCN Ethernet service functions MPLS functions PWE3 functions OM Loopback

Supports one DCC that is composed of three DCC bytes. See Table 3-119. See the description of MPLS/PWE3 functions provided in the section for the system control, switching, and timing board. Supports the following loopback types: l Inloops and outloops at IF ports l Inloops and outloops at composite ports l Inloops at the MAC layer of IF_ETH ports
NOTE An IF_ETH port is an internal Ethernet port on the IF board operating in Integrated IP radio mode and is used to receive or transmit Ethernet services transmitted in Integrated IP radio mode.

Cold reset and warm reset In-service FPGA loading PRBS BER test at IF ports Board manufacturing information query Board power consumption information query Board temperature detection Board power detection

Supported Supported Supported Supported

Supported

Supported

Supported

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

138

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-119 Ethernet service functions that the IFU2 supports Function and Feature Ethernet services E-Line services Description Supports the following types of E-Line services: l E-Line services based on ports l E-Line services based on port+VLAN l E-Line services carried by QinQ links l E-Line services carried by PWs E-LAN services Supports the following types of E-LAN services: l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridges l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges ERPS OAM Supports the ERPS function that complies with ITU-T G.8032/Y.1344. l Supports IEEE 802.1ag-compliant ETH-OAM function. l Supports IEEE 802.3ah-compliant ETH-OAM function. l Supports the packet loss, delay, and delay variation monitoring function that complies with ITU-T Y. 1731. LAG Spanning tree protocol Supported Supports the MSTP protocol that generates only the CIST. The MSTP protocol provides functions equivalent to that of the RSTP protocol. See the description of QoS functions provided in the section for the system control, switching, and timing board. Supported

QoS

RMON

3.7.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
This section describes how to process one IF signal in Integrated IP radio mode, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IFU2.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

139

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Functional Block Diagram
Figure 3-44 Functional block diagram of the IFU2
Backplane SMODEM unit ODU control signal HSM signal bus Paired board Service bus

Cross-connect unit System control and communication unit

Logic processing unit

Overhead bus

MUX/DEMUX unit

IF processing unit

Combiner interface unit

IF

Microwave frame signal

MODEM unit

Ethernet processing unit

GE bus Packet switching unit

Control bus

System control and communication unit Logic control unit

-48 V power supplied to the ODU +3.3 V power supplied to the other units on the board +3.3 V power supplied to the monitoring circuit Clock signal provided to the other units on the board

Power supply unit

-48 V1 -48 V2 +3.3 V

Clock unit

System clock signal

Signal Processing in the Receive Direction
Table 3-120 Signal processing in the receive direction of the IFU2 Step 1 2 Function Unit Combiner interface unit SMODEM unit Processing Flow Divides the received IF signals into ODU control signals and microwave service signals. l Demodulates ODU control signals. l Transmits the ODU control signals to the system control and communication unit. 3 IF processing unit l Filters signals. l Performs A/D conversion.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

140

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Step 4

Function Unit MODEM unit

Processing Flow l Performs digital demodulation. l Performs time domain adaptive equalization. l Performs FEC decoding and generates specific alarms.

5

MUX/DEMUX unit

l Detects microwave frame headers in Integrated IP radio mode and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames in Integrated IP radio mode and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Checks link IDs in microwave frames in Integrated IP radio mode and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Detects changes in ATPC messages and returned microwave messages in Integrated IP radio mode and reports the changes to the system control and communication unit over the control bus. l Extracts auxiliary channel bytes including orderwire bytes, F1 and SERIAL bytes, SSM bytes, and DCC bytes in microwave frames and transmits the overhead signals to the logic processing unit. l Maps E1 service signals in Integrated IP radio mode to the specific positions in VC-4s and then transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit. l Extracts the Ethernet service signals from microwave frams and transmits to the Ethernet processing unit.

6

Ethernet processing unit

l Processes the GE signals received from the MUX/ DEMUX unit. l Sends the processed signals to the packet switching unit.

7

Logic processing unit

l Processes clock signals. l Transmits the overhead signals to the system control and communication unit. l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals to the cross-connect unit.

NOTE

In 1+1 FD/SD mode, the MUX/DEMUX unit transmits service signals over the HSM bus to the MUX/DEMUX unit of the paired board. The main MUX/DEMUX unit selects the higher quality signals for subsequent processing.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

141

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction
Table 3-121 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the IFU2 Step 1 Function Unit Logic processing unit Processing Flow l Processes clock signals. l Processes overhead signals. l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals from the cross-connect unit. 2 Ethernet processing unit MUX/DEMUX unit l Receives GE signal from the packet switching unit. l Processes GE signals. l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signals. l Sets the microwave frame overheads in Integrated IP radio mode. l Combines the E1 signals, Ethernet signals, and microwave frame overheads to form microwave frames. 4 MODEM unit l Performs FEC coding. l Performs digital modulation. 5 IF processing unit l Performs D/A conversion. l Performs analog modulation. l Filters signals. l Amplifies signals. 6 7 SMODEM unit Combiner interface unit Modulates the ODU control signals transmitted from the system control and communication unit. Combines the ODU control signals, microwave service signals, and -48 V power supplies and transmits the combined signals to the IF cable.

3

Control Signal Processing
The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication unit. The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board over the control bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to the CPU unit over the control bus. The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system control and communication unit.

Power Supply Unit
The power supply unit performs the following functions:
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 142

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

l

Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power supply bus in the backplane and supplies -48 V power to the ODU after performing DCDC conversion. Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power supply bus in the backplane and supplies +3.3 V power to the other units on the IFU2 after performing DC-DC conversion.

l

Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock signals to the other units on the board.

3.7.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, an IF port, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-45 Front panel of the IFU2
IFU2
-48V OUTPUT TURN OFF POWER BEFORE DISCONNECTING IF CABLE

I
PULL

O

Indicators
Table 3-122 Status explanation for indicators on the IFU2 Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working properly. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board. SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) LINK On (green) On (red) ODU
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The radio link is normal. The radio link is faulty. The ODU is working properly.
143

On (green)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

STAT SRV LINK ODU RMT ACT

IF

WARNING

IFU2

ODU-PWR

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Indicator

State On (red)

Meaning l The ODU is reporting critical or major alarms. l There is no power supplied to the ODU.

On (yellow) Blinks on (yellow) and off at 300 ms intervals RMT On (yellow) Off ACT On (green)

The ODU is reporting minor alarms. The antennas are not aligned.

The remote equipment is reporting defects. The remote equipment is free of defects. l In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the active one. l In an unprotected system, the board has been activated.

Off

l In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the standby one. l In an unprotected system, the board is not activated.

Ports
Table 3-123 Description of the Ports Port IF ODU-PWRa Description IF port ODU power switch Connector Type TNC Corresponding Cable IF jumperb -

NOTE

a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To turn on or turn off the switch, you need to first pull the switch lever slightly outwards. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is open. When the switch is set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed. b: A 5D IF cable is connected to an IF board; therefore, an IF jumper is not required.

Labels
There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance label on the front panel.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

144

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

The high temperature warning label indicates that the board surface temperature may exceed 70°C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55°C. If surface temperature reaches this level, you need to wear protective gloves before handling the board. The operation warning label indicates that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off before the IF cable is removed. The operation guidance label indicates that the switch must be pulled slightly outwards before the switch is set to the "I" or "O" position.

3.7.5 Valid Slots
The IFU2 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the IFU2 on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. Figure 3-46 Slots for the IFU2 in the IDU chassis
Slot 5 (PIU) Slot 6 (FAN) Slot 3 (IFU2) Slot 1 Slot 4 (IFU2)

An ODU is not allocated a physical slot but it has a logical slot on the NMS. The logical slot number of the ODU is equal to the logical slot number of the IF board that is connected to the ODU plus 20. Figure 3-47 Logical slots of the IFU2 on the NMS
Slot 23 (ODU) Slot 24 (ODU)

Slot 5 (PIU)

Slot 6 (FAN)

Slot 3 (IFU2) Slot 1 Slot 10 Slot 7

Slot 4 (IFU2) Slot 8 Slot 9

Table 3-124 Slot allocation Item Slot allocation priority Description Slot 3 > Slot 4

3.7.6 Board Parameter Settings
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFU2.

Related References
A.5.6.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 145

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

A.5.6.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute A.5.6.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid_AM Configuration_Advanced Attributes A.5.10.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs A.5.5.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes A.5.5.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes A.5.5.3 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 3 Attributes A.5.5.4 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes

3.7.7 Technical Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including radio work modes, IF performance, modem performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

Radio Work Modes
Table 3-125 Integrated IP microwave work modes (IFU2 board) Channel Spacing (MHz) Modulation Scheme Maximum Number of E1s in Hybrid Microwave 5 10 12 15 18 21 10 20 24 31 37 43 20 40 52 64 75 Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s) 9 to 12 20 to 24 24 to 29 31 to 37 37 to 44 43 to 51 20 to 23 41 to 48 50 to 59 65 to 76 77 to 90 90 to 104 41 to 48 82 to 97 108 to 125 130 to 150 160 to 180
146

7 7 7 7 7 7 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Channel Spacing (MHz)

Modulation Scheme

Maximum Number of E1s in Hybrid Microwave 75 40 75 75 75 75 75

Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s) 180 to 210 82 to 97 165 to 190 208 to 240 260 to 310 310 to 360 360 to 420

28 (27.5) 56 (55) 56 (55) 56 (55) 56 (55) 56 (55) 56 (55)

256QAM QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM

NOTE

For the integrated IP microwave work mode that the IFU2/IFX2 board supports: l The throughput specifications listed in the tables are based on untagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 1518 bytes l E1 services need to occupy the corresponding bandwidth of the air interface capacity. The bandwidth remaining after the E1 service capacity is subtracted from the air interface capacity can be provided for Ethernet services.

IF Performance
Table 3-126 IF performance Item IF signal Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) ODU O&M signal Modulation scheme Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) Interface impedance (ohm) Performance 350 140 ASK 5.5 10 50

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

147

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem
Table 3-127 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem Item Encoding mode Adaptive timedomain equalizer for baseband signals Performance LDPC encoding Supported

Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-128 Mechanical behavior Item Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight Performance 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm 0.79 kg

Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 23 W

3.8 IFX2
The IFX2 is a universal IF board that supports the XPIC function in Integrated IP radio mode. The IFX2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.

3.8.1 Version Description
The functional version of the IFX2 is SL91.

3.8.2 Functions and Features
The IFX2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. The IFX2 supports cross-polarization interference cancellation (XPIC) processing for IF signals. Table 3-129 lists the functions and features that the IFX2 supports.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

148

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-129 Functions and features that the IFX2 supports Function and Feature Basic functions Description l Receives and transmits one IF signal. l Provides management channels to the ODU. l Supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. Radio type Integrated IP radio
NOTE Integrated IP radio is compatible with Hybrid radio and Packet radio.

Service categories

Native E1 + Ethernet
NOTE Ethernet services can be Native Ethernet services or packet services that are encapsulated into PWE3 packets.

AM E1 priority XPIC Radio work mode Protection 1+1 HSB/FD/ SD protection N+1 protection SNCP for TDM services License Air interface capacity license AM license Clock at the physical layer Clock source Clock protection

Supported Supported only in Integrated IP radio mode, in which native TDM services are E1 services Supported See Technical Specifications of the IFX2. Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Clock at an air interface Supports the following clock protection schemes: l Protection based on clock source priorities l Protection by running the SSM protocol l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol

IEEE 1588v2

Time synchronization Frequency synchronization Clock mode

Supported Not supported Supports the OC mode and BC mode. Supported. The DCN bandwidth is configurable.

DCN

Inband DCN

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

149

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature Outband DCN Ethernet service features MPLS functions PWE3 functions OM Loopback

Description Supports one DCC that is composed of three DCC bytes. See Table 3-130. See the description of the MPLS/PWE3 functions that the system control, switching, and timing board supports. Supports the following loopback types: l Inloops and outloops at IF ports l Inloops and outloops at multiplexing ports l Inloops at the MAC layer of IF_ETH ports
NOTE An IF_ETH port is an internal Ethernet port on the IF board operating in Integrated IP radio mode and is used to receive or transmit Ethernet services transmitted in Integrated IP radio mode.

Cold reset and warm reset In-service FPGA loading PRBS BER test at IF ports Board manufacturing information query Board power consumption information query Board temperature detection Board voltage detection

Supported Supported Supported Supported

Supported

Supported

Supported

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

150

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-130 Ethernet service functions that the IFX2 supports Function and Feature Ethernet services E-Line services Description Supports the following types of E-Line services: l E-Line services based on ports l E-Line services based on port+VLAN l E-Line services carried by QinQ links l E-Line services carried by PWs E-LAN services Supports the following types of E-LAN services: l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridges l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges ERPS ETH-OAM Supports the ERPS function that complies with ITU-T G.8032/Y.1344. l Supports IEEE 802.1ag-compliant ETH-OAM function. l Supports IEEE 802.3ah-compliant ETH-OAM function. l Supports the packet loss, delay, and delay variation monitoring function that complies with ITU-T Y. 1731. LAG Spanning tree protocol Supported Supports the MSTP protocol that generates only the CIST. The MSTP protocol provides functions equivalent to that of the RSTP protocol. See the description of the QoS functions that the system control, switching, and timing board supports. Supported

QoS RMON

3.8.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
This section describes how to process one IF signal in Integrated IP radio mode, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IFX2.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

151

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Functional Block Diagram
Figure 3-48 Functional block diagram of the IFX2
Backplane SMODEM unit ODU control signal

HSM signal bus Paired board Service bus

Logic processing unit

Cross-connect unit System control and communication unit

MUX/DEMUX unit

IF processing unit

Combiner interface unit

IF

Microwave MODEM unit frame signal

Overhead bus

Ethernet processing unit

GE bus

Packet switching unit

Paired XPIC board

XPIC signal Control bus System control and communication unit Logic control unit

-48 V power supplied to the ODU +3.3 V power supplied to the other units on the board +3.3 V power supplied to the monitoring circuit Clock signal provided to the other units on the board

Power supply unit

-48 V1 -48 V2 +3.3 V

Clock unit

System clock signal

Signal Processing in the Receive Direction
Table 3-131 Signal processing in the receive direction of the IFX2 Step 1 2 Function Unit Combiner interface unit SMODEM unit Processing Flow Divides the received IF signals into ODU control signals and microwave service signals. l Demodulates ODU control signals. l Transmits the ODU control signals to the system control and communication unit.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

152

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Step 3

Function Unit IF processing unit

Processing Flow l Filters the received signals and splits the signals to two channels of signals. – Performs A/D conversion for one channel of filtered signals and transmits the converted signals to the MODEM unit. – Outputs the other channel of filtered signals as the XPIC signals. l Performs A/D conversion for XPIC signals transmitted from the paired IFX2 and transmits the converted signals to the MODEM unit.

4

MODEM unit

l Performs digital demodulation by using XPIC IF signals transmitted from the paired IFX2 as reference signals. l Performs XPIC operations for IF signals. l Performs time domain adaptive equalization. l Performs FEC decoding and generates specific alarms.

5

MUX/DEMUX unit

l Detects microwave frame headers in Integrated IP radio mode and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames in Integrated IP radio mode and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Checks link IDs in microwave frames in Integrated IP radio mode and generates specific alarms. l Detects changes in ATPC messages and returned microwave messages in Integrated IP radio mode and reports the changes to the system control and communication unit over the control bus. l Extracts orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes including F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, and SSM bytes in microwave frames in Integrated IP radio mode and transmits the overhead signal to the logic processing unit. l Maps E1 service signals in Integrated IP radio mode to the specific positions in VC-4s and then transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit. l Extracts the Ethernet service signals from microwave frames in Integrated IP radio mode and transmits to the Ethernet processing unit.

6

Ethernet processing unit

l Processes the GE signals received from the MUX/ DEMUX unit. l Sends the processed signals to the packet switching unit.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

153

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Step 7

Function Unit Logic processing unit

Processing Flow l Processes clock signals. l Transmits the overhead signals to the system control and communication unit. l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals to the cross-connect unit.

NOTE

In 1+1 FD/SD mode, the MUX/DEMUX unit transmits service signals over the HSM bus to the MUX/DEMUX unit of the paired board. The main MUX/DEMUX unit selects the higher quality signals for subsequent processing.

Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction
Table 3-132 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the IFX2 Step 1 Function Unit Logic processing unit Processing Flow l Processes clock signals. l Processes overhead signals. l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals from the cross-connect unit. 2 Ethernet processing unit MUX/DEMUX unit l Receives GE signals from the packet switching unit. l Processes GE signals. l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signals. l Sets the microwave frame overheads in Integrated IP radio mode. l Combines the E1 signals, Ethernet signals and microwave frame overheads to form microwave frames. 4 MODEM unit l Performs FEC coding. l Performs digital modulation. 5 IF processing unit l Performs D/A conversion. l Performs analog modulation. l Filters signals. l Amplifies signals. 6 7 SMODEM unit Combiner interface unit Modulates the ODU control signals transmitted from the system control and communication unit. Combines the ODU control signals, microwave service signals, and -48 V power supplies and transmits the combined signals to the IF cable.

3

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

154

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Control Signal Processing
The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication unit. The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board over the control bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to the CPU unit over the control bus. The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system control and communication unit.

Power Supply Unit
The power supply unit performs the following functions: l Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power supply bus in the backplane and supplies -48 V power to the ODU after performing DCDC conversion. Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power supply bus in the backplane and supplies +3.3 V power to the other units on the IFX2 after performing DC-DC conversion.

l

Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock signals to the other units on the board.

3.8.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, an IF port, XPIC signal ports, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-49 Front panel of the IFX2
IFX2

-48V OUTPUT TURN OFF POWER BEFORE DISCONNECTING IF CABLE

PULL

I
X-IN X-OUT

O

Indicators
Table 3-133 Status explanation for indicators on the IFX2 Indicator XPIC State On (green) On (red)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Meaning The XPIC input signal is normal. The XPIC input signal is lost.
155

XPIC STAT SRV LINK ODU RMT ACT

IF

WARNING

IFX2

ODU-PWR

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Indicator

State Off

Meaning The XPIC function is disabled. The board is working properly. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board.

STAT

On (green) On (red) Off

SRV

On (green) On (red) On (yellow)

The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The radio link is normal. The radio link is faulty. The ODU is working properly. l The ODU is reporting critical or major alarms. l There is no power supplied to the ODU.

LINK

On (green) On (red)

ODU

On (green) On (red)

On (yellow) Blinks on (yellow) and off at 300 ms intervals RMT On (yellow) Off ACT On (green)

The ODU is reporting minor alarms. The antennas are not aligned. The remote equipment is reporting defects. The remote equipment is free of defects. l In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the active one. l In an unprotected system, the board has been activated.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

156

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Indicator

State Off

Meaning l In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the standby one. l In an unprotected system, the board is not activated.

Ports
Table 3-134 Description of the ports Port IF ODU-PWRa X-IN X-OUT Description IF port ODU power switch XPIC signal input port XPIC signal output port Connector Type TNC SMA SMA Corresponding Cable IF jumperb XPIC cable

NOTE

a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To turn on or turn off the switch, you need to first pull the switch lever slightly outwards. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is open. When the switch is set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed. b: A 5D IF cable is connected to an IF board; therefore, an IF jumper is not required.

Labels
There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance label on the front panel. The high temperature warning label indicates that the board surface temperature may exceed 70°C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55°C. If surface temperature reaches this level, you need to wear protective gloves before handling the board. The operation warning label indicates that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off before the IF cable is removed. The operation guidance label indicates that the switch must be pulled slightly outwards before the switch is set to the "I" or "O" position.

3.8.5 Valid Slots
The IFX2 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the IFX2 on the NMS are the same as the physical slots.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 157

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Figure 3-50 Slots for the IFX2 in the IDU chassis
Slot 5 (PIU) Slot 6 (FAN) Slot 3 (IFX2) Slot 1 Slot 4 (IFX2)

An ODU is not allocated a physical slot but it has a logical slot on the NMS. The logical slot number of the ODU is equal to the logical slot number of the IF board that is connected to the ODU plus 20. Figure 3-51 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IFX2
Slot 23 (ODU) Slot 24 (ODU)

Slot 5 (PIU)

Slot 6 (FAN)

Slot 3 (IFX2) Slot 1 Slot 10 Slot 7

Slot 4 (IFX2) Slot 8 Slot 9

Table 3-135 Slot allocation Item Slot allocation priority Description Slot 3 > Slot 4

NOTE

One IFX2 pair must be installed on the same row or adjacently in the same column.

3.8.6 Board Parameter Settings
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFX2.

Related References
A.5.6.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute A.5.6.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute A.5.6.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid_AM Configuration_Advanced Attributes A.5.10.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs A.5.5.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes A.5.5.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes A.5.5.3 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 3 Attributes A.5.5.4 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 158

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

3.8.7 Technical Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including radio work modes, IF performance, modem performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

Radio Work Modes
Table 3-136 Integrated IP microwave work modes (IFX2 board) Channel Spacing (MHz) Modulation Scheme Maximum Number of E1s in Hybrid Microwave 4 9 11 14 9 19 24 30 36 19 40 49 63 75 75 39 75 75 75 75 75 Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s) 9 to 11 19 to 23 24 to 29 31 to 36 20 to 23 40 to 47 50 to 59 63 to 73 75 to 88 41 to 48 84 to 97 103 to 120 130 to 150 160 to 180 180 to 210 83 to 97 165 to 190 210 to 245 260 to 305 310 to 360 360 to 410

7 7 7 7 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 56 (55) 56 (55) 56 (55) 56 (55) 56 (55) 56 (55)

QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAMa QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAMa QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

159

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Channel Spacing (MHz)

Modulation Scheme

Maximum Number of E1s in Hybrid Microwave

Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s)

NOTE For the IFX2 board, the microwave work modes are the same regardless of whether the XPIC function is enabled or disabled. a: When the XPIC function is enabled for the IFX2 board, the 64QAM/7MHz and 128QAM/14MHz modulation schemes do not apply to ODUs whose frequency band ranges from 26 GHz to 38 GHz.

NOTE

For the integrated IP microwave work mode that the IFU2/IFX2 board supports: l The throughput specifications listed in the tables are based on untagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 1518 bytes l E1 services need to occupy the corresponding bandwidth of the air interface capacity. The bandwidth remaining after the E1 service capacity is subtracted from the air interface capacity can be provided for Ethernet services.

IF Performance
Table 3-137 IF performance Item IF signal Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) ODU O&M signal Modulation scheme Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) Interface impedance (ohm) Performance 350 140 ASK 5.5 10 50

Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem
Table 3-138 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem Item Encoding mode Adaptive timedomain equalizer for baseband signals Performance LDPC encoding Supported

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

160

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-139 Mechanical behavior Item Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight Performance 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm 0.80 kg

Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 33 W

3.9 ISU2
The ISU2 is a universal IF board that supports the Integrated IP radio mode and SDH radio mode at the same time. The ISU2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.

3.9.1 Version Description
The functional version of the ISU2 is SL91.

3.9.2 Functions and Features
The ISU2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. Table 3-140 lists the functions and features that the ISU2 supports. The ISU2 needs to work with the packet switching unit to implement Ethernet service functions. Table 3-140 Functions and features Function and Feature Basic functions Description l Receives and transmits one IF signal. l Provides management channels to the ODU. l Supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. Radio type l Integrated IP radio l SDH radio
NOTE The Integrated IP radio is compatible with the Hybrid radio and the Packet radio.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

161

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature Service categories in Integrated IP radio mode

Description l Native E1 + Ethernet l Native STM-1 + Ethernet
NOTE Ethernet services can be native Ethernet services or packet services that are encapsulated into PWE3 packets.

Service categories in SDH radio mode AM Ethernet frame header compression E1 priority Radio work mode Link-level protection 1+1 HSB/FD/ SD protection N+1 protection LAG protection at air interfaces TDM service protection K byte pass-through PLA Ethernet service functions MPLS functions PWE3 functions License Air interface capacity license AM license Clock at the physical layer Clock source Clock protection

l STM-1 l 2xSTM-1 Supported only in Integrated IP radio mode Supported Supported only in Integrated IP radio mode with native TDM services being E1 services See Technical Specifications of the ISU2. Supported Supported Supported SNCP Supported Supported See Table 3-141. See the description of MPLS/PWE3 functions provided in the section for the system control, switching, and timing board. Supported Supported Clock at the air interface Supports the following clock protection schemes: l Protection based on clock source priorities l Protection by running the SSM protocol l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol

IEEE 1588v2 clock

Time synchronization Frequency synchronization

Supported Not supported

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

162

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature Clock mode DCN Inband DCN Outband DCN

Description Supports the OC mode and BC mode. Supported l Supports one DCC that is composed of three DCC bytes for each channel in Integrated IP radio mode. l Supports one DCC that is composed of D1-D3 bytes, D4-D12 bytes, or D1-D12 bytes, for each channel in SDH radio mode.

OM

Loopback

Supports the following loopback types: l Inloops and outloops at IF ports l Inloops and outloops at composite ports

Cold reset and warm reset In-service FPGA loading PRBS BER test at IF ports Board manufacturing information query Board power consumption information query Board temperature detection Board power detection

Supported Supported Supported Supported

Supported

Supported

Supported

Table 3-141 Ethernet service functions Function and Feature Ethernet services E-Line services Description Supports the following types of E-Line services: l E-Line services based on ports l E-Line services based on port+VLAN l E-Line services carried by QinQ links l E-Line services carried by PWs

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

163

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature E-LAN services

Description Supports the following types of E-LAN services: l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridges l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges

ERPS OAM

Supports the ERPS function that complies with ITU-T G.8032/Y.1344. l Supports IEEE 802.1ag-compliant ETH-OAM function. l Supports IEEE 802.3ah-compliant ETH-OAM function. l Supports the packet loss, delay, and delay variation monitoring function that complies with ITU-T Y. 1731.

LAG Spanning tree protocol

Supported Supports the MSTP protocol that generates only the CIST. The MSTP protocol provides functions equivalent to that of the RSTP protocol. See the description of QoS functions provided in the section for the system control, switching, and timing board. Supported

QoS

RMON

3.9.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
This section describes how to process one IF signal in Integrated IP radio mode, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the ISU2.
NOTE

The ISU2 adopts the same principle to process signals transmitted/received in Integrated IP radio mode and signals transmitted/received in SDH radio mode. The difference is with regard to the microwave frame structure and processed service categories.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

164

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Functional Block Diagram
Figure 3-52 Functional block diagram of the ISU2
Backplane SMODEM unit ODU control signal HSM signal bus Paired board

Service bus

Logic processing unit

Cross-connect unit System control and communication unit

MUX/DEMUX unit

Overhead bus

MODEM unit

IF processing unit

Combiner interface unit

IF

Microwave frame signal

Ethernet processing unit

GE bus

Packet switching unit

Control bus

System control and communication unit Logic control unit

-48 V power supplied to the ODU +3.3 V power supplied to the other units on the board +3.3 V power supplied to the monitoring circuit Clock signal provided to the other units on the board

Power supply unit

-48 V1 -48 V2 +3.3 V

Clock unit

System clock signal

Signal Processing in the Receive Direction
Table 3-142 Signal processing in the receive direction of the ISU2 Step 1 2 Function Unit Combiner interface unit SMODEM unit Processing Flow Divides the received IF signals into ODU control signals and microwave service signals. l Demodulates ODU control signals. l Transmits the ODU control signals to the system control and communication unit. 3 IF processing unit l Filters signals. l Performs A/D conversion. 4 MODEM unit l Performs digital demodulation. l Performs time domain adaptive equalization. l Performs FEC decoding and generates specific alarms.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 165

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Step 5

Function Unit MUX/DEMUX unit

Processing Flow l Detects microwave frame headers and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Checks link IDs in microwave frames and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Detects changes in ATPC messages and returned microwave messages and reports the changes to the system control and communication unit over the control bus. l Extracts orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes including F1 and SERIAL bytes, and DCC bytes in microwave frames and transmits to the logic processing unit. l Maps E1 service signals to the specific positions in VC-4s and then transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit, if native TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are E1 services. l Demaps VC-4s from STM-1 service signals and then transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit, if native TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are STM-1 services. l Extracts the Ethernet service signals from microwave frams and transmits to the Ethernet processing unit.

6

Ethernet processing unit

l Processes the GE signals received from the MUX/ DEMUX unit. l Sends the processed signals to the packet switching unit.

7

Logic processing unit

l Processes clock signals. l Transmits the overhead signals to the system control and communication unit. l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals to the cross-connect unit.

NOTE

In 1+1 FD/SD mode, the MUX/DEMUX unit transmits service signals over the HSM bus to the MUX/DEMUX unit of the paired board. The main MUX/DEMUX unit selects the higher quality signals for subsequent processing.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

166

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction
Table 3-143 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the ISU2 Step 1 Function Unit Logic processing unit Processing Flow l Processes clock signals. l Processes overhead signals. l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals from the cross-connect unit. 2 Ethernet processing unit MUX/DEMUX unit l Receives GE signals from the packet switching unit. l Processes GE signals. l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signals that are from the logic processing unit, if native TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are E1 services. l Adds overheads to the VC-4 signals that are from the logic processing unit to form STM-1 signals, if native TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are STM-1 services. l Sets microwave frame overheads. l Combines the E1/STM-1 signals, Ethernet signals, and microwave frame overheads to form microwave frames. 4 MODEM unit l Performs FEC coding. l Performs digital modulation. 6 IF processing unit l Performs D/A conversion. l Performs analog modulation. l Filters signals. l Amplifies signals. 7 8 SMODEM unit Combiner interface unit Modulates the ODU control signals transmitted from the system control and communication unit. Combines the ODU control signals, microwave service signals, and -48 V power supplies and transmits the combined signals to the IF cable.

3

Control Signal Processing
The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication unit. The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board over the control bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to the CPU unit over the control bus. The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system control and communication unit.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 167

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Power Supply Unit
The power supply unit performs the following functions: l Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power supply bus in the backplane and supplies -48 V power to the ODU after performing DCDC conversion. Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power supply bus in the backplane and supplies +3.3 V power to the other units on the ISU2 after performing DC-DC conversion.

l

Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock signals to the other units on the board.

3.9.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, an IF port, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-53 Front panel of the ISU2
ISU2

-48V OUTPUT TURN OFF POWER BEFORE DISCONNECTING IF CABLE

PULL

I

O

Indicators
Table 3-144 Status explanation for indicators on the ISU2 Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working properly. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board. SRV On (green) On (red) The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services.
168

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

STAT SRV LINK ODU RMT ACT

IF

WARNING

ISU2

ODU-PWR

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Indicator

State On (yellow)

Meaning A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The radio link is normal. The radio link is faulty. The ODU is working properly. l The ODU is reporting critical or major alarms. l There is no power supplied to the ODU.

LINK

On (green) On (red)

ODU

On (green) On (red)

On (yellow) Blinks on (yellow) and off at 300 ms intervals RMT On (yellow) Off ACT On (green)

The ODU is reporting minor alarms. The antennas are not aligned. The remote equipment is reporting defects. The remote equipment is free of defects. l In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the active one. l In an unprotected system, the board has been activated.

Off

l In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the standby one. l In an unprotected system, the board is not activated.

Ports
Table 3-145 Description of the Ports Port IF ODU-PWRa Description IF port ODU power switch Connector Type TNC Corresponding Cable IF jumperb -

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

169

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
NOTE

3 Boards

a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To turn on or turn off the switch, you need to first pull the switch lever slightly outwards. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is open. When the switch is set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed. b: A 5D IF cable is connected to an IF board; therefore, an IF jumper is not required.

Labels
There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance label on the front panel. The high temperature warning label indicates that the board surface temperature may exceed 70°C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55°C. If surface temperature reaches this level, you need to wear protective gloves before handling the board. The operation warning label indicates that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off before the IF cable is removed. The operation guidance label indicates that the switch must be pulled slightly outwards before the switch is set to the "I" or "O" position.

3.9.5 Valid Slots
The ISU2 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the ISU2 on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. Figure 3-54 Slots for the ISU2 in the IDU chassis
Slot 5 (PIU) Slot 6 (FAN) Slot 3 (ISU2) Slot 1 Slot 4 (ISU2)

An ODU is not allocated a physical slot but it has a logical slot on the NMS. The logical slot number of the ODU is equal to the logical slot number of the IF board that is connected to the ODU plus 20. Figure 3-55 Logical slots of the ISU2 on the NMS
Slot 23 (ODU) Slot 24 (ODU)

Slot 5 (PIU)

Slot 6 (FAN)

Slot 3 (ISU2) Slot 1 Slot 10 Slot 7

Slot 4 (ISU2) Slot 8 Slot 9

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

170

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-146 Slot allocation Item Slot allocation priority Description Slot 3 > Slot 4

3.9.6 Board Parameter Settings
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the ISU2.

Related References
A.5.6.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute A.5.6.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute A.5.6.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid_AM Configuration_Advanced Attributes A.5.10.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs A.5.10.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs A.5.5.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes A.5.5.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes A.5.5.3 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 3 Attributes A.5.5.4 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes

3.9.7 Technical Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including radio work modes, IF performance, modem performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

Radio Work Modes
Table 3-147 SDH microwave work modes (ISU2 board) Service Capacity STM-1 2xSTM-1 Modulation Scheme 128QAM 128QAM Channel Spacing (MHz) 28 (27.5) 56 (55)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

171

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-148 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISU2 board, Native E1 + Ethernet service) Channel Spacing (MHz) Modulation Scheme Maximum Number of E1s in Hybrid Microwave Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s) Without Compressio n With L2 Frame Header Compressio n 4 to 6 9 to 13 10 to 15 20 to 30 25 to 36 31 to 47 37 to 56 41 to 62 20 to 31 41 to 61 51 to 77 65 to 96 76 to 113 87 to 131 41 to 62 82 to 124 107 to 161 131 to 198 155 to 233 181 to 272 56 to 84 114 to 172 147 to 221 181 to 272 215 to 323 249 to 375 With L2+L3 Frame Header Compressio n (IPv4) 4 to 6 9 to 13 10 to 22 20 to 44 25 to 54 31 to 67 37 to 80 41 to 90 20 to 44 41 to 89 51 to 110 65 to 140 76 to 165 87 to 189 41 to 89 82 to 178 107 to 230 131 to 283 155 to 333 181 to 388 56 to 122 114 to 247 147 to 318 181 to 388 215 to 456 249 to 538 With L2+L3 Frame Header Compressio n (IPv6) 4 to 10 9 to 20 10 to 33 20 to 66 25 to 80 31 to 100 37 to 119 42 to 134 20 to 66 41 to 132 51 to 164 65 to 209 76 to 245 88 to 281 41 to 132 83 to 265 107 to 343 132 to 424 156 to 495 182 to 577 57 to 182 114 to 366 148 to 474 182 to 583 216 to 691 251 to 800

3.5 3.5 7 7 7 7 7 7 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 40 40 40 40 40 40

QPSK 16QAM QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM

2 4 5 10 12 15 18 20 10 20 24 31 37 42 20 40 52 64 75 75 27 55 71 75 75 75

4 to 5 9 to 11 10 to 13 20 to 26 25 to 32 31 to 40 37 to 47 41 to 53 20 to 26 41 to 52 51 to 65 65 to 83 76 to 97 87 to 111 41 to 52 82 to 105 107 to 136 131 to 168 155 to 198 181 to 230 56 to 72 114 to 145 147 to 187 181 to 230 215 to 272 249 to 318

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

172

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Channel Spacing (MHz)

Modulation Scheme

Maximum Number of E1s in Hybrid Microwave

Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s) Without Compressio n With L2 Frame Header Compressio n 82 to 124 166 to 250 206 to 308 262 to 388 309 to 466 360 to 538 With L2+L3 Frame Header Compressio n (IPv4) 82 to 178 165 to 356 206 to 437 262 to 567 309 to 656 360 to 777 With L2+L3 Frame Header Compressio n (IPv6) 83 to 265 167 to 533 207 to 659 264 to 836 311 to 983 362 to 1000

56 (55) 56 (55) 56 (55) 56 (55) 56 (55) 56 (55)

QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM

40 75 75 75 75 75

82 to 105 166 to 212 206 to 262 262 to 333 309 to 396 360 to 456

Table 3-149 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISU2 board, Native STM-1 + Ethernet service) Channel Spacing (MHz) Modulation Scheme Number of STM-1 Services in Hybrid Microwave Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s) Without Compressio n With L2 Frame Header Compressio n 155 to 233 181 to 272 181 to 272 215 to 323 249 to 375 166 to 250 206 to 308 262 to 388 309 to 466 360 to 538 With L2+L3 Frame Header Compressio n (IPv4) 155 to 333 181 to 388 181 to 388 215 to 456 249 to 538 165 to 356 206 to 437 262 to 567 309 to 656 360 to 777 With L2+L3 Frame Header Compressio n (IPv6) 156 to 495 182 to 577 182 to 583 216 to 691 251 to 800 167 to 533 207 to 659 264 to 836 311 to 983 362 to 1000

28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 40 40 40 56 (55) 56 (55) 56 (55) 56 (55) 56 (55)

128QAM 256QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

155 to 198 181 to 230 181 to 230 215 to 272 249 to 318 166 to 212 206 to 262 262 to 333 309 to 396 360 to 456

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

173

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
NOTE

3 Boards

For the integrated IP microwave work mode that the ISU2/ISX2 board supports: l The throughput specifications listed in the tables are based on the following conditions. l Without compression: untagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes l With L2 frame header compression: untagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes l With L2+L3 frame header compression (IPv4): untagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes l With L2+L3 frame header compression (IPv6): S-tagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from 92 bytes to 9600 bytes l E1/STM-1 services need to occupy the corresponding bandwidth of the air interface capacity. The bandwidth remaining after the E1/STM-1 service capacity is subtracted from the air interface capacity can be provided for Ethernet services.

IF Performance
Table 3-150 IF performance Item IF signal Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) ODU O&M signal Modulation scheme Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) Interface impedance (ohm) Performance 350 140 ASK 5.5 10 50

Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem
Table 3-151 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem Item Encoding mode Adaptive timedomain equalizer for baseband signals Performance LDPC encoding Supported

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

174

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-152 Mechanical behavior Item Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight Performance 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm 0.60 kg

Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 22 W

3.10 ISX2
The ISX2 is a universal XPIC IF board and provides the XPIC function for signals transmitted/ received in Integrated IP radio mode and SDH radio mode. The ISX2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.

3.10.1 Version Description
The functional version of the ISX2 is SL91.

3.10.2 Functions and Features
The ISX2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. In addition, the ISX2 provides the crosspolarization interference cancellation (XPIC) function for IF signals by transmitting/receiving XPIC reference signals. Table 3-153 lists the functions and features that the ISX2 supports. The ISX2 needs to work with the packet switching unit to implement Ethernet service functions and packet service functions. Table 3-153 Functions and features Function and Feature Basic functions Description l Receives and transmits one IF signal. l Provides management channels to the ODU. l Supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. Radio type l Integrated IP radio l SDH radio
NOTE The integrated IP radio is compatible with the Hybrid radio and the Packet radio.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

175

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature Service categories in Integrated IP radio mode

Description l Native E1 + Ethernet l Native STM-1 + Ethernet
NOTE Ethernet services can be native Ethernet services or packet services that are encapsulated into PWE3 packets.

Service categories in SDH radio mode AM Ethernet frame header compression E1 priority XPIC Radio work mode Link-level protection 1+1 HSB/FD/ SD protection N+1 protection LAG protection at air interfaces TDM service protection K byte pass-through PLA Ethernet service functions MPLS functions PWE3 functions License Air interface capacity license AM license Clock at the physical layer Clock source Clock protection

l STM-1 l 2xSTM-1 Supported only in integrated IP radio mode Supported Supported only in integrated IP radio mode with native TDM services being E1 services Supported See Technical Specifications of the ISX2. Supported Supported Supported SNCP Supported Supported See Table 3-154. See the description of MPLS/PWE3 functions provided in the section for the system control, switching, and timing board. Supported Supported Clock at the air interface Supports the following clock protection schemes: l Protection based on clock source priorities l Protection by running the SSM protocol l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol

IEEE 1588v2 clock

Time synchronization

Supported

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

176

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature Frequency synchronization Clock mode DCN Inband DCN Outband DCN

Description Not supported Supports the OC mode and BC mode. Supported l Supports one DCC that is composed of three DCC bytes for each channel in Integrated IP radio mode. l Supports one DCC that is composed of D1-D3 bytes, D4-D12 bytes, or D1-D12 bytes, for each channel in SDH radio mode.

OM

Loopback

Supports the following loopback types: l Inloops and outloops at IF ports l Inloops and outloops at composite ports

Cold reset and warm reset In-service FPGA loading PRBS BER test at IF ports Board manufacturing information query Board power consumption information query Board temperature detection Board power detection

Supported Supported Supported Supported

Supported

Supported

Supported

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

177

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-154 Ethernet service functions Function and Feature Ethernet services E-Line services Description Supports the following types of E-Line services: l E-Line services based on ports l E-Line services based on port+VLAN l E-Line services carried by QinQ links l E-Line services carried by PWs E-LAN services Supports the following types of E-LAN services: l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridges l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges ERPS OAM Supports the ERPS function that complies with ITU-T G.8032/Y.1344. l Supports IEEE 802.1ag-compliant ETH-OAM function. l Supports IEEE 802.3ah-compliant ETH-OAM function. l Supports the packet loss, delay, and delay variation monitoring function that complies with ITU-T Y. 1731. LAG Spanning tree protocol Supported Supports the MSTP protocol that generates only the CIST. The MSTP protocol provides functions equivalent to that of the RSTP protocol. See the description of QoS functions provided in the section for the system control, switching, and timing board. Supported

QoS

RMON

3.10.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
This section describes how to process one IF signal in Integrated IP radio mode, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the ISX2.
NOTE

The ISX2 adopts the same principle to process signals transmitted/received in Integrated IP radio mode and signals transmitted/received in SDH radio mode. The difference is with regard to the microwave frame structure and processed service types.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

178

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Functional Block Diagram
Figure 3-56 Functional block diagram of the ISX2
Backplane SMODEM unit ODU control signal

HSM signal bus Paired board Service bus

Logic processing unit

Cross-connect unit System control and communication unit

MUX/DEMUX unit

IF processing unit

Combiner interface unit

IF

Microwave MODEM unit frame signal

Overhead bus

Ethernet processing unit

GE bus

Packet switching unit

Paired XPIC board

XPIC signal Control bus System control and communication unit Logic control unit

-48 V power supplied to the ODU +3.3 V power supplied to the other units on the board +3.3 V power supplied to the monitoring circuit Clock signal provided to the other units on the board

Power supply unit

-48 V1 -48 V2 +3.3 V

Clock unit

System clock signal

Signal Processing in the Receive Direction
Table 3-155 Signal processing in the receive direction of the ISX2 Step 1 2 Function Unit Combiner interface unit SMODEM unit Processing Flow Divides the received IF signals into ODU control signals and microwave service signals. l Demodulates ODU control signals. l Transmits the ODU control signals to the system control and communication unit.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

179

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Step 3

Function Unit IF processing unit

Processing Flow l Filters the received signals and splits the signals to two channels of signals. – Performs A/D conversion for one channel of filtered signals and transmits the converted signals to the MODEM unit. – Outputs the other channel of filtered signals as the XPIC signals. l Performs A/D conversion for XPIC signals transmitted from the paired ISX2 and transmits the converted signals to the MODEM unit.

4

MODEM unit

l Performs digital demodulation by using XPIC IF signals transmitted from the paired ISX2 as reference signals. l Performs XPIC operations for IF signals. l Performs time domain adaptive equalization. l Performs FEC decoding and generates specific alarms.

5

MUX/DEMUX unit

l Detects microwave frame headers and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Checks link IDs in microwave frames and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Detects changes in ATPC messages and returned microwave messages and reports the changes to the system control and communication unit over the control bus. l Extracts auxiliary channel bytes including orderwire bytes, F1 and SERIAL bytes, and DCC bytes in microwave frames and transmits to the logic processing unit. l Maps E1 service signals to the specific positions in VC-4s and then transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit, if native TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are E1 services. l Demaps VC-4s from STM-1 service signals and then transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit, if native TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are STM-1 services. l Extracts the Ethernet service signals from microwave frams and transmits to the Ethernet processing unit.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

180

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Step 6

Function Unit Ethernet processing unit

Processing Flow l Processes the GE signals received from the MUX/ DEMUX unit. l Sends the processed signals to the packet switching unit.

7

Logic processing unit

l Processes clock signals. l Transmits the overhead signals to the system control and communication unit. l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals to the cross-connect unit.

NOTE

In 1+1 FD/SD mode, the MUX/DEMUX unit transmits service signals over the HSM bus to the MUX/DEMUX unit of the paired board. The main MUX/DEMUX unit selects the higher quality signals for subsequent processing.

Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction
Table 3-156 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the ISX2 Step 1 Function Unit Logic processing unit Processing Flow l Processes clock signals. l Processes overhead signals. l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals from the cross-connect unit. 2 Ethernet processing unit MUX/DEMUX unit l Receives GE signals from the packet switching unit. l Processes GE signals. l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signals that are from the logic processing unit, if native TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are E1 services. l Adds overheads to the VC-4 signals that are from the logic processing unit to form STM-1 signals, if native TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are STM-1 services. l Sets microwave frame overheads. l Combines the E1/STM-1 signals, Ethernet signals, and microwave frame overheads to form microwave frames. 4 MODEM unit l Performs FEC coding. l Performs digital modulation.

3

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

181

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Step 5

Function Unit IF processing unit

Processing Flow l Performs D/A conversion. l Performs analog modulation. l Filters signals. l Amplifies signals.

6 7

SMODEM unit Combiner interface unit

Modulates the ODU control signals transmitted from the system control and communication unit. Combines the ODU control signals, microwave service signals, and -48 V power supplies and transmits the combined signals to the IF cable.

Control Signal Processing
The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication unit. The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board over the control bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to the CPU unit over the control bus. The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system control and communication unit.

Power Supply Unit
The power supply unit performs the following functions: l Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power supply bus in the backplane and supplies -48 V power to the ODU after performing DCDC conversion. Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power supply bus in the backplane and supplies +3.3 V power to the other units on the ISU2 after performing DC-DC conversion.

l

Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock signals to the other units on the board.

3.10.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, an IF port, XPIC signal ports, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-57 Front panel of the ISX2
ISX2
-48V OUTPUT TURN OFF POWER BEFORE DISCONNECTING IF CABLE

PULL

I
X-IN X-OUT

O

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

XPIC STAT SRV LINK ODU RMT ACT

IF

WARNING

ISX2

ODU-PWR

182

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Indicators
Table 3-157 Status explanation for indicators on the ISX2 Indicator XPIC State On (green) On (red) Off STAT On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The XPIC input signal is normal. The XPIC input signal is lost. The XPIC function is disabled. The board is working properly. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board. SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) LINK On (green) On (red) ODU On (green) On (red) The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The radio link is normal. The radio link is faulty. The ODU is working properly. l The ODU is reporting critical or major alarms. l There is no power supplied to the ODU. On (yellow) Blinks on (yellow) and off at 300 ms intervals RMT On (yellow) The ODU is reporting minor alarms. The antennas are not aligned. The remote equipment is reporting defects.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

183

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Indicator

State Off

Meaning The remote equipment is free of defects. l In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the active one. l In an unprotected system, the board has been activated.

ACT

On (green)

Off

l In a 1+1 protected system, the board works as the standby one. l In an unprotected system, the board is not activated.

Ports
Table 3-158 Description of the ports Port IF ODU-PWRa X-IN X-OUT Description IF port ODU power switch XPIC signal input port XPIC signal output port Connector Type TNC SMA SMA Corresponding Cable IF jumperb XPIC cable

NOTE

a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To turn on or turn off the switch, you need to first pull the switch lever slightly outwards. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is open. When the switch is set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed. b: A 5D IF cable is connected to an IF board; therefore, an IF jumper is not required.

Labels
There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance label on the front panel. The high temperature warning label indicates that the board surface temperature may exceed 70°C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55°C. If surface temperature reaches this level, you need to wear protective gloves before handling the board.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 184

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

The operation warning label indicates that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off before the IF cable is removed. The operation guidance label indicates that the switch must be pulled slightly outwards before the switch is set to the "I" or "O" position.

3.10.5 Valid Slots
The ISX2 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the ISX2 on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. Figure 3-58 Slots for the ISX2 in the IDU chassis
Slot 5 (PIU) Slot 6 (FAN) Slot 3 (ISX2) Slot 1 Slot 4 (ISX2)

An ODU is not allocated a physical slot but it has a logical slot on the NMS. The logical slot number of the ODU is equal to the logical slot number of the IF board that is connected to the ODU plus 20. Figure 3-59 Logical slots of the ISX2 on the NMS
Slot 23 (ODU) Slot 24 (ODU)

Slot 5 (PIU)

Slot 6 (FAN)

Slot 3 (ISX2) Slot 1 Slot 10 Slot 7

Slot 4 (ISX2) Slot 8 Slot 9

Table 3-159 Slot allocation Item Slot allocation priority Description Slot 3 > Slot 4

NOTE

One ISX2 pair for implementing the XPIC function must be installed on the same row or adjacently in the same column.

3.10.6 Board Parameter Settings
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the ISX2.

Related References
A.5.6.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 185

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

A.5.6.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute A.5.6.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid_AM Configuration_Advanced Attributes A.5.10.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs A.5.10.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs A.5.5.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes A.5.5.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes A.5.5.3 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 3 Attributes A.5.5.4 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes

3.10.7 Technical Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including radio work modes, IF performance, modem performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

Radio Work Modes
Table 3-160 SDH microwave work modes (ISX2 board) Service Capacity STM-1 2xSTM-1 Modulation Scheme 128QAM 128QAM Channel Spacing (MHz) 28 (27.5) 56 (55)

NOTE For the ISX2 board in SDH service mode, the microwave work modes are the same regardless of whether the XPIC function is enabled or disabled.

Table 3-161 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISX2 board, Native E1 + Ethernet service, XPIC disabled) Channel Spacing (MHz) Modulation Scheme Maximum Number of E1s in Hybrid Microwave Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s) Without Compressio n With L2 Frame Header Compressio n 10 to 15 20 to 30 25 to 36 31 to 47 37 to 56 41 to 62 20 to 31 With L2+L3 Frame Header Compressio n (IPv4) 10 to 22 20 to 44 25 to 54 31 to 67 37 to 80 41 to 90 20 to 44 With L2+L3 Frame Header Compressio n (IPv6) 10 to 33 20 to 66 25 to 80 31 to 100 37 to 119 42 to 134 20 to 66

7 7 7 7 7 7 14 (13.75)

QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM QPSK

5 10 12 15 18 20 10

10 to 13 20 to 26 25 to 32 31 to 40 37 to 47 41 to 53 20 to 26

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

186

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Channel Spacing (MHz)

Modulation Scheme

Maximum Number of E1s in Hybrid Microwave

Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s) Without Compressio n With L2 Frame Header Compressio n 41 to 61 51 to 77 65 to 96 76 to 113 87 to 131 41 to 62 82 to 124 107 to 161 131 to 198 155 to 233 181 to 272 56 to 84 114 to 172 147 to 221 181 to 272 215 to 323 249 to 375 82 to 124 166 to 250 206 to 308 262 to 388 309 to 466 360 to 538 With L2+L3 Frame Header Compressio n (IPv4) 41 to 89 51 to 110 65 to 140 76 to 165 87 to 189 41 to 89 82 to 178 107 to 230 131 to 283 155 to 333 181 to 388 56 to 122 114 to 247 147 to 318 181 to 388 215 to 456 249 to 538 82 to 178 165 to 356 206 to 437 262 to 567 309 to 656 360 to 777 With L2+L3 Frame Header Compressio n (IPv6) 41 to 132 51 to 164 65 to 209 76 to 245 88 to 281 41 to 132 83 to 265 107 to 343 132 to 424 156 to 495 182 to 577 57 to 182 114 to 366 148 to 474 182 to 583 216 to 691 251 to 800 83 to 265 167 to 533 207 to 659 264 to 836 311 to 983 362 to 1000

14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 40 40 40 40 40 40 56 (55) 56 (55) 56 (55) 56 (55) 56 (55) 56 (55)

16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM

20 24 31 37 42 20 40 52 64 75 75 27 55 71 75 75 75 40 75 75 75 75 75

41 to 52 51 to 65 65 to 83 76 to 97 87 to 111 41 to 52 82 to 105 107 to 136 131 to 168 155 to 198 181 to 230 56 to 72 114 to 145 147 to 187 181 to 230 215 to 272 249 to 318 82 to 105 166 to 212 206 to 262 262 to 333 309 to 396 360 to 456

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

187

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-162 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISX2 board, Native E1 + Ethernet service, XPIC enabled) Channel Spacing (MHz) Modulation Scheme Maximum Number of E1s in Hybrid Microwave Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s) Without Compressio n With L2 Frame Header Compressio n 10 to 15 20 to 30 25 to 36 31 to 47 20 to 31 41 to 61 51 to 77 65 to 96 76 to 113 41 to 62 82 to 124 107 to 161 131 to 198 155 to 233 181 to 272 56 to 84 114 to 172 147 to 221 181 to 272 215 to 323 249 to 375 82 to 124 166 to 250 206 to 308 262 to 388 309 to 466 With L2+L3 Frame Header Compressio n (IPv4) 10 to 22 20 to 44 25 to 54 31 to 67 20 to 44 41 to 89 51 to 110 65 to 140 76 to 165 41 to 89 82 to 178 107 to 230 131 to 283 155 to 333 181 to 388 56 to 122 114 to 247 147 to 318 181 to 388 215 to 456 249 to 538 82 to 178 165 to 356 206 to 437 262 to 567 309 to 656 With L2+L3 Frame Header Compressio n (IPv6) 10 to 33 20 to 66 25 to 80 31 to 100 20 to 66 41 to 132 51 to 164 65 to 209 76 to 245 41 to 132 83 to 265 107 to 343 132 to 424 156 to 495 182 to 577 57 to 182 114 to 366 148 to 474 182 to 583 216 to 691 251 to 800 83 to 265 167 to 533 207 to 659 264 to 836 311 to 983

7 7 7 7 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 40 40 40 40 40 40 56 (55) 56 (55) 56 (55) 56 (55) 56 (55)

QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAMa QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAMa QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM

4 9 11 14 9 19 24 30 36 20 40 52 64 75 75 27 55 71 75 75 75 40 75 75 75 75

10 to 13 20 to 26 25 to 32 31 to 40 20 to 26 41 to 52 51 to 65 65 to 83 76 to 97 41 to 52 82 to 105 107 to 136 131 to 168 155 to 198 181 to 230 56 to 72 114 to 145 147 to 187 181 to 230 215 to 272 249 to 318 82 to 105 166 to 212 206 to 262 262 to 333 309 to 396

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

188

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Channel Spacing (MHz)

Modulation Scheme

Maximum Number of E1s in Hybrid Microwave

Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s) Without Compressio n With L2 Frame Header Compressio n 360 to 538 With L2+L3 Frame Header Compressio n (IPv4) 360 to 777 With L2+L3 Frame Header Compressio n (IPv6) 362 to 1000

56 (55)

256QAM

75

360 to 456

NOTE a: In 7MHz/64QAM or 14MHz/128QAM mode, ISX2 boards do not support cooperation with 26 GHz to 38 GHz ODUs if XPIC is enabled on the ISX2 boards.

Table 3-163 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISX2 board, Native STM-1 + Ethernet service) Channel Spacing (MHz) Modulation Scheme Number of STM-1 Services in Hybrid Microwave Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s) Without Compressio n With L2 Frame Header Compressio n 155 to 233 181 to 272 181 to 272 215 to 323 249 to 375 166 to 250 206 to 308 262 to 388 309 to 466 360 to 538 With L2+L3 Frame Header Compressio n (IPv4) 155 to 333 181 to 388 181 to 388 215 to 456 249 to 538 165 to 356 206 to 437 262 to 567 309 to 656 360 to 777 With L2+L3 Frame Header Compressio n (IPv6) 156 to 495 182 to 577 182 to 583 216 to 691 251 to 800 167 to 533 207 to 659 264 to 836 311 to 983 362 to 1000

28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 40 40 40 56 (55) 56 (55) 56 (55) 56 (55) 56 (55)

128QAM 256QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

155 to 198 181 to 230 181 to 230 215 to 272 249 to 318 166 to 212 206 to 262 262 to 333 309 to 396 360 to 456

NOTE For the ISX2 board in STM-1 + Ethernet service mode, the microwave work modes are the same regardless of whether the XPIC function is enabled or disabled.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

189

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
NOTE

3 Boards

For the integrated IP microwave work mode that the ISU2/ISX2 board supports: l The throughput specifications listed in the tables are based on the following conditions. l Without compression: untagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes l With L2 frame header compression: untagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes l With L2+L3 frame header compression (IPv4): untagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes l With L2+L3 frame header compression (IPv6): S-tagged Ethernet frames with a length ranging from 92 bytes to 9600 bytes l E1/STM-1 services need to occupy the corresponding bandwidth of the air interface capacity. The bandwidth remaining after the E1/STM-1 service capacity is subtracted from the air interface capacity can be provided for Ethernet services.

IF Performance
Table 3-164 IF performance Item IF signal Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) ODU O&M signal Modulation scheme Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) Interface impedance (ohm) Performance 350 140 ASK 5.5 10 50

Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem
Table 3-165 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem Item Encoding mode Adaptive timedomain equalizer for baseband signals Performance LDPC encoding Supported

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

190

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-166 Mechanical behavior Item Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight Performance 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm 0.60 kg

Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 23 W

3.11 EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA
The EM6T/EM6F/EM6TA/EM6FA is an FE/GE interface board, which provides four FE electrical ports and two GE ports. The EM6T/EM6TA has similar functions to the EM6F/ EM6FA. The only difference is as follows: The GE ports on the EM6T/EM6TA use fixed electrical ports whereas the GE ports on the EM6F/EM6FA use the SFP modules and therefore can function as two FE/GE optical or GE electrical ports. The GE electrical ports on the EM6F/EM6FA and the EM6T/EM6TA are compatible with the FE electrical ports.
NOTE

EM6TA/EM6FA boards have the same functions as EM6T/EM6F boards. The only difference is that EM6TA/EM6FA boards reserve hardware resources for the IEEE 1588v2 function.

3.11.1 Version Description
The functional version of the EM6T/EM6F/EM6TA/EM6FA is SL91.

3.11.2 Functions and Features
The EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA receives/transmits, processes, and converges four FE signals and two GE signals. The GE port on the EM6F/EM6FA can receive/transmit 2xFE optical signals using FE small form-factor pluggable (SFP) optical modules. Table 3-167 lists the functions and features that the EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA supports. The EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA needs to work with the packet switching unit of the system control, switching, and timing board to implement Ethernet service functions. Table 3-167 Functions and features Function and Feature Description EM6T/EM6TA Basic functions EM6F/EM6FA

Receives/Transmits FE/GE service signals and works with the packet switching unit to process the received FE/GE service signals.
191

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature

Description EM6T/EM6TA EM6F/EM6FA Provides four 10/100BASE-T(X) ports. Provides two GE ports by using SFP modules of any of the following types: l Dual-fiber bidirectional FE/GE optical module l Colored CWDM GE optical module l Single-fiber bidirectional FE/GE module l 10/100/1000BASE-T (X) GE electrical module

Port specifications

FE electrical port GE port

Provides four 10/100BASE-T(X) ports. Provides two 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) ports (fixed).

Backplane bus bandwidth Port attributes Working mode

1 Gbit/s

1 Gbit/s

l The FE electrical ports on EM6T/EM6F boards support 10M full-duplex, 10M half-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 100M half-duplex, and autonegotiation. l The FE electrical ports on EM6TA/EM6FA boards support 10M full-duplex, 100M full-duplex, and auto-negotiation. l The GE electrical ports on EM6T/EM6F boards support 10M full-duplex, 10M half-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 100M half-duplex, 1000M full-duplex, and auto-negotiation. l The GE electrical ports on EM6TA/EM6FA boards support 10M full-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 1000M full-duplex, and auto-negotiation. l The FE optical ports on EM6F/EM6FA boards support 100M full-duplex and auto-negotiation. l The GE optical ports support 1000M full-duplex and auto-negotiation.

TAG attributes

l The TAG attribute can be set to tag aware, access, or hybrid. l Sets and queries the TAG attribute of an Ethernet port.

Jumbo frame

Supports jumbo frames with a maximum frame length of 9600 bytes.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

192

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature

Description EM6T/EM6TA EM6F/EM6FA

Traffic control function Services E-Line services

Supports the port-based traffic control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x. Supports the following types of E-Line services: l E-Line services based on ports l E-Line services based on port+VLAN l E-Line services based on port+QinQ

E-LAN services

Supports the following types of E-LAN services: l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridges l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges

LAG

Inter-board LAG Intra-board LAG

Supported Supported

Supported Supported

ERPS Spanning tree protocol

Supports the ERPS function that complies with ITU-T G.8032/Y.1344. Supports the MSTP protocol that generates only the CIST. The MSTP protocol provides functions equivalent to that of the RSTP protocol. Supported DiffServ Supported

LPT QoS

Supports simple traffic classification by specifying PHB service classes for service flows based on their QoS information (C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN priorities, DSCP values, or MPLS EXP values) carried by the packets. Supports traffic classification at Ethernet ports based on C-VLAN IDs, S-VLAN IDs, C-VLAN priorities, SVLAN priorities, C-VLAN IDs + C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN IDs + S-VLAN priorities, or DSCP values carried by packets. Provides the CAR function for traffic flows at ports. Provides traffic shaping for a specific port, prioritized queue, or traffic flow. Supports the following queue scheduling policies: l SP l WRR l SP+WRR

Complex traffic classification

CAR Shaping Queue scheduling policies

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

193

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature

Description EM6T/EM6TA EM6F/EM6FA

ETH OAM

Ethernet service OAM

l Supports IEEE 802.1ag-compliant ETH-OAM function. l Supports the packet loss, delay, and delay variation monitoring function that complies with ITU-T Y. 1731.

Ethernet port OAM RMON Clock Clock source

Supports IEEE 802.3ah-compliant ETH-OAM function. Supported Synchronous Ethernet Supported Synchronous Ethernet (not supported by the SFP electrical module)

Clock protection

Supports the following clock protection schemes: l Protection based on clock source priorities l Protection by running the SSM protocol l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol

DCN OM

Inband DCN Loopback

Each FE/GE port provides one inband DCN channel. Supports the following loopback types: l Inloops at the PHY layer of Ethernet ports l Inloops at the MAC layer of Ethernet ports

Warm reset and cold reset Board manufacturing information query Board power consumption information query Board voltage detection Board temperature detection Query of SFP module information

Supported Supported

Supported Supported

Supported

Supported

Supported Supported

Supported Supported

Not supported

Supported

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

194

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

3.11.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
This section describes how to process one GE signal on the EM6T/EM6TA, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/ EM6FA.

Functional Block Diagram
Figure 3-60 Functional block diagram
Backplane GE signal GE signal access unit GE signal Control signal Ethernet processing unit FE signal access unit Control signal FE signal Control bus of the board Ethernet signal Ethernet signal Packet switching unit

Logic processing unit

FE signal

Logic control unit

Control bus

System control and communication unit

+3.3 V power supplied to the board +3.3 V power supplied to some I/O circuits on the board Clock signal provided to the other units on the board

Power supply unit

-48 V1 -48 V2 +3.3 V

Clock unit

System clock signal

Signal Processing in the Receive Direction
Table 3-168 Signal processing in the receive direction Step 1 Function Unit GE signal access unit/FE signal access unit Processing Flow l Receives/Transmits GE/FE signals. l Performs restructuring, decoding, and serial/parallel conversion for GE/FE signals. l Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping, CRC checks, and Ethernet performance measurement for frame signals.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

195

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Step 2

Function Unit Ethernet processing unit

Processing Flow l Adds tags identifying ingress ports to Ethernet data frames. l Processes VLAN tags in Ethernet data frames. l Processes labels in MPLS/PWE3 packets. l Performs QoS processing such as traffic classification and CAR traffic monitoring for Ethernet data frames. l Forwards Ethernet data frames to the logic processing unit.

3

Logic processing unit

Transmits Ethernet data frames to the packet switching unit.

Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction
Table 3-169 Signal processing in the transmit direction Step 1 Function Unit Logic processing unit Processing Flow l Selects Ethernet data frames from the packet switching unit. l Transmits Ethernet data frames to the Ethernet processing unit. 2 Ethernet processing unit l Processes labels in MPLS/PWE3 packets. l Processes VLAN tags in Ethernet data frames. l Performs QoS processing such as traffic shaping and queue scheduling for Ethernet data frames. l Forwards Ethernet data frames to proper egress ports based on egress tags contained in the Ethernet data frames. 3 GE signal access unit/FE signal access unit l Performs frame delimitation, preamble addition, CRC code computing, and Ethernet performance measurement. l Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding for Ethernet data frames, and sends out the generated GE/ FE signals through Ethernet ports.

Control Signal Processing
The Ethernet processing unit controls the FE/GE signal access unit by using management control signals. The logic control unit controls the Ethernet processing unit and logic processing unit over the control bus on the board.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 196

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

The logic control unit communicates with the main and standby system control and communication units over the system control bus. The configuration data and query commands from the system control and communication unit are issued to the various units of the board through the logic control unit. The command response reported by each unit on the board, and the alarms and performance events are reported to the system control and communication unit also through the logic control unit.

Power Supply Unit
The power supply unit performs the following functions: l l Receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48 V power supplies into +3.3 V power, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board. Receives one +3.3 V power supply from the backplane and then supplies the +3.3 V power to some I/O circuits on the board.

Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock signals to the other units on the board.

3.11.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, FE service ports, and GE service ports on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-61 Front panel of the EM6T
EM6T
STAT PROG SRV

GE1

GE2

FE1

FE2

FE3

FE4

Figure 3-62 Front panel of the EM6TA
EM6TA
STAT PROG SRV

GE1

GE2

FE1

FE2

FE3

FE4

Figure 3-63 Front panel of the EM6F
EM6F
STAT PROG SRV LINK1 LINK2
CLASS1 LASER PRODUCT

GE1

GE2

FE1

FE2

FE3

FE4

Figure 3-64 Front panel of the EM6FA
EM6FA
STAT PROG SRV L/A1 L/A2
CLASS1 LASER PRODUCT

GE1

GE2

FE1

FE2

FE3

FE4

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

197

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Indicators
Table 3-170 Status explanation for indicators on the EM6T/EM6F Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working properly. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board. SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off PROG Blinks on (green) and off at 100 ms intervals Blinks on (green) and off at 300 ms intervals On (green) The system is working properly. A critical or major alarm occurs in the system. A minor alarm occurs in the system. There is no power supplied to the system. Software is being loaded to the board during the power-on or resetting process of the board. The board software is in BIOS boot state during the power-on or resetting process of the board. l When the board is being powered on or being reset, the upper layer software is being initialized. l When the board is running, the software is running normally. Blinks on (red) and off at 100 ms intervals On (red) The BOOTROM self-check fails during the power-on or resetting process of the board. l The memory self-check fails or loading upper layer software fails during the power-on or resetting process of the board. l The logic file or upper layer software is lost during the running process of the board. l The pluggable storage card is faulty. LINK1a On (green) The GE1 port is connected correctly and is not receiving or transmitting data.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

198

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Indicator

State Blinking (green) Off

Meaning The GE1 port is receiving or transmitting data. The GE1 port is not connected or is connected incorrectly. The GE2 port is connected correctly and is not receiving or transmitting data. The GE2 port is receiving or transmitting data. The GE2 port is not connected or is connected incorrectly.

LINK2a

On (green) Blinking (green) Off

NOTE

a: The LINK1 and LINK2 indicators are available only on the EM6F and indicate the states of the corresponding GE ports.

Table 3-171 Status explanation for indicators on the EM6TA/EM6FA Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working properly. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board. SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off PROG Blinks on (green) and off at 100 ms intervals Blinks on (green) and off at 300 ms intervals The system is working properly. A critical or major alarm occurs in the system. A minor alarm occurs in the system. There is no power supplied to the system. Software is being loaded to the board during the power-on or resetting process of the board. The board software is in BIOS boot state during the power-on or resetting process of the board.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

199

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Indicator

State On (green)

Meaning l When the board is being powered on or being reset, the upper layer software is being initialized. l When the board is running, the software is running normally.

Blinks on (red) and off at 100 ms intervals On (red)

The BOOTROM self-check fails during the power-on or resetting process of the board. The memory self-check fails or loading upper layer software fails during the poweron or resetting process of the board. The logic file or upper layer software is lost during the running process of the board. The pluggable storage card is faulty.

L/A1a

On (green) Blinking (yellow) Off

The GE1 port is connected correctly and is not receiving or transmitting data. The GE1 port is receiving or transmitting data. The GE1 port is not connected or is connected incorrectly. The GE2 port is connected correctly and is not receiving or transmitting data. The GE2 port is receiving or transmitting data. The GE2 port is not connected or is connected incorrectly.

L/A2a

On (green) Blinking (yellow) Off

NOTE

a: The L/A1 and L/A2 indicators are available only on the EM6FA and indicate the states of the corresponding GE ports.

Ports
Table 3-172 Description of the ports on the EM6T/EM6TA Port GE1 GE2 FE1
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Description GE service port (fixed electrical port) FE service port

Connector Type RJ45

Corresponding Cable Network cable

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

200

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Port FE2 FE3 FE4

Description

Connector Type

Corresponding Cable

Table 3-173 Description of the ports on the EM6F/EM6FA Port GE1 GE2 FE1 FE2 FE3 FE4 Description GE service port (using SFP modules) FE service port Connector Type RJ45 SFP electrical module/LC SFP optical module RJ45 Corresponding Cable 5.9 Network Cable/5.5 Fiber Jumper 5.9 Network Cable

NOTE

On the NMS, GE1 and GE2 correspond to PORT1 and PORT2 respectively; FE1 to FE4 correspond to PORT3 to PORT6 respectively.

The performance of the FE service ports on the EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA complies with the 10/100BASE-T(X) standard; the performance of the GE service ports on the EM6T/ EM6TA complies with the 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) standard; the performance of the GE service ports on the EM6F/EM6FA complies with the 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) standard if SFP electrical modules are used. All service ports support the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes. For the pin assignments for the ports, see Table 3-174 and Table 3-175. For the front view of an RJ45 connector, see Figure 3-65. Figure 3-65 Front view of the RJ45 connector

87654321

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

201

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-174 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI mode Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) Signal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TX+ TXRX+ Reserved Reserved RXReserved Reserved Function Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) Receiving data (+) Receiving data (-) 1000BASE-T Signal BIDA+ BIDABIDB+ BIDC+ BIDCBIDBBIDD+ BIDDFunction Bidirectional data wire A (+) Bidirectional data wire A (-) Bidirectional data wire B (+) Bidirectional data wire C (+) Bidirectional data wire C (-) Bidirectional data wire B (-) Bidirectional data wire D (+) Bidirectional data wire D (-)

Table 3-175 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI-X mode Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) Signal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 RX+ RXTX+ Reserved Reserved TXReserved Function Receiving data (+) Receiving data (-) Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) 1000BASE-T Signal BIDB+ BIDBBIDA+ BIDD+ BIDDBIDABIDC+ Function Bidirectional data wire B (+) Bidirectional data wire B (-) Bidirectional data wire A (+) Bidirectional data wire D (+) Bidirectional data wire D (-) Bidirectional data wire A (-) Bidirectional data wire C (+)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

202

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Pin

10/100BASE-T(X) Signal Function -

1000BASE-T Signal BIDCFunction Bidirectional data wire C (-)

8

Reserved

The RJ45 connector has two indicators. For status explanation for these indicators, see Table 3-176. Table 3-176 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector Indicator LINK (green) State On Off ACT (yellow) On or blinking Off Meaning The link is working properly. The link is interrupted. The port is transmitting or receiving data. The port is not transmitting or receiving data.

When the SFP ports on the EM6F/EM6FA function as optical ports, optical modules are required. l When dual-fiber bidirectional SFP optical modules are used to provide ports, one SFP optical module provides one TX port and one RX port. For details, see Figure 3-66, in which TX represents the transmit port and RX represents the receive port. One optical fiber is connected to each port. When single-fiber bidirectional optical modules are used to provide ports, one optical module provides only the port on the left. This port is an optical port that can receive and transmit service signals. One optical fiber is connected to this port.

l

Figure 3-66 Ports of an SFP optical module

TX

RX

Labels
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel of the EM6F/EM6FA. The laser safety class label indicates that the laser safety class of the optical port is CLASS 1. That is, the maximum launched optical power of the optical port is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

203

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

3.11.5 Valid Slots
The EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the EM6T/EM6F on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. Figure 3-67 Slots for the EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA in the IDU chassis
Slot 5 (PIU) Slot 6 Slot 3 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA) Slot 4 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA) (FAN) Slot 1

Figure 3-68 Logical slots of the EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA on the NMS
Slot 5 (PIU) Slot 6 Slot 3 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA) Slot 4 (EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/EM6FA) (FAN) Slot 1 Slot 10 Slot 7 Slot 8 Slot 9

Table 3-177 Slot allocation Item Slot allocation priority Description Slot 4 > Slot 3

3.11.6 Types of SFP Modules
The FE/GE small form-factor pluggable (SFP) ports on the EM6F/EM6FA support multiple types of SFP modules. Table 3-178 Types of SFP modules that the FE/GE port supports Category Part Number Type Wavelength and Transmission Distance 850 nm, 0.5 km 1310 nm, 10 km 1310 nm, 40 km 1550 nm, 40 km 1000BASE-ZX 1000BASE-CWDM 1550 nm, 80 km 1471 nm, 40 km
204

Dual-fiber bidirectional GE module

34060286 34060473 34060298 34060513 34060360 34060416

1000Base-SX 1000Base-LX 1000BASE-VX

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Category

Part Number

Type

Wavelength and Transmission Distance 1491 nm, 40 km 1511 nm, 40 km 1531 nm, 40 km 1551 nm, 40 km 1571 nm, 40 km 1591 nm, 40 km 1611 nm, 40 km 1471 nm, 80 km 1491 nm, 80 km 1511 nm, 80 km 1531 nm, 80 km 1551 nm, 80 km 1571 nm, 80 km 1591 nm, 80 km 1611 nm, 80 km

34060417 34060418 34060419 34060420 34060421 34060422 34060423 34060483 34060481 34060479 34060482 34060478 34060476 34060477 34060480 Single-fiber bidirectional GE module 34060475 1000BASE-BX-D

Transmit: 1490 nm; receive: 1310 nm 10 km

34060470

1000BASE-BX-U

Transmit: 1310 nm; receive: 1490 nm 10 km

34060540

1000BASE-BX-D

Transmit: 1490 nm; receive: 1310 nm 40 km

34060539

1000BASE-BX-U

Transmit: 1310 nm; receive: 1490 nm 40 km

Dual-fiber bidirectional FE module

34060287 34060276 34060281 34060282

100BASE-FX 100BASE-LX 100BASE-VX 100BASE-ZX

1310 nm, 2 km 1310 nm, 15 km 1310 nm, 40 km 1550 nm, 80 km

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

205

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Category

Part Number

Type

Wavelength and Transmission Distance Transmit: 1550 nm; receive: 1310 nm 15 km

Single-fiber bidirectional FE module

34060364

100BASE-BX-D

34060363

100BASE-BX-U

Transmit: 1310 nm; receive: 1550 nm 15 km

Electrical module

34100052

10/100/1000BASE-T (X)

-

NOTE

For the specifications for each type of optical module, see Table 3-180-Table 3-185 in 3.11.8 Technical Specifications.

The types of SFP modules listed in the following table can be identified by board feature codes in the bar codes of EM6F boards. A board feature code refers to the number next to the board name in a bar code. The bar code of the EM6T/EM6TA does not contain a board feature code. Table 3-179 Board feature code of the EM6F Board Feature Code 01 02 03 10 11 Module Type 1000BASE-SX 1000BASE-LX 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) 100BASE-FX 100BASE-LX Part Number of the Module 34060286 34060473 34100052 34060287 34060276

NOTE

If the board feature code in the bar code of the EM6T/EM6TA is empty, no SFP module is installed on the EM6T/EM6TA.

3.11.7 Board Parameter Settings
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the EM6T/EM6TA/EM6F/ EM6FA.

Related References
A.5.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes A.5.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 206

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

A.5.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes A.5.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Layer 3 Attributes A.5.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes

3.11.8 Technical Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including the GE port performance, FE port performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

Performance of FE/GE Optical Ports
The FE/GE optical ports on the EM6F comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists the main specifications for the FE/GE optical ports.
NOTE

The OptiX RTN 910 uses SFP modules to provide GE optical interfaces. Users can use different types of SFP modules to provide GE optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.

Table 3-180 GE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional, short-distance transmission) Item Classification code Nominal wavelength (nm) Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) Fiber type Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength (nm) Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Performance 1000BASE-SX (0.5 km) 850 1000 Multi-mode 0.5 770 to 860 -9 to -3 -17 0 9.5 Single-mode 10 1270 to 1355 -9 to -3 -20 -3 9.5 1000BASE-LX (10 km) 1310

Table 3-181 GE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional, long-haul transmission) Item Classification code Nominal wavelength (nm)
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Performance 1000BASE-VX (40 km) 1310 1000BASE-VX (40 km) 1550 1000BASE-ZX (80 km) 1550
207

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Item Classification code Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) Fiber type Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength (nm) Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)

Performance 1000BASE-VX (40 km) 1000 Single-mode 40 1270 to 1350 -5 to 0 -23 -3 9 1000BASE-VX (40 km) 1000 Single-mode 40 1480 to 1580 -5 to 0 -22 -3 9 1000BASE-ZX (80 km) 1000 Single-mode 80 1500 to 1580 -2 to +5 -22 -3 9

Table 3-182 GE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional, CWDM) Item Classification code Nominal wavelength (nm) Performance 1000BASE-CWDM (40 km) l Channel 1: 1471 l Channel 2: 1491 l Channel 3: 1511 l Channel 4: 1531 l Channel 5: 1551 l Channel 6: 1571 l Channel 7: 1591 l Channel 8: 1611 Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) Fiber type Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength (nm) Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) 1000 Single-mode 40 Nominal wavelength ±6.5 0 to +5 -19 0 1000BASE-CWDM (80 km) l Channel 1: 1471 l Channel 2: 1491 l Channel 3: 1511 l Channel 4: 1531 l Channel 5: 1551 l Channel 6: 1571 l Channel 7: 1591 l Channel 8: 1611 1000 Single-mode 80 Nominal wavelength ±6.5 0 to +5 -28 -9

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

208

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Item Classification code Minimum extinction ratio (dB)

Performance 1000BASE-CWDM (40 km) 8.2 1000BASE-CWDM (80 km) 8.2

Table 3-183 GE optical interface performance (single-fiber bidirectional) Item Performance 1000BASEBX-D (10 km) Nominal wavelength (nm) Tx: 1490 Rx: 1310 Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) Fiber type Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength (nm) 1000 Multi-mode 10 Tx: 1480 to 1500 Rx: 1260 to 1360 Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) -9 to -3 -19.5 -3 6 1000BASEBX-U (10km) Tx: 1310 Rx: 1490 1000 Multi-mode 10 Tx: 1260 to 1360 Rx: 1480 to 1500 -9 to -3 -19.5 -3 6 1000BASEBX-D (40 km) Tx: 1490 Rx: 1310 1000 Single-mode 40 Tx: 1260 to 1360 Rx: 1480 to 1500 -3 to +3 -23 -3 6 1000BASEBX-U (40km) Tx: 1310 Rx: 1490 1000 Single-mode 40 Tx: 1480 to 1500 Rx: 1260 to 1360 -3 to +3 -23 -3 6

Table 3-184 FE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional) Item Performance 100BASEFX (2 km) Nominal wavelength (nm) Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) Fiber type 1310 100 Single-mode 100BASELX (15 km) 1310 100 Single-mode 100BASEVX (40 km) 1310 100 Single-mode 100BASEZX (80 km) 1550 100 Single-mode

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

209

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Item

Performance 100BASEFX (2 km) 100BASELX (15 km) 15 1261 to 1360 -15 to -8 -28 -8 8.2 100BASEVX (40 km) 40 1263 to 1360 -5 to 0 -34 -10 10 100BASEZX (80 km) 80 1480 to 1580 -5 to 0 -34 -10 10.5

Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength (nm) Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)

2 1270 to 1380 -19 to -14 -30 -14 10

Table 3-185 FE optical interface performance (single-fiber bidirectional) Item Classification code Nominal wavelength (nm) Performance 100BASE-BX-D (15 km) Tx: 1550 Rx: 1310 Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) Fiber type Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength (nm) 100 Single-mode 15 Tx: 1480 to 1580 Rx: 1260 to 1360 Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) -15 to -8 -32 -8 8.5 100BASE-BX-U (15 km) Tx: 1310 Rx: 1550 100 Single-mode 15 Tx: 1260 to 1360 Rx: 1480 to 1580 -15 to -8 -32 -8 8.5

Performance of GE Electrical Ports
The GE electrical ports on the EM6T/EM6F comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists the main specifications for the GE electrical ports.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

210

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-186 GE electrical interface performance Item Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) Performance 10 (10BASE-T) 100 (100BASE-TX) 1000 (1000BASE-T) Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T) MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX) 4D-PAM5 encoding signal (1000BASE-T) Interface type RJ45

Performance of FE Electrical Ports
The FE electrical ports on the EM6T/EM6F comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists the main specifications for the FE electrical ports. Table 3-187 FE electrical interface performance Item Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) Performance 10 (10BASE-T) 100 (100BASE-TX) Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T) MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX) Interface type RJ45

Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-188 Mechanical behavior Item Performance EM6T Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight EM6TA EM6F EM6FA

19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm 0.37 kg 0.40 kg 0.40 kg 0.40 kg

Power Consumption
Power consumption of the EM6T: < 10.4 W Power consumption of the EM6TA: < 16.2 W
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 211

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Power consumption of the EM6F: < 11.3 W Power consumption of the EM6FA: < 15.4 W

3.12 EMS6
The EMS6 is an FE/GE EoSDH processing board providing the L2 switching function. It provides four FE electrical ports and two GE ports using small form-factor pluggable (SFP) optical/electrical modules.

3.12.1 Version Description
The functional version of the EMS6 is SL91.

3.12.2 Functions and Features
The EMS6 receives/transmits 4xFE signals and 2xGE signals from the front panel and 1xGE packet plane signals from the backplane, and encapsulates these Ethernet signals into synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) signals to transmit the Ethernet signals on the SDH network. The EMS6 supports transparent service transmission and Layer 2 switching. Table 3-189 lists the functions and features that the EMS6 supports. Table 3-189 Functions and features Function and Feature Basic functions Description Receives/transmits 4xFE signals, 2xGE signals, and 1xGE packet plane signals, and performs EoSDH processing. FE electrical port GE port Provides four 10/100BASE-T(X) ports.

Port specifications

Provides two GE ports by using small form-factor pluggable (SFP) modules of any of the following types: l 1000Base-SX l 1000Base-LX l 1000Base-VX l 1000Base-ZX l 10/100/1000BASE-T(X)

Port attributes

Working mode

l The FE ports support 10M full-duplex, 100M fullduplex, and auto-negotiation. l The GE electrical ports support 10M full-duplex, 10M half-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 100M halfduplex, 1000M full-duplex, and auto-negotiation. l The GE optical ports support 1000M full-duplex and auto-negotiation.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

212

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature TAG attributes

Description l Sets and queries the TAG attribute of an Ethernet port. l The TAG attribute can be set to tag aware, access, or hybrid.

Jumbo frame Traffic control function Services Ethernet private line (EPL) services Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL) services Ethernet private LAN (EPLAN) services Ethernet virtual private LAN (EVPLAN) services Encapsulation and mapping Encapsulati on format

Supports jumbo frames with a maximum frame length of 9600 bytes. Supports the port-based traffic control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x. Supports the EPL services based on ports.

Supports the following types of EVPL services: l EVPL services based on port+VLAN l EVPL services based on QinQ

Supports the EPLAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridges.

Supports the following types of EVPLAN services: l EVPLAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges l EVPLAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges

Supports the following encapsulation formats: l Generic Framing Procedure (GFP) l High Level Data Link Control (HDLC) l Link Access Protocol-SDH (LAPS)

Maximum TDM service capacity supported by the backplane

4xVC-4

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

213

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature Maximum number of VCTRUN Ks supported by the board Maximum bandwidth supported by each VCTRUN K Link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS) Link aggregation group (LAG) Inter-board LAG Intra-board LAG

Description 8

l VCTRUNK1 to VCTRUNK7: 100 Mbit/s l VCTRUNK8: 622 Mbit/s

Supported

Not supported Supported
NOTE Port 7 (bridging port) on the EMS6 does not support intraboard LAG.

Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS) Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) IGMP Snooping Link state pass through (LPT)a

Supports the ERPS function that complies with ITU-T G.8032/Y.1344. Supports the STP and Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP), which comply with IEEE 802.1w. Supported Supported
NOTE Port 7 (bridging port) on the EMS6 does not support LPT.

QoS

Traffic classificatio n

Supports the following traffic classification modes: l Traffic classification based on ports l Traffic classification based on port+C-VLAN ID l Traffic classification based on port+S-VLAN ID l Traffic classification based on port+C-VLAN ID +S-VLAN ID

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

214

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature CoS

Description Schedules packets in traffic flows to eight egress queues of different CoSs by: l Simple l VLAN priority l IP TOS value l DSCP value

Committed access rate (CAR) Shaping Queue scheduling policy

Provides the CAR function for traffic flows.

Supports traffic shaping for a specific port or egress queue. Supports the following scheduling policies: l SP l WRR l SP+WRR

ETH OAM

l Supports IEEE 802.1ag-compliant ETH-OAM function. l Supports IEEE 802.3ah-compliant ETH-OAM function.
NOTE Port 7 (bridging port) on the EMS6 does not support IEEE 802.3ah-compliant ETH-OAM function.

Remote monitoring (RMON) Port mirroring Clock Clock source

Supported Supported Synchronous Ethernet
NOTE Ports 7 and 8 (bridging ports) on the EMS6 board do not support synchronous Ethernet.

Clock protection

Supports the following clock protection schemes: l Protection based on clock source priorities l Protection by running the Synchronization Status Message (SSM) protocol l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol

OM

Loopback

Supports the following loopback types: l Supports inloops at the PHY layer of Ethernet ports excluding ports 7 and 8 (bridging ports). l Supports inloops at the MAC layer of Ethernet ports excluding port 8 (bridging port). l Supports inloops on VC-3 paths.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

215

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature Traffic monitoring Warm reset and cold reset Board manufactur ing information query Board power consumptio n information query Board temperature detection

Description Supported Supported

Supported

Supported

Supported

NOTE

a: The LPT function is used to detect faults that occur on a service access node or an intermediate transmission network, and instruct the service access node to immediately start the backup network for communication. The LPT function ensures the normal transmission of important data.

3.12.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
This section describes the working principle and signal flow of the EMS6, using FE/GE signal processing as an example.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

216

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Functional Block Diagram
Figure 3-69 Functional block diagram of the EMS6
Backplane Ethernet signal FE signal FE signal access unit GE signal access unit Ethernet processing unit SDH signal Logic processing unit

Encapsulation unit

Mapping unit

Cross-connect unit

GE signal

GE signal

Packet switching unit

Management control signal

Control signal of the board Logic control unit +3.3 V power supplied to the board +3.3 V backup power supplied to certain auxiliary circuits on the board Clock signal provided to the other units on the board Clock unit Control bus

System control and communication unit -48 V1 -48 V2 +3.3 V

Power supply unit

System clock signal

Signal Processing in the Receive Direction
Table 3-190 Signal processing in the receive direction Step 1 Function Unit FE/GE signal access unit Processing Flow l Receives FE/GE signals. If GE signals are received through a GE optical port, O/E conversion is required. l Performs restructuring, decoding, and serial/parallel conversion for FE/GE signals. l Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping, cyclic redundancy check (CRC) code processing, and Ethernet performance measurement for frames. 2 Ethernet processing unit l Receives Ethernet signals from the FE/GE signal access unit and GE signals from the packet switching unit. l Performs QoS processing, such as traffic classification and committed access rate (CAR) control, for Ethernet data frames based on service types. l Processes tags based on service types. l Forwards Ethernet data frames based on service types. 3 Encapsulation unit Performs the High Level Data Link Control (HDLC), Link Access Protocol-SDH (LAPS), or Generic Framing Procedure (GFP) encapsulation for Ethernet frames.
217

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Step 4 5

Function Unit Mapping unit Logic processing unit

Processing Flow Maps encapsulated Ethernet data frames into VC-12s, VC-3s, VC-12-Xvs, or VC-3-Xvs. Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals to the cross-connect unit.

Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction
Table 3-191 Signal processing in the transmit direction Step 1 2 3 4 Function Unit Logic processing unit Mapping unit Encapsulation unit Ethernet processing unit Processing Flow Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals from the cross-connect unit. Demaps encapsulated Ethernet data frames from VC-12s, VC-3s, VC-12-Xvs, or VC-3-Xvs. Decapsulates Ethernet data frames after they are demapped. l Processes tags based on service types. l Performs QoS processing, such as traffic shaping and queue scheduling, for Ethernet data frames. l Performs Ethernet data frame delimitation, preamble addition, CRC code computation, and Ethernet performance measurement. l Forwards Ethernet data frames to the FE/GE signal access unit or the GE port connected to the packet switching unit based on egress tags contained in the Ethernet data frames. 5 FE signal access unit Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding for Ethernet data frames, and transmits generated FE/GE signals through Ethernet ports. For a GE optical port, the FE signal access unit needs to perform E/O conversion before transmitting signals through the GE optical port.

Control Signal Processing
The Ethernet processing unit controls the FE/GE signal access unit by using management control signals. The logic control unit controls the Ethernet processing unit, encapsulation unit, mapping unit, and logic processing unit using the control bus on the board. The logic control unit communicates with the system control and communication unit using the system control bus. The logic control unit issues configuration and query commands from the system control and communication unit to various units on the board, and reports command
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 218

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

responses, alarms, and performance events reported by various units on the board to the system control and communication unit.

Power Supply Unit
The power supply unit receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48 V power into +3.3 V power using the DC-DC module, and supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board. The power supply unit receives one +3.3 V power supply from the backplane and supplies the +3.3 V power to certain auxiliary circuits on the board.

Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock signals to the other units on the board.

3.12.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, four FE ports, and two small form-factor pluggable (SFP) GE ports on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-70 Front panel of the EMS6
EMS6
STAT PROG SRV LINK1 ACT1 LINK2 ACT2

GE1

GE2

FE1

FE2

FE3

FE4

Indicators
Table 3-192 Status explanation for indicators on the EMS6 Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working properly. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board. PROG Blinks on (green) and off at 100 ms intervals Software is being loaded to the board during the power-on or resetting process of the board.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

219

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Indicator

State Blinks on (green) and off at 300 ms intervals On (green)

Meaning The board software is in BIOS boot state during the power-on or resetting process of the board. l The upper layer software is being initialized during the power-on or resetting process of the board. l The software is running properly during the running process of the board.

Blinks on (red) and off at 100 ms intervals On (red)

The BOOTROM self-check fails during the power-on or resetting process of the board. l The memory self-check fails or loading upper layer software fails during the power-on or resetting process of the board. l The logic file or upper layer software is lost during the running process of the board. l The pluggable storage card is faulty.

SRV

On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off

The system is working normally. A critical or major alarm occurs in the system. A minor alarm occurs in the system. There is no power supplied to the system. The GE1 port is connected correctly. The receive optical power at the GE1 optical port is higher than the upper threshold. The receive optical power at the GE1 optical port is lower than the lower threshold. The GE1 port is not connected or is connected incorrectly. The GE1 port is receiving or transmitting data. The GE1 port is not receiving or transmitting data. The GE2 port is connected correctly. The receive optical power at the GE2 optical port is higher than the upper threshold.

LINK1

On (green) Blinks on (red) and off at 300 ms intervals Blinks 300 ms on (red) and 700 ms off Off

ACT1

Blinking (yellow) Off

LINK2

On (green) Blinks on (red) and off at 300 ms intervals

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

220

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Indicator

State Blinks 300 ms on (red) and 700 ms off Off

Meaning The receive optical power at the GE2 optical port is lower than the lower threshold. The GE1 port is not connected or is connected incorrectly. The GE2 port is receiving or transmitting data. The GE2 port is not receiving or transmitting data.

ACT2

Blinking (yellow) Off

Ports
Table 3-193 Description of the ports on the EMS6 Port GE1 GE2 FE1 FE2 FE3 FE4 Description GE service port (using SFP modules) FE service port Connector Type RJ45 SFP electrical module/LC SFP optical module RJ45 Corresponding Cable 5.9 Network Cable/5.5 Fiber Jumper 5.9 Network Cable

NOTE

On the network management system (NMS), GE1 and GE2 correspond to PORT1 and PORT2 respectively, and FE1 to FE4 correspond to PORT3 to PORT6 respectively.

The performance of the FE electrical ports on the EMS6 complies with the 10/100BASE-T(X) standard, and the performance of the GE electrical ports on the EMS6 complies with the 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) standard if SFP electrical modules are used. The two types of ports support the MDI, MDI-X, auto-MDI, and auto-MDI-X modes. For the front view of an RJ45 connector, see Figure 3-71. For the pin assignments for the ports, see Table 3-194 and Table 3-195. Figure 3-71 Front view of the RJ45 connector

87654321

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

221

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-194 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI mode Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) Signal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TX+ TXRX+ Reserved Reserved RXReserved Reserved Function Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) Receiving data (+) Receiving data (-) 1000BASE-T Signal BIDA+ BIDABIDB+ BIDC+ BIDCBIDBBIDD+ BIDDFunction Bidirectional data wire A (+) Bidirectional data wire A (-) Bidirectional data wire B (+) Bidirectional data wire C (+) Bidirectional data wire C (-) Bidirectional data wire B (-) Bidirectional data wire D (+) Bidirectional data wire D (-)

Table 3-195 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI-X mode Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) Signal 1 2 3 4 5 6 RX+ RXTX+ Reserved Reserved TXFunction Receiving data (+) Receiving data (-) Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) 1000BASE-T Signal BIDB+ BIDBBIDA+ BIDD+ BIDDBIDAFunction Bidirectional data wire B (+) Bidirectional data wire B (-) Bidirectional data wire A (+) Bidirectional data wire D (+) Bidirectional data wire D (-) Bidirectional data wire A (-)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

222

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Pin

10/100BASE-T(X) Signal Function -

1000BASE-T Signal BIDC+ BIDCFunction Bidirectional data wire C (+) Bidirectional data wire C (-)

7 8

Reserved Reserved

The RJ45 connector has two indicators. For status explanation for these indicators, see Table 3-196. Table 3-196 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector Indicator LINK (green) State On Off ACT (yellow) On or blinking Off Meaning The link is working properly. The link is interrupted. The port is transmitting or receiving data. The port is not transmitting or receiving data.

SFP optical modules are used to provide GE ports on the EMS6. One SFP optical module provides one TX port and one RX port. For details, see Figure 3-72, in which TX represents the transmit port and RX represents the receive port. Figure 3-72 Ports of an SFP optical module

TX

RX

3.12.5 Valid Slots
The EMS6 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the EMS6 on the network management system (NMS) are the same as the physical slots. Figure 3-73 Slots for the EMS6 in the IDU chassis
Slot 5 (PIU) Slot 6 (FAN) Slot 3 (EMS6) Slot 1 Slot 4 (EMS6)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

223

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Figure 3-74 Logical slots for the EMS6 on the NMS
Slot 5 (PIU) Slot 6 (FAN) Slot 3 (EMS6) Slot 1 Slot 10 Slot 7 Slot 4 (EMS6) Slot 8 Slot 9

Table 3-197 Slot configuration for the EMS6 Item Slot allocation priority Description Slot 4 > Slot 3

3.12.6 Types of SFP Modules
The GE port on the EMS6 board supports multiple types of small form-factor pluggable (SFP) modules. Table 3-198 Types of SFP modules that the GE port supports Part Number 34060286 34060473 34060298 34060513 34060360 34100052 Type 1000Base-SX 1000Base-LX 1000Base-VX (40 km, 1310 nm) 1000Base-VX (40 km, 1550 nm) 1000Base-ZX 10/100/1000BASE-T(X)

The types of SFP modules listed in the following table can be identified by board feature codes in the bar codes of EMS6 boards. A board feature code refers to the number next to the board name in a bar code. Table 3-199 Board feature codes of the EMS6 Board Feature Code 01 02 03 Module Type 1000Base-SX 1000Base-LX 10/100/1000BASE-T(X)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

224

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
NOTE

3 Boards

If the board feature code in the bar code of the EMS6 is empty, no SFP module is installed on the EMS6.

3.12.7 Board Parameter Settings
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the EMS6.

Related References
A.7.5.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_External Port A.7.5.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Internal Port A.7.5.3 Parameter Description: Type Field of QinQ Frames A.5.10.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs

3.12.8 Technical Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including the GE port performance, FE port performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

Performance of GE Optical Ports
The GE optical ports on the EMS6 comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists the main specifications for the GE optical ports. Table 3-200 GE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional, short-distance transmission) Item Classification code Nominal wavelength (nm) Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) Fiber type Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength (nm) Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Performance 1000BASE-SX (0.5 km) 850 1000 Multi-mode 0.5 770 to 860 -9 to -3 -17 0 9.5 Single-mode 10 1270 to 1355 -9 to -3 -20 -3 9.5 1000BASE-LX (10 km) 1310

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

225

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-201 GE optical interface performance (two-fiber bidirectional, long-haul transmission) Item Classification code Nominal wavelength (nm) Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) Fiber type Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength (nm) Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Performance 1000BASE-VX (40 km) 1310 1000 Single-mode 40 1270 to 1350 -5 to 0 -23 -3 9 1000BASE-VX (40 km) 1550 1000 Single-mode 40 1480 to 1580 -5 to 0 -22 -3 9 1000BASE-ZX (80 km) 1550 1000 Single-mode 80 1500 to 1580 -2 to +5 -22 -3 9

NOTE

The OptiX RTN 910 uses SFP modules to provide GE optical interfaces. Users can use different types of SFP modules to provide GE optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.

Performance of GE Electrical Ports
The GE electrical ports on the EMS6 comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists the main specifications for the GE electrical ports. Table 3-202 GE electrical interface performance Item Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) Performance 10 (10BASE-T) 100 (100BASE-TX) 1000 (1000BASE-T) Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T) MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX) 4D-PAM5 encoding signal (1000BASE-T) Interface type RJ45

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

226

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Performance of FE Electrical Ports
The FE electrical ports on the EMS6 comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists the main specifications for the FE electrical ports. Table 3-203 FE electrical interface performance Item Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) Performance 10 (10BASE-T) 100 (100BASE-TX) Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T) MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX) Interface type RJ45

Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-204 Mechanical behavior Item Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight Performance 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm 0.50 kg

Power Consumption
Power consumption of the EMS6: < 16.5 W

3.13 EFP8
The EFP8 is an 8-port FE EoPDH processing board. The EFP board is connected to the packet plane through its bridging GE port.

3.13.1 Version Description
The functional version of the EFP8 is SL91.

3.13.2 Functions and Features
The EFP8 receives/transmits 8xFE signals from its front panel and 1xGE packet plane signals from the backplane, and encapsulates the Ethernet signals into E1 signals, and transmits the Ethernet signals on the PDH network. Table 3-205 lists the functions and features that the EFP8 supports.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 227

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-205 Functions and features Function and Feature Basic functions Port specifications Port attributes FE electrical port: 10/100BASE-T (X) Working mode TAG attributes Description Receives/Transmits 8xFE signals and 1xGE packet plane signals and performs EoPDH processing. 8

The FE port supports 10M full-duplex, 100M fullduplex, and auto-negotiation. l Sets and queries the TAG attribute of an Ethernet port. l The TAG attribute can be set to tag aware, access, or hybrid.

Jumbo frame Traffic control function Services EPL services EVPL services

Supports jumbo frames with a maximum frame length of 2000 bytes. Supports the port-based traffic control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x. Supports the EPL services that are based on port. Supports the following types of EVPL services: l EVPL services based on port+VLAN l EVPL services based on QinQ

EPLAN services EVPLAN services

Supports the EPLAN services that are based on IEEE 802.1d bridges. Supports the following types of EVPLAN services: l EVPLAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges l EVPLAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges

Encapsulation and mapping

Encapsulation format Maximum number of VCTRUNKs supported by the board Maximum TDM service capacity supported by the backplane

Generic framing procedure (GFP) 16

1xVC-4 (63xE1)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

228

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature Maximum number of E1s that can be bound with a single VCTRUNK Link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS) LAG Inter-board LAG Intra-board LAG

Description 16xE1

Supported

Not supported Supported
NOTE Port 9 (bridging port) on the EFP8 does not support intraboard LAG.

Spanning tree protocol

Supports the MSTP protocol that generates only the CIST. The MSTP protocol provides functions equivalent to that of the RSTP protocol. Supported Supported
NOTE Port 9 (bridging port) on the EFP8 does not support LPT.

IGMP snooping function LPTa

QoS

Traffic classification

l Traffic classification based on ports l Traffic classification based on port+VLAN ID l Traffic classification based on port+VLAN ID +VLAN PRI l Traffic classification based on port+S-VLAN ID l Traffic classification based on port+C-VLAN ID +S-VLAN ID

CoS

Grooms packets in traffic flows to eight egress queues that belong to different service classes based on the following conditions: l Simple l VLAN priority l IP TOS value l DSCP value

CAR Shaping Queue scheduling policies

Provides the CAR function for traffic flows. Supports traffic shaping for queues at ports. Supports SP+WRR.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

229

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature ETH OAM

Description l Supports IEEE 802.1ag-compliant ETH-OAM function. l Supports IEEE 802.3ah-compliant ETH-OAM function.
NOTE Port 9 (bridging port) of the EFP8 does not support the OAM function that complies with IEEE 802.3ah.

RMON Port mirroring Clock Clock source

Supported Supported Synchronous Ethernet
NOTE Ports 9 and 10 (bridging ports) on the EFP8 board do not support synchronous Ethernet.

Clock protection

Supports the following clock protection schemes: l Protection based on clock source priorities l Protection by running the SSM protocol l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol

OM

Loopback

Supports the following loopback types: l Inloops at the PHY layer of Ethernet ports excluding ports 9 and 10 (bridging ports) l Inloops at the MAC layer of Ethernet ports excluding port 10 (bridging port) l Inloops on VC-12 paths

Warm reset and cold reset Board manufacturing information query Board power consumption information query Board temperature detection

Supported Supported

Supported

Supported

NOTE

a: The LPT function is used to detect faults that occur at a service access node and in an intermediate transmission network. If a fault is detected, the LPT notifies the equipment that receives the service of starting the backup network at the earliest time for communication, ensuring normal transmission of important data.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

230

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

3.13.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
This section describes how to process one FE signal, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the EFP8.

Functional Block Diagram
Figure 3-75 Functional block diagram of the EFP8
Backplane Ethernet signal FE signal FE signal access unit Management control signal Ethernet processing unit PDH signal Logic processing unit

Encapsulation unit

Mapping unit

Cross-connect unit

GE signal

Packet switching unit

Control signal of the board Logic control unit +3.3 V power supplied to the board +3.3 V backup power supplied to the board Clock signal provided to the other units on the board Clock unit Control bus

System control and communication unit -48 V1 -48 V2 +3.3 V

Power supply unit

System clock signal

Signal Processing in the Receive Direction
Table 3-206 Signal processing in the receive direction of the EFP8 Step 1 Function Unit FE signal access unit Processing Flow l Receives/Transmits FE signals. l Performs restructuring, decoding, and serial/parallel conversion for FE signals. l Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping, CRC code checks, and Ethernet performance measurement for frame signals. 2 Ethernet processing unit l Receives/Transmits GE signals from the packet switching unit. l Performs QoS processing such as traffic classification and CAR for Ethernet data frames based on service categories. l Processes tags based on service categories. l Forwards data frames based on service categories.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 231

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Step 3 4

Function Unit Encapsulation unit Mapping unit

Processing Flow Performs GFP encapsulation for Ethernet frames. l Maps encapsulated data frames based on E1 virtual concatenation and then encapsulates the data frames to proper VC-12s. l Processes pointers to form TU-12s. l Performs byte interleaving for three TU-12s to form one TUG-2. l Performs byte interleaving for seven TUG-2s to form one TUG-3. l Performs byte interleaving for three TUG-3s to form one C-4. l Adds higher order path overhead bytes to one C-4 to form one VC-4.

5

Logic processing unit

Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals to the cross-connect unit.

Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction
Table 3-207 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the EFP8 Step 1 2 Function Unit Logic processing unit Mapping unit Processing Flow Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals from the cross-connect unit. l Demultiplexes three TUG-3s from one VC-4. l Demultiplexes seven TUG-2s from one TUG-3. l Demultiplexes three VC-12s from one TUG-2. l Extracts E1 payload from VC-12s and demaps the E1 payload based on E1 virtual concatenation. 3 4 Encapsulation unit Ethernet signal processing unit Decapsulates signals after demapping. l Processes tags based on service categories. l Performs QoS processing such as traffic shaping and queue scheduling for Ethernet data frames. l Performs frame delimitation, preamble adding, CRC code computing, and Ethernet performance measurement for Ethernet data frames. l Forwards Ethernet data frames to the FE signal access unit or the GE port that is connected to the packet switching unit according to the egress flag.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

232

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Step 5

Function Unit FE signal access unit

Processing Flow Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding for Ethernet data frames, and sends the generated FE signals to an Ethernet port.

Control Signal Processing
The Ethernet processing unit controls the FE signal access unit by using management control signals. The logic control unit controls the Ethernet processing unit, encapsulation unit, mapping unit, and logic processing unit over the control bus on the board. The logic control unit communicates with the system control and communication unit over the system control bus. The configuration data and query commands from the system control and communication unit are issued to the various units of the board through the logic control unit. The command response reported by each unit on the board, and alarms and performance events are reported to the system control and communication unit also through the logic control unit.

Power Supply Unit
The power supply unit performs the following functions: l l Receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48 V power supplies into +3.3 V power, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board. Receives one +3.3 V power supply from the backplane, which functions as a +3.3 V power backup for the other units on the board.

Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock signals to the other units on the board.

3.13.4 Front Panel
There are indicators and eight FE ports on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-76 Front panel of the EFP8
EFP8
STAT PROG

SRV

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

233

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Indicators
Table 3-208 Status explanation for indicators on the EFP8 Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working properly. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board. PROG Blinks on (green) and off at 100 ms intervals Blinks on (green) and off at 300 ms intervals On (green) Software is being loaded to the board during the power-on or resetting process of the board. The board software is in BIOS boot state during the power-on or resetting process of the board. l When the board is being powered on or being reset, the upper layer software is being initialized. l When the board is running, the software is running normally. Blinks on (red) and off at 100 ms intervals On (red) The BOOTROM self-check fails during the power-on or resetting process of the board. l The memory self-check fails or loading upper layer software fails during the power-on or resetting process of the board. l The logic file or upper layer software is lost during the running process of the board. l The pluggable storage card is faulty. SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off The system is working properly. A critical or major alarm occurs in the system. A minor alarm occurs in the system. There is no power supplied to the system.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

234

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Ports
Table 3-209 Description of the ports on the EFP8 Port FE1 to FE8 Description FE port Connector Type RJ45 Corresponding Cable 5.9 Network Cable

The FE electrical ports support the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes. For the pin assignments for the ports, see Table 3-210 and Table 3-211. For the front view of an RJ45 connector, see Figure 3-77. Figure 3-77 Front view of the RJ45 connector

87654321

Table 3-210 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI mode Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) Signal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TX+ TXRX+ Reserved Reserved RXReserved Reserved Function Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) Receiving data (+) Receiving data (-) -

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

235

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-211 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI-X mode Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) Signal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RX+ RXTX+ Reserved Reserved TXReserved Reserved Function Receiving data (+) Receiving data (-) Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) -

The RJ45 port has two indicators. For status explanation for these indicators, see Table 3-212. Table 3-212 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector Indicator LINK (green) State On Off ACT (yellow) On or blinking Off Meaning The link is working properly. The link is interrupted. The port is transmitting or receiving data. The port is not transmitting or receiving data.

3.13.5 Valid Slots
The EFP8 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the EFP8 on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. Figure 3-78 Slots for the EFP8 in the IDU chassis
Slot 5 (PIU) Slot 6 (FAN) Slot 3 (EFP8) Slot 1 Slot 4 (EFP8)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

236

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Figure 3-79 Logical slots of the EFP8 on the NMS
Slot 5 (PIU) Slot 6 (FAN) Slot 3 (EFP8) Slot 1 Slot 10 Slot 7 Slot 4 (EFP8) Slot 8 Slot 9

Table 3-213 Slot allocation Item Slot allocation priority Description Slot 4 > Slot 3

3.13.6 Board Parameter Settings
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the EFP8.

Related References
A.7.5.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_External Port A.7.5.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Internal Port A.7.5.3 Parameter Description: Type Field of QinQ Frames A.5.10.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs

3.13.7 Technical Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including the FE port performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

Performance of FE Electrical Ports
The FE electrical ports on the EFP8 comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists the main specifications for the FE electrical ports. Table 3-214 FE electrical interface performance Item Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) Performance 10 (10BASE-T) 100 (100BASE-TX) Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T) MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX) Interface type RJ45

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

237

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-215 Mechanical behavior Item Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight Performance 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm 0.6 kg

Power Consumption
Power consumption of the EFP8: < 13.5 W

3.14 SL1D/SL1DA
The SL1D/SL1DA is a 2xSTM-1 optical interface board. The SL1D/SL1DA can also provide STM-1 electrical ports by using SFP electrical modules. Besides all the functions provided by the SL1D, the SL1DA supports the K byte pass-through function.

3.14.1 Version Description
The functional version of the SL1D/SL1DA is SL91.

3.14.2 Functions and Features
The SL1D/SL1DA receives and transmits 2xSTM-1 optical/electrical signals. Table 3-216 lists the functions and features that the SL1D/SL1DA supports. Table 3-216 Functions and features Function and Feature Basic functions Port specifications Optical ports Description Receives and transmits 2xSTM-1 optical/electrical signals. l Adopts SFP optical modules and supports the optical ports of Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2 types. l The characteristics of all the optical ports comply with ITU-T G.957. Electrical ports l Adopts SFP electrical modules. l The performance of the electrical ports complies with ITU-T G.703. Protection Linear MSP SNCP
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Supported Supported
238

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature Clock Clock source Clock protection

Description Each line port provides one SDH line clock signal. Supports the following clock protection schemes: l Protection based on clock source priorities l Protection by running the SSM protocol l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol

DCN

Outband DCN

Each SDH line port can provide one DCC that is composed of three DCC bytes, nine DCC bytes, or twelve DCC bytes. Supported only by the SL1DA Supports the following loopback types: l Outloops at optical/electrical ports l Inloops at optical/electrical ports l Outloops on VC-4 paths l Inloops on VC-4 paths

K byte pass-through OM Loopback

Warm reset and cold reset Setting of the on/off state of a laser ALS functiona In-service FPGA loading Board manufacturing information query Board power consumption information query Detection and query of SFP module information

Supported Supported

Supported Supported Supported

Supported

Supported

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

239

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
NOTE

3 Boards

a: The ALS function is implemented as follows: l When the optical module detects the R_LOS alarm at the receive port and the alarm persists for 500 ms, the laser at the specific transmit port is automatically shut down. l The laser starts to launch laser pulses at a specified interval; that is, the laser emits light for two seconds and stops emission for 60 seconds. l After the R_LOS alarm is cleared, the laser works properly and emits continuous light.

3.14.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
This section describes how to process one STM-1 optical signal, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the SL1D/SL1DA.

Functional Block Diagram
Figure 3-80 Functional block diagram of the SL1D/SL1DA
Backplane

Logic processing unit

STM-1 STM-1

Service bus

Crossconnect unit System control and communication unit

Power supplied to the other units on the board Clock signal provided to the other units on the board Clock unit

Signal Processing in the Receive Direction
Table 3-217 Signal processing in the receive direction of the SL1D/SL1DA Step 1 Function Unit O/E conversion unit Processing Flow l Regenerates STM-1 optical signals. l Detects R_LOS alarms. l Converts STM-1 optical signals into electrical signals.

O/E conversion unit
Control bus

Logic control unit +3.3 V System clock signal

Overhead processing unit

Overhead bus

System control and communication unit

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

240

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Step 2

Function Unit Overhead processing unit

Processing Flow l Restores clock signals. l Aligns frames and detects R_LOS and R_LOF alarms. l Performs descrambling. l Checks B1 and B2 bytes and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Checks the M1 byte and bits 6-8 of the K2 byte, and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte and reports the SSM status to the system control and communication unit. l Extracts orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes including F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes and transmits the overhead signal to the logic processing unit. l Adjusts AU pointers and generates specific performance events. l Checks higher order path overheads and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals to the logic processing unit.

3

Logic processing unit

l Processes clock signals. l Ttransmits the overhead signals to the system control and communication unit. l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals to the cross-connect unit.

Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction
Table 3-218 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the SL1D/SL1DA Step 1 Function Unit Logic processing unit Processing Flow l Processes clock signals. l Processes overhead signals. l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals from the cross-connect unit. 2 Overhead processing unit l Sets higher order path overheads. l Sets AU pointers. l Sets multiplex section overhead bytes. l Sets regenerator section overhead bytes. l Performs scrambling.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

241

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Step 3

Function Unit O/E conversion unit

Processing Flow Converts electrical signals into optical signals.

Control Signal Processing
The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication unit. The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board over the control bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to the CPU unit over the control bus. The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system control and communication unit and enables FPGA loading.

Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock signals to the other units on the board.

3.14.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, STM-1 ports, and a label on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-81 Front panel of the SL1D (with optical ports)
SL1D
STAT SRV LOS1 LOS2
CLASS1 LASER PRODUCT

TX1/RX1

TX2/RX2

Figure 3-82 Front panel of the SL1DA (with optical ports)
SL1DA
STAT SRV LOS1 LOS2
CLASS1 LASER PRODUCT

TX1/RX1

TX2/RX2

Figure 3-83 Front panel of the SL1D (with electrical ports)
SL1D
STAT SRV LOS1 LOS2

SL1D

TX1/RX1

TX2/RX2

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

SL1D

242

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Figure 3-84 Front panel of the SL1DA (with electrical ports)
SL1DA
STAT SRV LOS1 LOS2

TX1/RX1

TX2/RX2

Indicators
Table 3-219 Status explanation for indicators on the SL1D/SL1DA Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working properly. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board. SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off LOS1 On (red) The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured. The first port of the SL1D/ SL1DA is reporting the R_LOS alarm. The first port of the SL1D/ SL1DA is free of R_LOS alarms. The second port of the SL1D/SL1DA is reporting the R_LOS alarm. The second port of the SL1D/SL1DA is free of R_LOS alarms.

Off

LOS2

On (red)

Off

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

243

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Ports
Table 3-220 Description of the ports Port TX1 RX1 Description Transmit port of the first STM-1 port Receive port of the first STM-1 port Transmit port of the second STM-1 port Receive port of the second STM-1 port Connector Type l SFP optical module: LC l SFP electrical module: SAA straight/female l SFP optical module: LC l SFP electrical module: SAA straight/female Corresponding Cable l SFP optical module: 5.5 Fiber Jumper l SFP electrical module: 5.6 STM-1 Cable

TX2 RX2

Labels
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel. The laser safety class label indicates that the laser safety class of the optical port is CLASS 1. That is, the maximum launched optical power of the optical port is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).

3.14.5 Valid Slots
The SL1D/SL1DA can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the SL1D/SL1DA on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. Figure 3-85 Slots for the SL1D/SL1DA in the IDU chassis
Slot 5 (PIU) Slot 6 (FAN) Slot 3 (SL1D/SL1DA) Slot 1 Slot 4 (SL1D/SL1DA)

Figure 3-86 Logical slots of the SL1D/SL1DA on the NMS
Slot 5 (PIU) Slot 6 (FAN) Slot 3 (SL1D/SL1DA) Slot 1 Slot 10 Slot 7 Slot 4 (SL1D/SL1DA) Slot 8 Slot 9

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

244

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-221 Slot allocation Item Slot allocation priority Description Slot 4 > Slot 3

3.14.6 Board Feature Code
The board feature code of the SL1D/SL1DA indicates the type of SFP module. The board feature code refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code. Table 3-222 Board feature code of the SL1D/SL1DA Feature Code 01 02 03 04 05 Type of Optical Module Ie-1 S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2 STM-1e Part Number of the Optical Module 34060287 34060276 34060281 34060282 34100104

3.14.7 Board Parameter Settings
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SL1D/SL1DA.

Related References
A.5.8.1 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces A.5.10.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead A.5.10.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs

3.14.8 Technical Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including the STM-1 optical/electrical port performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

STM-1 Optical Interface Performance
The performance of the STM-1 optical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.957/G.825. The following table provides the typical performance of the interface.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

245

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-223 STM-1 optical interface performance Item Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Classification code Fiber type Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength (nm) Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Performance 155520 Ie-1 Multi-mode fiber 2 1270 to 1380 -19 to -14 -30 -14 10 S-1.1 Single-mode fiber 15 1261 to 1360 -15 to -8 -28 -8 8.2 L-1.1 Single-mode fiber 40 1263 to 1360 -5 to 0 -34 -10 10 L-1.2 Single-mode fiber 80 1480 to 1580 -5 to 0 -34 -10 10

NOTE

The OptiX RTN 910 uses SFP optical modules for providing optical interfaces. You can use different types of SFP optical modules to provide optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.

STM-1 Electrical Interface Performance
The performance of the STM-1 electrical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.703. The following table provides the typical performance of the interface. Table 3-224 STM-1 electrical interface performance Item Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Code type Wire pair in each transmission direction Impedance (ohm) Performance 155520 CMI One coaxial wire pair 75

NOTE

The OptiX RTN 910 uses SFP electrical modules to provide electrical interfaces.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

246

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-225 Mechanical behavior Item Performance SL1D Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight SL1DA

19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm 0.30 kg

Power Consumption
Power consumption of the SL1D: < 3.4 W Power consumption of the SL1DA: < 3.3 W

3.15 ML1/MD1
The ML1 is a 16xSmart E1 service processing board. The MD1 is a 32xSmart E1 service processing board.

3.15.1 Version Description
The functional version of the ML1 is SL92. The functional version of the MD1 is SL91.

3.15.2 Functions and Features
The ML1 receives and transmits 16xE1 signals. The MD1 receives and transmits 32xE1 signals. Table 3-226 lists the functions and features that the ML1/MD1 supports. Table 3-226 Functions and features Function and Feature Description ML1 Basic functions E1 service categories MD1

Receives and transmits E1 signals, and supports flexible configuration of E1 service categories. Supports the following E1 service categories: l CES E1 l ATM/IMA E1

Port specifications
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

75-ohm/120ohm E1 port

16

32

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

247

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature

Description ML1 MD1

Fractional E1 ATM/IMA Maximum number of ATM services Maximum number of ATM connections ATM traffic management ATM encapsulation mode

Supports transparent service transmission at the 64 kbit/s level. 64

256

Supported Supports the following ATM encapsulation modes: l N-to-one VPC l N-to-one VCC l One-to-one VPC l One-to-one VCC

Maximum number of concatenated ATM cells ATM OAM

31

Supports F4 OAM (VP level) and F5 OAM (VC level), including the following functions: l Alarm indication signal (AIS)/Remote defect indication (RDI) l Continuity check test l Loopback test

Maximum number of IMA groups Maximum number of members in an IMA group CES Maximum number of services Encapsulation mode

16

32

16

16

32

Supports the following encapsulation modes: l CESoPSN l SAToP

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

248

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Function and Feature

Description ML1 MD1

Service category Compression of vacant slots Jitter buffering time (us) Packet loading time (us) CES ACR Retiming Clock protection OM Loopback Cold reset and warm reset PRBS tests at E1 ports Board manufacturing information query Board power consumption information query

Point-to-point services Supported (applicable to CESoPSN only) 375-16000 125-5000 Supported Supported Supports clock protection based on clock source priorities. Supports inloops and outloops at E1 tributary ports. Supported Supported Supported

Supported

3.15.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
This section describes how to process one E1 signal, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the ML1/MD1.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

249

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Functional Block Diagram
Figure 3-87 Functional block diagram of the ML1/MD1
Backplane

Logic processing unit

Signal interface unit

Service processing unit

E1

Service bus

GE bus

Packet switching unit

E1

Control bus

System control and communication unit

Logic control unit +3.3 V power supplied to the board +3.3 V backup power supplied to the board Clock signal provided to the other units of the board Power supply unit -48 V1 -48 V2 +3.3 V Clock unit System clock signal

Signal Processing in the Receive Direction
Table 3-227 Signal processing in the receive direction of the ML1/MD1 Step 1 Function Unit Signal interface unit Processing Flow l Receives external E1 signals. l Matches the resistance. l Equalizes signals. l Converts the level. l Recovers clock signals. l Buffers the received data. l Performs HDB3 decoding. 2 Service processing unit l Frames E1 signals. l Performs CES emulation or processes ATM/IMA services. l Encapsulates PWE3 services and converts the PWE3 services into Ethernet services.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

250

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Step 3

Function Unit Logic processing unit

Processing Flow l Implements the conversion from the internal service bus into the GE bus in the backplane. l Sends service signals to the packet switching unit.

Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction
Table 3-228 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the ML1/MD1 Step 1 Function Unit Logic processing unit Processing Flow l Receives service signals from the packet switching unit. l Implements the conversion from the GE bus in the backplane into the internal service bus. 2 Service processing unit l Decapsulates service signals. l Re-forms CES packets or processes ATM/IMA services. l Converts signals into E1 signals and sends the E1 signals to the signal interface unit. 3 Signal interface unit l Performs HDB3 coding. l Performs clock re-timing. l Performs pulse shaping. l Drives the line. l Sends E1 signals to a port.

Control Signal Processing
The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication unit. The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board over the control bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to the CPU unit over the control bus. The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system control and communication unit.

Power Supply Unit
The power supply unit performs the following functions: l l Receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48 V power supplies into +3.3 V power, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board. Receives one +3.3 V power supply from the backplane, which functions as a +3.3 V power backup for the other units on the board.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 251

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock signals to the other units on the board.

3.15.4 Front Panel
There are indicators and E1 ports on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-88 Front panel of the ML1
ML1
STAT SRV

16 E1 1

Figure 3-89 Front panel of the MD1
MD1
STAT SRV

16 1 17

32

Indicators
Table 3-229 Status explanation for indicators on the ML1/MD1 Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working properly. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board. SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services.
252

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Indicator

State Off

Meaning The services are not configured.

Ports
Table 3-230 Description of the ports on the ML1 Port 1 to 16 Description The first to sixteenth E1 ports Connector Type Anea 96 Corresponding Cable 5.7.1 E1 Cable Connected to the External Equipment or 5.7.2 E1 Cable Connected to the E1 Panel

Table 3-231 Description of the ports on the MD1 Port 1 to 16 Description The first to sixteenth E1 ports Connector Type Anea 96 Corresponding Cable 5.7.1 E1 Cable Connected to the External Equipment or 5.7.2 E1 Cable Connected to the E1 Panel 5.7.1 E1 Cable Connected to the External Equipment or 5.7.2 E1 Cable Connected to the E1 Panel

17 to 32

The seventeenth to thirty-second E1 ports

Anea 96

The ports on the ML1/MD1 use the Anea 96 connector. Figure 3-90 shows the front view of an Anea 96 connector and Table 3-232 provides the pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector. Figure 3-90 Front view of an Anea 96 connector
POS.1

POS.96

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

253

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-232 Pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Signal The first received E1 differential signal (+) The first received E1 differential signal (-) The second received E1 differential signal (+) The second received E1 differential signal (-) The third received E1 differential signal (+) The third received E1 differential signal (-) The fourth received E1 differential signal (+) The fourth received E1 differential signal (-) The fifth received E1 differential signal (+) The fifth received E1 differential signal (-) The sixth received E1 differential signal (+) The sixth received E1 differential signal (-) The seventh received E1 differential signal (+) The seventh received E1 differential signal (-) The eighth received E1 differential signal (+) The eighth received E1 differential signal (-) The ninth received E1 differential signal (+) The ninth received E1 differential signal (-) Pin 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 Signal The first transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The first transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The second transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The second transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The third transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The third transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The fourth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The fourth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The fifth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The fifth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The sixth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The sixth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The seventh transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The seventh transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The eighth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The eighth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The ninth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The ninth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

254

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Pin 19 20 21 22 23 24 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56

Signal The tenth received E1 differential signal (+) The tenth received E1 differential signal (-) The eleventh received E1 differential signal (+) The eleventh received E1 differential signal (-) The twelfth received E1 differential signal (+) The twelfth received E1 differential signal (-) The thirteenth received E1 differential signal (+) The thirteenth received E1 differential signal (-) The fourteenth received E1 differential signal (+) The fourteenth received E1 differential signal (-) The fifteenth received E1 differential signal (+) The fifteenth received E1 differential signal (-) The sixteenth received E1 differential signal (+) The sixteenth received E1 differential signal (-)

Pin 43 44 45 46 47 48 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80

Signal The tenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The tenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The eleventh transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The eleventh transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The twelfth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The twelfth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The thirteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The thirteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The fourteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The fourteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The fifteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The fifteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The sixteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The sixteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)

3.15.5 Valid Slots
The ML1/MD1 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the ML1/MD1 on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. Figure 3-91 Slots for the ML1/MD1 in the IDU chassis
Slot 5 (PIU) Slot 6 (FAN) Slot 3 (ML1/MD1) Slot 1 Slot 4 (ML1/MD1)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

255

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Figure 3-92 Logical slots of the ML1/MD1 on the NMS
Slot 5 (PIU) Slot 6 (FAN) Slot 3 (ML1/MD1) Slot 1 Slot 10 Slot 7 Slot 4 (ML1/MD1) Slot 8 Slot 9

Table 3-233 Slot allocation Item Slot allocation priority Description Slot 4 > Slot 3

3.15.6 Board Feature Code
The board feature code of the ML1/MD1 indicates the port impedance. The board feature code refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code. Table 3-234 Board feature code of the ML1/MD1 Board Feature Code A B Port Impedance (Ohm) 75 120

3.15.7 Board Parameter Settings
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the ML1/MD1.

Related References
A.5.2.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Basic Attributes A.5.2.2 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Advanced Attributes

3.15.8 Technical Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including the E1 port performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

256

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

E1 Interface Performance
Table 3-235 E1 interface performance Item Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Code pattern Impedance (ohm) Wire pair in each transmission direction Performance 2048 HDB3 75 One coaxial wire pair 120 One symmetrical wire pair

Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-236 Mechanical behavior Item Performance ML1 Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight MD1

19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm 0.45 kg 0.50 kg

Power Consumption
Power consumption of the ML1: < 7.0 W Power consumption of the MD1: < 12.2 W

3.16 SP3S/SP3D
The SP3S is a 16xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm tributary board. The SP3D is a 32xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm tributary board.

3.16.1 Version Description
The SP3S has two functional versions: SL91SP3SVER.B and SL91SP3SVER.C. The SP3D also has two functional versions: TNH1SP3DVER.B and TNH1SP3DVER.C. The difference between VER.B and VER.C is that path indication on the front panel is optimized and the board power consumption is reduced.

3.16.2 Functions and Features
The SP3S receives and transmits 16xE1 signals. The SP3D receives and transmits 32xE1 signals.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 257

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-237 lists the functions and features that the SP3S/SP3D supports. Table 3-237 Functions and features Function and Feature Description SP3S Basic functions Port specifications Clock 75-ohm/120ohm E1 port Clock source Clock protection E1 retiming function OM Loopback Cold reset and warm reset PRBS tests at E1 ports Board manufacturing information query Board power consumption information query SP3D

Receives and transmits E1 signals. 16 32

Supports a tributary clock source extracted from the first or fifth E1 signal. Supports clock protection based on clock source priorities. Supported Supports inloops and outloops at E1 tributary ports. Supported Supported Supported

Supported

3.16.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
This section describes how to process one E1 signal, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the SP3S/SP3D.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

258

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Functional Block Diagram
Figure 3-93 Functional block diagram of the SP3S/SP3D
Backplane

Mapping/Demapping unit

E1

E1 signal

Service bus

Logic processing unit

Interface unit

Codec unit

Cross-connect unit

E1

Control bus

System control and communication unit

Logic control unit +3.3 V power supplied to the board +3.3 V backup power supplied to the board Clock signal provided to the other units on the board Clock unit Power supply unit -48 V1 -48 V2 +3.3 V System clock signal

NOTE

The power supply units on the SP3SVER.C and SP3DVER.C boards do not support conversion from -48 V power into +3.3 V power.

Signal Processing in the Receive Direction
Table 3-238 Signal processing in the receive direction of the SP3S/SP3D Step 1 2 Function Unit Interface unit Codec unit Processing Flow External E1 signals are coupled by the transformer and then transmitted to the board. l Equalizes the received signals. l Recovers clock signals. l Detects T_ALOS alarms. l Performs HDB3 decoding.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

259

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Step 3

Function Unit Mapping/ Demapping unit

Processing Flow l Asynchronously maps signals into C-12s. l Adds path overhead bytes to C-12s to form VC-12s. l Processes pointers to form TU-12s. l Performs byte interleaving for three TU-12s to form one TUG-2. l Performs byte interleaving for seven TUG-2s to form one TUG-3. l Performs byte interleaving for three TUG-3s to form one C-4. l Adds higher order path overhead bytes to one C-4 to form one VC-4.

4

Logic processing unit

l Processes clock signals. l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals to the main and standby cross-connect units.

Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction
Table 3-239 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the SP3S/SP3D Step 1 Function Unit Logic processing unit Processing Flow l Processes clock signals. l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals from the cross-connect unit. l Demultiplexes three TUG-3s from one VC-4. l Demultiplexes seven TUG-2s from one TUG-3. l Demultiplexes three VC-12s from one TUG-2. l Processes path overheads and pointers and detects specific alarms and performance events. l Extracts E1 signals. 3 4 Codec unit Interface unit Performs HDB3 coding. E1 signals are coupled by the transformer and then transmitted to an external cable.

2

Mapping/ Demapping unit

Control Signal Processing
The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication unit. The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board over the control bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to the CPU unit over the control bus.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 260

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system control and communication unit.

Power Supply Unit
The power supply unit performs the following functions: l Receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48 V power into +3.3 V power, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board. The power supply units on the SP3SVER.C and SP3DVER.C boards do not support conversion from -48 V power into +3.3 V power. Receives one +3.3 V power supply from the backplane, which functions as a +3.3 V power backup for the other units on the board.

l

Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock signals to the other units on the board.

3.16.4 Front Panel
There are indicators and E1 ports on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-94 Front panel of the SP3SVER.B
SP3S
STAT SRV

E1 1-16

Figure 3-95 Front panel of the SP3SVER.C
SP3S
STAT SRV

E1 1

16

Figure 3-96 Front panel of the SP3DVER.B
SP3D
STAT SRV

21 1 22

42

Figure 3-97 Front panel of the SP3DVER.C
SP3D
STAT SRV

16 1 17

32

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

SP3D

SP3S

261

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Indicators
Table 3-240 Status explanation for indicators on the SP3S/SP3D Indicator STAT State On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working properly. The board hardware is faulty. l The board is not working. l The board is not created. l There is no power supplied to the board. SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured.

Ports
Table 3-241 Description of the ports on the SP3S(VER.B and VER.C) Port 1-16 Description The first to sixteenth E1 ports Connector Type Anea 96 Corresponding Cable 5.7.1 E1 Cable Connected to the External Equipment or 5.7.2 E1 Cable Connected to the E1 Panel

Table 3-242 Description of the ports on the SP3DVER.B Port 1-21 Description The first to sixteenth E1 ports Connector Type Anea 96 Corresponding Cable 5.7.1 E1 Cable Connected to the External Equipment or 5.7.2 E1 Cable Connected to the E1 Panel
262

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Port 22-42

Description The seventeenth to thirty-second E1 ports

Connector Type Anea 96

Corresponding Cable 5.7.1 E1 Cable Connected to the External Equipment or 5.7.2 E1 Cable Connected to the E1 Panel

NOTE

On the OptiX RTN 910, only ports 1-16 and 22-37 of the SP3D are used. Ports 1-16 correspond to E1 signals 1-16 and ports 22-37 correspond to E1 signals 17-32.

Table 3-243 Description of the ports on the SP3DVER.C Port 1-16 Description The first to sixteenth E1 ports Connector Type Anea 96 Corresponding Cable 5.7.1 E1 Cable Connected to the External Equipment or 5.7.2 E1 Cable Connected to the E1 Panel 5.7.1 E1 Cable Connected to the External Equipment or 5.7.2 E1 Cable Connected to the E1 Panel

17-32

The seventeenth to thirty-second E1 ports

Anea 96

The ports on the SP3S/SP3D use Anea 96 connectors. Figure 3-98 shows the front view of an Anea 96 connector and Table 3-244 provides the pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector. Figure 3-98 Front view of an Anea 96 connector
POS.1

POS.96

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

263

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-244 Pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Signal The first received E1 differential signal (+) The first received E1 differential signal (-) The second received E1 differential signal (+) The second received E1 differential signal (-) The third received E1 differential signal (+) The third received E1 differential signal (-) The fourth received E1 differential signal (+) The fourth received E1 differential signal (-) The fifth received E1 differential signal (+) The fifth received E1 differential signal (-) The sixth received E1 differential signal (+) The sixth received E1 differential signal (-) The seventh received E1 differential signal (+) The seventh received E1 differential signal (-) The eighth received E1 differential signal (+) The eighth received E1 differential signal (-) The ninth received E1 differential signal (+) The ninth received E1 differential signal (-) Pin 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 Signal The first transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The first transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The second transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The second transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The third transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The third transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The fourth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The fourth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The fifth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The fifth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The sixth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The sixth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The seventh transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The seventh transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The eighth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The eighth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The ninth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The ninth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

264

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Pin 19 20 21 22 23 24 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56

Signal The tenth received E1 differential signal (+) The tenth received E1 differential signal (-) The eleventh received E1 differential signal (+) The eleventh received E1 differential signal (-) The twelfth received E1 differential signal (+) The twelfth received E1 differential signal (-) The thirteenth received E1 differential signal (+) The thirteenth received E1 differential signal (-) The fourteenth received E1 differential signal (+) The fourteenth received E1 differential signal (-) The fifteenth received E1 differential signal (+) The fifteenth received E1 differential signal (-) The sixteenth received E1 differential signal (+) The sixteenth received E1 differential signal (-)

Pin 43 44 45 46 47 48 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80

Signal The tenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The tenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The eleventh transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The eleventh transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The twelfth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The twelfth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The thirteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The thirteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The fourteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The fourteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The fifteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The fifteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The sixteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The sixteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)

3.16.5 Valid Slots
The SP3S/SP3D can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the SP3S/SP3D on the NMS are the same as the physical slots. Figure 3-99 Slots for the SP3S/SP3D in the IDU chassis
Slot 5 (PIU) Slot 6 (FAN) Slot 3 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 1 Slot 4 (SP3S/SP3D)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

265

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Figure 3-100 Logical slots of the SP3S/SP3D on the NMS
Slot 5 (PIU) Slot 6 (FAN) Slot 3 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 1 Slot 10 Slot 7 Slot 4 (SP3S/SP3D) Slot 8 Slot 9

Table 3-245 Slot allocation Item Slot allocation priority Description Slot 4 > Slot 3

3.16.6 Board Feature Code
The board feature code of the SP3S/SP3D indicates the E1 port impedance. The board feature code refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code. Table 3-246 Board feature code of the SP3S/SP3D Board Feature Code A B Port Impedance (Ohm) 120 75

3.16.7 Board Parameter Settings
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SP3S/SP3D.

Related References
A.5.9.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports A.5.10.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs

3.16.8 Technical Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including the E1 port performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

266

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

E1 Interface Performance
Table 3-247 E1 interface performance Item Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Code pattern Impedance (ohm) Wire pair in each transmission direction Performance 2048 HDB3 75 One coaxial wire pair 120 One symmetrical wire pair

Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-248 Mechanical behavior Item Performance SP3SVER.B Dimensio ns (H x W x D) Weight SP3SVER.C SP3DVER.B SP3SVER.C

19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

0.50 kg

0.40 kg

0.64 kg

0.54 kg

Power Consumption
Power consumption of the SP3SVER.B: < 5.7 W Power consumption of the SP3SVER.C: < 4.8 W Power consumption of the SP3DVER.B: < 9.6 W Power consumption of the SP3DVER.C: < 8.3 W

3.17 PIU
The PIU is the power interface board and can access two -48 V DC or -60 V DC power supplies.

3.17.1 Version Description
The functional version of the PIU is TNC1.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

267

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

3.17.2 Functions and Features
The PIU supports power access, power protection, surge protection status monitoring, and information reporting. Table 3-249 lists the functions and features that the PIU supports. Table 3-249 Functions and features Function and Feature Basic functions Power access Power output Protection Protection Power protection Surge protection Board power consumption information query Surge protection status monitoring Description One PIU is provided and the PIU accesses two -48 V DC or -60 V DC power inputs. The PIU provides other boards with -48 V power. Supports 1+1 HSB protection. l Protection against overcurrent l Protection against short circuits Supported Supported Supported

3.17.3 Working Principle
The PIU consists of the protection and detection unit, EMI filtering unit, and communication control unit.

Functional Block Diagram
Figure 3-101 shows the functional block diagram of the PIU. Figure 3-101 Functional block diagram of the PIU
Backplane -48 V/-60 V -48 V 1 Board operating in distributed power supply mode

Protection and detection unit

EMI filtering unit

-48 V/-60 V

Protection and detection unit

EMI filtering unit

-48 V 2 Board operating in distributed power supply mode

Detection signal Communicatio n control unit

Detection signal

System control and communication unit +3.3 V

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

268

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Protection and Detection Unit
The protection and detection unit primarily protects and detects the PIU. It performs the following functions: l l l Provides protection against lightning strike and surge. Detects whether the surge-protection circuit fails and reports a surge-protection failure alarm. Monitors PIU temperature in real time and reports it to the system control and communication unit through the communication control unit.

EMI Filtering Unit
The EMI filtering unit performs electro-magnetic interference (EMI) filtering.

Communication Control Unit
The communication control unit achieves communication between the system control and communication unit and the PIU and reports the following information to the system control and communication unit: l l l l PIU manufacturing information PCB version information Surge-protection failure information PIU temperature

3.17.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, power access ports, and a label on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-102 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PIU. Figure 3-102 Front panel of the PIU
PIU
NEG1 RTN1 NEG2 RTN2 (-) (+) (-) (+)

-48V

-60V

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

PWRA

PWRB

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

269

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Indicators
Table 3-250 Status explanation for indicators on the PIU Indicator PWRA Status On (green) Off PWRB On (green) Off Description The power supply is connected. There is no power supplied to the PIU or the power supply is connected incorrectly. The power supply is connected. There is no power supplied to the PIU or the power supply is connected incorrectly.

Ports
The PIU accesses two power supplies. Table 3-251 lists the types of the ports on the PIU and their respective usage. Table 3-251 Description of the ports on the PIU Port NEG1 (-) RTN1 (+) NEG2 (-) RTN2 (+) Port Description -48 V power input port BGND power input port -48 V power input port BGND power input port Connector Type Termi-blok stacking connector, 4-pin Corresponding Cable 5.1 Power Cable

Labels
Caution label for power operations: prompting you to read the operation guide before any power operations.

CAUTION
Do not remove or install a PIU while the equipment is powered on. That is, turn off all the power supplies of the PIU before removing or installing it.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

270

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

3.17.5 Valid Slots
The PIU can be inserted in slot 5. The logical slot of the PIU on the NMS is the same as the physical slot. Figure 3-103 Slot for the PIU in the IDU chassis
Slot 5 (PIU) Slot 6 Slot 3 Slot 1 Slot 4

Figure 3-104 Logical slot for the logical board of the PIU
Slot 5 (PIU) Slot 6 Slot 3 Slot 1 Slot 10 Slot 7 Slot 4 Slot 8 Slot 9

3.17.6 Technical Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including input voltage, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption. Table 3-252 lists the technical specifications for the PIU. Table 3-252 Technical specifications for the PIU Item Dimensions Weight Power consumption Input voltage Performance 21.0 mm x 41.4 mm x 224.8 mm 0.12 kg < 0.5 W -38.4 V to -72.0 V

3.18 FAN
The FAN is a fan board that dissipates heat generated in the chassis through air cooling.

3.18.1 Version Description
The functional version of the FAN is TNC1.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

271

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

3.18.2 Functions and Features
The FAN adjusts the fan rotating speed, and detects and reports the fan status. Table 3-253 lists the functions and features that the FAN supports. Table 3-253 Functions and features Function and Feature Power input Description Accesses one +12 V power input from the system control, switching, and timing board. 3 Supported Provides soft-start for the power supply of the fans and protects fans against overcurrent. l Reports the information about the fan rotating speed, alarms, version number, and board in-position status. l Provides alarm indicators. l Supports board power consumption information query

Number of fans Intelligent fan speed adjustment Protection OM

NOTE

l When one fan fails, it is recommended that you replace it within 96 hours if the ambient temperature reaches 40°C; it is recommended that you replace it within 24 hours if the ambient temperature exceeds 40°C. l When more than one fan fails, it is recommended that you replace the failed fans immediately.

3.18.3 Working Principle
The FAN consists of the fan unit, power unit, and communication monitoring unit. Figure 3-105 shows the functional block diagram of the FAN. Figure 3-105 Functional block diagram of the FAN
Backplane

Fan unit

+12 V

+12 V Power unit +12 V

Communication detection signal Communication detection signal

Communication monitoring unit

System control and communication unit

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

272

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Power Unit
l l Receives +12 V power from the backplane. Provides the fan power with the following functions: soft-start, filtering, and overcurrent protection.

Fan Unit
Three air-cooling fans dissipate the heat generated by the system.

Communication Monitoring Unit
l Detects the manufacturing information, PCB version information, and environmental temperature of the FAN, and reports the information to the system control and communication unit. Detects the fan rotating speed and adjusts the speed according to the pulse-width modulation signal from the system control and communication unit. The system adjusts the fan rotating speed based on the working temperature, as listed in Table 3-254. Table 3-254 Adjustment of the fan rotating speed Working Temperature ≤ 25°C 25°C to 60°C ≥ 60°C Rotating Speed 4800 rounds/minute Linear increase in accordance with the temperature 16000 rounds/minute

l

3.18.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, an ESD wrist strap jack, and labels on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-106 shows the appearance of the front panel of the FAN. Figure 3-106 Front panel of the FAN

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

273

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Indicators
Table 3-255 Status explanation for indicators on the FAN Indicator FAN State On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The fan is working properly. The fan is faulty. The fan is not powered on or is not installed.

ESD Wrist Strap Jack
An ESD wrist strap needs to be connected to the ESD wrist strap jack to achieve the proper grounding of the human body.

Labels
The front panel of the FAN has the following labels: l l ESD protection label: indicates that the equipment is static-sensitive. Fan warning label: warns you not to touch fan leaves when a fan is rotating.

3.18.5 Valid Slots
The FAN can be inserted in slot 6 in the IDU chassis. The logical slot of the FAN on the NMS is the same as the physical slot. Figure 3-107 Slot for the FAN in the IDU chassis
Slot 5 Slot 6 (FAN) Slot 3 Slot 1 Slot 4

Figure 3-108 Logical slot of the FAN on the NMS
Slot 5 Slot 6 (FAN) Slot 3 Slot 1 Slot 10 Slot 7 Slot 4 Slot 8 Slot 9

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

274

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

3.18.6 Technical Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including board mechanical behavior and board power consumption. Table 3-256 lists the technical specifications for the FAN. Table 3-256 Technical specifications for the FAN Item Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight Power consumption Performance 28.5 mm x 42.0 mm x 217.6 mm 0.200 kg < 2.3 W (room temperature) < 17 W (high temperature)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

275

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

4 Accessories

4
About This Chapter

Accessories

The accessories of the OptiX RTN 910 include the E1 panel and the power distribution unit (PDU). Select appropriate accessories based on the requirements. 4.1 E1 Panel When an IDU is installed in a 19-inch cabinet, install an E1 panel in the cabinet and this E1 panel functions as a DDF for the IDU. 4.2 PDU A PDU is installed on the top of a 19-inch cabinet to distribute the input power supply to devices in the cabinet.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

276

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

4 Accessories

4.1 E1 Panel
When an IDU is installed in a 19-inch cabinet, install an E1 panel in the cabinet and this E1 panel functions as a DDF for the IDU. The dimensions (H x W x D) of the E1 panel are 42 mm x 483 mm x 33 mm. An E1 panel provides cable distribution for 16 E1s.

Front Panel Diagram
Figure 4-1 Front panel of an E1 panel
R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 R10 R11 R12 R13 R14 R15 R16 1-8 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 T16 9-16

Ports
Table 4-1 Port description of an E1 panel Port T1-T16 Description Transmit ports for the first to sixteenth E1 ports (connected to external equipment) Receive ports for the first to sixteenth E1 ports (connected to external equipment) The first to eighth E1 ports (connected to an IDU) The ninth to sixteenth E1 ports (connected to an IDU) Connecting a PGND cable DB37 Connector Type BNC

R1-R16

1-8 9-16 Grounding bolt

NOTE

The port impedance of each E1 port on an E1 panel is 75 ohms.

Figure 4-2 shows the front view of an E1 port that is connected to an IDU. Table 4-2 provides the pin assignments for the E1 port.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

277

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

4 Accessories

Figure 4-2 Front view of an E1 port (E1 panel)

Pos. 1

Pos. 37

Table 4-2 Pin assignments for an E1 port (E1 panel) Pin 20 2 22 4 24 6 26 8 36 17 34 15 32 13 Signal The first E1 received differential signal (+) The first E1 received differential signal (-) The second E1 received differential signal (+) The second E1 received differential signal (-) The third E1 received differential signal (+) The third E1 received differential signal (-) The fourth E1 received differential signal (+) The fourth E1 received differential signal (-) The fifth E1 received differential signal (+) The fifth E1 received differential signal (-) The sixth E1 received differential signal (+) The sixth E1 received differential signal (-) The seventh E1 received differential signal (+) The seventh E1 received differential signal (-) Pin 21 3 23 5 25 7 27 9 35 16 33 14 31 12 Signal The first E1 transmitted differential signal (+) The first E1 transmitted differential signal (-) The second E1 transmitted differential signal (+) The second E1 transmitted differential signal (-) The third E1 transmitted differential signal (+) The third E1 transmitted differential signal (-) The fourth E1 transmitted differential signal (+) The fourth E1 transmitted differential signal (-) The fifth E1 transmitted differential signal (+) The fifth E1 transmitted differential signal (-) The sixth E1 transmitted differential signal (+) The sixth E1 transmitted differential signal (-) The seventh E1 transmitted differential signal (+) The seventh E1 transmitted differential signal (-)
278

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

4 Accessories

Pin 30 11 Others

Signal The eighth E1 received differential signal (+) The eighth E1 received differential signal (-) Reserved

Pin 29 10 -

Signal The eighth E1 transmitted differential signal (+) The eighth E1 transmitted differential signal (-) -

4.2 PDU
A PDU is installed on the top of a 19-inch cabinet to distribute the input power supply to devices in the cabinet.

4.2.1 Front Panel
There are input power terminals, PGND terminals, output power terminals, and power switches on the front panel of a PDU.

Front Panel Diagram
Figure 4-3 Front panel of the PDU
1 2 3 4

1

2

3

4

OUTPUT

A

B
ON
RTN1(+) RTN2(+) NEG1(-) NEG2(-)

1

2

3

4

OUTPUT

ON

OFF
20A 20A 20A 20A

INPUT

OFF
20A 20A 20A 20A

5

6

1. Output power terminals (A) 3. Input power terminals 5. Power switches (A)

2. PGND terminals 4. Output power terminals (B) 6. Power switches (B)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

279

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

4 Accessories

Ports
Table 4-3 Ports on the PDU Position Output power terminals (A) PGND terminals Input power terminals Port + Wiring terminal for a two-hole OT terminal RTN1(+) RTN2(+) NEG1(-) NEG2(-) Output power terminals (B) Power switches (A) + 20 A Description Power output (+) Power output (-) For connecting PGND cables

The first power input (+) The second power input (+) The first power input (-) The second power input (-) Power output (+) Power output (-) Switches for power outputs The fuse capacity is 20 A. The switches from the left to the right correspond to output power terminals 1 to 4 on side A.

Power switches (B)

20 A

Switches for power outputs The fuse capacity is 20 A. The switches from the left to the right correspond to output power terminals 1 to 4 on side B.

4.2.2 Functions and Working Principle
After implementing simple power distribution, a PDU feeds power to devices in a cabinet.

Functions
l l l l The PDU supports two -48 V/-60 V DC power inputs. Each input power supply provides four outputs. The fuse capacity of the switch for each power output is 20 A. The PDU supports DC-C and DC-I power distribution.

Working Principle
A PDU consists of input terminals, output terminals, and circuit breakers and it performs simple distribution operations for the input power.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 280

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

4 Accessories

Figure 4-4 Functional block diagram of the PDU

OUTPUT A
+ SW1 + + SW3 + SW4 1 2

INPUT
RTN1(+) BGND RTN2(+) NEG1(-) BGND NEG2(-)

SW2

3 4

OUTPUT B
+ SW1 + + SW4 + SW4 1 2

SW2

3 4

PGND

4.2.3 Power Distribution Mode
A PDU supports DC-C and DC-I power distribution. The DC-C power distribution is the default mode. A short-circuit copper bar inside a PDU controls the power distribution mode of the PDU.

DC-C Power Distribution Mode
To use DC-C power distribution, use the short-circuit copper bar to short-circuit terminal RTN1 (+), terminal RTN2(+), and PGND terminals.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

281

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

4 Accessories

Figure 4-5 Interior of the PDU in DC-C mode

DC-I Power Distribution Mode
To use DC-I power distribution, remove the short-circuit copper bar. Figure 4-6 Interior of the PDU in DC-I mode

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

282

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

5 Cables

5
About This Chapter

Cables

This chapter describes the purpose, appearance, and pin assignments of various cables used on the IDU 910. 5.1 Power Cable A power cable connects the PIU board in the IDU to a power supply device (for example, a PDU on top of the cabinet) for access of the -48 V power to the IDU. 5.2 PGND Cable PGND cables are available in two categories: IDU PGND cables and E1 panel PGND cables. 5.3 IF Jumper An IF jumper connects the IDU to an IF cable. The IF jumper works with the IF cable to transmit IF signals and O&M signals in addition to supplying -48 V power between the ODU and the IDU. 5.4 XPIC Cable An XPIC cable transmits reference IF signals between the two XPIC boards in an XPIC workgroup to implement the XPIC function. 5.5 Fiber Jumper A fiber jumper transmits optical signals. One end of the fiber jumper has an LC/PC connector that is connected to an SDH optical port or GE optical port on the OptiX RTN 910. The connector at the other end of the fiber jumper depends on the type of the optical port on the equipment to be connected. 5.6 STM-1 Cable An STM-1 cable transmits/receives STM-1 signals. One end of the STM-1 cable has an SAA connector that is connected to an STM-1 electrical port. The connector at the other end of the STM-1 cable is connected to a DDF and needs to be prepared on site as required. 5.7 E1 Cables E1 cables are available in two categories: E1 cable (Anea 96) connected to the external equipment and E1 cable connected to the E1 panel. 5.8 Orderwire Cable An orderwire cable connects an orderwire phone to the equipment. Both ends of the orderwire cable are terminated with an RJ11 connector. One end of the orderwire cable is connected to the
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 283

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

5 Cables

PHONE port on the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC. The other end of the orderwire cable is connected to the port of the orderwire phone. 5.9 Network Cable A network cable connects two pieces of Ethernet equipment. Both ends of the network cable are terminated with an RJ45 connector.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

284

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

5 Cables

5.1 Power Cable
A power cable connects the PIU board in the IDU to a power supply device (for example, a PDU on top of the cabinet) for access of the -48 V power to the IDU.

Cable Diagram
Figure 5-1 Power cable
Single cord end terminal PGND cable (black)

-48 V power cable (blue) 1U DC connector

Table 5-1 Power cable specifications Model 2.5 mm2 power cable and terminal Cable Power cable, 450 V/ 750 V, H07Z-K-2.5 mm2, blue/black, low smoke zero halogen cable Terminal Common terminal, single cord end terminal, conductor cross section 2.5 mm2, 12.5 A, insertion depth 8 mm, blue

NOTE

For the OptiX RTN 910, power cables with a 2.5 mm2 cross-sectional area can extend for a maximum distance of 50 m.

5.2 PGND Cable
PGND cables are available in two categories: IDU PGND cables and E1 panel PGND cables.

5.2.1 IDU PGND Cable
An IDU PGND cable connects the left ground point of the IDU to the ground point of external equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the IDU and external equipment share the same ground.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 285

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

5 Cables

Cable Diagram
Figure 5-2 IDU PGND cable
Main label 1 Cable tie H.S.tube

2

L
1. Bare crimping terminal, OT 2. Bare crimping terminal, OT

Pin Assignments
None.

5.2.2 E1 Panel PGND Cable
An E1 panel PGND cable connects the right ground nut of the E1 panel to the ground point of external equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the E1 panel and external equipment share the same ground.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

286

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

5 Cables

Cable Diagram
Figure 5-3 E1 panel PGND cable
Main label 1

L Bare crimping terminal, OT

Pin Assignments
None.

5.3 IF Jumper
An IF jumper connects the IDU to an IF cable. The IF jumper works with the IF cable to transmit IF signals and O&M signals in addition to supplying -48 V power between the ODU and the IDU. An IF jumper is a 2 m RG-223 cable. One end of the IF jumper has a type-N connector that is connected to the IF cable. The other end of the IF jumper has a TNC connector that is connected to the IF board.
NOTE

l A 5D IF cable is directly connected to the IF board; therefore, an IF jumper is not required. l If an RG-8U or 1/2-inch IF cable is used, an IF jumper is required to connect the RG-8U or 1/2-inch IF cable to the IF board.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

287

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

5 Cables

Cable Diagram
Figure 5-4 IF jumper
1 H.S.tube 2 PCS L = 3 cm 2

2000 mm 1. RF coaxial cable connector, TNC, male 2. RF coaxial cable connector, type-N, female

Pin Assignments
None.

5.4 XPIC Cable
An XPIC cable transmits reference IF signals between the two XPIC boards in an XPIC workgroup to implement the XPIC function. An XPIC cable is an RG316 cable that has SMA connectors at both ends. One end of the XPIC cable is connected to the X-IN port of one XPIC board in an XPIC workgroup, and the other end of the XPIC cable is connected to the X-OUT port of the other XPIC board in the same XPIC work group. When the XPIC function is disabled for XPIC boards, an XPIC cable is used to connect the XIN port to the X-OUT port on the same XPIC board to loop back signals. XPIC cables are available in the following types: l l XPIC cables with angle connectors: These XPIC cables are long and used to connect two XPIC boards in the horizontal direction. XPIC cables with straight connectors: These XPIC cables are short and used to connect two XPIC boards in the vertical direction. These XPIC cables are also used to connect the X-IN port to the X-OUT port on the same XPIC board to loop back signals.

The OptiX RTN 910 uses XPIC cables with angle connectors.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

288

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

5 Cables

Cable Diagram
Figure 5-5 XPIC cable
1 1

L1
1. Coaxial cable connector, SMA, angle, male

Pin Assignments
None.

5.5 Fiber Jumper
A fiber jumper transmits optical signals. One end of the fiber jumper has an LC/PC connector that is connected to an SDH optical port or GE optical port on the OptiX RTN 910. The connector at the other end of the fiber jumper depends on the type of the optical port on the equipment to be connected.

Types of Fiber Jumpers
Table 5-2 Types of fiber jumpers Connector 1 LC/PC Connector 2 FC/PC Cable 2 mm single-mode fiber 2 mm multi-mode fiber LC/PC SC/PC 2 mm single-mode fiber 2 mm multi-mode fiber LC/PC LC/PC 2 mm single-mode fiber 2 mm multi-mode fiber

NOTE

For the OptiX RTN 910, multi-mode fibers are required to connect to 1000BASE-SX GE optical ports.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

289

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

5 Cables

Fiber Connectors
The following figures show three common types of fiber connectors, namely, LC/PC connector, SC/PC connector, and FC/PC connector. Figure 5-6 LC/PC connector

Figure 5-7 SC/PC connector

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

290

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

5 Cables

Figure 5-8 FC/PC connector

5.6 STM-1 Cable
An STM-1 cable transmits/receives STM-1 signals. One end of the STM-1 cable has an SAA connector that is connected to an STM-1 electrical port. The connector at the other end of the STM-1 cable is connected to a DDF and needs to be prepared on site as required.

Cable Diagram
Figure 5-9 STM-1 cable

1. Coaxial connector, SAA straight/male

2. Main label

3. Coaxial cable

Pin Assignments
None.

Cable Specifications
Item Connector Cable model
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Description Coaxial connector, SAA connector (1.0/2.3), 75-ohm straight/male Coaxial cable, 75-ohm, 3.9 mm, 2.1 mm, 0.34 mm, shielded
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 291

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

5 Cables

Item Number of cores Core diameter

Description One Diameter of the shield layer (3.9 mm), diameter of the internal insulation layer (2.1 mm), diameter of the internal conductor (0.34 mm) 10 m CM

Length Fireproof class

5.7 E1 Cables
E1 cables are available in two categories: E1 cable (Anea 96) connected to the external equipment and E1 cable connected to the E1 panel.

5.7.1 E1 Cable Connected to the External Equipment
An E1 cable that is connected to the external equipment is used when the IDU needs to directly receive E1 signals from or transmits E1 signals to external equipment. Each E1 cable that is connected to the external equipment can transmit a maximum of 16 E1 signals. There are two types of E1 cables that are connected to the external equipment: 75-ohm coaxial cables and 120-ohm twisted pair cables.

Cable Diagram
Figure 5-10 E1 cable connected to the external equipment
Main label 1 W

X1

A ViewA Pos.96 Cable connector, Anea, 96-pin,female

Pos.1

1. Cable connector, Anea 96, female

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

292

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
NOTE

5 Cables

l A 120-ohm E1 cable and a 75-ohm E1 cable have the same appearance. l The core diameter of a 75-ohm E1 cable is 1.6 mm. Therefore, use a crimping tool with an opening of 2.5 mm (0.098-inch) to attach the end of the 75-ohm E1 cable on the DDF frame with a 75-1-1 coaxial connector.

Pin Assignments
Table 5-3 Pin assignments for a 75-ohm E1 cable Pin W Core 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 18 17 20 19 22
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Serial No. 1

Remark s

Pin

W Core Serial No. 2

Remark s

Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring

R0

25 26

Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring

T0

3

R1

27 28

4

T1

5

R2

29 30

6

T2

7

R3

31 32

8

T3

9

R4

33 34

10

T4

11

R5

35 36

12

T5

13

R6

37 38

14

T6

15

R7

39 40

16

T7

17

R8

42 41

18

T8

19

R9

44 43

20

T9

21

R10

46

22

T10
293

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

5 Cables

Pin

W Core Serial No.

Remark s

Pin

W Core Serial No.

Remark s

21 24 23 50 49 52 51 54 53 56 55 Shell

Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Braid 31 R15 29 R14 27 R13 25 R12 23 R11

45 48 47 74 73 76 75 78 75 80 79 Shell

Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Braid 32 T15 30 T14 28 T13 26 T12 24 T11

Table 5-4 Pin assignments for a 120-ohm E1 cable Pin W Color of the Core 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Relati onshi p Twiste d pair

Rema rks

Tape Color

Pin

W Color of the Core Relati onshi p Twiste d pair

Rema rks

Tape Color

White Blue White Green White Grey Red Orang e Red Brown

R0

Blue

25 26

White Orang e White Brown Red Blue Red Green Red Grey

T0

Blue

Twiste d pair Twiste d pair Twiste d pair

R1

27 28

Twiste d pair Twiste d pair Twiste d pair

T1

R2

29 30

T2

R3

31 32

T3

Twiste d pair

R4

33 34

Twiste d pair

T4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

294

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

5 Cables

Pin

W Color of the Core Relati onshi p Twiste d pair

Rema rks

Tape Color

Pin

W Color of the Core Relati onshi p Twiste d pair

Rema rks

Tape Color

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 Shell

Black Blue Black Green Black Grey White Blue White Green White Grey Red Orang e Red Brown Black Blue Black Green Black Grey Braid

R5

35 36

Black Orang e Black Brown Yello w Blue White Orang e White Brown Red Blue Red Green Red Grey Black Orang e Black Brown Yello w Blue Braid

T5

Twiste d pair Twiste d pair

R6

37 38

Twiste d pair Twiste d pair

T6

R7

39 40

T7

Twiste d pair

R8

Orang e

41 42 43 44

Twiste d pair

T8

Orang e

Twiste d pair Twiste d pair Twiste d pair

R9

Twiste d pair Twiste d pair Twiste d pair

T9

R10

45 46

T10

R11

47 48

T11

Twiste d pair Twiste d pair

R12

73 74

Twiste d pair Twiste d pair

T12

R13

75 76

T13

Twiste d pair Twiste d pair

R14

77 78

Twiste d pair Twiste d pair

T14

R15

79 80 Shell

T15

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

295

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

5 Cables

5.7.2 E1 Cable Connected to the E1 Panel
An E1 cable that is connected to the E1 panel is used when the E1 panel functions as a DDF. One end of the E1 cable has an Anea 96 connector that is connected to an E1 port on the IDU. The other end of the E1 cable has a DB37 connector that is connected to the E1 panel. Each E1 cable can transmit 16 E1 signals. The port impedance of the E1 cable is 75 ohms.

Cable Diagram
Figure 5-11 E1 cable connected to the E1 panel

X1: Cable connector, Anea 96, female Label 1: "CHAN 0-7"

X2/X3: Cable connector, type D, 37 male Label 2: "CHAN 8-15"

Pin Assignments
Table 5-5 Pin assignments for the E1 cable terminated with an Anea 96 connector and a DB37 connector Wire W1 Connecto r X1 X1.2 X1.1 X1.26 X1.25
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Connecto r X2/X3 X2.20 X2.2 X2.21 X2.3

Remarks R0

Connecto r X1 X1.10 X1.9

Connecto r X2/X3 X2.36 X2.17 X2.35 X2.16

Remarks R4

T0

X1.34 X1.33

T4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

296

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

5 Cables

Wire

Connecto r X1 X1.4 X1.3 X1.28 X1.27 X1.6 X1.5 X1.30 X1.29 X1.8 X1.7 X1.32 X1.31

Connecto r X2/X3 X2.22 X2.4 X2.23 X2.5 X2.24 X2.6 X2.25 X2.7 X2.26 X2.8 X2.27 X2.9 X3.20 X3.2 X3.21 X3.3 X3.22 X3.4 X3.23 X3.5 X3.24 X3.6 X3.25 X3.7 X3.26 X3.8 X3.27 X3.9 Braid

Remarks R1

Connecto r X1 X1.12 X1.11

Connecto r X2/X3 X2.34 X2.15 X2.33 X2.14 X2.32 X2.13 X2.31 X2.12 X2.30 X2.11 X2.29 X2.10 X3.36 X3.17 X3.35 X3.16 X3.34 X3.15 X3.33 X3.14 X3.32 X3.13 X3.31 X3.12 X3.30 X3.11 X3.29 X3.10 Braid

Remarks R5

T1

X1.36 X1.35

T5

R2

X1.14 X1.13

R6

T2

X1.38 X1.37

T6

R3

X1.16 X1.15

R7

T3

X1.40 X1.39

T7

W2

X1.18 X1.17 X1.42 X1.41 X1.20 X1.19 X1.44 X1.43 X1.22 X1.21 X1.46 X1.45 X1.24 X1.23 X1.48 X1.47 Shell

R8

X1.50 X1.49

R12

T8

X1.74 X1.73

T12

R9

X1.52 X1.51

R13

T9

X1.76 X1.75

T13

R10

X1.54 X1.53

R14

T10

X1.78 X1.77

T14

R11

X1.56 X1.55

R15

T11

X1.80 X1.79 Shell

T15

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

297

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

5 Cables

5.8 Orderwire Cable
An orderwire cable connects an orderwire phone to the equipment. Both ends of the orderwire cable are terminated with an RJ11 connector. One end of the orderwire cable is connected to the PHONE port on the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC. The other end of the orderwire cable is connected to the port of the orderwire phone.

Cable Diagram
Figure 5-12 Orderwire cable
1
6

Main label
6

1

X1

X2

1

1. Orderwire port, RJ11 connector

Pin Assignments
Table 5-6 Pin assignments for the orderwire cable Connector X1 X1.3 X1.4 Connector X2 X2.3 X2.4 Function Tip Ring

5.9 Network Cable
A network cable connects two pieces of Ethernet equipment. Both ends of the network cable are terminated with an RJ45 connector. Two types of interfaces use RJ45 connectors, which are medium dependent interfaces (MDIs) and MDI-Xs. MDIs are used by terminal equipment, for example, network card. The pin assignments for MDIs are provided in Table 5-7. MDI-Xs are used by network equipment. The pin assignments for MDI-Xs are provided in Table 5-8.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

298

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

5 Cables

Table 5-7 Pin assignments for MDIs Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) Signal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TX+ TXRX+ Reserved Reserved RXReserved Reserved Function Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) Receiving data (+) Receiving data (-) 1000BASE-T Signal BIDA+ BIDABIDB+ BIDC+ BIDCBIDBBIDD+ BIDDFunction Bidirectional data wire A (+) Bidirectional data wire A (-) Bidirectional data wire B (+) Bidirectional data wire C (+) Bidirectional data wire C (-) Bidirectional data wire B (-) Bidirectional data wire D (+) Bidirectional data wire D (-)

Table 5-8 Pin assignments for MDI-Xs Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) Signal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 RX+ RXTX+ Reserved Reserved TXReserved Function Receiving data (+) Receiving data (-) Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) 1000BASE-T Signal BIDB+ BIDBBIDA+ BIDD+ BIDDBIDABIDC+ Function Bidirectional data wire B (+) Bidirectional data wire B (-) Bidirectional data wire A (+) Bidirectional data wire D (+) Bidirectional data wire D (-) Bidirectional data wire A (-) Bidirectional data wire C (+)

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

299

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

5 Cables

Pin

10/100BASE-T(X) Signal Function -

1000BASE-T Signal BIDCFunction Bidirectional data wire C (-)

8

Reserved

Straight-through cables are used between MDIs and MDI-Xs, and crossover cables are used between MDIs or between MDI-Xs. The only difference between straight-through cables and crossover cables is with regard to the pin assignment. The NMS/COM port, NE cascading port, and Ethernet electrical service ports of the OptiX RTN 910 support the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes. Straight-through cables and crossover cables can be used to connect the NMS/COM port, EXT port, and Ethernet electrical service ports to MDIs or MDI-Xs.

Cable Diagram
Figure 5-13 Network cable
1 Label 1 Main label Label 2 8 1

8 1

1. Network port connector, RJ45

Pin Assignments
Table 5-9 Pin assignments for the straight-through cable Connector X1 X1.1 X1.2 X1.3 X1.6 X1.4 X1.5 X1.7 X1.8
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Connector X2 X2.1 X2.2 X2.3 X2.6 X2.4 X2.5 X2.7 X2.8

Color White/Orange Orange White/Green Green Blue White/Blue White/Brown Brown

Relation Twisted pair

Twisted pair

Twisted pair

Twisted pair

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

300

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

5 Cables

Table 5-10 Pin assignments for the crossover cable Connector X1 X1.6 X1.3 X1.1 X1.2 X1.4 X1.5 X1.7 X1.8 Connector X2 X2.2 X2.1 X2.3 X2.6 X2.4 X2.5 X2.7 X2.8 Color Orange White/Orange White/Green Green Blue White/Blue White/Brown Brown Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Relation Twisted pair

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

301

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

A

Parameters Description

This chapter describes the parameters used in this document. A.1 Parameters for Network Management This topic describes the parameters that are related to network management. A.2 Radio Link Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to radio links. A.3 Multiplex Section Protection Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to multiplex section protection (MSP). A.4 SDH/PDH Service Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to SDH/PDH services. A.5 Parameters for Board Interfaces This topic describes the parameters that are related to board interfaces. A.6 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features on the Packet Plane This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet services and Ethernet features on the packet plane, including service parameters, protocol parameters, OAM parameters, Ethernet port parameters, and QoS parameters. A.7 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features on the EoS/EoPDH Plane This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet services and Ethernet features on the EoS/ EoPDH plane, including service parameters, protocol parameters, OAM parameters, Ethernet port parameters, and QoS parameters. A.8 RMON Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON performances. A.9 Parameters for MPLS/PWE3 Services This topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS/PWE3 services. A.10 Clock Parameters This topic describes the parameters that are related to clocks. A.11 Parameters for the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces This topic describes the parameters that are related to the orderwire and auxiliary interfaces.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

302

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

A.1 Parameters for Network Management
This topic describes the parameters that are related to network management.

A.1.1 Parameters for NE Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing network elements (NEs).

A.1.1.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching
This topic describes the parameters that are used for searching for NEs.

Navigation Path
Choose File > Discovery > NE from the Main Menu.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

303

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameters for the Search Field
Parameter Address Type Value Range IP Address of GNE NSAP Address IP Address Range of GNE Default Value IP Address Range of GNE Description l If the OSI protocol is used on the DCN, you can search for an NE based on NSAP Address only. l If the IP protocol is used on the DCN, you can search for an NE based on IP Address of GNE or IP Address Range of GNE. l To search for all the NEs that communicate with the gateway NE, select IP Address Range of GNE. l To select the gateway NE only, select IP Address of GNE.
NOTE If Address Type is set to IP Address of GNE or IP Address Range of GNE, and if the U2000 (server) and the gateway NE are located in different network segments, ensure that the U2000 and relevant routers are configured with the IP routes for the network segment in which the U2000 and gateway NE are located. If Address Type is set to NSAP Address, ensure that the OSI protocol stack is installed.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

304

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Search Address

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description l If Address Type is set to IP Address of GNE, enter the IP address of the gateway NE, such as 129.9.x.x. l If Address Type is set to IP Address Range of GNE, enter the number of the IP network segment in which the gateway NE is located, such as 129.9.255.255. l If Address Type is set to NSAP Address, enter the NSAP address of the gateway NE.

User Name

-

-

This parameter specifies the user name of the gateway NE. This parameter specifies the password of the gateway NE.

Password

-

-

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

305

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter for Searching for NEs
Parameter Create NE after search Value Range Selected Deselected Default Value Deselected Description l To create NEs in batches, it is recommended that you select Create NE after search. The NEs are automatically created after they are found. l After Create NE after search is selected, enter NE User and Password that are used for creating an NE.
NOTE If only Create NE after search is selected, Search for NE is selected automatically.

NE User

-

-

l This parameter specifies the user name to be entered when an NE is created. l This parameter is valid only when Create NE after search is selected.

Password

-

-

l This parameter specifies the password to be entered when an NE is created. l This parameter is valid only when Create NE after search is selected.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

306

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Upload after create

Value Range Selected Deselected

Default Value Deselected

Description l This parameter specifies whether to automatically upload the NE data after the NE is found and created. l If only Upload after create is selected, Search for NE and Create NE after search are selected automatically.

Parameter for the Found NEs
Parameter NE ID Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the ID of the found NE, which consists of extended ID and NE ID. This parameter indicates the address of the gateway NE that is connected to the found NE. This parameter indicates the ID of the gateway NE that is connected to the found NE. l This parameter specifies the password to be entered when an NE is created. l This parameter is valid only when Create NE after search is selected. Connection Mode Common Security SSL Common The communication between the client and the server is encrypted if this parameter is set to Security SSL. This parameter specifies the communication port.

GNE Address

-

-

GNE ID

-

-

Created As GNE

Yes No

Yes

Port

-

1400

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

307

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter NE Status

Value Range Created Uncreated

Default Value -

Description This parameter indicates whether the found NE is created.

A.1.1.2 Parameter Description: NE Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are related to NE creation.

Navigation Path
1. 2. Choose File > Creat > NE from the Main Menu. Choose RTN Series > OptiX RTN 910 from the Object Tree.

Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Type Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the type of the NE to be created. l The ID refers to the basic ID. If the extended ID is not used, the basic ID of an NE must be unique on the networks that are managed by the same NMS. l This parameter is set according to the planning information. l The NE ID consisting of the basic ID and extended ID identifies an NE on the NMS. Extended ID 1 to 254 9 If the number of existing NEs does not exceed the range represented by the basic ID, do not change Extended ID.

ID

1 to 49135

-

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

308

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Name

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description l This parameter specifies the name of the NE. l After you have specified the name of the NE, the name is displayed under the icon of the NE.

Remarks Gateway Type

Non-Gateway Gateway

Non-Gateway

This parameter specifies the remarks of the NE. l This parameter is set to Gateway if the new NE is a gateway NE. l This parameter is set to Non-Gateway if the new NE is a nongateway NE. l This parameter is set according to the DCN planning if the new NE can function as a gateway NE or a nongateway NE.

Gateway

-

-

This parameter indicates the gateway NE of the new NE when Gateway Type is set to Non-Gateway. l This parameter needs to be set when Gateway Type is set to Gateway. l When the OSI over DCC solution is used, this parameter is set to OSI. l In other cases, this parameter is set to IP.

Protocol

IP OSI

IP

IP Address

-

-

This parameter indicates the IP address of the new NE. This parameter needs to be set when Affiliated Gateway Protocol is set to IP.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

309

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Connection Mode

Value Range Common Security SSL

Default Value Common

Description The communication between the client and the server is encrypted if this parameter is set to Security SSL. This parameter specifies the communication port. This parameter specifies the user name to be entered when an NE is created. This parameter specifies the password to be entered when an NE is created. This parameter indicates the NSAP address of the new NE. This parameter needs to be set when Affiliated Gateway Protocol is set to OSI. You need to set the area ID only, and the other parts are automatically generated by the NE.

Port NE User

-

1400 -

Password

-

-

NSAP Address

-

-

A.1.1.3 Parameter Description: Attribute_Changing NE IDs
This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing NE IDs.

Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. In the Main Topology, right-click the NE whose ID needs to be changed. Choose Object Attributes. Click Modify NE ID.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

310

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameters for Changing NE IDs
Parameter New ID Value Range Default Value Description l The new ID refers to the basic ID. If the extended ID is not used, the basic ID of an NE must be unique on the networks that are managed by the same NMS. l This parameter is set according to the network plan.
NOTE The NE ID consisting of the basic ID and extended ID identifies an NE on the NMS.

New Extended ID

1 to 254

9

If the number of existing NEs does not exceed the range represented by the basic ID, do not change the extended ID.

A.1.1.4 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization
This topic describes the parameters that are used for synchronizing the time of NEs.

Navigation Path
1. 2. Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from the Main Menu. Click the NE Time Synchronization tab.

Parameters for NE Time Synchronization
Parameter NE Name NE ID Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the name of the NE. This parameter indicates the ID of the NE.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

311

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Synchronous Mode

Value Range Standard NTP NM Null

Default Value Null

Description l If this parameter is set to NM, the NE synchronizes the time of the NMS server. l If this parameter is set to Standard NTP, the NE synchronizes the Network Time Protocol (NTP) server through the standard NTP.

Standard NTP Authentication

Enabled Disabled

Disabled

This parameter is valid only when Synchronous Mode is set to Standard NTP.

Parameters for the Standard NTP Server
Parameter Standard NTP Server Identifier Value Range NE ID IP Default Value NE ID Description l If the NE functions as the gateway NE, this parameter is set to IP. l If the NE functions as a non-gateway NE and communicates with the gateway NE through the HWECC protocol, this parameter is set to NE ID. l If the NE functions as a non-gateway NE and communicates with the gateway NE through the IP protocol, this parameter is set to IP.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

312

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Standard NTP Server

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description l If the NE functions as the gateway NE, this parameter is set to the IP address of the external NTP server. l If the NE functions as a non-gateway NE, this parameter is set to the ID or IP address of the gateway NE.

Standard NTP Server Key

0 to 1024

0

l If the NTP server does not need to authenticated, this parameter is set to the value "0". l If the NTP server needs to be authenticated, the authentication is performed according to the allocated key of the NTP server. In this case, the NE authenticates the NTP server based on the key and the corresponding password (specified in the management of the standard NTP key).

Parameters for Setting Automatic Synchronization
Parameter Synchronization Starting Time Value Range Default Value Description l This parameter specifies the start time of the synchronization period. After this parameter is specified, the NMS and the NE synchronize the time once at the intervals of Synchronization Period(days). l It is recommended that you use the default value.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

313

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter DST

Value Range Selected Deselected

Default Value Deselected

Description l This parameter indicates whether Synchronization Starting Time is the daylight saving time. l This parameter is set according to the actual situation.

Synchronization Period (days)

1 to 300

1

l This parameter indicates the period of synchronizing the time of the NE with the time of the NMS. l It is recommended that you use the default value.

A.1.1.5 Parameter Description: Localization Management of the NE Time
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for localization management of the NE time.

Navigation Path
1. 2. Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Localization Management from the Main Menu. Select the NE for time localization management from the Object Tree, and then click .

Parameters for Localization Management of the NE Time
Parameter NE TimeZone DST Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the name of the NE. This parameter indicates the time zone. This parameter indicates whether DST is enabled.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

314

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameters for Time Zone
Parameter Time Zone Value Range Default Value Description l After the time zone is changed, the current time of the NE is changed accordingly. l This parameter is set according to the place where the NE is located. DST Selected Deselected Deselected l The parameters related to daylight saving time can be valid only when this parameter is selected. l This parameter is set according to the situation whether daylight saving time is used in the place where the NE is located. Offset 1 to 120 Unit: minute(s) Start Rule WEEK DATE Start Time End Rule WEEK DATE End Time WEEK WEEK This parameter specifies the offset value of the daylight saving time. This parameter specifies the method of adjusting the daylight saving time. This parameter specifies the start daylight saving time. This parameter specifies the method of adjusting the daylight saving time. This parameter specifies the end daylight saving time.

A.1.1.6 Parameter Description: Standard NTP Key Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing the standard NTP key.

Navigation Path
1. 2. Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from the Main Menu. Click the Standard NTP Key Management tab.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

315

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Key Value Range 1 to 1024 Default Value Description l This parameter indicates the key for NTP authentication. l This parameter is set according to the requirements of the external NTP server. Password l This parameter indicates the password that corresponds to Key. l This parameter is set according to the requirements of the external NTP server. Trusted Yes No Yes l When this parameter is set to No, the key verification is not trusted. After receiving the key, the NE rejects the clock synchronization service. l When this parameter is set to Yes, the key verification is trusted. After receiving the key, the NE provides the clock synchronization service. l After receiving an unknown or incorrect key, the NE rejects the clock synchronization service. Hence, it is recommended that you set a trusted key only.

A.1.1.7 Parameter Description: License Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing the license.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

316

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Navigation Path
1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > License Management from the Function Tree. Click the License Management tab.

Parameters for Managing Licenses
Parameter Board License File Type Capacity Loaded Value Range Default Value Description This parameter displays the boards that need to be supported by licenses. This parameter displays the license type corresponding to each board. This parameter displays the capacity of each board. This parameter displays whether the corresponding license file is loaded to each board.

A.1.1.8 Parameter Description: Automatic Disabling of the Functions of NEs
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for automatically disabling the functions of an NE.

Navigation Path
1. 2. On the Main Topology, choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Automatic Disabling of NE Function. Select the NE whose functions need to be automatically disabled from the Object Tree, and then click .

Parameters for Automatically Disabling the Functions of NEs
Parameter NE Name NE Type Operation Type Value Range OptiX RTN 910 Default Value Description This parameter indicates the name of the NE. This parameter indicates the type of the NE. This parameter indicates the type of the operation, such as loopback, and shutdown of the laser. This parameter specifies whether to automatically disable the operations such as loopback, and shutdown of the laser.
317

Auto Disabling

Disabled Enabled

Enabled

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Auto Disabling Time(min)

Value Range 1 to 2880

Default Value 5

Description This parameter specifies the time of automatically disabling the operations such as loopback, and shutdown of the laser.

A.1.2 Parameters for Communications Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for communications management.

A.1.2.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting
This topic describes the parameters that are used for NE communication setting.

Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > Communication Parameters from the Function Tree.

Parameters for NE Communication Setting
Parameter IP Address Value Range Default Value Before delivery, the IP address of the NE is set to 129.9.0.x. The letter x indicates the basic ID. 0.0.0.0 255.255.0.0 Description In the HWECC solution, an IP address is set according to the following rules: l The IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway of the gateway NE should meet the planning requirements of the external DCN. l If an NE uses the extended ECC, the IP address must be in the same network segment. l The IP address of other NEs should be set according to the NE ID. In this case, the IP address of an NE should be set in the format of 0x81000000+ID. That is, if the ID is 0x090001, the IP address should be set to 129.9.0.1. l Do not change the extended ID when the number of actual NEs does not exceed the range permitted by the basic NE ID. l It is recommended that this parameter takes the default value.

Gateway IP Address Subnet Mask

-

Extended ID

1 to 254

9

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

318

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter NSAP Address

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description This parameter is valid only when the OSI over DCC solution is applied. This parameter is used to set only the area ID of an NSAP address. The other parts of the NSAP address are automatically generated by the NE. l Specifies the connection mode that the gateway NE allows the NMS to use for connecting to the gateway NE. l If the gateway NE has no special security requirement for connection to the NMS, Connection Mode can be set to Common. l If the gateway NE requests secure connection to the NMS for preventing information interception and cracking, Connection Mode needs to be set to Security SSL. l If NE communication security level needs to be the same as NMS communication security level, Connection Mode needs to be set to Common + Security SSL. l The default parameter value is recommended unless the gateway NE requires that the NMS use the SSL connection mode. l The parameter value takes effect only when it is set for a gateway NE and the gateway NE is connected to the NMS by means of the IP protocol.

Connection Mode

Common + Security SSL Common Security SSL

Common + Security SSL

A.1.2.2 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Rate Configuration
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the DCC rate.

Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCC Management from the Function Tree. Click the DCC Rate Configuration tab.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

319

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameters for DCC Rate Configuration
Parameter Port Enabled/Disabled Value Range Enabled Disabled Default Value Enabled Description This parameter indicates the port that is connected to the DCC channel. It is recommended that you use the default value, except for the following cases: l If the port is connected to the other ECC subnet, Enabled/Disabled is set to Disabled. l If the port is connected to a third-party network and does not exchange the network management information with other ports, Enabled/Disabled is set to Disabled. Channel D1-D3 D4-D12 D1-D12 D1-D1 D1-D1 (for the PDH radio whose transmission capacity is less than 16xE1) D1-D3 (for other cases) It is recommended that you use the default value, except for the following cases: l If the IP DCN or OSI over DCC solution is adopted, Channel for the SDH line ports is set to a value that is the same as the value for third-party network. l If the DCC transparent transmission solution is adopted, the value of Channel for the SDH line ports should not conflict with the value that is set for the third-party network. This parameter indicates the DCC resources. This parameter indicates the communication status. It is recommended that you use the default value, except for the following cases: l If the IP DCN solution is adopted, Protocol Type is set to TCP/IP. l If the OSI over DCC solution is adopted, Protocol Type is set to OSI. l When the L2 DCN solution is used, set Protocol Type to L2DCN. IP Address l IP Address is available only if Protocol Type is set to TCP/IP. l When the IP DCN solution is used and the NE functions as an ABR, this parameter specifies the interface IP address of the non-backbone area port on the ABR.

DCC Resources Communication Status Protocol Type

HWECC TCP/IP OSI L2DCN

HWECC

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

320

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Subnet Mask

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description l Subnet Mask is available only if Protocol Type is set to TCP/IP. l When the IP DCN solution is used and the NE functions as an ABR, this parameter specifies the subnet mask of the non-backbone area port on the ABR.

A.1.2.3 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Transparent Transmission Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for DCC transparent transmission management.

Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCC Management from the Function Tree. Click the DCC Transparent Transmission Management tab. Click Create.

Parameters for DCC Transparent Transmission Management
Parameter Source Timeslot/ Porta Value Range Default Value Description This parameter specifies the source timeslot or port.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

321

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Transparent Transmission of Overhead Bytes at Source Port

Value Range D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 E1 E2 F1 K1 K2 X1 X2 X3 X4

Default Value -

Description l Only one overhead byte can be selected each time. l X1, X2, X3, and X4 indicate the customized overhead bytes that are used for transmitting asynchronous data services. l An overhead byte cannot be a byte that is used. For example, an overhead byte cannot be a byte in the used DCC channel.
NOTE Only the ISU2/ISX2/SL1DA board supports transparent transmission of the K1/K2 byte.

Sink Timeslot/ Porta

-

-

This parameter specifies the sink timeslot or port.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

322

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Transparent Transmission of Overhead Bytes at Sink Port

Value Range D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 E1 E2 F1 K1 K2 X1 X2 X3 X4

Default Value -

Description l Only one overhead byte can be selected each time. l An overhead byte cannot be a byte that is used. For example, an overhead byte cannot be a byte in the used DCC channel. l Generally, Transparent Transmission of Overhead Bytes at Sink Port can be set to a value that is the same as or different from the value in the case of Transparent Transmission of Overhead Bytes at Source Port.
NOTE Only the ISU2/ISX2/SL1DA board supports transparent transmission of the K1/K2 byte.

NOTE

a. A bidirectional cross-connection is set up between the source port and the sink port. Hence, a port functions the same regardless of the source port or sink port.

A.1.2.4 Parameter Description: ECC Management_Ethernet Port Extended ECC
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the extended ECCs of Ethernet ports.

Navigation Path
Click an NE in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > ECC Management from the Function Tree.

Parameters for the ECC Extended Mode
Parameter ECC Extended Mode Value Range Auto mode Specified mode Default Value Auto mode Description It is recommended that you use the default value.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

323

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameters for Setting the Server
Parameter IP Port Value Range 1601 to 1699 Default Value 0 Description This parameter indicates the IP address of the server. l This parameter is valid only when ECC Extended Mode is set to Specified mode. l This parameter can be set only when the NE functions as the server of the extended ECC. In normal cases, the NE that is close to the NMS functions as the server. l This parameter can be set to any value from 1601 to 1699.

Parameters for Setting the Client
Parameter Opposite IP Port Value Range 1601 to 1699 Default Value 0.0.0.0 0 Description l This parameter is valid only when ECC Extended Mode is set to Specified mode. l This parameter can be set only when the NE functions as the client of the extended ECC. Except for the NE that functions as the server, all other NEs that use the extended ECC can function as the client. l Opposite IP and Port are respectively set to the IP address of the server NE and the specified port number.

A.1.2.5 Parameter Description: NE ECC Link Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for NE ECC link management.

Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > NE ECC Link Management from the Function Tree.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

324

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter for NE ECC Link Management
Parameter Destination NE Transfer NE Distance Value Range Default Value Description This parameter specifies the sink NE of the ECC connection. This parameter specifies the next transfer NE and the direction of the ECC route. l This parameter specifies the number of NEs (excluding the source NE and sink NE) through which the ECC route passes, namely, the number of ECC packet forwarding attempts. The value can be set to a value that is greater than the number of actual ECC packet forwarding attempts. If the value is set to a value that is less than the number of actual ECC packet forwarding attempts, however, the destination NE fails to be accessed. l If the value is set to 0, it indicates that the source NE is adjacent to the destination NE. Level l This parameter indicates that multiple ECC routes from the source NE to the destination NE may be available. An ECC route of a higher priority is selected to transmit the packets to the destination NE. l If the ECC route is generated automatically, the priority is 4. l If the ECC route is added manually, the priority is 5. Mode SCC No. This parameter indicates the ECC routing mode. This parameter specifies the physical port through which the ECC route passes. The value of this parameter is automatically assigned the NE.

A.1.2.6 Parameter Description: ECC Link Management_Availability Test
This topic describes the parameters that are used to test ECC availability.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

325

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Navigation Path
1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and then choose Communication > NE ECC Link Management from the Function Tree. Click Reachability Test and choose Ping Test or Trace Route from the drop-down menu.

Ping Test Parameters
Parameter Target NE Packet Length (Byte) Value Range 0-800 Default Value 64 Description Specifies the NE for which a ping test will be performed. l Specifies the test packet length. l It is recommended that this parameter take its default value. 1-65535 3 l Specifies the number of test packets. l It is recommended that this parameter take its default value. Sending Interval (ms) 0-65535 0 l Specifies the test packet transmission interval. l It is recommended that this parameter take its default value. To Be Translated (ms) 1-65535 1000 l Specifies the maximum time for test packet to wait until being responded to. l It is recommended that this parameter take its default value.

Packet Quantity

Traceroute Parameters
Parameter Target NE To Be Translated (ms) Value Range 0-65535 Default Value 1000 Description Specifies the NE for which a traceroute test will be performed. l Specifies the maximum time for test packet to wait until being responded to. l It is recommended that this parameter take its default value. Forwarding NEs 0-255 64 Specifies the number of NEs that test packets will traverse during the forwarding process.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

326

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

A.1.2.7 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for IP route management.

Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree. Click the IP Route Management tab.

Parameters for IP Route Management
Parameter Destination Address Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the destination address of the packets. This parameter can be set to a valid IP address of class A, B, or C only, but cannot be set to the IP address of the local host or the loopback address with the 127 field. This parameter indicates the subnet mask of the destination address of the packets. This parameter indicates the IP address of the gateway on the subnetwork where the NE is located, namely, the IP address of the next hop of the packets. l DIRECT: indicates the route between the local NE and an adjacent NE. l STATIC: indicates the route that is created manually. l OSPF: indicates the route between the local NE and a non-adjacent NE. l RIP: indicates the route that is discovered by the routing information protocol. l OSPF_ASE: indicates the route whose Destination Address is beyond the OSPF domain. l OSPF_NSSA: indicates the route whose Destination Address is in a not so stubby area (NSSA). l A route can be deleted in the case of STATIC only, but cannot be edited in the other cases. l Compared with a dynamic route, a static route has a higher priority. If any conflict occurs, the static route is preferred.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 327

Subnet Mask Gateway

-

-

Protocol

-

-

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Interface

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description This parameter indicates the interface that is used on the route. Interface is a concept specified in the TCP/IP protocol stack. In the TCP/IP protocol stack, you can create multiple types of interface, such as a loopback interface (namely, the interface whose IP address is 127.0.0.1), an Ethernet interface, and PPP interface. Each interface must have a unique interface name. This parameter indicates the maximum number of routers through which the packets are transmitted. Metric is used to indicate the overhead bytes that are transmitted to the destination address. The smaller the value, the less the overhead bytes. If multiple routes can reach the same destination address, a route whose overhead is less is preferred to transmit the packets.

Metric

-

-

A.1.2.8 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for new static IP routes.

Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree. Click the IP Route Management tab. Click New.

Parameters for Creating IP Routes
Parameter Destination Address Value Range Default Value Description This parameter specifies the destination address of the packets. This parameter can be set to a valid IP address of class A, B, or C only, but cannot be set to the IP address of the local host or the loopback address with the 127 field. This parameter indicates the subnet mask of the destination address of the packets.

Subnet Mask

-

-

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

328

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Gateway

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description This parameter specifies the IP address of the gateway on the subnetwork where the NE is located, namely, the IP address of the next hop of the packets.

A.1.2.9 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_Availability Test
This topic describes the parameters that are used to test IP DCN availability.

Navigation Path
1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and then choose Communication > IP Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree. Click Reachability Test and choose Ping Test or Trace Route from the drop-down menu.

Ping Test Parameters
Parameter Target NE IP Packet Length (Byte) Value Range 0-800 Default Value 64 Description Specifies the NE for which a ping test will be performed. l Specifies the test packet length. l It is recommended that this parameter take its default value. 1-65535 3 l Specifies the number of test packets. l It is recommended that this parameter take its default value. Sending Interval (ms) 0-65535 0 l Specifies the test packet transmission interval. l It is recommended that this parameter take its default value. To Be Translated (ms) 1-65535 5000 l Specifies the maximum time for test packet to wait until being responded to. l It is recommended that this parameter take its default value.

Packet Quantity

Traceroute Parameters
Parameter Target NE IP Value Range Default Value Description Specifies the NE for which a traceroute test will be performed.
329

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Max Hops

Value Range 1-30

Default Value 10

Description Specifies the number of hops which test packets traverse during the packet transmission process.

A.1.2.10 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_OSPF Parameter Settings
This topic describes the parameters that are used for OSPF settings.

Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree. Click the OSPF Parameter Settings tab.

OSPF Parameters
Parameter Area Value Range Default Value 0.0.0.0 Description l If only an OSPF area is configured on an NE, set this parameter according to the planning information. l If multiple OSPF areas are configured on an NE, this parameter takes its default value 0.0.0.0. DCC Hello Timer (s) 1 to 255 10 l DCC Hello Timer(s) specifies the Hello packet timer for the DCC channel or inband DCN. l The Hello packets are used for detecting the neighbor router on the network that is connected to the router. By periodically transmitting the hello packets, you can determine whether the interface on the neighbor router is still in the active status. l DCC Hello Timer(s) determines the interval for the hello packet timer to transmit the hello packets. l In the case of two interconnected NEs, DCC Hello Timer(s) must be set to the same value. l Unless otherwise specified, it is recommended that this parameter take its default value.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

330

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s)

Value Range 1 to 65535

Default Value 40

Description l DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s) specifies the dead time of a neighbor router for the DCC channel or inband DCN. l If the local router fails to receive the hello packets from the connected neighbor router within the time specified in DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s), it considers that the neighbor router is unavailable. l DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s) should be set to a value that is a minimum of twice the value of DCC Hello Timer (s). l In the case of adjacent NEs, DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s) must be set to the same value. Otherwise, the OSPF protocol fails to operate normally. l Unless otherwise specified, it is recommended that this parameter take its default value.

DCC Retransmission Timer(s)

1 to 65535

5

l DCC Retransmission Timer(s) specifies the interval for transmitting a request through the DCC channel or inband DCN to retransmit the link state advertisement (LSA) packets. l Unless otherwise specified, it is recommended that this parameter take its default value.

DCC Delay(s)

1 to 3600

1

l DCC Delay(s) specifies the delay time to transmit the LSA packets through the DCC channel or inband DCN. l The LSA packets in the LSA database of the local router are aged as the time elapses, but are not aged when they are being transmitted on the network. Hence, before the LSA packets are transmitted, you need to increase the age of the LSA packets based on the value of DCC Delay(s). l Unless otherwise specified, it is recommended that this parameter take its default value.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

331

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter LAN Hello Timer (s)

Value Range 1 to 255

Default Value 10

Description l DCC Hello Timer(s) specifies the hello packet timer at the Ethernet network management port or NE cascading port. l The hello packets are used for detecting the neighbor router on the network that is connected to the router. By periodically transmitting the hello packets, you can determine whether the interface on the neighbor router is still in the active status. l LAN Hello Timer(s) determines the interval for the hello packet timer of the NE to transmit the hello packets. l In the case of two interconnected NEs, LAN Hello Timer(s) must be set to the same value. l Unless otherwise specified, it is recommended that this parameter take its default value.

LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s)

1 to 65535

40

l LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s) specifies the dead time of a neighbor router at the LAN interface. l If the local router fails to receive the hello packets from the connected neighbor router within the time specified in LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s), it considers that the neighbor router is unavailable. l LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s) should be set to a value that is a minimum of two times the value of LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s). l In the case of adjacent NEs, DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s) must be set to the same value. Otherwise, the OSPF protocol fails to operate normally. l Unless otherwise specified, it is recommended that this parameter take its default value.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

332

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter LAN Retransmission Timer(s)

Value Range 1 to 65535

Default Value 5

Description l LAN Retransmission Timer(s) specifies the time for transmitting a request for retransmission of the LSA packets through the Ethernet network management port or NE cascading port. l Unless otherwise specified, it is recommended that this parameter take its default value.

LAN Delay(s)

1 to 3600

1

l LAN Delay(s) specifies the delay time to transmit the LSA packets through the Ethernet network management port or NE cascading port. l The LSA packets in the LSA database of the local router are aged as the time elapses, but are not aged when they are being transmitted on the network. Hence, before the LSA packets are transmitted, you need to increase the age of the LSA packets based on the value of LAN Delay(s). l Unless otherwise specified, it is recommended that this parameter take its default value.

OSPF Status

Enabled Disabled

Enabled

Specifies whether the OSPF protocol is enabled. If an NE uses only static routes with OSPF disabled, set this parameter to Disabled. l Specifies whether to enable the STUB Area. l Set this parameter as required. l A backbone area cannot be a STUB area.

STUB Area

Enabled Disabled

Disabled

NSSA Area

Enabled Disabled

Disabled

l Specifies whether to enable the NSSA Area. l Set this parameter as required. l A backbone area cannot be an NSSA area.

Direct route

Enabled Disabled

Disabled

l Specifies whether the direct route automatic flooding function is enabled. l Direct route: the route detected by the link layer protocol. l Set this parameter as required.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

333

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Static route

Value Range Enabled Disabled

Default Value Disabled

Description l Specifies whether the static route automatic flooding function is enabled. l Static route: the route manually configured by the network administrator. l Set this parameter as required.

RIP route

Enabled Disabled

Disabled

l Specifies whether the RIP route automatic flooding function is enabled. l RIP route: the route detected by the RIP protocol. l Set this parameter as required.

Default route

Enabled Disabled

Disabled

l Specifies whether the default route automatic flooding function is enabled for ASBRs. l Default OSPF routes are routes whose destination addresses and subnet masks are 0s. l Set this parameter according to the planning information.

Router ID Opaque LSA of External Network Port

Enabled Disabled

Enabled

The Router IP address is always the NE IP address. l Specifies whether the Ethernet network management port or NE cascading port transmits Type-10 LSAs. l If this parameter is set to Disabled, the Ethernet network management port or NE cascading port transmits network management information. l Set this parameter as required.

LAN Interface

Enabled Disabled

Disabled

l Specifies whether the OSPF protocol is enabled for the Ethernet network management port or NE cascading port. l If this parameter is set to Enabled, the OSPF protocol is communicated with other equipment through the Ethernet network management port or NE cascading port.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

334

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

OSPF authentication parameters
Parameter Interface Type Value Range Default Value Description l Displays the DCN port types that allow the OSPF authentication key to be specified. l LAN indicates the Ethernet network management port or NE cascading port. l DCC indicates the DCC channels or inband DCN port. Authentication Type none MD5 simple none l Specifies the OSPF authentication mode for which a key needs to be set. l If Authentication Type is MD5, a key needs to be set for the MD5 authentication mode. l If Authentication Type is simple, a key needs to be set for the simple authentication mode. l If Authentication Type is none, all preset keys for the related port type are cleared. Authentication Password MD5 Key 1-255 Specifies the OSPF authentication password for each port type. MD5 Key is available only when Authentication Type is MD5.

A.1.2.11 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack_Proxy ARP
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the proxy ARP.

Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree. Click the Proxy ARP tab.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

335

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameters for configuring the proxy ARP
Parameter Proxy ARP Value Range Disabled Enabled Default Value Disabled Description l The proxy ARP enables the NEs in the same network segment but different domains to communicate with each other. l To realize communication between such NEs, the source NE sends the ARP broadcast packet to address the route to the destination NE. The NE with the proxy ARP function enabled checks the routing table after sensing the ARP broadcast packet. If the routing table contains the destination address that the ARP broadcast packet looks for, the NE returns an ARP spoofing packet, which enables the NE that sends the ARP broadcast packet to consider that the MAC address of the NE that returns the ARP spoofing packet is the MAC address of the destination NE. In this manner, the packet that is to be sent to the destination NE is first sent to the NE with the proxy ARP function enabled and then forwarded to the destination NE.

A.1.2.12 Parameter Description: Management of Multiple OSPF Areas
This topic describes the parameters that are related to management of multiple OSPF areas.

Navigation Path
1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE and choose Communication > IP Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree. Click the Multi-OSPF Management tab.

Parameters Required for Configuring Multiple OSPF Areas
Parameter ID Default Area Authentication Type Value Range none MD5 simple
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Default Value none

Description Displays the area ID. Displays whether an area is the default area. l Specifies the OSPF authentication type used by an area. l none indicates no authentication.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

336

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Automatic Route Aggregation

Value Range Enabled Disabled

Default Value Disabled

Description l Specifies whether automatic route aggregation is enabled for an area. l The number of routes after automatic route aggregation is the same as the number of Networks.

Stub Type

-

-

Displays the STUB type of an area.

Network Parameters
Parameter IP Address Subnet Mask Value Range Default Value Description Displays the IP addresses of the Networks in an area. Displays the subnet masks of the Networks in an area.

Parameters for Configuring Manual Route Aggregation
Parameter IP Address Value Range Default Value Description Displays the IP address of the Network where route aggregation is manually enabled. Displays the subnet mask of the Network where route aggregation is manually enabled.

Subnet Mask

-

-

A.1.2.13 Parameter Description: Management of Multiple OSPF Areas_Adding OSPF Areas
This topic describes the parameters that are used for adding OSFP areas.

Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE and choose Communication > IP Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree. Click the Multi-OSPF Management tab. Click New.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

337

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameters Required for Creating OSPF Areas
Parameter ID Value Range Default Value Description l Set the area ID of a new OSPF area according to the planning information. l An NE can be configured with a maximum of four OSPF areas. IP Address l Set the IP addresses of the Networks in an area according to planning information. l An area supports a maximum of four Networks. Subnet Mask Set the subnet masks of the Networks in an area according to planning information. A subnet mask can contain a maximum of 30 bits. Specifies the OSPF authentication type used by an area according to planning information. l none indicates no authentication. l MD5 indicates that authentication is performed based on the preset password, with the password encrypted in MD5 mode. l simple: indicates that authentication is performed based on the preset password, with the password not encrypted. Automatic Route Aggregation Enabled Disabled Disabled l Specifies whether automatic route aggregation is enabled for an area. l The number of routes after automatic route aggregation is the same as the number of Networks. STUB Type NON-STUB STUB NSSA NON-STUB Set the STUB type of an area according to planning information. l For the backbone area, this parameter must be set to NON-STUB. l For other areas, it is recommended that you set this parameter to NON-STUB. If required, this parameter can also be set to STUB or NSSA.

Authentication Type

none MD5 simple

none

A.1.2.14 Parameter Description: Management of Multiple OSPF Areas_Adding Routes to Be Manually Aggregated
This topic describes the parameters for adding routes to be manually aggregated.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 338

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE and choose Communication > IP Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree. Click the Multi-OSPF Management tab. In Manual Route Aggregation, click Add.

Parameters for Configuring Manual Route Aggregation
Parameter ID Address Value Range Default Value Description Specifies the IP address of the Network where routes need to be aggregated manually. Specifies the subnet mask of the Network where routes need to be aggregated manually.

Subnet Mask

-

-

A.1.2.15 Parameter Description: Port OSPF Setting
This section describes the parameters that are used for setting port OSPF parameters.

Navigation Path
1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the required NE and choose Communication > IP Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree. Click the Port OSPF Parameter Settings tab.

Port OSPF Parameters
Parameter Port Path Type OSPF Status Value Range Enabled Disabled Opaque LSA of External Network Port Enabled Disabled Enabled Default Value Enabled Description Displays the ports that allow OSPF parameters to be set. Displays the current DCC channel type. l Specifies whether to enable the OSPF. l Set this parameter as required. l Specifies whether DCC channels support Opaque LSAs. l Set this parameter as required.

A.1.2.16 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Network Layer Parameter
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the network layer of the OSI protocol model.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 339

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > OSI Management from the Function Tree. Click the Network Layer Parameters tab.

Network Layer Parameters
Parameter NE Configuration Role Value Range ES L1 L2 Default Value L1 Description This parameter indicates the name of the NE. l An NE whose Configuration Role is set to L1 cannot function as a neighbor of an NE in the other area. It uses a route in the local area only and accesses the other area by distributing the default route of the nearest L2 NE. l An NE whose Configuration Role is set to L2 can function as a neighbor of an NE in the other area and can use a route in the backbone area. The backbone area is a collection that is formed by consecutive L2 NEs. That is, the L2 NE of all the roles must be consecutive (connected to each other).
NOTE Configuration Role cannot be set to ES.

Current Role

-

-

This parameter indicates the current role.

A.1.2.17 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Routing Table
This topic describes the parameters that are related to OSI routing tables.

Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > OSI Management from the Function Tree. Click the Routing Table tab.

Parameters for Link Adjacency Table
Parameter Port Data Link Layer Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the port used for OSI communication. This parameter indicates the protocol that is used at the data link layer.
340

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Adjacency No.

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description l This parameter specifies the identifier of the adjacency that is set up by two NEs through the OSI protocol. One adjacency number corresponds to an OSI adjacency. l The value is dynamically allocated by the NE.

Adjacency Type Adjacency State Peer End Area ID

-

-

This parameter indicates the type of the adjacency. This parameter indicates the state of the adjacency. This parameter indicates the area ID that is contained in the NSAP address of the opposite NE. This parameter indicates the system ID of the opposite NE. Generally, the system ID is the MAC address.

Peer End System ID

-

-

Parameters for L1 and L2 Routing Tables
Parameter Destination SYSID Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the system ID of the destination NE. Generally, the system ID is the MAC address. This parameter indicates the number of hops that reach the destination NE or destination area. This parameter indicates the number of the adjacent link that is connected to the destination NE. This parameter indicates the number of the adjacent link that is connected to the destination NE.

Metric

-

-

Adjacency No.1

-

-

Adjacency No.2

-

-

A.1.2.18 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Tunnel
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the OSI tunnels.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

341

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > OSI Management from the Function Tree. Click the OSI Tunnel tab.

Parameters for OSI Tunnel Attributes
Parameter Remote IP Address LAPD Actor Value Range User Network Default Value User Description This parameter indicates the IP address of the opposite end of the OSI tunnel. l This parameter specifies the LAPD actor. l If the adjacent NEs run the OSI protocol, they can perform the LAPD negotiation only when the LAPD actor is set to User at one end and is set to Network at the other end. Efficient LAPD Enable Configurable LAPD Enable Enabled Disabled Enabled This parameter indicates whether the current LAPD is enabled. This parameter specifies whether the LAPD is enabled.

LAPD Parameters
Parameter Remote IP Address L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) Value Range 1 to 20 Default Value 1 Description This parameter indicates the IP address of the opposite end of the OSI tunnel. l This parameter specifies L2 Wait Time to Retry(s). l L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) indicates the interval for retransmitting packets at the LAPD link layer. l L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) needs to be set according to the network situation. If the network is in good situation, L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) can be set to a smaller value. Otherwise, it is recommended that you set L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) to a greater value. l This parameter needs to be set according to the planning information. In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 342

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter L2 Retry Times

Value Range 2 to 6

Default Value 3

Description l This parameter specifies L2 Retry Times. l L2 Retry Times indicates the maximum number of packet retransmission attempts at the LAPD link layer. l L2 Retry Times needs to be set according to the network situation. If the network is in good situation, L2 Retry Times can be set to a smaller value. Otherwise, it is recommended that you set L2 Retry Times to a greater value. l This parameter needs to be set according to the planning information. In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value.

L3 Hello Timer(s)

1 to 100

3

l This parameter specifies L3 Hello Timer(s). l L3 Hello Timer(s) indicates the Hello packet timer at the LAPD link network layer. It is used for periodical transmission of the Hello packets. l The Hello timer determines the interval for transmitting the Hello packets once. L3 Hello Timer(s) needs to be set according to the network situation. If the network is in good situation, L3 Hello Timer(s) can be set to a greater value. Otherwise, it is recommended that you set L3 Hello Timer(s) to a smaller value. l This parameter needs to be set according to the planning information. In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

343

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter L3 ES Timer(s)

Value Range 1 to 200

Default Value 50

Description l This parameter specifies L3 ES Timer (s). l L3 ES Timer(s) indicates the ES configuration timer at the LAPD link network layer. It is used for setting the time to transmit the configuration information on the ES route. l L3 ES Timer(s) needs to be set according to the network situation. If the network is in good situation, L3 ES Timer(s) can be set to a greater value. Otherwise, it is recommended that you set L3 Hello Timer(s) to a smaller value. l This parameter needs to be set according to the planning information. In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value.

L3 IS Timer(s)

1 to 200

10

l This parameter specifies L3 IS Timer (s). l L3 IS Timer(s) indicates the IS configuration timer at the LAPD link network layer. It is used for setting the time to transmit the configuration information through the L1/L2 router. l L3 IS Timer(s) needs to be set according to the network situation. If the network is in good situation, L3 IS Timer(s) can be set to a greater value. Otherwise, it is recommended that you set L3 IS Timer (s) to a smaller value. l This parameter needs to be set according to the planning information. In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

344

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter L3 Hold Timer(s)

Value Range 2 to 63

Default Value 5

Description l This parameter specifies L3 Hold Timer (s). l L3 Hold Timer(s) indicates the hold timer at the LAPD link network layer. l L3 Hold Timer(s) needs to be set according to the network situation. If the network is in good situation, L3 Hold Timer(s) can be set to a smaller value. Otherwise, it is recommended that you set L3 IS Timer(s) to a greater value. l This parameter needs to be set according to the planning information. In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value.

COST

1 to 63

20

l This parameter specifies COST. l COST indicates the overhead value of the virtual LAPD that corresponds to the OSI tunnel. l The overhead value determines whether this link is perverted. If the overhead value is smaller, this link has a higher priority to be selected. l This parameter needs to set according to the planning information.

A.1.2.19 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Port Parameters
This topic describes the OSI port parameters.

Navigation Path
1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and choose Communication > OSI Management from the Function Tree. Click the Port Parameters tab.

OSI port parameters
Parameter LAPD Role Value Range User Network Default Value User Description l This parameter is available only when Protocol Type is OSI. l Set LAPD Role to User at one end of a DCC and to Network at the other end of the DCC.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

345

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter LAPD MTU

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description This parameter displays the maximum LAPD packet length.

A.1.2.20 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Bandwidth Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for bandwidth management of the inband DCN.

Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCN Management from the Function Tree. Click the Bandwidth Management tab.

Parameters for Bandwidth Management
Parameter Ethernet Board VLAN ID Value Range 2 to 4094 Default Value 4094 Description l The equipment on the traditional DCN can be connected to the NMS through the SCC board, but the OptiX RTN 910 can also be connected to the NMS through an Ethernet interface. If an Ethernet port is used to carry the network management information, the NE differentiates the network management information and Ethernet service information according to the VLAN ID. l If the default VLAN ID of the inband DCN conflicts with the VLAN ID in the service, the Ethernet Board VLAN ID of the inband DCN can be changed manually. The same VLAN ID must be, however, is used on the network-wide inband DCN. Bandwidth(Kbit/s) 64 to 1000 512 Bandwidth(Kbit/s) specifies the bandwidth for inband DCN messaging on the Ethernet link. The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter. IF Port Bandwidth(Kbit/s) specifies the bandwidth for inband DCN messaging on the radio link.

E1 Port Bandwidth(Kbit/s) Tunnel Bandwidth (Kbit/s) IF Port Bandwidth (Kbit/s)

64 to 1000

512

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

346

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

A.1.2.21 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Port Setting
This topic describes the parameters that are used for setting ports of the inband DCN.

Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCN Management from the Function Tree. Click the Port Settings tab.

Parameters for Setting Ports
Parameter Port Name Enabled Status Value Range Enabled Disabled Default Value Enabled Description This parameter indicates the port name. l Enabled Status specifies the enabling status of the port. l The network management information can be transmitted over the inband DCN when the DCN function is enabled for the ports at both ends of a link. Protocol Type IP HWECC L2DCN IP l Specifies the DCN protocol used by the inband DCN. l If Protocol Type is set to different values for two interconnected sets of equipment, equipment interconnection fails. Therefore, set Protocol Type to the same value for both ends of a link. l This parameter is available only when Protocol Type is set to IP. l When the IP DCN solution is used and the NE functions as an ABR, this parameter specifies the interface IP address of the non-backbone area port on the ABR. Subnet Mask l This parameter is available only when Protocol Type is set to IP. l When the IP DCN solution is used and the NE functions as an ABR, this parameter specifies the subnet mask of the non-backbone area port on the ABR.

IP Address

-

A.1.2.22 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Access Control
This section describes the parameters for configuring access control.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

347

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Navigation Path
l l In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Communication > DCN Management from the Function Tree. Click the Access Control tab.

Parameters
Parameter Port Name Enabled Status Value Range Disabled Enabled Default Value Disabled Description Displays the Ethernet ports that support this function. l Specifies the enabling status of the port. l If the Enabled Status is set to Enabled, this port can be used to support access of the management information from the NMS. l If the Enabled Status is set to Disabled, this port cannot be used to support access of the management information from the NMS. IP Address Subnet Mask 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Specifies the IP address of the port. Specifies the submask of the port.

A.1.2.23 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Packet Control
This topic describes the parameters for controlling the priority of inband DCN packets.

Navigation Path
l l In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and then choose Communication > DCN Management from the Function Tree. Click the Packet Control tab.

Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Packet Type Supported Application Value Range Default Value Description Displays the packet type for which the packet priority can be manually specified. This parameter cannot be specified manually.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

348

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Packet Priority

Value Range CS6 EF AF4 AF3 AF2 AF1 BE

Default Value CS6 (Packet Type is VLAN) BE (Packet Type is DSCP)

Description Specifies the PHB service class of inband DCN packets.

A.1.2.24 Parameter Description: L2 DCN Management
This section describes the parameters that are related to L2 DCN management.

Navigation Path
l l In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and then choose Communication > L2DCN Management from the Function Tree. Click Query.

Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Config Status Value Range Auto Disabled Default Value Auto Description When the OptiX RTN 910 uses the L2 DCN solution, the RSTP protocol can be used to prevent L2 forwarding loops. It is recommended that the RSTP protocol uses its default enable/disable mode Auto for the OptiX RTN 910 NE level. That is, the RSTP protocol is automatically enabled/disabled depending on the enable/disable status of the L2 DCN function over IF ports. l Real Status is queried to be Disabled in the following scenarios: – Config Status is set to Disabled. – When Config Status is set to Auto, the L2 DCN function is disabled for all IF ports on the NE. l When Config Status is set to Auto, the L2 DCN function is enabled for at least one IF port on the NE. In this case, the RSTP protocol will automatically work. At this time, the queried Real Status is Enabled.

Real Status

Disabled Enabled

-

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

349

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

A.1.2.25 Parameter Description: Access Control
This topic describes the parameters that are used for access control of the NMS.

Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > Access Control from the Function Tree.

Parameters for Ethernet Access Control
Parameter Enable Ethernet Access PORT Value Range Selected Deselected Default Value Description After The First Network Port is set to Enabled for Ethernet access, the NE can access the NMS through the Ethernet port. This parameter displays the NMS port and the NE cascading port on the system control, switching, and timing board. This parameter specifies the working modes of the NMS port and the NE cascading port on the system control, switching, and timing board.

Work Mode

adapt 10M Half_Duplex 10M Full_Duplex 100M Half_Duplex 100M Full_Duplex

-

Actual Work Mode

-

-

This parameter displays the working modes of the NMS port and the NE cascading port on the system control, switching, and timing board. Specifies whether the Ethernet network management port or NE cascading port is enabled.

Enabled/Disabled

Enabled Disabled

Parameters for Access Control over Serial Ports
Parameter Enable Serial Port Access Access Command Line Access NM Value Range Selected Deselected Selected Deselected Selected Deselected Deselected Deselected Default Value Selected Description After Enable Serial Port Access is selected, the NE can access the NMS or command lines through the serial port. If Access Command Line is selected, the serial interface can be used to access the command line terminal. If Access NM is selected, the serial interface can be used to access the NMS.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

350

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Baud Rate

Value Range 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200

Default Value 9600

Description l This parameter specifies the data transmission rate in the communications through serial ports. l This parameter is set according to the rate of the serial port at the opposite end, and the rates at both ends must be the same.

A.1.3 Parameters for Network Security Management
This topic describes the parameters that are related to network security management.

A.1.3.1 Parameter Description: NE User Management
This topic describes the parameters that are related to NE user management.

Navigation Path
1. Select the required NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Security > NE User Management from the Function Tree. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. 2. Close the dialog box.

Parameters for NE user management
Parameter NE NE User User Level NE User Flag Value Range Default Value Description Displays the current NE name. Displays the registered NE user name. Displays the registered NE user level. Displays whether a registered NE user is logged in.

A.1.3.2 Parameter Description: NE User Management_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an NE user.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 351

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Navigation Path
1. Select the required NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Security > NE User Management from the Function Tree. A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful. Close the dialog box. Click Add.

2. 3.

Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter NE User Value Range Default Value Description Specifies the name of a registered NE user.
NOTE The name of an NE cannot contain any space or Chinese characters.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

352

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter User Level

Value Range Monitor Level Operation Level Maintenance Level System Level Debug Level

Default Value Monitor Level

Description l A Debug Level NE user has all security and configuration authorities, and has the right to run debugging commands. l A System Level NE user has all security and configuration authorities. l A Maintenance Level NE user has some security authorities, some configuration authorities, the communication setting authority, and the log management authority. l An Operation Level NE user has all fault performance authorities, some security authorities, and some configuration authorities. l A Monitor Level NE user has the right to use all query commands, to log in, to log out, and to change its own password.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

353

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter NE User Flag

Value Range LCT NE User EMS NE User CMD NE User General NE User

Default Value LCT NE User

Description l Specifies the NE user flag. l LCT NE User indicates NE users for NE management on the U2000 Local Craft Terminal (U2000 LCT). l EMS NE User indicates NE users for NE management on the U2000. l CMD NE User indicates NE users for NE management on the CMD. l General NE User indicates NE users for all NMS types.

Detailed Description New Password Confirm Password Immediate Password Change

Yes No

Yes

Describes a configured NE user. l Specifies the password for a new NE user. Enter the same value as New Password. Specifies whether the password of a registered NE user can be changed.

A.1.3.3 Parameter Description: LCT Access Control
This topic describes the parameters that are used for LCT access control.

Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Security > LCT Access Control from the Function Tree.

Parameters for LCT Access Control
Parameter NE Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the name of the NE.
354

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter LCT Access Control Switch

Value Range Access Allowed Disable Access

Default Value Access Allowed

Description l No NMS user logs in to the NE. In this case, when the LCT requests an LCT user to log in to the NE, the NE does not check the status of LCT Access Control Switch, and directly allows the LCT user to log in to the NE. l An NMS user first logs in to the NE. In this case, when the LCT requests an LCT user to log in to the NE, the NE determines whether to allow the LCT user to log in to the NE through the LCT according to the status of LCT Access Control Switch. l An LCT user first logs in to the NE. In this case, when the NMS requests an NMS user to log in to the NE, the NMS user can directly log in to the NE. After the NMS user successfully logs in to the NE, the online LCT user is not affected. l When both the LCT user and NMS user log in to the NE, the online LCT user is not affected after LCT Access Control Switch is set to Disable Access.

A.1.3.4 Parameter Description: RADIUS Configuration_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RADIUS configuration.

Navigation Path
1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and choose Security > NE RADIUS Configuration from the Function Tree. Click New.

Parameters
Parameter Function Server ID Server Type Value Range Default Value Description Specifies the desired RADIUS function, the authentication server ID, and the server type. l Function, Server ID, and Server Type are associated with the servers that are configured in Creating a RADIUS Server or a RADIUS Proxy Server. l Select the desired RADIUS server or proxy server according to planning information.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

355

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Server Status

Value Range Active Standby

Default Value Active

Description Specifies the active/standby status of the RADIUS server or proxy server. l If no standby server is required, set Server Status to Active. l The OptiX RTN 910 supports one active server and one standby server. If both the active and standby servers are configured, set Server Status of the active server to Active and Server Status of the standby server to Standby.

Shared Key

-

-

Specifies the key for communication between an NE and the RADIUS server. l Set Shared Key to the same value on the NE and on the RADIUS server. l If Server Type is Proxy Server, Shared Key is not available.

Interval of Packet Transmission Packet Retransmission Attempts

3-10 1-5

5 3

Specifies the number of packet retransmission attempts and the interval between the attempts. l If an NE does not receive the response from the RADIUS server within a specific period, the NE re-transmits the authentication request for the configured attempt times and at the configured interval. l It is recommended that Interval of Packet Transmission and Packet Retransmission Attempts take their default values.

A.1.3.5 Parameter Description: RADIUS Configuration_RADIUS Server
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RADIUS server configuration.

Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and choose Security > NE RADIUS Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the RADIUS Server Configuration tab. The RADIUS Server Information dialog box is displayed. Click New.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

356

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameters
Parameter Function Value Range Authentication Accounting Authentication + Accounting Default Value Authentication Description Specifies the RADIUS function that an NE needs to use. l For NE RADIUS authentication, select Authentication. l For both NE RADIUS authentication and NE usage accounting, set this parameter to Authentication + Accounting or Accounting (when the Authentication function has been enabled). Server Type RADIUS Server Proxy Server RADIUS Server Specifies the server type used for NE RADIUS authentication. l When an NE uses RADIUS authentication in the NAS mode or functions as a proxy server, set Server Type to RADIUS Server. l When an NE uses RADIUS authentication in the proxy NAS mode, set Server Type to Proxy Server. Server ID IP Address NE ID IP Address Specifies the address of the server that is used for NE RADIUS authentication. l If Server Type is RADIUS Server, set Server ID to IP Address and specify the IP address of the RADIUS server. l If Server Type is Proxy Server, it is recommended that you set Server ID to NE ID and set the gateway NE as the proxy server. l If Server Type is Proxy Server and there is no IP route between the NE and the proxy server, Server ID can be set to only NE ID. If Server Type is Proxy Server and there is an IP route between the NE and the proxy server, Server ID can be set to NE ID or IP Address.

A.1.3.6 Parameter Description: Enabling/Disabling the RADIUS Function
This topic describes the parameters that are required for enabling/disabling the RADIUS function.

Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and choose Security > NE RADIUS Configuration from the Function Tree.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 357

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameters
Parameter NE RADIUS Client Value Range Open Close Default Value Close Description Displays the NE name. Specifies whether an NE has the ability to be a RADIUS client. The RADIUS function can be enabled on an NE only if RADIUS Client is set to Open for the NE. Specifies whether an NE has the ability to be a proxy server. l If an NE needs to function as a proxy server, set Proxy Server to Open for the NE. l Proxy Server can be set to Open only if RADIUS Client is set to Open. l When an NE uses RADIUS authentication in the proxy NAS mode, set Proxy Server to Close.

Proxy Server

Open Close

Close

A.2 Radio Link Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to radio links.

A.2.1 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC Workgroup_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function.

Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the XPIC tab. Click New.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

358

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameters
Parameter IF Channel Bandwidth Value Range ISX2: 7M 14M 28M 40M 56M IFX2: 7M 14M 28M 56M Polarization Direction-V Polarization Direction-H l This parameter indicates the polarization direction of a radio link. l It is recommended that you set the IF port on the XPIC IF board that has a smaller slot number to Link ID-V and the IF port on the other XPIC IF board to Link IDH. l Set Link ID-V and Link ID-H. l A link ID is an identifier of a radio link and is used to prevent the radio links between sites from being wrongly connected. l When the link ID received by an NE is different from the link ID set for the NE, the NE reports an MW_LIM alarm and inserts the AIS. l These two parameters are set according to the planning information. These two parameters must be set to different values, but Link ID-V must be set to the same value at both ends of a link and Link ID-H must also be set to the same value at both ends of a link. Default Value Description l This parameter specifies the channel spacing when the XPIC function is enabled. l When this parameter is set to 56M or 40M, the high-power ODU must be used.

Link ID-V Link ID-H

1 to 4094

1 2

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

359

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Transmit Power (dBm)

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description l This parameter specifies the transmit power of an ODU. The value of this parameter must not exceed the rated power range supported by the ODU. l It is recommended that you set the transmit power of the ODU to the same value at both ends of a radio link. l Consider the receive power of the ODU at the opposite end when you set this parameter. Ensure that the receive power of the ODU at the opposite end can ensure stable radio services. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Maximum Transmit Power (dBm)

-

-

l This parameter specifies the maximum transmit power of the ODU. This parameter cannot be set to a value that exceeds the nominal power rang of the ODU in the guaranteed capacity modulation module. l This parameter is set to limit the maximum transmit power of the ODU within this preset range. l The maximum transmit power adjusted by using the ATPC function should not exceed this value. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Transmission Frequency(MHz)

-

-

l This parameter indicates the channel central frequency. l The value of this parameter must not be less than the sum of the lower transmit frequency limit supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing, and must not be more than the difference between the upper transmit frequency limit supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

360

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter T/R Spacing(MHz)

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description l This parameter specifies the spacing between the transmit frequency and the receive frequency of an ODU to prevent mutual interference between the transmitter and the receiver. l If Station Type of the ODU is TX high, the transmit frequency is one T/R spacing higher than the receive frequency. If Station Type of the ODU is TX low, the transmit frequency is one T/R spacing lower than the receive frequency. l If the ODU supports only one T/R spacing, this parameter is set to 0, indicating that the T/R spacing supported by the ODU is used. l A valid T/R spacing value is determined by the ODU itself, and the T/R spacing should be set according to the technical specifications of the ODU. l The T/R spacing of the ODU should be set to the same value at both ends of a radio link.

Transmission Status

unmute mute

unmute

l When this parameter is set to mute, the ODU does not transmit microwave signals but can normally receive microwave signals. l When this parameter is set to unmute, the ODU normally transmits and receives microwave signals. l In normal cases, Transmission Status is set to unmute.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

361

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter ATPC Enabled

Value Range Disabled Enabled

Default Value Disabled

Description l This parameter specifies whether the ATPC function is enabled. l If this parameter is set to Enabled and if the RSL at the receive end is 2 dB higher or lower than the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold at the receive end, the receiver notifies the transmitter to decrease or increase the transmit power until the RSL is within the range that is 2 dB higher or lower than the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold. l The settings of the ATPC attributes must be consistent at both ends of a radio link. l In the case of areas where fast fading severely affects the radio transmission, it is recommended that you set this parameter to Disabled. l During the commissioning process, set this parameter to Disabled to ensure that the transmit power is not changed. After the commissioning, re-set the ATPC attributes.

ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm)

-

-45.0 -70.0

l The central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold is set as the expected receive power. l It is recommended that you set ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) to the sum of the planned central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm) to the difference between the planned central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB. l You can set the ATPC upper threshold only when ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status is set to Disabled.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

362

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status

Value Range Disabled Enabled

Default Value Disabled

Description l This parameter specifies whether the ATPC automatic threshold function is enabled. l If this parameter is set to Enabled, the equipment automatically uses the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds according to the work mode of the radio link.

A.2.2 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function.

Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the XPIC tab.

Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Group ID Polarization Direction-V Link ID-V Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the ID of the work group. This parameter indicates the IF port to which the polarization direction V corresponds. This parameter indicates the link ID to which the polarization direction V corresponds. This parameter indicates the IF port to which the polarization direction H corresponds. This parameter indicates the link ID to which the polarization direction H corresponds.

Polarization Direction-H Link ID-H

-

-

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

363

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter IF Channel Bandwidth

Value Range ISX2: 7M 14M 28M 40M 56M IFX2: 7M 14M 28M 56M

Default Value -

Description l IF Channel Bandwidth refers to the channel spacing of the corresponding radio links. l When this parameter is set to 56M or 40M, the high-power ODU must be used. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Power to Be Received -V(dBm)

-90.0 to -20.0

-10.0

l This parameter is used to set the expected receive power of the ODU and is mainly used in the antenna alignment stage. After this parameter is set, the NE automatically enables the antenna misalignment indicating function. l When the antenna misalignment indicating function is enabled, if the actual receive power of the ODU is 3 dB lower than the power expected to be received, the ODU indicator on the IF board connected to the ODU blinks yellow (300 ms on, 300 ms off), indicating that the antenna is not aligned. l After the antenna alignment, after the state that the antenna is aligned lasts for 30 minutes, the NE automatically disables the antenna misalignment indicating function. l When this parameter takes the default value, the antenna misalignment indicating function is disabled. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

364

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Power to Be Received -H(dBm)

Value Range -90.0 to -20.0

Default Value -10.0

Description l This parameter is used to set the expected receive power of the ODU and is mainly used in the antenna alignment stage. After this parameter is set, the NE automatically enables the antenna misalignment indicating function. l When the antenna misalignment indicating function is enabled, if the actual receive power of the ODU is 3 dB lower than the power expected to be received, the ODU indicator on the IF board connected to the ODU blinks yellow (300 ms on, 300 ms off), indicating that the antenna is not aligned. l After the antenna alignment, after the state that the antenna is aligned lasts for 30 minutes, the NE automatically disables the antenna misalignment indicating function. l When this parameter takes the default value, the antenna misalignment indicating function is disabled. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Maximum Transmit Power (dBm)

-

-

l This parameter specifies the maximum transmit power of the ODU. This parameter cannot be set to a value that exceeds the nominal power rang of the ODU in the guaranteed capacity modulation module. l This parameter is set to limit the maximum transmit power of the ODU within this preset range. l The maximum transmit power adjusted by using the ATPC function should not exceed this value. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

365

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Transmit Power (dBm)

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description l This parameter indicates or specifies the transmit power of the ODU. This parameter cannot be set to a value that exceeds the nominal power range of the ODU. l It is recommended that you set the transmit power of the ODU to the same value at both ends of a radio link. l Consider the receive power of the ODU at the opposite end when you set this parameter. Ensure that the receive power of the ODU at the opposite end can ensure stable radio services. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Transmission Frequency(MHz)

-

-

l This parameter indicates or specifies the transmit frequency of the ODU, namely, the channel central frequency. l The value of this parameter must not be less than the sum of the lower TX frequency limit supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing, and must not be more than the difference between the upper TX frequency limit supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing. l The difference between the transmit frequencies of both the ends of a radio link should be one T/R spacing. l This parameter needs to be set according to the planning information.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

366

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter T/R Spacing(MHz)

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description l This parameter indicates or specifies the spacing between the transmit frequency and receive frequency of the ODU to prevent mutual interference between the transmitter and receiver. l If the ODU is a Tx high station, the transmit frequency is one T/R spacing higher than the receive frequency. If the ODU is a Tx low station, the transmit frequency is one T/R spacing lower than the receive frequency. l If the ODU supports only one T/R spacing, this parameter is set to 0, indicating that the T/R spacing supported by the ODU is used. l A valid T/R spacing value is determined by the ODU itself, and the T/R spacing should be set according to the technical specifications of the ODU. l The T/R spacing of the ODU should be set to the same value at both ends of a radio link.

Transmission Status

unmute mute

unmute

l This parameter indicates or specifies the transmit status of the ODU. l If this parameter is set to mute, the transmitter of the ODU does not work but can normally receive microwave signals. l If this parameter is set to unmute, the ODU can normally transmit and receive microwave signals. l In normal cases, this parameter is set to unmute.

Parameters for Hybrid/AM Configuration
Parameter Group ID Polarization direction Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the ID of the work group. This parameter indicates the IF port to which the polarization direction H or the polarization direction V corresponds.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

367

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter AM Enable Status

Value Range Disabled Enabled

Default Value Disabled

Description l When AM Enable Status is set to Disabled, the radio link uses only the specified modulation scheme. In this case, you need to select Manually Specified Modulation Mode. l When AM Enable Status is set to Enabled, the radio link uses the corresponding modulation scheme according to the channel conditions. Hence, the Hybrid radio can ensure the reliable transmission of the E1 services and provide bandwidth adaptively for the Ethernet services when the AM function is enabled.

Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity

QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM

-

This parameter specifies the highest-gain modulation scheme that the AM function supports. This parameter is set according to the planning information. Generally, the value of this parameter is determined by the bandwidth of the services that need to be transmitted over the Hybrid radio and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme.
NOTE Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity must be higher than Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity.

This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Enabled. Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM This parameter specifies the highest-gain modulation scheme that the AM function supports. This parameter is set according to the planning information. Generally, the value of this parameter is determined by the bandwidth of the services that need to be transmitted over the Hybrid radio and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme.
NOTE Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity must be higher than Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity.

This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Enabled.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

368

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Manually Specified Modulation Mode

Value Range QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM

Default Value QPSK

Description This parameter specifies the modulation scheme that the radio link uses for signal transmission. This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Disabled.

Transmit-End Modulation Mode Receive-End Modulation Mode

-

-

Displays the modulation mode at the transmit end. Displays the modulation mode at the receive end.

Parameters for ATPC Management
Parameter Group ID ATPC Enable Status Value Range Disabled Enabled Default Value Description This parameter indicates the object to be set. l This parameter specifies whether the ATPC function is enabled. l If this parameter is set to Enabled and if the RSL at the receive end is 2 dB higher or lower than the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold at the receive end, the receiver notifies the transmitter to decrease or increase the transmit power until the RSL is within the range that is 2 dB higher or lower than the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold. l The settings of the ATPC attributes must be consistent at both ends of a radio link. l In the case of areas where fast fading severely affects the radio transmission, it is recommended that you set this parameter to Disabled. l During the commissioning process, set this parameter to Disabled to ensure that the transmit power is not changed. After the commissioning, re-set the ATPC attributes. ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) l Set the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

369

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm)

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description threshold to a value for the expected receive power. l It is recommended that you set ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) to the sum of the planned central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm) o the difference between the planned central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB. l You can set this parameter only when ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status is set to Disabled. l This parameter specifies whether the ATPC automatic threshold function is enabled. l If this parameter is set to Enabled, the equipment automatically uses the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds according to the work mode of the radio link. l If this parameter is set to Disabled, you need to manually set ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) and ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm).

ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status

Disabled Enabled

-

A.2.3 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection_Create
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF N+1 protection group.

Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > N+1 Protection from the Function Tree. Click Create.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

370

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter WTR time(s) Value Range 300 to 720 Default Value 600 Description l This parameter specifies the wait-torestore (WTR) time. l When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the set WTR time, a revertive switching occurs. l It is recommended that you use the default value. SD enable Enabled Disabled Enabled l This parameter specifies whether the signal degradation switching function of N+1 protection is enabled. l When this parameter is set to Enabled, the signal degradation condition is considered as a trigger condition of protection switching. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Enabled.

Slot Mapping Relation Parameters
Parameter Select Mapping Direction Value Range Work Unit Protection Unit Default Value Work Unit Description l This parameter specifies the mapping direction of N+1 protection. l This parameter is set according to the planning information. Select Mapping Way l In the case of N+1 protection, map N IF ports as Work Unit and map the remaining IF port as Protection Unit. l This parameter is set according to the planning information. Mapped Board This parameter indicates the working unit and protection unit that have been set.

A.2.4 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection
This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF N+1 protection.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

371

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > N+1 Protection from the Function Tree.

Protection Group Parameters
Parameter Protection Group ID WTR Time(s) Value Range 300 to 720 Default Value Description This parameter indicates the ID of the protection group. l This parameter indicates or specifies the WTR time. l When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the set WTR time, a revertive switching occurs. l It is recommended that you use the default value. SD Enable Enabled Disabled l This parameter indicates or specifies whether the SD switching function of N +1 protection is enabled. l When this parameter is set to Enabled, the SD condition is considered as a trigger condition of protection switching. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Enabled. Protocol Status This parameter indicates the status of the switching control protocol.

Protection Unit Parameters
Parameter Protection Unit Line Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the protection unit. This parameter indicates the information about the working board or protection board. This parameter indicates the switching state. This parameter indicates the protected unit. This parameter indicates the local end or remote end.

Switching Status Protected Unit Remote/Local End Indication

-

-

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

372

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

A.2.5 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection_Create
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF 1+1 protection group.

Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree. Click Create.

Parameters
Parameter Working Mode Value Range HSB FD SD Default Value HSB Description l This parameter specifies the working mode of the IF 1+1 protection. l When Working Mode is set to HSB, the equipment provides a 1+1 hot standby configuration for the IF board and ODU at both ends of each hop of a radio link to realize the protection. l When Working Mode is set to FD, the system uses two channels that have a frequency spacing between them, to transmit and receive the same signal. The remote end selects signals from the two received signals. With FD protection, the impact of the fading on signal transmission is reduced. l When Working Mode is set to SD, the system uses two antennas that have a space distance between them, to receive the same signal. The equipment selects signals from the two received signals. With SD protection, the impact of the fading on signal transmission is reduced. l The FD mode and SD mode are compatible with the HSB switching function. l This parameter is set according to the network plan.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

373

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Revertive Mode

Value Range Revertive Mode Non-Revertive

Default Value Revertive Mode

Description l This parameter specifies the revertive mode of the IF 1+1 protection. l When Revertive Mode is set to Revertive Mode, the NE that is in the switching state releases the switching and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state some time after the former working channel is restored to normal. It is recommended that you set this parameter to Revertive Mode. l When Revertive Mode is set to NonRevertive, the NE that is in the switching state keeps the current state unchanged unless another switching occurs even though the former working channel is restored to normal.

WTR Time(s)

300 to 720

600

l This parameter specifies the wait-torestore (WTR) time. l When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the set WTR Time(s), a revertive switching occurs. l You can set WTR Time(s) only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive Mode. It is recommended that you use the default value.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

374

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Enable Reverse Switching

Value Range Enabled Disabled

Default Value Enabled

Description l This parameter indicates whether the reverse switching function is enabled. l When both the main IF board and the standby IF board at the sink end report service alarms, they send the alarms to the source end by using the MWRDI overhead in the microwave frame. When Enable Reverse Switching at the source end is set to Enabled and the reverse switching conditions are met, the IF 1+1 protection switching occurs at the source end. l Enable Reverse Switching is valid only when Working Mode is set to HSB or SD. l Generally, if Working Mode is set to HSB, it is recommended that you set Enable Reverse Switching to Disabled; if Working Mode is set to SD, it is recommended that you set Enable Reverse Switching to Enabled.

Working Board Protection Board Alarm Report Mode

Only board alarms Only protection group alarms Protection group and board alarms

Only board alarms

This parameter specifies the working board of the protection group. This parameter specifies the protection board of the protection group. l When Alarm Report Mode is set to Only board alarms, only IF board alarms are reported. l When Alarm Report Mode is set to Only protection group alarms, alarms are reported if a protection group fails or degrades and suppress IF board alarms and radio link alarms. l When Alarm Report Mode is set to Protection group and board alarms, IF board alarms and protection group alarms are reported. l It is recommended that you set Alarm Report Mode to Only protection group alarms. In this case, protection group alarms are reported to indicate radio link faults.
NOTE The faulty board reports related fault alarms regardless of parameter settings.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

375

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Anti-jitter Time(s)

Value Range 0 to 600

Default Value 300

Description l When Anti-jitter Time(s) is not set to 0, a protection group does not report an alarm immediately after it is degraded, but reports the alarm after the specified anti-jitter time expires. l It is recommended that Anti-jitter Time (s) take its default value.

NOTE

Each of the parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, WTR Time(s),Anti-jitter Time(s) and Enable Reverse Switching must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio hop.

A.2.6 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection
This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF 1+1 protection.

Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF 1+1 Protection from the Function Tree.

Protection Group Parameters
Parameter Protection Group ID Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the ID of the protection group.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

376

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Working Mode

Value Range HSB FD SD

Default Value -

Description l This parameter indicates the working mode of the created IF 1+1 protection group. l In HSB mode, the equipment provides a 1+1 hot standby configuration for the IF board and ODU at both ends of each hop of a radio link to realize the protection. l In FD mode, the system uses two channels that have a frequency spacing between them, to transmit and receive the same signal. The remote end selects signals from the two received signals. With FD protection, the impact of the fading on signal transmission is reduced. l In SD mode, the system uses two antennas that have a space distance between them, to receive the same signal. The equipment selects signals from the two received signals. With SD protection, the impact of the fading on signal transmission is reduced. l The FD mode and SD mode are compatible with the HSB switching function. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Revertive Mode

Revertive Mode Non-Revertive Mode

-

l This parameter indicates or specifies the revertive mode of the protection group. l When this parameter is set to Revertive Mode, the NE that is in the switching state releases the switching and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state some time after the former working channel is restored to normal. l When this parameter is set to NonRevertive Mode, the NE that is in the switching state keeps the current state unchanged unless another switching occurs even though the former working channel is restored to normal. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Revertive Mode.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

377

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter WTR Time(s)

Value Range 300 to 720

Default Value -

Description l This parameter indicates or specifies the WTR time. l When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the set WTR time, a revertive switching occurs. l You can set WTR Time(s) only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive Mode. l It is recommended that you use the default value.

Enable Reverse Switching

Enabled Disabled

-

l This parameter indicates or specifies whether the reverse switching function is enabled. l When both the main IF board and the standby IF board at the sink end report service alarms, they send the alarms to the source end by using the MWRDI overhead in the microwave frame. When this parameter at the source end is set to Enabled and the reverse switching conditions are met, the IF 1+1 protection switching occurs at the source end. l This parameter is valid only when Working Mode is set to HSB or SD.

NE Switching Status

-

-

l This parameter indicates the switching state on the equipment side. l Unknown is displayed when the switching state on the channel side is not queried or not obtained after a query.

Channel Switching Status

-

-

l This parameter indicates the switching state on the channel side. l Unknown is displayed when the switching state on the channel side is not queried or not obtained after a query.

Active Port of Device Active Port of Channel

-

-

This parameter indicates the current working board on the equipment side. This parameter indicates the current working board on the channel side.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

378

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Alarm Report Mode

Value Range Only board alarms Only Protection group alarms Protection group and board alarms

Default Value -

Description l When Alarm Report Mode is set to Only board alarms, only IF board alarms are reported. l When Alarm Report Mode is set to Only protection group alarms, alarms are reported if a protection group fails or degrades and suppress IF board alarms and radio link alarms. l When Alarm Report Mode is set to Protection group and board alarms, IF board alarms and protection group alarms are reported. l It is recommended that you set Alarm Report Mode to Only protection group alarms. In this case, protection group alarms are reported to indicate radio link faults.
NOTE The faulty board reports related fault alarms regardless of parameter settings.

Anti-jitter Time

0 to 600

-

l When Anti-jitter Time(s) is not set to 0, a protection group does not report an alarm immediately after it is degraded, but reports the alarm after the specified anti-jitter time expires. l It is recommended that Anti-jitter Time (s) take its default value.

NOTE

Each of the parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, and WTR Time(s) must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio hop.

Slot Mapping Relation Parameters
Parameter Unit Slot Mapping Relation Working Status of Device Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the working board and protection board. This parameter indicates the names and ports of the working board and protection board. This parameter indicates the working state on the equipment side.

-

-

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

379

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Signal Status of Channel

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description This parameter indicates the status of the link signal.

A.2.7 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_Creating a PLA Group
This topic describes the parameters for creating a PLA group.

Navigation Path
1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > Physical Link Aggregation from the Function Tree. Click New.

Parameters for Creating a PLA group
Parameter PLA ID Main Board Main Port Board Port Selected Slave Ports Value Range 1 Default Value Description This parameter specifies the ID of a PLA group. This parameter specifies the main IF board in a PLA group. This parameter specifies the main port in a PLA group. This parameter specifies the slave IF board in a PLA group. This parameter specifies the slave port in a PLA group. This parameter displays the slave IF board and slave port that have been selected.

A.2.8 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_PLA
This topic describes PLA parameters.

Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > Physical Link Aggregation from the Function Tree.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

380

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

PLA Parameters
Parameter PLA ID Main Board Main Port Hardware Status of Main Port Link Status of Main Port Work Status of Main Port Minimum Active Links Value Range Default Value Description This parameter displays the ID of a PLA group. This parameter displays the main IF board in a PLA group. This parameter displays the main port in a PLA group. This parameter displays whether the main IF board in a PLA group is functional. This parameter displays whether the main link in a PLA group is functional. This parameter displays the working status of the main port in a PLA group. This parameter specifies the minimum number of available links in a PLA group and helps to trigger ERPS switching even if not all members in the PLA group fail For example, if you set Minimum Active Links to 2, ERPS switching is triggered when either PLA member link fails. Slave Board Slave Port Hardware Status of Slave Port Link Status of Slave Port Work Status of Slave Port This parameter displays the slave IF board in a PLA group. This parameter displays the slave port in a PLA group. This parameter displays whether the slave IF board in a PLA group is functional. This parameter displays whether the slave link in a PLA group is functional. This parameter displays the working status of the slave port in a PLA group.

A.2.9 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the IF/ODU.

Navigation Path
1. 2.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 381

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameters for Configuring the IF
Parameter Work Mode Value Range 1,4E1,7MHz,QPSK 2,4E1,3.5MHz, 16QAM 3,8E1,14MHz,QPS K 4,8E1,7MHz, 16QAM 5,16E1,28MHz,QP SK 6,16E1,14MHz, 16QAM 7,STM-1,28MHz, 128QAM 10,22E1,14MHz, 32QAM 11,26E1,14MHz, 64QAM 12,32E1,14MHz, 128QAM 13,35E1,28MHz, 16QAM 14,44E1,28MHz, 32QAM 15,53E1,28MHz, 64QAM Link ID 1 to 4094 1 l Link ID indicates or specifies the ID of a radio link. As the identifier of a radio link, this parameter is used to prevent incorrect connections of radio links between sites. l If the value of Received Radio Link ID does not match the preset value of Link ID at the local end, the local end inserts the AIS signal to the downstream direction of the service. At the same time, the local end reports MW_LIM alarm to the NMS, indicating that the link IDs do not match. l Link ID is set according to the network plan. Each radio link of an NE should have a unique link ID, and the link IDs at both ends of a radio link should be the same. Default Value Description l This parameter indicates or specifies the work mode of the radio link in "work mode number, service capacity, channel spacing, modulation mode" format. l This parameter is set according to the network plan. The work modes of the IF boards at the two ends of a radio link must be the same.
NOTE The IF1 board supports this parameter.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

382

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Received Link ID

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description l This parameter indicates the received ID of the radio link. l If the value of Received Radio Link ID does not match the preset value of Radio Link ID at the local end, the local end inserts the AIS signal to the downstream direction of the service. At the same time, the local end reports an alarm to the NMS, indicating that the link IDs do not match. l When the radio link becomes faulty, this parameter is displayed as an invalid value.

IF Service Type

Hybrid(Native E1 +ETH) Hybrid(Native STM-1+ETH) SDH

Hybrid(Native E1 +ETH)

l Displays or specifies the type of services carried by the IF board. l If the Integrated IP radio transmits Native E1 services, set this parameter to Hybrid(Native E1+ETH). l If the Integrated IP radio transmits Native STM-1 services, set this parameter to Hybrid(Native STM-1 +ETH). l If the SDH radio transmits SDH services, set this parameter to SDH.
NOTE The ISU2 and ISX2 boards support this parameter.

IF Channel Bandwidth

3.5M 7M 14M 28M 40M 56M

-

IF Channel Bandwidth indicates the channel spacing of the corresponding radio link. This parameter is set according to the network plan.
NOTE l This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board. l The IFU2 board does not support the value 40M. l The IFX2 board does not support the values 40M. l IF Channel Bandwidth can be set to 3.5M only for the ISU2 board.

AM Mode

-

-

This parameter is not applicable to the OptiX RTN 910.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

383

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter AM Enable Status

Value Range Disabled Enabled

Default Value Disabled

Description l When AM Enable Status is set to Disabled, the radio link uses only the specified modulation scheme. In this case, you need to select Manually Specified Modulation Mode. l When AM Enable Status is set to Enabled, the radio link uses the corresponding modulation scheme according to the channel conditions. l Hence, the Integrated IP radio can ensure the reliable transmission of the E1 services and provide bandwidth adaptively for the Ethernet services when the AM function is enabled. l The ISX2/ISU2 does not support the AM function when IF Service Type is SDH. l When IF Channel Bandwidth is 3.5M for the ISU2 board, the AM function is unavailable and AM Enable Status must be set to Disabled.
NOTE This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.

Manually Specified Modulation Mode

QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM

QPSK

l This parameter specifies the modulation scheme that the radio link uses for signal transmission. l This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Disabled.
NOTE This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.

Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity

QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM

QPSK

l This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Enabled. l Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity specifies the lowest-order modulation scheme that the AM function supports. This parameter is set according to the network plan. Generally, the value of this parameter is determined by the service transmission bandwidth that the Hybrid radio must ensure and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme.
NOTE This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

384

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity

Value Range QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM

Default Value QPSK

Description l This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Enabled. l Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity specifies the highest-order modulation scheme that the AM function supports. This parameter is set according to the network plan. Generally, the value of this parameter is determined by the bandwidth of the services that need to be transmitted over the Hybrid radio and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme.
NOTE Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity must be higher than Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity. NOTE This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.

STM-1 Capacity

-

-

l Specifies the STM-1 capacity of the IF board. l This parameter is available only when IF Service Type is set to Hybrid(Native STM-1+ETH) and SDH. l If IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native STM-1+ETH), this parameter can be set to 0 or 1. l If IF Service Type is SDH, this parameter can be set to 1 or 2.
NOTE The IF1, IFU2, and IFX2 boards do not support this parameter.

Guarantee E1 Capacity

-

-

l If AM Enable Status is set to Enabled, this parameter needs to be set according to IF Channel Bandwidth, Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity, and the actually transmitted services. l If AM Enable Status is set to Disabled, this parameter needs to be set according to IF Channel Bandwidth, Manually Specified Modulation Mode, and the actually transmitted services. l For the ISU2 and ISX2 boards, this parameter is available when IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).
NOTE This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

385

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Guarantee E1 Capacity Range Data Service Bandwidth(Mbit/ s) Enable E1 Priority

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description Displays the E1 capacity range of the IF board in guarantee capacity modulation mode. Displays the data service bandwidth of the IF board. l This parameter specifies whether to enable the E1 priority function. l This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Enabled. l For the ISU2 and ISX2 boards, this parameter is available when IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).
NOTE This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.

-

-

Disabled Enabled

Disabled

Full E1 Capacity

-

-

l This parameter specifies the number of transmitted E1 services in Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity. l This parameter is valid if Enable E1 Priority is set to Enabled. l E1 service bandwidth in full capacity mode ≤ Service bandwidth in full capacity mode - Service bandwidth in guarantee capacity mode + E1 service bandwidth in guarantee capacity mode. In addition, the number of E1 services in full capacity modulation mode should be smaller than or equal to the maximum number of E1 services in full capacity modulation mode. l The Full E1 Capacity must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio link. l For the ISU2 and ISX2 boards, this parameter is available when IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).
NOTE This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.

Full E1 Capacity Range

-

-

Displays the E1 capacity range of the IF board in full capacity modulation mode.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

386

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameters for Configuring the RF
Parameter TX Frequency (MHz) Value Range Default Value Description l This parameter indicates or specifies the transmit frequency of the ODU, namely, the channel central frequency. l The value of this parameter must not be less than the sum of the lower TX frequency limit supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing, and must not be more than the difference between the upper TX frequency limit supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing. l The difference between the transmit frequencies of both the ends of a radio link should be one T/R spacing. l This parameter needs to be set according to the network plan. Range of TX Frequency(MHz) l This parameter indicates the range of the transmit frequency of the ODU. l The Range of Frequency(MHz) depends on the specifications of the ODU. Actual TX Frequency(MHz) Actual RX Frequency(MHz) This parameter indicates the actual transmit frequency of the ODU. This parameter indicates the actual receive frequency of the ODU.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

387

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter T/R Spacing(MHz)

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description l This parameter specifies the spacing between the transmit frequency and the receive frequency of an ODU to prevent interference between them. l If Station Type of the ODU is TX high, the TX frequency is one T/R spacing higher than the receive frequency. If Station Type of the ODU is TX low, the TX frequency is one T/R spacing lower than the receive frequency. l If the ODU supports only one T/R spacing, set this parameter to 0, indicating that the T/R spacing supported by the ODU is used. l A valid T/R spacing value is determined by the ODU itself, and the T/R spacing should be set according to the technical specifications of the ODU. l The T/R spacing of the ODU should be set to the same value at both the ends of a radio link.

Actual T/R Spacing(MHz)

-

-

This parameter indicates the actual T/R spacing of the ODU.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

388

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameters for Configuring the Power
Parameter TX Power(dBm) Value Range Default Value Description l This parameter indicates or specifies the transmit power of the ODU. This parameter cannot be set to a value that exceeds the nominal power range of the ODU. l This parameter cannot take a value greater than the preset value of Maximum Transmit Power(dBm). l It is recommended that you set the transmit power of the ODU to the same value at both ends of a radio link. l Consider the receive power of the ODU at the opposite end when you set this parameter. Ensure that the receive power of the ODU at the opposite end can ensure stable radio services. l This parameter needs to be set according to the network plan. Range of TX Power(dBm) Actual TX Power (dBm) This parameter indicates the range of the transmit power of the ODU. l This parameter indicates the actual transmit power of the ODU. l If the ATPC function is enabled, the queried actual transmit power may be different from the preset value.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

389

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Power to Be Received(dBm)

Value Range -90.0 to -20.0

Default Value -10.0

Description l Power to Be Received(dBm) is used to set the expected receive power of the ODU and is mainly used in the antenna alignment stage. After this parameter is set, the NE automatically enables the antenna misalignment indicating function. l When the antenna misalignment indicating function is enabled, When the antenna non-alignment indication function is enabled, if the actual receive power of the ODU is 3 dB lower than the power expected to be received, the ODU indicator on the IF board connected to the ODU blinks yellow (300 ms on, 300 ms off), indicating that the antenna is not aligned. l After the antenna alignment, after the state that the antenna is aligned lasts for 30 minutes, the NE automatically disables the antenna misalignment indicating function. l When Power to Be Received(dBm) takes the default value (-10.0), the antenna misalignment indicating function is disabled. l This parameter is set according to the network plan.

Actual RX Power (dBm) TX Status

Unmute Mute

Unmute

This parameter indicates the actual receive power of the ODU. l This parameter indicates or specifies the transmit status of the ODU. l When this parameter is set to Mute, the transmitter of the ODU does not work but can normally receive microwave signals. l When this parameter is set to Unmute, the ODU can normally transmit and receive microwave signals. l In normal cases, it is recommended that you set TX Status to unmute.

Actual TX Status

-

-

This parameter indicates the actual transmit status of the ODU.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

390

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Equipment Information
Parameter Frequency(GHz) Equip Type Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the frequency band where the ODU operates. l This parameter indicates the equipment type of the ODU. l PDH and SDH indicate the transmission capacity only and are irrelevant to the type of transmitted service. Station Type l This parameter indicates whether the ODU is a Tx high station or a Tx low station. l The transmit frequency of a Tx high station is one T/R spacing higher than the transmit frequency of a Tx low station. Produce SN This parameter indicates the manufacturing serial number and the manufacturer code of the ODU. This parameter indicates the level of the output power of the ODU.

Transmission Power Level

-

-

A.3 Multiplex Section Protection Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to multiplex section protection (MSP).

A.3.1 Parameter Description: Linear MSP_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating linear MSP groups.

Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Linear MS from the Function Tree. Click Create.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

391

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Protection Type Value Range 1+1 Protection 1:N Protection Default Value 1+1 Protection Description l This parameter specifies the protection type of the linear MSP group. l In the case of 1+1 linear MSP, one working channel and one protection channel are required. When the working channel fails, the service is switched from the working channel to the protection channel. l In the case of 1:N linear MSP, N working channels and one protection channel are required. Normal services are transmitted on the working channels and extra services are transmitted on the protection channel. When one working channel fails, the services are switched from this working channel to the protection channel, and the extra services are interrupted. l If extra services need to be transmitted or several working channels are required, select 1:N Protection. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

392

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Switching Mode

Value Range Single-Ended Switching Dual-Ended Switching

Default Value Single-Ended Switching (1 +1 Protection) Dual-Ended Switching (1:N Protection)

Description l This parameter specifies the switching mode of the linear MSP. l In single-ended mode, the switching occurs only at one end and the state of the other end remains unchanged. l In dual-ended mode, the switching occurs at both ends at the same time. l If the linear MSP type is set to 1:N Protection, Switching Mode can be set to DualEnded Switching only.

Revertive Mode

Non-Revertive Revertive

Non-Revertive (1+1 Protection) Revertive (1:N Protection)

l This parameter specifies the revertive mode of the linear MSP. l When this parameter is set to Revertive, the NE that is in the switching state releases the switching and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state some time after the former working channel is restored to normal. l When this parameter is set to Non-Revertive, the NE that is in the switching state keeps the current state unchanged unless another switching occurs even though the former working channel is restored to normal. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Revertive. l If the linear MSP type is set to 1:N Protection, Revertive Mode can be set to Revertive only.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

393

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter WTR Time(s)

Value Range 300 to 720

Default Value 600

Description l This parameter specifies the WTR time. l When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the preset WTR time, a revertive switching occurs. l You can set WTR Time(s) only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive. l It is recommended that you use the default value.

SD Enable

Enabled Disabled

Enabled

l This parameter indicates or specifies whether the switching at the SD alarm of the linear MSP is enabled. l When this parameter is set to Enabled, the B2_SD alarm is considered as a switching condition. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Enabled.

Protocol Type

New Protocol Restructure Protocol

New Protocol

l The new protocol is supported at the early stage, and the mainstream protocol version is used currently. l The restructure protocol optimizes the new protocol and provides better measures to protect the new protocol, thus ensuring that the new protocol runs in a better manner. l The new protocol is more mature, and the restructure protocol complies with the standard. It is recommended that you use the new protocol. l You must ensure that the interconnected NEs run the protocols of the same type.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

394

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Slot Mapping Relation Parameters
Parameter Select Mapping Direction Value Range West Working Unit West Protection Unit Default Value West Working Unit Description This parameter specifies the mapping direction of the linear MSP.

Select Mapping Mode

l This parameter specifies the mapping board and port in the mapping direction. l If the protection type is set to 1+1 Protection, only one line port can be mapped as West Working Unit. l Only one line port can be mapped as West Protection Unit. l The line port mapped as West Protection Unit and the line port mapped as West Working Unit should be configured for different boards if possible.

Mapped Board

-

-

This parameter indicates the preset slot mapping relations, including the mapping direction and the corresponding mapping mode.

A.3.2 Parameter Description: Linear MSP
This topic describes the parameters that are related to linear MSP groups.

Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Linear MS from the Function Tree.

Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Protection Group ID Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the ID of the protection group.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

395

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Protection Type

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description l This parameter indicates the protection type of the linear MSP group. l In the case of 1+1 linear MSP, one working channel and one protection channel are required. When the working channel fails, the service is switched from the working channel to the protection channel. l In the case of 1:N linear MSP, N working channels and one protection channel are required. Normal services are transmitted on the working channels and extra services are transmitted on the protection channel. When one working channel fails, the services are switched from this working channel to the protection channel, and the extra services are interrupted. l If extra services need to be transmitted or several working channels are required, select 1:N Protection.

Switching Mode

Single-Ended Switching Dual-Ended Switching

-

l This parameter indicates or specifies the switching mode of the linear MSP. l In single-ended mode, the switching occurs only at one end and the state of the other end remains unchanged. l In dual-ended mode, the switching occurs at both ends at the same time. l If the linear MSP type is set to 1:N Protection, Switching Mode can be set to Dual-Ended Switching only.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

396

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Revertive Mode

Value Range Non-Revertive Revertive

Default Value -

Description l This parameter indicates or specifies the revertive mode of the linear MSP. l When this parameter is set to Revertive, the NE that is in the switching state releases the switching and enables the former working channel to return to the normal state some time after the former working channel is restored to normal. l When this parameter is set to NonRevertive, the NE that is in the switching state keeps the current state unchanged unless another switching occurs even though the former working channel is restored to normal. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Revertive. l If the linear MSP type is set to 1:N Protection, Revertive Mode can be set to Revertive only.

WTR Time(s)

300 to 720

-

l This parameter indicates or specifies the WTR time. l When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the preset WTR time, a revertive switching occurs. l You can set WTR Time(s) only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive. l It is recommended that you use the default value.

SD Enable

Enabled Disabled

-

l This parameter indicates or specifies whether the reverse switching function is enabled. l When this parameter is set to Enabled, the B2_SD alarm is considered as a switching condition. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Enabled.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

397

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Protocol Type

Value Range New Protocol Restructure Protocol

Default Value -

Description l The new protocol is supported at the early stage, and the mainstream protocol version is used currently. l The restructure protocol optimizes the new protocol and provides better measures to protect the new protocol, thus ensuring that the new protocol runs in a better manner. l You must ensure that the interconnected NEs run the protocols of the same type. l The new protocol is more mature, and the restructure protocol complies with the standard. It is recommended that you use the new protocol.

Protocol Status Protection Subnet

-

-

This parameter indicates the protocol status of the linear MSP. This parameter displays the protection subnet where the MS protection is configured.

Slot Mapping Relation Parameters
Parameter Protection Unit Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates that which of the units, namely, the west protection unit or the west working unit, is currently in the protection status. This parameter indicates the west protection unit and the west working unit of the linear MSP. This parameter indicates the switching status of the line. This parameter indicates the working channel protected by the current protection channel. When Switching Mode is set to DualEnded Switching, the central office end that issues the switching command is displayed.

West Line

-

-

West Switching Status Protected Unit

-

-

Remote/Local End Indication

-

-

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

398

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

A.4 SDH/PDH Service Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to SDH/PDH services.

A.4.1 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating point-to-point crossconnections.

Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. Click Options to change the VC-12 timeslot numbering policy used by the crossconnection. Click Create.

Parameters
Parameter Level Value Range VC12 VC3 VC4 Default Value VC12 Description l This parameter specifies the level of the service to be created. l If the service is an E1 service or a data service that is bound with VC-12 channels, set this parameter to VC12. l If the service is a data service that is bound with VC-3 channels, set this parameter to VC3. l If all the services on a VC-4 channel pass through the NE, set this parameter to VC4. Direction Bidirectional Unidirectional Bidirectional l When this parameter is set to Unidirectional, create only the crossconnections from the service source to the service sink. l When this parameter is set to Bidirectional, create the crossconnections from the service source to the service sink and the crossconnections from the service sink to the service source. l In normal cases, it is recommended that you set this parameter to Bidirectional. Source Slot This parameter specifies the slot of the service source.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

399

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Source VC4

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description l This parameter specifies the number of the VC-4 channel where the service source is located. l This parameter cannot be set when Source Slot is set to the slot of the tributary board.

Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)

-

-

l This parameter indicates the timeslot range of the service source. l This parameter can be set to a number or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l This parameter is set according to the network plan.

Sink Slot Sink VC4

-

-

This parameter specifies the slot of the service sink. l This parameter specifies the number of the VC-4 channel where the service sink is located. l This parameter cannot be set when Sink Slot is set to the slot of the tributary board.

Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)

-

-

l This parameter specifies the timeslot range of the service sink. l This parameter can be set to a number or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l This parameter is set according to the network plan.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

400

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter E1 Priority

Value Range High Low None

Default Value -

Description l This parameter specifies the priority of an E1 service. This parameter is available only if the E1 priority function is enabled for the ports configured in the cross-connections. l If E1 Priority is set to High, transmission of the E1 service is ensured in any modulation scheme. l If E1 Priority is set to Low, transmission of the E1 service is ensured only in fullcapacity modulation scheme l If the service priority is not specified during service creation, E1 Priority is None. In this case, the E1 priority of a service needs to be changed after the service is created.

Activate Immediately

Yes No

Yes

l This parameter specifies whether to immediately activate the configured service. l To immediately deliver the configured SDH service to the NE, set this parameter to Yes.

A.4.2 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_SNCP Service Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating SNCP services.

Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. Click Options to change the VC-12 timeslot numbering policy used by the crossconnection. Click Create SNCP Service.

Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Service Type Value Range SNCP Default Value SNCP Description This parameter indicates that the type of the service to be created is SNCP.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

401

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Direction

Value Range Bidirectional Unidirectional

Default Value Bidirectional

Description l When this parameter is set to Unidirectional, create only the crossconnections from the SNCP service source to the SNCP service sink. l When this parameter is set to Bidirectional, create the crossconnections from the SNCP service source to the service sink and the crossconnections from the SNCP service sink to the service source. l In normal cases, it is recommended that you set this parameter to Bidirectional.

Level

VC12 VC3 VC4

VC12

l This parameter specifies the level of the SCNP service to be created. l If the service is an E1 service or a data service that is bound with VC-12 channels, set this parameter to VC12. l If the service is a data service that is bound with VC-3 channels, set this parameter to VC3. l If all the services on a VC-4 channel pass through the NE, set this parameter to VC4.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

402

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Hold-off Time (100ms)

Value Range 0 to 100

Default Value 0

Description l This parameter specifies the duration of the hold-off time. l When a line is faulty, SNCP switching can be performed on the NE after a delay of time to prevent the situation where the NE performs SNCP switching and other protection switching at the same time. l Hold-off Time(100ms) is generally set to prevent SNCP protection switching, when SNCP works with N+1 protection. Hold-off Time(100ms) must be longer than the switching time of any protection mode that works with SNCP. Generally, Hold-off Time(100ms) is set to 200 ms. l When SNCP works with 1+1 FD/SD, trigger conditions for HSM switching or SNCP switching trigger HSM switching but do not trigger SNCP switching. Therefore, Hold-off Time(100ms) does not need to be set in this case. l The switching time of 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection is much longer than that of SNCP. Therefore, to shorten service interruptions, it is recommended that you do not set Hold-off Time(100ms) when SNCP works with 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection. l If only the SNCP scheme is available, it is recommended that you set the hold-off time to 0.

Revertive Mode

Non-Revertive Revertive

Non-Revertive

l This parameter specifies whether to switch the service to the original working channel after the fault is rectified. l If this parameter is set to Revertive, the service is switched from the protection channel to the original working channel. If this parameter is set to NonRevertive, the service is not switched from the protection channel to the original working channel. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Revertive.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

403

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter WTR Time(s)

Value Range 300 to 720

Default Value 600

Description l This parameter specifies the WTR time. l When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the preset WTR time, a revertive switching occurs. l You can set WTR Time(s) only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive. l It is recommended that you use the default value.

Source Slot Source VC4

-

-

This parameter specifies the slot of the service source. l This parameter specifies the number of the VC-4 channel where the service source is located. l This parameter cannot be set when Source Slot is set to the slot of the tributary board.

Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)

-

-

l This parameter indicates the timeslot range of the service source. l This parameter can be set to a number or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Sink Slot Sink VC4

-

-

This parameter specifies the slot of the service sink. l This parameter specifies the number of the VC-4 channel where the service sink is located. l This parameter cannot be set when Sink Slot is set to the slot of the tributary board.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

404

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description l This parameter specifies the timeslot range of the service sink. l This parameter can be set to a number or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Configure SNCP Tangent Ring

Selected Deselected

Deselected

l After the Configure SNCP Tangent Ring checkbox is selected, you can quickly configure the SNCP service for the SNCP ring tangent point. l In normal cases, it is recommended that you do not select this checkbox.

Activate Immediately

Selected Deselected

Selected

l This parameter specifies whether to immediately activate the configured SNCP service. l After the Activate Immediately checkbox is selected, you can immediately activate the created SNCP service.

A.4.3 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Converting Normal Services Into SNCP Services
This topic describes the parameters that are used for converting normal services into SNCP services.

Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree. Optional: If a bidirectional SDH service is created, select this service in CrossConnection. Right-click the selected service and choose Expand to Unidirectional from the shortcut menu. Select the unidirectional service. Right-click the selected service and choose Convert to SNCP Service from the shortcut menu.

3.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

405

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Service Type Direction Level Value Range SNCP Unidirectional Default Value SNCP Description This parameter indicates that the type of the service to be created is SNCP. This parameter indicates the direction of the SNCP service. l This parameter indicates the level of the SNCP service. l If the service is an E1 service or a data service that is bound with VC-12 channels, the parameter value is VC12. l If the service is a data service that is bound with VC-3 channels, the parameter value is VC3. l If all the services on a VC-4 channel pass through the NE, the parameter value is VC4.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

406

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Hold-off Time (100ms)

Value Range 0 to 100

Default Value 0

Description l This parameter specifies the duration of the hold-off time. l When a line is faulty, SNCP switching can be performed on the NE after a delay of time to prevent the situation where the NE performs SNCP switching and other protection switching at the same time. l Hold-off Time(100ms) is generally set to prevent SNCP protection switching, when SNCP works with N+1 protection. Hold-off Time(100ms) must be longer than the switching time of any protection mode that works with SNCP. Generally, Hold-off Time(100ms) is set to 200 ms. l When SNCP works with 1+1 FD/SD, trigger conditions for HSM switching or SNCP switching trigger HSM switching but do not trigger SNCP switching. Therefore, Hold-off Time(100ms) does not need to be set in this case. l The switching time of 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection is much longer than that of SNCP. Therefore, to shorten service interruptions, it is recommended that you do not set Hold-off Time(100ms) when SNCP works with 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection. l If only the SNCP scheme is available, it is recommended that you set the hold-off time to 0.

Revertive Mode

Non-Revertive Revertive

Non-Revertive

l This parameter specifies whether to switch the service to the original working channel after the fault is rectified. If this parameter is set to "Revertive", the service is switched from the protection channel to the original working channel. l If this parameter is set to Revertive, the service is switched from the protection channel to the original working channel. If this parameter is set to NonRevertive, the service is not switched from the protection channel to the original working channel. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Revertive.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

407

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter WTR Time(s)

Value Range 300 to 720

Default Value 600

Description l This parameter specifies the WTR time. l When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the preset WTR time, a revertive switching occurs. l You can set WTR Time(s) only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive. l It is recommended that you use the default value.

Source Slot Source VC4

-

-

This parameter specifies the slot of the service source. l This parameter specifies the number of the VC-4 channel where the service source is located. l This parameter cannot be set when Source Slot is set to the slot of the tributary board.

Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)

-

-

l This parameter indicates the timeslot range of the service source. l This parameter can be set to a number or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Sink Slot Sink VC4

-

-

This parameter specifies the slot of the service sink. l This parameter specifies the number of the VC-4 channel where the service sink is located. l This parameter cannot be set when Sink Slot is set to the slot of the tributary board.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

408

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description l This parameter specifies the timeslot range of the service sink. l This parameter can be set to a number or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Configure SNCP Tangent Ring

-

-

After the Configure SNCP Tangent Ring checkbox is selected, you can quickly configure the SNCP service for the SNCP ring tangent point. l This parameter indicates whether to immediately activate the configured SNCP service. l After the Activate Immediately checkbox is selected, you can immediately activate the created SNCP service.

Activate Immediately

-

-

A.4.4 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring SDH services (namely, configuring cross-connections).

Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Service Configuration from the Function Tree.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

409

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Cross-Connection Parameters
Parameter Level Value Range VC12 VC3 VC4 Default Value Description l This parameter indicates the level of the service. l If the service is an E1 service or a data service that is bound with VC-12 channels, VC12 is displayed. l If the service is a data service that is bound with VC-3 channels, VC3 is displayed. l If all the services on a VC-4 channel pass through the NE, VC4 is displayed. Source Slot Source Timeslot/ Path Sink Slot Sink Timeslot/ Path E1 Priority High Low None This parameter indicates the slot of the service source. This parameter indicates the timeslot or timeslot range of the service source. This parameter indicates the slot of the source sink. This parameter indicates the timeslot or timeslot range of the service sink. l This parameter specifies the priority of an E1 service. This parameter is available only if the E1 priority function is enabled for the ports configured in the cross-connections. l If E1 Priority is set to High, transmission of the E1 service is ensured in any modulation scheme. l If E1 Priority is set to Low, transmission of the E1 service is ensured only in fullcapacity modulation scheme l If the service priority is not specified during service creation, E1 Priority is None. In this case, the E1 priority of a service needs to be changed after the service is created. Activation Status Yes No Bound Group Number Lockout Status This parameter indicates whether to activate the service. The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

410

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Trail Name Schedule No.

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter.

Parameters for Automatically Created Cross-Connections
Parameter Level Value Range VC12 VC3 VC4 Default Value Description l This parameter indicates the level of the service. l If the service is an E1 service or a data service that is bound with VC-12 channels, VC12 is displayed. l If the service is a data service that is bound with VC-3 channels, VC3 is displayed. l If all the services on a VC-4 channel pass through the NE, VC4 is displayed. Source Slot Source Timeslot/ Path Sink Slot Sink Timeslot/ Path Lockout Status Trail Name Schedule No. This parameter indicates the slot of the service source. This parameter indicates the timeslot or timeslot range of the service source. This parameter indicates the slot of the source sink. This parameter indicates the timeslot or timeslot range of the service sink. The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter.

A.4.5 Parameter Description: SNCP Service Control
This topic describes the parameters that are used for controlling SNCP services.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

411

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SNCP Service Control from the Function Tree.

Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Service Type Source Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the service protection type of the protection group. This parameter indicates the timeslots where the working service source and protection service source of the protection group are located. This parameter indicates the timeslots where the working service sink and protection service sink of the protection group are located. l This parameter indicates the level of the service. l If the service is an E1 service or a data service that is bound with VC-12 channels, VC12 is displayed. l If the service is a data service that is bound with VC-3 channels, VC3 is displayed. l If all the services on a VC-4 channel pass through the NE, VC4 is displayed. Current Status This parameter indicates the current switching mode and switching status of the services of the protection group. l This parameter indicates or specifies the revertive mode of the service. l This parameter determines whether to switch the service from the protection channel to the original working channel after the fault is rectified. l If this parameter is set to Revertive, the service is switched from the protection channel to the original working channel. If this parameter is set to NonRevertive, the service is not switched from the protection channel to the original working channel. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to Revertive.

Sink

-

-

Level

VC12 VC3 VC4

-

Revertive Mode

Revertive Non-Revertive

-

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

412

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter WTR Time(s)

Value Range 300 to 720

Default Value -

Description l This parameter indicates or specifies the WTR time. l When the time after the former working channel is restored to normal reaches the preset WTR time, a revertive switching occurs. l You can set WTR Time(s) only when Revertive Mode is set to Revertive. l It is recommended that you use the default value.

Hold-off Time (100ms)

0 to 100

-

l This parameter specifies the duration of the hold-off time. l When a line is faulty, SNCP switching can be performed on the NE after a delay of time to prevent the situation where the NE performs SNCP switching and other protection switching at the same time. l Hold-off Time(100ms) is generally set to prevent SNCP protection switching, when SNCP works with N+1 protection. Hold-off Time(100ms) must be longer than the switching time of any protection mode that works with SNCP. Generally, Hold-off Time(100ms) is set to 200 ms. l When SNCP works with 1+1 FD/SD, trigger conditions for HSM switching or SNCP switching trigger HSM switching but do not trigger SNCP switching. Therefore, Hold-off Time(100ms) does not need to be set in this case. l The switching time of 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection is much longer than that of SNCP. Therefore, to shorten service interruptions, it is recommended that you do not set Hold-off Time(100ms) when SNCP works with 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection. l If only the SNCP scheme is available, it is recommended that you set the hold-off time to 0.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

413

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter SD Initiation Condition

Value Range -

Default Value Null

Description l This parameter indicates or specifies the conditions that trigger the protection switching of the service. l After being selected as SD Initiation Condition, an alarm becomes a condition for triggering switching of an SNCP service. l It is recommended that you set SD Initiation Condition to the same condition for Working Service and Protection Service. l The protection switching conditions in SD Initiation Condition are optional values not included in the default values, and they are set according to the planning information.

Trail Status

-

-

This parameter indicates the status of the working service and protection service of the protection group. The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter. This parameter indicates whether the working service or protection service is currently received by the protection group. Displays the trail name.

Service Grouping Group Type Active Channel

-

-

Trail Name

-

-

A.4.6 Parameter Description: TU_AIS Insertion
This section describes the parameters for TU_AIS insertion.

Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the IF board from the Object Tree and choose Alarm > Triggered Alarm Insertion from the Function Tree.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

414

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameters on the Main Interface
Table A-1 Parameters on the main interface Parameter Port High Channel Low Channel Insert TU_AIS to E1_AIS Value Range Enable Disable Auto Default Value Auto Description Displays the slot ID of the IF board and the ID of the IF port. Displays the higher order path number of the IF board. Displays the lower order path number of the IF board. l When Insert TU_AIS to E1_AIS is Auto, the TU_AIS is automatically inserted after the E1_AIS is detected in the E1 channel. l Generally, it is recommended that Auto take its default value.

A.5 Parameters for Board Interfaces
This topic describes the parameters that are related to board interfaces.

A.5.1 Parameter Description: Working Modes of Ports
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the working modes of ports.

Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the MP1 logical board from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > Port Mode Configuration from the Function Tree.

Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Port Name Value Range Default Value Description Displays the port name.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

415

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Service Mode

Value Range CES PDH

Default Value CES

Description Specifies the working mode of a PDH port. l The value PDH indicates that the port transmits Native E1 services as a common PDH port. l The value CES indicates that the port transmits services as a Smart E1 port.

A.5.2 PDH Port Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to PDH ports supported by Smart E1 interface boards.

A.5.2.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Basic Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of PDH ports.

Navigation Path
1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function Tree. Click the General Attributes tab.

Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Port Name Value Range Default Value Description Displays the ID of a service port. Specifies or displays the customized port name.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

416

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Port Mode

Value Range Layer 1 Layer 2

Default Value Layer 2

Description l Specifies the working mode of a PDH port. l When this parameter is set to Layer 1, the port can transmit TDM signals. A port can transmit CES and serial services only if this parameter is set to Layer 1. l When this parameter is set to Layer 2, the port can transmit ATM signals.

Encapsulation Type

-

-

l Displays Encapsulation Type of a PDH port. l When Port Mode is Layer 1, Encapsulation Type takes its default value Null. l When Port Mode is Layer 2, Encapsulation Type takes its default value ATM.

A.5.2.2 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Advanced Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the advanced attributes of PDH ports.

Navigation Path
1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function Tree. Click the Advanced Attributes tab.

Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Port Value Range Default Value Description Displays the name of a service port.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

417

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Frame Format

Value Range Unframe Double Frame CRC-4 Multiframe

Default Value CRC-4 Multiframe

Description l Specifies the frame format. l If a CES service uses the emulation mode of CESoPSN, this parameter can assume the value CRC-4 Multiframe or Double Frame. The value CRC-4 Multiframe is recommended. l If a CES service uses the emulation mode of SAToP, this parameter needs to assume the value Unframe. l The value of Frame Format must be the same at the local and opposite ends.

Line Encoding Format

-

-

Displays the line encoding format. The parameter value is always HDB3.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

418

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Loopback Mode

Value Range Non-Loopback Inloop Outloop

Default Value Non-Loopback

Description l Specifies the loopback status for a port. l Non-Loopback indicates that loopbacks are cancelled or not performed. l Inloop indicates that the signals that need to be transmitted to the opposite end are looped back. l Outloop indicates that the received signals are looped back. l This function is used for fault locating for the PDH ports. This function affects services over related ports. Therefore, exercise precaution before starting this function. l Generally, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback.

Impedance

-

-

Displays the port impedance.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

419

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Frame Mode

Value Range 30(ATM) 31(ATM,CES)

Default Value -

Description l 30 timeslots: In an E1 frame format, timeslots 1 to 15 and 17 to 31 are used to transmit service data, and timeslot 16 is used to transmit signaling. l 31 timeslots: In an E1 frame format, timeslots 1 to 31 are used to transmit service data. l This parameter is unavailable if Frame Format is Unframe. l The port frame modes need to be the same at the local and opposite ends.

Clock Mode

Master Mode Slave Mode System Clock Mode

Master Mode

l Master Mode: The system clock is used as the output clock of services. l Slave Mode: The CES ACR clock is used as the output clock of services. The port inputting E1 clocks on Slave is set to Slave Mode. l System Clock Mode: The upstream E1 line clock of the opposite equipment is used as the output clock of services. The port inputting E1 clocks on Master is set to System Clock Mode

Composite Port Loopback Service Load Indication

-

-

For the OptiX RTN 910, this parameter cannot be configured. For the OptiX RTN 910, this parameter cannot be configured.

-

-

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

420

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Equalize Input Signal

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description For the OptiX RTN 910, this parameter cannot be configured. For the OptiX RTN 910, this parameter cannot be configured.

Equalize Outpput Signal

-

-

A.5.3 Parameters for the Ports on Ethernet Boards
This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet ports on the packet plane.

A.5.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of an Ethernet interface.

Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Click the General Attributes tab.

Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Port Name Enable Port Value Range Enabled Disabled Default Value Enabled Description Displays the port name. Specifies the port name. l Specifies whether an Ethernet port is enabled. An Ethernet port can receive, process, and forward Ethernet services only if this parameter is set to Enabled. l Set this parameter according to the planning information.
NOTE Port 10 of the EFP8 board does not support this parameter. Port 8 of the EMS6 board does not support this parameter.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

421

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Port Mode

Value Range Layer 2 Layer 3 Layer Mix

Default Value Layer 2

Description l Port Mode specifies the mode of the Ethernet port. l If Port Mode is Layer 2, Encapsulation Type can be set to Null, 802.1Q, or QinQ. l If Port Mode is Layer 3, Encapsulation Type can be set to 802.1Q only and the port can carry MPLS tunnels.
NOTE Port 10 of the EFP8 board does not support the value Layer 3 and Layer Mix. Port 8 of the EMS6 board does not support the value Layer 3 and Layer Mix.

Encapsulation Type

Null 802.1Q QinQ

-

l Encapsulation Type specifies the method of the port to process the received packets. l If you set Encapsulation Type to Null, the port transparently transmits the received packets. l If you set Encapsulation Type to 802.1Q, the port identifies the packets that comply with the IEEE 802.1q standard. l If you set Encapsulation Type to QinQ, the port identifies the packets that comply with the IEEE 802.1ad QinQ standard.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

422

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Working Mode

Value Range Auto-Negotiation 10M Half-Duplex 10M Full-Duplex 100M Half-Duplex 100M Full-Duplex 1000M Full-Duplex

Default Value Auto-Negotiation

Description l The Ethernet ports of different types support different Working Mode. l When the equipment on the opposite side works in autonegotiation mode, set the Working Mode of the equipment on the local side to AutoNegotiation. l When the equipment on the opposite side works in full-duplex mode, set the Working Mode of the equipment on the local side to 10M FullDuplex, 100M FullDuplex, or 1000M Full-Duplex depending on the port rate of the equipment on the opposite side. l When the equipment on the opposite side works in half-duplex mode, set the Working Mode of the equipment on the local side to 10M HalfDuplex, 100M HalfDuplex, or AutoNegotiation depending on the port rate of the equipment on the opposite side. l FE ports support 10M full-duplex, 10M halfduplex, 100M fullduplex, 100M halfduplex, and autonegotiation. l GE electrical ports support 10M fullduplex, 10M halfduplex, 100M fullduplex, 100M half-

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

423

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter

Value Range

Default Value

Description duplex, 1000M fullduplex, and autonegotiation. l GE optical ports support 1000M fullduplex and autonegotiation.
NOTE Port 10 of the EFP8 board does not support this parameter. Port 8 of the EMS6 board does not support this parameter. The logical EM6X board does not support halfduplex.

Max Frame Length (byte)

1518 to 9600

1522

The value of Max Frame Length(byte) should be greater than the length of any frame to be transported. l Auto-Negotiation Ability specifies the auto-negotiation capability of the Ethernet port. l For GE optical ports, Auto-Negotiation Ability can be set to 1000M Full-Duplex only. l Auto-Negotiation Ability is valid only when Working Mode is set to AutoNegotiation.

Auto-Negotiation Ability

10M Half-Duplex 10M Full-Duplex 100M Half-Duplex 100M Full-Duplex 1000M Full-Duplex

FE: 100M Full-Duplex GE: 1000M Full-Duplex

Logical Port Attribute

Optical Port Electrical Port

-

l This parameter specifies the attribute of the logical port. l The SFP on the EM6F,EM6FA, CSHB CSHC, CSHD board supports the optical port and electrical port.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

424

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Physical Port Attribute

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description This parameter indicates the attribute of the physical port. This parameters indicates the enabled status of the traffic monitoring function over an Ethernet port. This parameter indicates the traffic monitoring period.

Traffic Monitoring Status

Enabled Disabled

Disabled

Traffic Monitoring Period (min)

1 to 30

15

A.5.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control
This topic describes the parameters that are related to flow control.

Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Click the Flow Control tab.

Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Port Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the port name.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

425

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode

Value Range Disabled Enable Symmetric Flow Control

Default Value Disabled

Description l Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode is valid only when Working Mode is not set to AutoNegotiation. l Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode of the equipment on the local side must be consistent with the non-autonegotiation flow control mode of the equipment on the opposite side l The OptiX RTN 910 supports only two nonauto-negotiation flow control modes, namely, Disabled mode and Enable Symmetric Flow Control mode.
NOTE Port 10 of the EFP8 board does not support this parameter. Port 8 of the EMS6 board does not support this parameter.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

426

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Auto-Negotiation Flow Control Mode

Value Range Disabled Enable Symmetric Flow Control

Default Value Disabled

Description l Auto-Negotiation Flow Control Mode is valid only when Working Mode is set to Auto-Negotiation. l Auto-Negotiation Flow Control Mode of the equipment on the local side must be consistent with the auto-negotiation flow control mode of the equipment on the opposite side l The OptiX RTN 910 supports only two auto-negotiation flow control modes, namely, Disabled mode and Enable Symmetric Flow Control mode.
NOTE Port 10 of the EFP8 board does not support this parameter. Port 8 of the EMS6 board does not support this parameter.

A.5.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 2 attributes.

Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Click the Layer 2 Attributes tab.

Parameters on the Main Interface
NOTE

The parameter Layer 2 Attributes is meaningful only when Port Mode is set to Layer 2.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

427

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Port QinQ Type Domain

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description This parameter indicates the port name. l When Encapsulation Type in the General Attributes tab page is set to QinQ, you need to set QinQ Type Domain. The default value is 88A8. l When Encapsulation Type in the General Attributes tab page is set to Null or 802.1Q, you cannot set QinQ Type Domain. In this case, QinQ Type Domain is displayed as FFFF and cannot be changed. l QinQ Type Domain should be set to the same value for all the ports on the EM6T/ EM6TA/EM6F/ EM6FA board or the EM4T/EM4F/EM6X logical board.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

428

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter TAG

Value Range Tag Aware Access Hybrid

Default Value Tag Aware

Description l If all the accessed services are frames with the VLAN tag (tagged frames), set TAG to Tag Aware. l If all the accessed services are frames without the VLAN tag (untagged frames), set TAG to Access. l If the accessed services contain tagged frames and untagged frames, set TAG to Hybrid.
NOTE TAG specifies the TAG flag of a port. For details about the TAG flags and associated frameprocessing methods, see Table A-2.

Default VLAN ID

1 to 4094

1

l Default VLAN ID is valid only when TAG is set to Access or Hybrid. l Default VLAN ID is set according to the actual situations.
NOTE For details about the functions of Default VLAN ID, see Table A-2.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

429

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter VLAN Priority

Value Range 0 to 7

Default Value 0

Description l VLAN Priority is valid only when TAG is set to Access or Hybrid. l When the VLAN priority is required to divide streams or to be used for other purposes, VLAN Priority is set according to the planning information. In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value.
NOTE For details about the functions of VLAN Priority, see Table A-2.

Table A-2 Methods used by Ethernet interfaces to process data frames Port Type of Data Frame Tagged frame Untagged frame Processing Method Tag Aware The port receives the frame. The port discards the frame. Access The port discards the frame. The ports add the VLAN tag, to which Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority correspond, to the frame and receive the frame. Hybrid The port receives the frame. The ports add the VLAN tag, to which Default VLAN ID and VLAN Priority correspond, to the frame and receive the frame.

Ingress UNI

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

430

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Port

Type of Data Frame Tagged frame

Processing Method Tag Aware The port transmits the frame. Access The port strips the VLAN tag from the frame and then transmits the frame. Hybrid l If the VLAN ID in the frame is Default VLAN ID, the port strips the VLAN tag from the frame and then transmits the frame. l If the VLAN ID in the frame is not Default VLAN ID, the port directly transmits the frame.

Egress UNI

A.5.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Layer 3 Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 3 attributes of Ethernet ports.

Navigation Path
1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Click the Layer 3 Attributes tab.

Parameters on the Main Interface
NOTE

Layer 3 Attributes is valid only if Port Mode is set to Layer 3.

Parameter Port Enable Tunnel

Value Range Disabled Enabled

Default Value Enabled

Description Displays the port name. l If Enable Tunnel is set Enabled, a port identifies and processes MPLS labels. l Enable Tunnel is available if you set Port Mode to Layer 3 in the General Attributes tab.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

431

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Specify IP Address

Value Range Manually Unspecified

Default Value Unspecified

Description l Specifies the method of setting the IP address of a port. l The value Unspecified indicates that the IP addresses do not need to be configured. l The value Manually indicates that the IP address of the port can be manually configured.

IP Address

-

0.0.0.0

l Specifies the IP address of a port. l This parameter is available when Specify IP Address is Manually. l The IP addresses of different ports on the NE cannot be in the same network segment, but the IP addresses of the ports at both ends of the MPLS tunnel must be in the same network segment.

IP Mask

-

255.255.255.252

l Specifies the subnet mask of a port. l This parameter is available when Specify IP Address is Manually.

A.5.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes.

Navigation Path
1. 2.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree. Click the Advanced Attributes tab.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 432

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Port Port Physical Parameters MAC Loopback Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the port name. This parameter indicates the physical parameters of the port. l This parameter specifies the loopback state at the MAC layer. When this parameter is set to Inloop, the Ethernet signals transmitted to the opposite end are looped back. l In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value. PHY Loopback Non-Loopback Inloop Non-Loopback l This parameter specifies the loopback state at the PHY layer. When this parameter is set to Inloop, the Ethernet signals transmitted to the opposite end are looped back. l In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value. MAC Address This parameter indicates the MAC address of the port. This parameter indicates the rate at which the data packets are transmitted. This parameter indicates the rate at which the data packets are received. This parameter specifies whether to enable loop detection, which is used to check whether a loop exists on the port.

Non-Loopback Inloop

Non-Loopback

Transmitting Rate(kbit/ s) Receiving Rate(kbit/s)

-

-

-

-

Loopback Check

Enabled Disabled

Disabled

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

433

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Loopback Port Block

Value Range Enabled Disabled

Default Value Disabled

Description This parameter indicates whether to enable the loop port shutdown function. This parameter indicates the egress PIR bandwidth. l This parameter specifies whether to limit the traffic rate of the broadcast packets according to the proportion of the broadcast packets in the total packets. When the equipment at the opposite end may encounter a broadcast storm, this parameter is set to Enabled. l If Ethernet services are E-LAN services, the recommended value is Enabled. l This parameter takes effect only for E-LAN services in the ingress direction.

Egress PIR Bandwidth (Kbit/s) Broadcast Packet Suppression

Disabled Enabled

Disabled

Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold

0 to 100

30

When the proportion of the broadcast packets in the total packets exceeds the value of this parameter, the received broadcast packets are discarded. The value of this parameter should be more than the proportion of the broadcast packets in the total packets before the broadcast storm occurs. In normal cases, this parameter is set to default value. This parameter displays the working mode of the network cable connected to an Ethernet port.

Network Cable Mode

-

-

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

434

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

A.5.4 Serial Port Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to serial ports.

A.5.4.1 Parameter Description: Serial Port_Basic Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of series ports.

Navigation Path
1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Interface Management > Serial Port from the Function Tree. Click the General Attributes tab.

Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Port Value Range Default Value Description Displays the name of the port where a serial service is configured. Specifies or displays the customized port name. l Specifies or displays the serial port level. l 64K Timeslot: 64 kbit/ s timeslots of E1 signals can be bound.
NOTE The OptiX RTN 910 supports 64K Timeslot only.

Name Level

-

-

Used Port

-

-

Displays the physical port that carries a serial service. Displays the timeslots that a serial service occupies. The timeslots can be consecutive or not. l Displays or specifies the port mode. l A port supports ATM encapsulation if its Port Mode is Layer 2. A port does not support encapsulation if its Port Mode is Layer 3.

64K Timeslot

-

-

Port Mode

Layer 2 Layer 3

Layer 3

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

435

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Encapsulation Type

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description l Displays and specifies the encapsulation type of a PW. l When Port Mode is Layer 2, this parameter displays ATM; when Port Mode is Layer 3, this parameter displays Null.

A.5.4.2 Parameter Description: Serial Port_Creation of Serial Ports
This topic describes parameters that are used for creating serial ports.

Navigation Path
1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree. Click the New tab.

Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Port Number(e.g:1,3-6) Value Range Default Value Description Specifies the port where the serial service is configured. Specifies the customized port name. l Specifies the serial port level. l When this parameter is set to 64K Timeslot , E1 timeslots can be bound.
NOTE The OptiX RTN 910 supports only the parameter value 64K Timeslot .

Name Level

64K Timeslot

64K Timeslot

Used Board Used Port

-

-

Specifies the board where a serial port is located. Displays the board where a serial port is located.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

436

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter High Channel Low Channel(e.g:1,3-6) 64K Timeslot(e.g:1,3-6)

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter. Specifies the 64 kbit/s timeslots to be bound with the serial port. The timeslots can be consecutive or not.

A.5.5 Microwave Interface Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF_ETH interfaces.

A.5.5.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of microwave interfaces.

Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree. Click the Basic Attributes tab.

Parameters
Parameter Port Name Port Mode Value Range Layer 2 Layer 3 Layer Mix Default Value Layer 2 Description This parameter indicates the corresponding IF port. This parameter indicates or specifies the customized port name. l If Port Mode is Layer 2, Encapsulation Type can be set to Null, 802.1Q, or QinQ. l If Port Mode is Layer 3, Encapsulation Type can be set to 802.1Q only and the port can carry tunnels. l If Port Mode is Layer Mix, Encapsulation Type can be set to only 802.1Q or QinQ and the port can carry both tunnels and Native Ethernet services.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 437

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Encapsulation Type

Value Range Null 802.1Q QinQ

Default Value 802.1Q

Description l Encapsulation Type specifies the method of the port to process the received packets. l If Encapsulation Type is set to Null, the port transparently transmits the received packets. l If Encapsulation Type is set to 802.1Q, the port identifies the packets that comply with the IEEE 802.1Q standard. l If Encapsulation Type is set to QinQ, the port identifies the packets that comply with the IEEE 802.1ad QinQ standard.

A.5.5.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 2 attributes of microwave interfaces.

Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree. Click the Layer 2 Attributes tab.

Parameters for Layer 2 Attributes
NOTE

The parameter Layer 2 Attributes is meaningful only when Port Mode is set to Layer 2.

Parameter Port QinQ Type Domain

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description This parameter indicates the corresponding IF port. l When Encapsulation Type in the General Attributes tab page is set to QinQ, you need to set QinQ Type Domain. The default value is 88A8. l When Encapsulation Type in the General Attributes tab page is set to Null or 802.1Q, you cannot set QinQ Type Domain. In this case, QinQ Type Domain is displayed as FFFF and cannot be changed.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

438

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Tag

Value Range Tag Aware Access Hybrid

Default Value Tag Aware

Description l If all the accessed services are frames that contain the VLAN tag (tagged frames), set Tag to "Tag Aware". l If all the accessed services are frames that do not contain the VLAN tag (untagged frames), set Tag to "Access". l If the accessed services contain tagged frames and untagged frames, set Tag to "Hybrid".
NOTE Tag specifies the TAG flag of a port. For details about the TAG flags and associated frameprocessing methods, see Table A-3.

Default VLAN ID

1 to 4094

1

l Default VLAN ID is valid only when TAG is set to Access or Hybrid. l Default VLAN ID needs to be set according to the actual situations.
NOTE For details about the functions of Default VLAN ID, see Table A-3.

VLAN Priority

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

0

l VLAN Priority is valid only when TAG is set to Access or Hybrid. l When the VLAN priority is required to divide streams or to be used for other purposes, VLAN Priority needs to be set according to the planning information. In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value.
NOTE For details about the functions of VLAN Priority, see Table A-3.

Table A-3 Data frame processing Status Type of Data Frame Tagged frame Processing Method Tag Aware The port receives the frame. Access The port discards the frame. Hybrid The port receives the frame.

Ingress Port

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

439

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Status

Type of Data Frame Untagged frame

Processing Method Tag Aware The port discards the frame. Access The port receives the frame after the VLAN tag that corresponds to "Default VLAN ID" and "VLAN Priority" is added to the frame. The port strips the VLAN tag from the frame and then transmits the frame. Hybrid The port receives the frame after the VLAN tag that corresponds to "Default VLAN ID" and "VLAN Priority" is added to the frame. l If the VLAN ID in the frame is "Default VLAN ID", the port strips the VLAN tag from the frame and then transmits the frame. l If the VLAN ID in the frame is not "Default VLAN ID", the port directly transmits the frame.

Egress Port

Tagged frame

The port transmits the frame.

A.5.5.3 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 3 Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 3 attributes of an IF_ETH port.

Navigation Path
1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree. Click the Layer 3 Attributes tab.

Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Port Value Range Default Value Description Displays the corresponding IF port.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

440

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Enable Tunnel

Value Range Disabled Enabled

Default Value Disabled

Description l A port identifies and processes MPLS labels, if its Enable Tunnel is set Enabled. l Enable Tunnel is available if you set Port Mode to Layer 3 in the General Attributes tab.

Specify IP Address

Manually Unspecified

Unspecified

l Specifies the method of setting the IP address of a port. l The value Unspecified indicates that the IP addresses do not need to be configured for a port. l The value Manually indicates that the IP address of a port can be manually configured.

IP Address

-

0.0.0.0

l Specifies the IP address for a port. l This parameter is available when Specify IP Address is Manually. l The IP addresses of different ports on the NE cannot be in the same network segment, but the IP addresses of the ports at both ends of the MPLS tunnel must be in the same network segment.

IP Mask

-

255.255.255.252

l Specifies the subnet mask of a port. l This parameter is available when Specify IP Address is Manually.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

441

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

A.5.5.4 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the advanced attributes of microwave interfaces.

Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree. Click the Advanced Attributes tab.

Parameters for Advanced Attributes
Parameter Port Radio Link ID Value Range 1 to 4094 Default Value 1 Description This parameter indicates the corresponding IF port. l This parameter specifies the ID of the radio link. As the identifier of a radio link, this parameter is used to prevent incorrect connections of radio links between sites. l The ID of each radio link of an NE must be unique, and the link IDs at both ends of a radio link must be the same. Received Radio Link ID l This parameter indicates the received ID of the radio link. l If the value of Received Radio Link ID does not match with the preset value of Radio Link ID at the local end, the local end inserts the AIS signal to the downstream direction of the service. At the same time, the local end reports an alarm to the NMS, indicating that the link IDs do not match.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

442

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter IF Port Loopback

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description l This parameter indicates the loopback status of the IF interface. l Non-Loopback indicates that the loopback is cancelled or not performed. l Inloop indicates that the IF signals transmitted to the opposite end are looped back. l Outloop indicates that the received IF signals are looped back. l Generally, this parameter is used to locate the faults that occur at each IF interface. The IF loopback is used for diagnosis. If this function is enabled, the services at the related ports are affected. In normal cases, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback.

Composite Port Loopback

-

-

l This parameter indicates the loopback status on the composite interface. l Non-Loopback indicates that the loopback is cancelled or not performed. l Inloop indicates that the composite signals transmitted to the opposite end are looped back. l Outloop indicates that the received composite signals are looped back. l In normal cases, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback.

Error Frame Discard Enabled

Enabled Disabled

Enabled

l This parameter indicates or specifies whether to discard the Ethernet frame when a CRC error occurs in an Ethernet frame. l If the Ethernet service transmitted on the IF_ETH port is a voice service or a video service, you can set this parameter to Disabled.

MAC Address Transmitting Rate (Kbit/s) Receiving Rate (Kbit/s)

-

-

This parameter indicates the MAC address of the port. This parameter indicates the transmit rate of the local port. This parameter indicates the receive rate of the local port.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

443

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter MAC Loopback

Value Range Non-Loopback Inloop

Default Value Non-Loopback

Description l This parameter specifies the loopback state at the MAC layer. When this parameter is set to Inloop, the Ethernet signals transmitted to the opposite end are looped back. l In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value.
NOTE The ISU2 and ISX2 boards can not be set to Inloop.

Speed Transmission at L2

Disabled Enabled

Disabled

l If Speed Transmission at L2 is set to Enabled, the Layer-2 Ethernet packets transmitted at microwave ports will be compressed to improve transmission efficiency. l If the Layer 2 header compression function can be enabled for the ISU2 or ISX2 board, it is recommended that you set Speed Transmission at L2 to Enabled. l The settings of Speed Transmission at L2 must be the same at both ends of a radio link.
NOTE The ISU2 and ISX2 boards support this parameter.

Speed Transmission at L3

Disabled Enabled

Disabled

l If Speed Transmission at L3 is set to Enabled, the IP packets transmitted at microwave ports will be compressed to improve transmission efficiency. l If the Layer 3 header compression function can be enabled for the ISU2 or ISX2 board, it is recommended that you set Speed Transmission at L3 to Enabled. l The settings of Speed Transmission at L3 must be the same at both ends of a radio link.
NOTE l The ISU2 and ISX2 boards support this parameter. l When Speed Transmission at L3 is set to Enabled, Encapsulation Type of the ISU2 and ISX2 boards cannot be set to Null.

Loopback Check

Disabled Enabled

Disabled

This parameter specifies whether to enable loop detection, which is used to check whether a loop exists on the port.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

444

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Loopback Port Shutdown Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression

Value Range Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled

Default Value Disabled

Description This parameter indicates whether to enable the automatic shut-down of looped ports. l This parameter specifies whether to limit the traffic rate of the broadcast packets according to the proportion of the broadcast packets in the total packets. When the equipment at the opposite end may encounter a broadcast storm, this parameter is set to Enabled. l If Ethernet services are E-LAN services, the recommended value is Enabled. l This parameter takes effect only for ELAN services in the ingress direction.

Disabled

Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold

0 to 100

30

When the proportion of the broadcast packets in the total packets exceeds the value of this parameter, the received broadcast packets are discarded. The value of this parameter should be more than the proportion of the broadcast packets in the total packets before the broadcast storm occurs. In normal cases, this parameter is set to default value.

A.5.6 IF Board Parameters
This topic describes parameters that are related to IF boards.

A.5.6.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute
This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF attributes.

Navigation Path
l l Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree. Click the IF Attributes tab.

Parameters
Parameter Port Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the corresponding IF interface.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

445

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Radio Link ID

Value Range 1,4E1,7MHz,QPSK 2,4E1,3.5MHz, 16QAM 3,8E1,14MHz,QPS K 4,8E1,7MHz, 16QAM 5,16E1,28MHz,QP SK 6,16E1,14MHz, 16QAM 7,STM-1,28MHz, 128QAM 10,22E1,14MHz, 32QAM 11,26E1,14MHz, 64QAM 12,32E1,14MHz, 128QAM 13,35E1,28MHz, 16QAM 14,44E1,28MHz, 32QAM 15,53E1,28MHz, 64QAM

Default Value -

Description l This parameter indicates or specifies the work mode of the radio link in "work mode number, service capacity, channel spacing, modulation mode" format. l This parameter is set according to the network plan. The work modes of the IF boards at the two ends of a radio link must be the same.
NOTE The IF1 board supports this parameter.

IF Service Type

Hybrid(Native E1 +ETH) Hybrid(Native STM-1+ETH) SDH

Hybrid(Native E1 +ETH)

l Displays or specifies the type of services carried by the IF board. l If the Integrated IP radio transmits Native E1 services, set this parameter to Hybrid(Native E1+ETH). l If the Integrated IP radio transmits Native STM-1 services, set this parameter to Hybrid(Native STM-1 +ETH). l If the SDH radio transmits SDH services, set this parameter to SDH.
NOTE The ISU2 and ISX2 boards support this parameter.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

446

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Radio Link ID

Value Range 1 to 4094

Default Value 1

Description l Link ID indicates or specifies the ID of a radio link. As the identifier of a radio link, this parameter is used to prevent incorrect connections of radio links between sites. l If the value of Received Radio Link ID does not match the preset value of Link ID at the local end, the local end inserts the AIS signal to the downstream direction of the service. At the same time, the local end reports MW_LIM alarm to the NMS, indicating that the link IDs do not match. l Link ID is set according to the network plan. Each radio link of an NE should have a unique link ID, and the link IDs at both ends of a radio link should be the same.

Received Radio Link ID

-

-

l This parameter indicates the received ID of the radio link. l If the value of Received Radio Link ID does not match the preset value of Radio Link ID at the local end, the local end inserts the AIS signal to the downstream direction of the service. At the same time, the local end reports an alarm to the NMS, indicating that the link IDs do not match. l When the radio link becomes faulty, this parameter is displayed as an invalid value.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

447

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter IF Port Loopback

Value Range Non-Loopback Inloop Outloop

Default Value Non-Loopback

Description l This parameter indicates or specifies the loopback status of the IF interface. l Non-Loopback indicates that the loopback is cancelled or not performed. l Inloop indicates that the IF signals transmitted to the opposite end are looped back. l Outloop indicates that the received IF signals are looped back. l Generally, IF Port Loopback is used to locate the faults that occur at each IF interface. The IF loopback is used for diagnosis. If this function is enabled, the services at the related ports are affected. In normal cases, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback.

2M Wayside Enable Statusa

Disabled Enabled

Disabled

l This parameter indicates or specifies whether the radio link transmits the wayside E1 service. l The wayside E1 service can be supported by the IF1 board in the 7,STM-1,28MHz,128QAM, 8,E3,28MHz,QPSK, or 9,E3,14MHz, 16QAM mode.

2M Wayside Input Boarda

-

-

l This parameter indicates or specifies the slot in which the 2M wayside service is accessed. l This parameter can be set only when 2M Wayside Enable Status is set to Enabled. l The wayside E1 service can be supported by the IF1 board in the 7,STM-1,28MHz,128QAM, 8,E3,28MHz,QPSK, or 9,E3,14MHz, 16QAM mode.

350 MHz Consecutive Wave Status

Stop Start

Stop

l This parameter indicates or specifies the status of transmitting the 350 MHz carrier signals at the IF interface. l 350 MHz Consecutive Wave Status can be set to Start in the commissioning process only. In normal cases, this parameter is set to Stop. Otherwise, the services are interrupted.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

448

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter XPIC Enabledb

Value Range Enabled Disabled

Default Value Enabled

Description l This parameter indicates or specifies whether the XPIC function of the XPIC IF board is enabled. l If the XPIC IF board does not perform the XPIC function, XPIC Enabled should be set to Disabled.

Enable IEEE-1588 Timeslotc

Enabled Disabled

Disabled

l Enable IEEE-1588 Timeslot needs to be set consistently between two ends of a radio link. l If the OptiX RTN 910 needs to transmit IEEE 1588v2 packets, set Enable IEEE-1588 Timeslot to Enabled. If the OptiX RTN 910 does not need to transmit IEEE 1588v2 packets, set Enable IEEE-1588 Timeslot to Disabled.

NOTE

l a. The IFU2 and IFX2 boards do not support way-side services. l b. The IFU2, ISU2, and IF1 boards do not support the XPIC function. l c. The IF1 board does not support the IEEE-1588 timeslot function.

Parameters for Hybrid/AM Configuration
NOTE

The IF1 board does not support Hybrid/AM configuration.

Parameter Port IF Channel Bandwidth

Value Range 3.5M 7M 14M 28M 40M 56M

Default Value -

Description This parameter indicates the corresponding IF port. IF Channel Bandwidth indicates the channel spacing of the corresponding radio link. This parameter is set according to the network plan.
NOTE l This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board. l The IFU2 board does not support the value 40M. l The IFX2 board does not support the values 40M. l IF Channel Bandwidth can be set to 3.5M only for the ISU2 board.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

449

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter AM Enable Status

Value Range Disabled Enabled

Default Value Disabled

Description l When AM Enable Status is set to Disabled, the radio link uses only the specified modulation scheme. In this case, you need to select Manually Specified Modulation Mode. l When AM Enable Status is set to Enabled, the radio link uses the corresponding modulation scheme according to the channel conditions. l Hence, the Integrated IP radio can ensure the reliable transmission of the E1 services and provide bandwidth adaptively for the Ethernet services when the AM function is enabled. l The ISX2/ISU2 does not support the AM function when IF Service Type is SDH. l When IF Channel Bandwidth is 3.5M for the ISU2 board, the AM function is unavailable and AM Enable Status must be set to Disabled.

Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity

QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM

QPSK

l This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Enabled. l Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity specifies the lowest-order modulation scheme that the AM function supports. This parameter is set according to the network plan. Generally, the value of this parameter is determined by the service transmission bandwidth that the Hybrid radio must ensure and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

450

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity

Value Range QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM

Default Value QPSK

Description l This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Enabled. l Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity specifies the highest-order modulation scheme that the AM function supports. This parameter is set according to the network plan. Generally, the value of this parameter is determined by the bandwidth of the services that need to be transmitted over the Hybrid radio and the availability of the radio link that corresponds to this modulation scheme.
NOTE Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity must be higher than Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity.

Manually Specified Modulation Mode

QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM

QPSK

l This parameter specifies the modulation scheme that the radio link uses for signal transmission. l This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Disabled.

STM-1 Capacity

-

-

l Specifies the STM-1 capacity of the IF board. l This parameter is available only when IF Service Type is set to Hybrid(Native STM-1+ETH) and SDH. l If IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native STM-1+ETH), this parameter can be set to 0 or 1. l If IF Service Type is SDH, this parameter can be set to 1 or 2.
NOTE The IFU2 and IFX2 boards do not support this parameter.

Enable E1 Priority

Disabled Enabled

Disabled

l This parameter specifies whether to enable the E1 priority function. l This parameter is valid only when AM Enable Status is set to Enabled. l For the ISU2 and ISX2 boards, this parameter is available when IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

451

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Guarantee E1 Capacity

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description l If AM Enable Status is set to Enabled, this parameter needs to be set according to IF Channel Bandwidth, Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity, and the actually transmitted services. l If AM Enable Status is set to Disabled, this parameter needs to be set according to IF Channel Bandwidth, Manually Specified Modulation Mode, and the actually transmitted services. l For the ISU2 and ISX2 boards, this parameter is available when IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).

Guarantee E1 Capacity Range Data Service Bandwidth(Mbit/ s) Full E1 Capacity

-

-

Displays the E1 capacity range of the IF board in guarantee capacity modulation mode. Displays the data service bandwidth of the IF board. l This parameter specifies the number of transmitted E1 services in Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity. l This parameter is valid if Enable E1 Priority is set to Enabled. l E1 service bandwidth in full capacity mode ≤ Service bandwidth in full capacity mode - Service bandwidth in guarantee capacity mode + E1 service bandwidth in guarantee capacity mode. In addition, the number of E1 services in full capacity modulation mode should be smaller than or equal to the maximum number of E1 services in full capacity modulation mode. l The Full E1 Capacity must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio link. l For the ISU2 and ISX2 boards, this parameter is available when IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).

-

-

-

-

Full E1 Capacity Transmit-End Modulation Mode

-

-

Displays the E1 capacity range of the IF board in full capacity modulation mode. Displays the modulation mode at the transmit mode.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

452

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Receive-End Modulation Mode Guarantee AM Service Capacity (Mbit/s) Full AM Service Capacity(Mbit/s) Transmitted AM Service Capacity (Mbit/s) Received AM Service Capacity (Mbit/s) E1 Capacity For High Priority

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description Displays the modulation mode at the receive mode. Displays the guarantee AM service capacity.

-

-

Displays the full AM service capacity. Displays the transmitted AM service capacity. Displays the received AM service capacity.

-

-

-

-

Displays the number of configured highpriority E1s.

A.5.6.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the ATPC attributes.

Navigation Path
l l Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree. Click the ATPC Attributes tab.

Parameters
Parameter Port Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the corresponding IF interface.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

453

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter ATPC Enable Status

Value Range Disabled Enabled

Default Value Disabled

Description l This parameter specifies whether the ATPC function is enabled. l When this parameter is set to Enabled and if the RSL at the receive end is 2 dB higher or lower than the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold at the receive end, the receiver notifies the transmitter to decrease or increase the transmit power until the RSL is within the range that is 2 dB higher or lower than the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold. l The settings of the ATPC attributes must be consistent at both ends of a radio link. l In the case of areas where fast fading severely affects the radio transmission, it is recommended that you set ATPC Enable Status to Disabled. l During the commissioning process, set this parameter to Disabled to ensure that the transmit power is not changed. After the commissioning, re-set the ATPC attributes.

ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm)

-

-45.0 -70.0

l Set the central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold to a value for the expected receive power. l It is recommended that you set ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm) to the sum of the planned central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm) to the difference between the planned central value between the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB. l You can set the ATPC upper threshold only when ATPC Automatic Threshold(dBm) is set to Disabled.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

454

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status

Value Range Enabled Disabled

Default Value Disabled

Description l This parameter specifies whether the ATPC automatic threshold function is enabled. l If ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status is set to Enabled, the equipment automatically uses the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds according to the work mode of the radio link. l If ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status is set to Disabled, you need to manually set ATPC Upper Automatic Threshold(dBm) and ATPC Lower Automatic Threshold(dBm).

ATPC Upper Automatic Threshold(dBm) ATPC Lower Automatic Threshold(dBm)

-

-

-

-

l This parameter indicates that the equipment automatically uses the preset ATPC upper and lower thresholds. l This parameter is valid only when ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable Status is set to Enabled.

A.5.6.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid_AM Configuration_Advanced Attributes
This section describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes.

Navigation Path
l l In the NE Explorer, select the IF board, and then choose Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree. Click the AM Advanced Attributes tab.

Parameters
Parameter Port Modulation Mode Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the corresponding IF interface. Displays the modulation schemes.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

455

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter E1 Capacity

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description l You can specify the number of E1s that can be transmitted in intermediate modulation scheme, by setting the advanced attributes correspondingly. l Generally, it is recommended that this parameter takes the default value. To ensure that a specific number of E1s can be transmitted in intermediate modulation scheme, adjust the E1 capacity in each modulation scheme according to the network planning information. l If the E1 priority function is enabled, the maximum number of allowed E1 services in the current mode = Min {[Bandwidth of the air interface in the current mode - (Bandwidth for the assured capacity - Assured E1 number x 2Mbps)]/2Mbps, E1 number in the highest-gain modulation mode}.

Data Service Bandwidth(Mbit/ s)

-

-

Displays the data service bandwidth.

A.5.6.4 Parameter Description: ATPC Adjustment Records
This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATPC adjustment records.

Navigation Path
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ATPC Adjustment Records from the Function Tree.

Parameters
Parameter Port Event NO. Adjustment Time Adjustment Direction
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description This parameter indicates the port for the ATPC adjustment. This parameter indicates the number of the ATPC adjustment event. This parameter indicates the time of the ATPC adjustment. This parameter indicates the direction of the adjustment at the port.
456

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Switchover Transmitted Power(dBm) Received Power (dBm)

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description This parameter indicates the switching operation at the port. This parameter indicates the transmitted power of the port to be switched. This parameter indicates the received power of the port to be switched.

A.5.6.5 Parameter Description: PRBS Test
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the pseudorandom binary sequence (PRBS) test.

Navigation Path
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > PRBS Test from the Function Tree.

Parameters
Parameter Port Direction Value Range Cross Tributary Default Value Cross Description This parameter indicates the port for the PRBS test. l This parameter indicates or specifies the direction of the PRBS test. l In the tributary direction, the PRBS test is performed to check the connectivity of the cable from the tributary board to the DDF. l In the cross-connect direction, the PRBS test is performed to check the processing of the service from the tributary board to the NE at the remote end. Duration Measured Time 1 to 255 s 10min h Start Time Progress This parameter indicates the start time of the PRBS test. This parameter indicates the progress percentage of the PRBS test.
457

1 s

This parameter indicates or specifies the duration of the PRBS test. This parameter indicates or specifies the time unit used for the PRBS test.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Total PRBS Accumulating Mode

Value Range Selected Deselected

Default Value Deselected

Description This parameter indicates the number of bit errors that occur in the PRBS test. This parameter specifies whether to display the values in accumulative mode. If Accumulating Mode is selected, it indicates that the values are displayed in accumulative mode.

A.5.7 ODU Parameters
This topic describes parameters that are related to ODUs.

A.5.7.1 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Radio Frequency Attribute
This topic describes the parameters that are related to radio frequency attributes of an ODU.

Navigation Path
l l Select the ODU from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU Interface from the Function Tree. Click the Radio Frequency Attributes tab.

Parameters
Parameter Board Transmit Frequency(MHz) Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the corresponding ODU. l This parameter indicates or specifies the transmit frequency of the ODU, namely, the central frequency of the channel. l The value of Transmit Frequency (MHz) must not be less than the sum of the minimum transmit frequency supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing, and must not be more than the difference between the maximum transmit frequency supported by the ODU and a half of the channel spacing. l The difference between the transmit frequencies at both ends of a radio link should be one T/R spacing. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 458

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter T/R Spacing(MHz)

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description l This parameter indicates or specifies the spacing between the transmit frequency and receive frequency of the ODU to prevent mutual interference of the transmitter and receiver. l If the ODU is a Tx high station, the transmit frequency is one T/R spacing higher than the receive frequency. If the ODU is a Tx low station, the transmit frequency is one T/R spacing lower than the receive frequency. l If the ODU supports only one T/R spacing, T/R Spacing(MHz) is set to 0, indicating that the T/R spacing supported by the ODU is used. l A valid T/R spacing value is determined by the ODU itself, and T/R Spacing (MHz) should be set according to the technical specifications of the ODU. l The T/R spacing of the ODU should be set to the same value at both ends of a radio link.

Actual Transmit Frequency(MHz) Actual Receive Frequency(MHz) Actual T/R Spacing(MHz) The range of frequency point (MHz)

-

-

This parameter indicates the actual transmit frequency of the ODU. This parameter indicates the actual receive frequency of the ODU. This parameter indicates the actual T/R spacing of the ODU. This parameter indicates the working range of the frequency of the ODU.

A.5.7.2 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Power Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the power attributes of the ODU.

Navigation Path
l l Select the ODU from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU Interface from the Function Tree. Click the Power Attributes tab.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

459

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameters
Parameter Board Maximum Transmit Power (dBm) Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the corresponding ODU. l Maximum Transmit Power(dBm) is set according to the network plan. This parameter cannot be set to a value that exceeds the nominal power rang of the ODU in the guaranteed capacity modulation module. l This parameter is set to limit the maximum transmit power of the ODU within this preset range. l The maximum transmit power adjusted by using the ATPC function should not exceed Maximum Transmit Power (dBm). Transmit Power (dBm) l Transmit Power(dBm) is set according to the network plan. This parameter specifies the transmit power of the ODU. This parameter cannot be set to a value that exceeds the nominal power rang of the ODU or a value that exceeds Maximum Transmit Power(dBm). l It is recommended that you set the transmit power of the ODU to the same value at both ends of a radio link. l Consider the receive power of the ODU at the opposite end when you set this parameter. Ensure that the receive power of the ODU at the opposite end can ensure stable radio services.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

460

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Power to Be Received(dBm)

Value Range -90.0 to -20.0

Default Value -10.0

Description l Power to Be Received(dBm) is used to set the expected receive power of the ODU and is mainly used in the antenna alignment stage. After this parameter is set, the NE automatically enables the antenna misalignment indicating function. l When the antenna misalignment indicating function is enabled, if the actual receive power of the ODU is 3 dB lower than the power expected to be received, the ODU indicator on the IF board connected to the ODU blinks yellow (300 ms on, 300 ms off), indicating that the antenna is not aligned. l After the antenna alignment, after the state that the antenna is aligned lasts for 30 minutes, the NE automatically disables the antenna misalignment indicating function. l Power to Be Received(dBm) is set according to the network plan. When this parameter takes the default value, the antenna misalignment indicating function is disabled.

TX High Threshold(dBm)

-

-

l If the value of the actual transmit power of the ODU is greater than the preset value of TX High Threshold(dBm), the system separately records the duration when the value of the actual transmit power of the ODU is greater than the preset value of TX High Threshold (dBm) and the duration when the value of the actual transmit power of the ODU is greater than the preset value of TX Low Threshold(dBm) in the performance events. l If the value of the actual transmit power of the ODU is greater than the preset value of TX Low Threshold(dBm) and is lower than the preset value of TX High Threshold(dBm), the system records the duration when the value of the actual transmit power of the ODU is greater than the preset value of TX Low Threshold(dBm) in the performance events.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

461

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter TX Low Threshold (dBm)

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description l If the value of the actual transmit power of the ODU is lower than the preset value of TX Low Threshold(dBm), the system does not record it. l TX High Threshold(dBm) and TX Low Threshold(dBm) are valid only when the ATPC function is enabled.

RX High Threshold(dBm)

-

-

l If the value of the actual receive power of the ODU is lower than the preset value of RX Low Threshold(dBm), the system records the duration when the value of the actual receive power of the ODU is lower than the preset value of RX Low Threshold(dBm) and duration when the value of the actual transmit power of the ODU is lower than the preset value of RX High Threshold (dBm)in the performance events. l If the value of the actual receive power of the ODU is greater than the preset value of RX Low Threshold(dBm) and is lower than the preset value of RX High Threshold(dBm), the system records the duration when the value of the actual receive power of the ODU is Lower than the preset value of RX High Threshold (dBm) in the performance events. l If the value of the actual receive power of the ODU is greater than the preset

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

462

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter RX Low Threshold (dBm)

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description value of RX High Threshold(dBm), the system does not record it.

Actual Transmit Power(dBm)

-

-

l This parameter indicates the actual transmit power of the ODU. l If the ATPC function is enabled, the queried actual transmit power may be different from the preset value.

Actual Receive Power(dBm) Actual range of Power(dBm) Transmission Power Type

-

-

This parameter indicates the actual receive power of the ODU. This parameter indicates the range of the actual transmit power of the ODU. This parameter indicates the level of the output power of the ODU.

A.5.7.3 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Equipment Information
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the equipment information of the ODU.

Navigation Path
l l Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU Interface from the Function Tree. Click the Equipment Information tab.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

463

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameters
Parameter Board Frequency(GHz) Equipment Type Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the corresponding ODU. This parameter indicates the frequency band where the ODU operates. l This parameter indicates the equipment type of the ODU. l PDH and SDH indicate the transmission capacity only and are irrelevant to the type of transmitted service. T/R Spacing(MHz) Intermediate Frequency Bandwidth (MHz) IF Bandwidth Type Station Type This parameter indicates the T/R spacing of the ODU. This parameter indicates the IF frequency bandwidth of the ODU. Displays the IF bandwidth type. l This parameter indicates whether the ODU is a Tx high station or a Tx low station. l The transmit frequency of a Tx high station is one T/R spacing higher than the transmit frequency of a Tx low station. Transmission Power Type Produce Time Produce SN This parameter indicates the level of the output power of the ODU. This parameter indicates the manufacturing time of the ODU. This parameter indicates the manufacturing serial number and the manufacturer code of the ODU.

-

-

A.5.7.4 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Advanced Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes of the ODU.

Navigation Path
l l
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Select the ODU from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU Interface from the Function Tree. Click the Advanced Attributes tab.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 464

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameters
Parameter Board RF Loopback Value Range Non-Loopback Inloop Default Value Non-Loopback Description This parameter indicates the corresponding ODU. l This parameter indicates or specifies the loopback status of the RF interface of the ODU. l Non-Loopback indicates that the loopback is canceled or not performed. l Inloop indicates that the RF signals transmitted to the opposite end are looped back. l RF Loopback function is used for fault locating for the RF interfaces. The RF Loopback function is used for diagnosis and may affect the services that are transmitted over the interfaces. Hence, exercise caution before starting this function. l In normal cases, RF Loopback is set to Non-Loopback. Configure Transmission Status unmute mute unmute l This parameter indicates or specifies the transmit status of the ODU. l If Configure Transmission Status is set to mute, the transmitter of the ODU does not work but can normally receive microwave signals. l If Configure Transmission Status is set to unmute, the ODU can normally transmit and receive microwave signals. l In normal cases, Configure Transmission Status is set to unmute. Actual Transmission Status Factory Information Remarks Displays the ODU manufacturer information. This parameter indicates the manufacturer information about the ODU. Specifies the remarks of the ODU.

-

-

A.5.8 Parameters for SDH Interface Boards
This topic describes parameters that are related to SDH interface boards.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

465

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

A.5.8.1 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the SDH interfaces.

Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree. Select By Board/Port(Channel), and select Port or VC4 Channel from the list box.

Parameters
Parameter Port Optical Interface Namea Laser Switcha Value Range On Off Default Value On Description This parameter indicates the corresponding SDH interface. This parameter indicates or specifies the name of the optical interface. l This parameter indicates or specifies the on/off state of the laser. l This parameter is set for SDH optical interfaces only. l In normal cases, this parameter is set to On. Optical(Electrical) Interface Loopbacka Non-Loopback Inloop Outloop Non-Loopback l This parameter indicates or specifies the loopback status on the SDH interface. l Non-Loopback indicates that the loopback is canceled or not performed. l Inloop indicates that the SDH signals transmitted to the opposite end are looped back. l Outloop indicates that the received SDH signals are looped back. l This function is used for fault locating for the SDH interfaces. The Optical (Electrical) Interface Loopback function is used for diagnosis and may affect the services that are transmitted over the interfaces. Hence, exercise precaution before starting this function. l In normal cases, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

466

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter VC4 Loopbackb

Value Range Non-Loopback Inloop Outloop

Default Value Non-Loopback

Description l This parameter indicates or specifies the loopback status in the VC-4 path. l Non-Loopback indicates that the loopback is canceled or not performed. l Inloop indicates that the VC-4 signals transmitted to the opposite end are looped back. l Outloop indicates that the received VC-4 signals are looped back. l This function is used for fault locating for the VC-4 paths. The VC4 Loopback function is used for diagnosis and may affect the services that are transmitted over the interfaces. Hence, exercise precaution before starting this function. l In normal cases, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback.

NOTE

l a: Indicates the parameters that are supported when Port is selected from the list box. l b: Indicates the parameters that are supported when VC4 Channel is selected from the list box.

A.5.8.2 Parameter Description: Automatic Laser Shutdown
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function.

Navigation Path
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Automatic Laser Shutdown from the Function Tree.

Parameters
Parameter Optical Interface Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the corresponding optical interface.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

467

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Auto Shutdown

Value Range Disabled Enabled

Default Value Disabled

Description l This parameter indicates or specifies whether the Auto Laser Shutdown function is enabled or disabled for the laser. l The ALS function allows the laser to shut down automatically when an optical port does not carry services, an optical fiber is broken, or no optical signal is received. l You can set On Period(ms), Off Period (ms), and Continuously On-test Period (ms) only when this parameter is set to Enabled.

On Period(ms)

1000 to 3000

2000

This parameter indicates or specifies the period when a shutdown laser automatically starts up and tests whether the optical fiber is normal. This parameter indicates or specifies the period when the laser does not work (with the ALS function being enabled). This parameter indicates or specifies the period when a shutdown laser is manually started up and tests whether the optical fiber is normal.

Off Period(ms)

2000 to 300000

60000

Continuously Ontest Period(ms)

2000 to 300000

90000

A.5.9 Parameters for PDH Interface Boards
This topic describes parameters that are related to PDH interface boards.

A.5.9.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the PDH ports.

Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > PDH Interface from the Function Tree. Select By Board/Port(Channel). Select Port from the list box.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

468

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameters
Parameter Port Port Name Tributary Loopback Value Range Non-Loopback Inloop Outloop Default Value Non-Loopback Description This parameter indicates the corresponding port. This parameter indicates or specifies the name of the port. l This parameter indicates or specifies the loopback status in the associated path of the tributary unit. l Non-Loopback indicates that the loopback is canceled or not performed. l Inloop indicates that the PDH signals transmitted to the opposite end are looped back. l Outloop indicates that the received PDH signals are looped back. l This function is used for fault locating for the paths of the tributary unit. The Tributary Loopback function is used for diagnosis and may affect the services that are transmitted over the interfaces. Hence, exercise precaution before starting this function. l In normal cases, this parameter is set to Non-Loopback. Port Impedance Service Load Indication Load Non-Loaded Load This parameter indicates the impedance of a path, which depends on the tributary unit. l This parameter indicates or specifies the service loading status in a specific path. l When this parameter is set to Load, the board detects whether alarms exist in the path. l When this parameter is set to NonLoaded, the board does not detect whether there are alarms in the path. l If a path does not carry any services, you can set this parameter to Non-Loaded for the path to mask all the alarms. If a path carries services, you need to set this parameter to Load for the path. Input Signal Equalization Unequalized Equalized Unequalized l This parameter indicates whether the input signals are equalized. l It is recommended that you set this parameter to default value.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

469

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Retiming Mode

Value Range Normal Retiming Mode of Tributary Clock Retiming Mode of Cross-Connect Clock

Default Value Normal

Description l This parameter indicates or specifies the retiming mode of a specific path. l By using the retiming function, the retiming reference signal from the SDH network and the service data signal are combined and then sent to the client equipment, therefore decreasing the output jitter in the signal. In this way, the retiming function ensures that the service code flow can normally transfer the retiming reference signal. l When this parameter is set to Normal, the retiming function is not used. l When this parameter is set to Retiming Mode of Tributary Clock, the retiming function is used with the clock of the upstream tributary unit traced. l When this parameter is set to Retiming Mode of Cross-Connect Clock, the retiming function is used with the clock of the cross-connect unit traced. l It is recommended that the external clock, instead of the retiming function, should be used to provide reference clock signals for the equipment. l If the retiming function is required, it is recommended that you set this parameter to Retiming Mode of Cross-connect Clock.

Port Service Type

-

-

This parameter indicates the type of services that are processed in a path. It depends on the services that are transmitted in a path. l This parameter indicates whether the output signals are equalized. l It is recommended that you use the default value.

Output Signal Equalization

Unequalized Equalized

Unequalized

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

470

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter E1 Frame Format

Value Range Unframe Double Frame CRC-4 Multiframe

Default Value Unframe

Description Specifies the E1 frame format for E1 ports. l To detect E1 BER performance on the OptiX RTN 910, set E1 Frame Format of the local E1 port to the same value as that of the opposite E1 port. It is recommended that E1 Frame Format of both the local and opposite E1 ports be CRC-4 Multiframe. l In other scenarios wherein the OptiX RTN 910 is used, it is recommended that E1 Frame Format take its default value Unframe. If E1 Frame Format is Unframe, the OptiX RTN 910 transparently transmits E1 frames and the local E1 port allows for interconnection with another E1 port whose E1 Frame Format is Double Frame or CRC-4 Multiframe.
NOTE E1 Frame Format needs to be set to the same value at both ends of an E1 link. E1 ports integrated on the system control, switching, and timing board do not support this parameter.

A.5.9.2 Parameter Description: PRBS Test
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the pseudorandom binary sequence (PRBS) test.

Navigation Path
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > PRBS Test from the Function Tree.

Parameters
Parameter Port Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the port for the PRBS test.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

471

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Direction

Value Range Cross Tributary

Default Value Cross

Description l This parameter indicates or specifies the direction of the PRBS test. l In the tributary direction, the PRBS test is performed to check the connectivity of the cable from the tributary board to the DDF. l In the cross-connect direction, the PRBS test is performed to check the processing of the service from the tributary board to the NE at the remote end.

Duration Measured Time

1 to 255 s 10min h

1 s

This parameter indicates or specifies the duration of the PRBS test. This parameter indicates or specifies the time unit used for the PRBS test.

Start Time Progress Total PRBS Accumulating Mode

Selected Deselected

Deselected

This parameter indicates the start time of the PRBS test. This parameter indicates the progress percentage of the PRBS test. This parameter indicates the number of bit errors that occur in the PRBS test. This parameter specifies whether to display the values in accumulative mode. If Accumulating Mode is selected, it indicates that the values are displayed in accumulative mode.

A.5.10 Parameters for Overhead
This topic describes the parameters that are related to overhead.

A.5.10.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the regenerator section overheads (RSOHs).

Navigation Path
1. 2.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Select an SDH interface board in the NE Explorer Choose Configuration > Overhead Management > Regenerator Section Overhead from the Function Tree. Choose Display in Text Format or Display in Hexadecimal.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 472

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameters for Setting the Display Format
Parameter Display in Text Format Display in Hexadecimal Value Range Selected Deselected Selected Deselected Deselected Default Value Selected Description This parameter specifies the display in the text format. This parameter specifies the display in the hexadecimal format.

Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Object J0 to be Sent ([Mode]Content) Value Range Default Value [16 Bytes]HuaWei SBS Description This parameter indicates the object to be set. If the NE at the opposite end reports the J0_MM alarm, this parameter is set according to the J0 byte to be received at the opposite end. l This parameter specifies the J0 byte to be received. l If this parameter is set to [Disabled], the board does not monitor the received J0 byte. l It is recommended that you use the default value. J0 Received ([Mode]Content) This parameter indicates the J0 byte that is actually received.

J0 to be Received ([Mode]Content)

-

[Disabled]

A.5.10.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the VC-4 path overheads (POHs).

Navigation Path
1. 2. Select SDH interface board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Overhead Management > VC4 Path Overhead from the Function Tree. Choose Display in Text Format or Display in Hexadecimal.

Parameters for Setting the Display Format
Parameter Display in Text Format Value Range Selected Deselected Default Value Selected Description This parameter specifies the display in the text format.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

473

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Display in Hexadecimal

Value Range Selected Deselected

Default Value Deselected

Description This parameter specifies the display in the hexadecimal format.

Parameters for the Trace Byte J1
Parameter Object J1 to be Sent ([Mode]Content) Value Range Default Value [16 Bytes]HuaWei SBS Description This parameter indicates the object to be set. If the NE at the opposite end reports the HP_TIM alarm, this parameter is set according to the J1 byte to be received at the opposite end. l If this parameter is set to [Disabled], the board does not monitor the received J1 byte. l It is recommended that you use the default value. J1 Received ([Mode]Content) This parameter displays the J1 byte that is actually received.

J1 to be Received ([Mode]Content)

-

[Disabled]

Parameters for the Signal Flag C2
Parameter Object C2 to be Sent Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the object to be set. If the NE at the opposite end reports the HP_SLM alarm, this parameter is set according to the C2 byte to be received at the opposite end. If the NE at the local end reports the HP_SLM alarm, this parameter is set according to the C2 byte to be sent at the opposite end. This parameter displays the C2 byte that is actually received.

C2 to be Received

-

-

C2 Received

-

-

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

474

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameters for Overhead Termination
Parameter Object VC4 Overhead Termination Value Range Termination Pass-Through Auto Default Value Auto Description This parameter indicates the object to be set. l If this parameter is set to PassThrough, the NE forwards the original overhead after monitoring the VC-4 path overhead regardless of the C2 byte. l If this parameter is set to Termination, the NE generates the new VC-4 path overhead according to the board setting after monitoring the VC-4 path overhead regardless of the C2 byte. l If this parameter is set to Auto, the VC-4 path overhead in the VC-4 pass-through service is passed through, and the VC-4 path overhead in the VC-12 service is terminated. l It is recommended that you use the default value.

A.5.10.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the VC-12 path overheads (POHs).

Navigation Path
1. Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Overhead Management > VC12 Path Overhead from the Function Tree. Choose Display in Text Format or Display in Hexadecimal.

2.

Parameters for Setting the Display Format
Parameter Display in Text Format Display in Hexadecimal Value Range Selected Deselected Selected Deselected Deselected Default Value Selected Description This parameter specifies the display in the text format. This parameter specifies the display in the hexadecimal format.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

475

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameters for the Trace Byte
Parameter Object J2 to be Sent Value Range Default Value [16 Bytes]HuaWei SBS Description This parameter indicates the object to be set. If the NE at the opposite end reports the LP_TIM or LP_TIM_VC12 alarm, this parameter is set according to the J2 byte to be received by the NE at the opposite end. l If this parameter is set to [Disabled], the board does not monitor the received J2 byte. l It is recommended that you use the default value.
NOTE IF boards do not support this parameter.

J2 to be Received

-

[Disabled]

J2 Received

-

-

This parameter displays the J2 byte that is actually received.

Parameters for the Signal Flag
Parameter Object Signal Label (L1,L2,L3 of V5) to be Sent Signal Label (L1,L2,L3 of V5) to be Received Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the object to be set. If the NE at the opposite end reports the LP_SLM or LP_SLM_VC12 alarm, this parameter is set according to the V5 byte to be received at the opposite end. If the NE at the local end reports the LP_SLM or LP_SLM_VC12 alarm, this parameter is set according to the V5 byte to be sent at the opposite end.
NOTE IF boards do not support this parameter.

-

-

Signal Label (L1,L2,L3 of V5) Received

-

-

This parameter displays the V5 byte that is actually received.

A.5.11 Parameter Description: Ethernet Virtual Interfaces
This topic describes the parameters of Ethernet virtual interfaces.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

476

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Interface Management > Ethernet Virtual Interface from the Function Tree. Click the Basic Attributes tab. Choose New > Create Ethernet Virtual Interface.

2. 3.

Basic Attributes of Ethernet Virtual Interfaces
Parameter Port Name Port Type Value Range 1 to 8191 EoA Virtual Interface VLAN Sub Interface Board Default Value EoA Virtual Interface Description This parameter displays or specifies the port number of an Ethernet virtual interface. This parameter displays or specifies the port name of an Ethernet virtual interface. This parameter displays or specifies the port type of an Ethernet virtual interface. The OptiX RTN 910 allows Port Type to be set to VLAN Sub Interface only. This parameter displays or specifies the board where an Ethernet virtual interface is located. This parameter displays or specifies the port where an Ethernet virtual interface is located. Setting this parameter is not available. Setting this parameter is not available. Setting this parameter is not available.

Port

-

-

VPI VCI AAL5 Encapsulation Type VLAN

-

-

-

-

This parameter specifies the VLAN ID that an Ethernet virtual interface uses. This parameter can be set when Port Type is VLAN Sub Interface.

Specify IP Address

Manually Unspecified

Unspecified

This parameter specifies whether to set the IP address for a port. l Unspecified: indicates that the IP address will not be specified for a port. l Manually: indicates that the IP address will be specified for a port. If the specified IP address is a valid value, it will become the IP address of this port.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

477

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter IP Address

Value Range -

Default Value 0.0.0.0

Description This parameter specifies the IP address of a port. l This parameter can be set only when Specify IP Address is Manually. l The IP addresses of different ports on an NE must be in different network segments, but the IP addresses of the ports at both ends of an MPLS tunnel must be in the same network segment.

IP Mask

-

255.255.255.252

This parameter specifies the subnet mask for a port. This parameter can be set only when Specify IP Address is Manually.

Enable Tunnel

Enabled Disabled

Disabled

This parameter specifies whether to enable an MPLS tunnel. This parameter specifies the MPLS enabled status for a port. If you set Enable Tunnel to Enabled for a port, the port identifies and processes MPLS labels.

MAC Address

-

-

This parameter displays the port MAC address of an Ethernet virtual interface.

Layer 3 Attributes
Parameter Port Enable Tunnel Value Range Enabled Disabled Default Value Disabled Description This parameter displays an IF port. This parameter displays or specifies whether to enable an MPLS tunnel. Set the MPLS enabled status for a port. If you set Enable Tunnel to Enabled, the port identifies and processes MPLS labels. Specify IP Address Manually Unspecified Unspecified This parameter displays or specifies whether to set the IP address for a port. l Unspecified: indicates that the IP address will not be specified for a port. l Manually: indicates that the IP address will be specified for a port. If the specified IP address is a valid value, it will become the IP address of this port.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

478

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter IP Address

Value Range -

Default Value 0.0.0.0

Description This parameter displays or specifies the IP address of a port. l This parameter can be set only when Specify IP Address is Manually. l The IP addresses of different ports on an NE must be in different network segments, but the IP addresses of the ports at both ends of an MPLS tunnel must be in the same network segment.

IP Mask

-

255.255.255.252

This parameter displays or specifies the subnet mask of a port. This parameter can be set only when Specify IP Address is Manually.

A.6 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features on the Packet Plane
This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet services and Ethernet features on the packet plane, including service parameters, protocol parameters, OAM parameters, Ethernet port parameters, and QoS parameters.

A.6.1 Parameters for Ethernet Services
This topic describes the parameters that are related to Ethernet services.

A.6.1.1 Parameter Description: E-Line Service_Creation
This topic describes the interface parameters that are used for creating an Ethernet line (E-Line) service.

Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree. Click New.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

479

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameters on the Main Interface
Table A-4 Service direction of UNI-UNI Parameter Service ID Value Range 1 to 4294967294 Default Value Description This parameter specifies the ID of the E-Line service. This parameter specifies the name of the E-Line service. l This parameter specifies the direction of the E-Line service. l Set this parameter to UNI-UNI.

Service Name

-

-

Direction

UNI-UNI UNI-NNI NNI-NNI

UNI-UNI

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

480

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter BPDU

Value Range Not Transparently Transmitted Transparently Transmitted

Default Value Not Transparently Transmitted

Description l This parameter specifies the transparent transmission ID of the bridge protocol data unit (BPDU) packets. It is used to indicate whether the E-Line service transparently transmits the BPDU packets. l If the BPDU packets are used as the service packets and transparently transmitted to the opposite end, set this parameter to Transparently Transmitted. That is, the parameter value Transparently Transmitted takes effect only if Encapsulation Type of the source and sink ports of the E-Line service are Null. l In other cases, set this parameter to Not Transparently Transmitted. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

MTU(bytes) Service Tag Role

-

-

This parameter cannot be set here. The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

481

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Source Port

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description l Before setting this parameter, check and ensure that the attributes in Ethernet Interface of the port are set correctly and are the same as the planning information. l The value of this parameter cannot be the same as the value of sink port. l The value of this parameter cannot be used for the E-LAN port. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

482

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Source VLANs

Value Range 1 to 4094

Default Value -

Description l This parameter can be set to null, a number, or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l The number and value of VLANs must be the same value of Sink VLANs. l If this parameter is set to null, all the services at the source port are used as the service source. l If this parameter is not set to null, only the service that contains the VLAN ID at the source port can be used as the service source.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

483

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Sink Port

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description l Before setting this parameter, check and ensure that the attributes in Ethernet Interface of the port are set correctly and are the same as the planning information. l The value of this parameter cannot be the same as the value of Source Port. l The value of this parameter cannot be used for the E-LAN port. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

484

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Sink VLANs

Value Range 1 to 4094

Default Value -

Description l This parameter can be set to null, a number, or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l The number and value of VLANs must be the same value of Source VLANs. l If this parameter is set to null, all the services at the sink port are used as the service sink. l If this parameter is not set to null, only the service that contains the VLAN ID at the sink port can be used as the service sink.

Table A-5 Service direction of UNI-NNI (carried by PWs) Parameter Service ID Value Range 1 to 4294967294 Default Value Description This parameter specifies the ID of the E-Line service. This parameter specifies the name of the E-Line service. l This parameter specifies the direction of the E-Line service. l Set this parameter to UNI-NNI.

Service Name

-

-

Direction

UNI-UNI UNI-NNI NNI-NNI

UNI-UNI

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

485

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter BPDU

Value Range Not Transparently Transmitted Transparently Transmitted

Default Value Not Transparently Transmitted

Description For UNI-NNI ETH PWE3 services, the parameter value is always Not Transparently Transmitted. This parameter cannot be set here. The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter. l Before setting this parameter, check and ensure that the attributes in Ethernet Interface of the port are set correctly and are the same as the planning information. l The value of this parameter cannot be the same as the value of sink port. l The value of this parameter cannot be used for the E-LAN port. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

MTU(bytes) Service Tag Role

-

-

Source Port

-

-

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

486

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Source VLANs

Value Range 1 to 4094

Default Value -

Description l This parameter can be set to null, a number, or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l If this parameter is set to null, all the services at the source port are used as the service source. l If this parameter is not set to null, only the service that contains the VLAN ID at the source port can be used as the service source.

PRI

-

-

The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter. For UNI-NNI ETH PWE3 services, the parameter value is always PW.

Bearer Type

QinQ Link PW

PW

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

487

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Protection Type

Value Range No Protection PW APS Slave Protection Pair

Default Value No Protection

Description l If this parameter is set to PW APS, working and protection PWs need to be configured. l If this parameter is set to Slave Protection Pair, you need to bind the slave PW APS protection group with the master PW APS protection group. The switching of the master PW APS protection group triggers the switching of the slave PW APS protection group simultaneously.

Table A-6 Service direction of UNI-NNI (carried by QinQ links) Parameter Service ID Value Range 1 to 4294967294 Default Value Description This parameter specifies the ID of the E-Line service. This parameter specifies the name of the E-Line service. l This parameter specifies the direction of the E-Line service. l Set this parameter to UNI-NNI. Not Transparently Transmitted For UNI-NNI QinQ services, the parameter value is always Not Transparently Transmitted. This parameter cannot be set here. The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter.

Service Name

-

-

Direction

UNI-UNI UNI-NNI NNI-NNI

UNI-UNI

BPDU

Not Transparently Transmitted Transparently Transmitted

MTU(bytes) Service Tag Role

-

-

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

488

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Source Port

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description l Before setting this parameter, check and ensure that the attributes in Ethernet Interface of the port are set correctly and are the same as the planning information. l The value of this parameter cannot be the same as the value of sink port. l The value of this parameter cannot be used for the E-LAN port. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Source VLANs

1 to 4094

-

l This parameter can be set to null, a number, or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l If this parameter is set to null, all the services at the source port are used as the service source. l If this parameter is not set to null, only the service that contains the VLAN ID at the source port can be used as the service source.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

489

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter PRI

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter. For NNI-NNI QinQ services, the parameter value is always QinQ Link. Selects or specifies the ID of a QinQ link. You can create a QinQ link or select an existing QinQ link.

Bearer Type

QinQ Link PW

PW

QinQ Link ID

-

-

Table A-7 Service direction of NNI-NNI Parameter Service ID Value Range 1 to 4294967294 Default Value Description This parameter specifies the ID of the E-Line service. This parameter specifies the name of the E-Line service. l This parameter specifies the direction of the E-Line service. l Set this parameter to NNI-NNI. Not Transparently Transmitted For NNI-NNI QinQ services, the parameter value is always Not Transparently Transmitted . This parameter cannot be set here. The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter.

Service Name

-

-

Direction

UNI-UNI UNI-NNI NNI-NNI

UNI-UNI

BPDU

Not Transparently Transmitted Transparently Transmitted

MTU(bytes) Service Tag Role

-

-

PRI

-

-

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

490

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Bearer Type 1 QinQ Link ID 1

Value Range QinQ Link -

Default Value QinQ Link -

Description Uses the QinQ link to carry the E-Line service. l Selects the QinQ link ID of the first QinQ link. l The QinQ link ID is preset in QinQ Link.

Bearer Type 2 QinQ Link ID 2

QinQ Link -

QinQ Link -

Uses the QinQ link to carry the E-Line service. l Selects the QinQ link ID of the second QinQ link. l The QinQ link ID is preset in QinQ Link.

QinQ Link ID

-

-

Selects or specifies the ID of a QinQ link. You can create a QinQ link or select an existing QinQ link.

Parameters of PWs
NOTE

l Parameters of PWs need to be configured only when Direction is UNI-NNI and Bearer Type is PW. l If the parameter Protection Type of PWs is set to PW APS or Slave Protection Pair, all the parameters of working and protection PWs need to be configured. This section considers the parameters of the working PW as an example.

Parameter PW ID PW Signaling Type

Value Range Static

Default Value Static

Description Specifies the ID of the PW that carries services. Labels for static PWs need to be manually assigned.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

491

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter PW Type

Value Range Ethernet Ethernet Tagged Mode

Default Value Ethernet

Description l Specifies the type of the PW. l PW Type indicates whether P-TAG is added to Ethernet frames that are encapsulated for transmission on PWs. If it is not required to add VLAN IDs, set this parameter to Ethernet. If it is required to add VLAN IDs, set this parameter to Ethernet Tagged Mode and then set Request VLAN in the Advanced Attributes tab.

PW Direction PW Encapsulation Type

Bidirectional MPLS

Bidirectional MPLS

Displays the direction of the PW. Displays the encapsulation type of the packets on the PW. Specifies the PW Ingress label. Specifies the PW Egress label. Displays the method to select tunnels. Displays the type of the tunnel that carries the PW. A tunnel needs to be selected. If no tunnel is available, creation of a PW will fail. For a bidirectional tunnel, the system will configure the egress tunnel automatically.

PW Ingress Label/ Source Port PW Egress Label/Sink Port Tunnel selection mode Tunnel Type Tunnel

16 to 1048575 16 to 1048575 MPLS -

MPLS -

Egress Tunnel

-

-

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

492

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Peer LSR ID

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description Specifies the LSR ID of the PW at the remote end. If an existing tunnel is selected, the LSR ID will be automatically assigned.

QoS Parameters (PW)
NOTE

QoS parameters need to be configured only when Direction is UNI-NNI and Bearer Type is PW.

Parameter Bandwidth Limit

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description Specifies whether the bandwidth limit function is enabled. l This function limits the bandwidth of one or more PWs in an MPLS tunnel. l An ETH PWE3 service corresponds to a PW. Therefore, this function can also limit the bandwidth of ETH PWE3 services in an MPLS tunnel.

Policy CIR(Kbit/s)

-

-

The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter. Specifies the committed information rate (CIR) of a PW. It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value as PIR.

CBS(byte) PIR(Kbit/s)

-

-

Specifies the committed burst size (CBS) of a PW. Specifies the peak information rate (PIR) of a PW. It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value as CIR.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

493

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter PBS(byte) EXP LSP Mode

Value Range Pipe

Default Value Pipe

Description Specifies the peak burst size (PBS) of a PW. The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter. Pipe: When stripping MPLS tunnel labels from packets, an egress node does not update the scheduling priority for the packets.

Parameters of Advanced Attributes (PW)
Parameter Control Word Value Range No Use Default Value No Use Description For ETH PWE3 services, the parameter value is always No Use. l Specifies the mode of PW connectivity check. l None indicates that VCCV is not used. l Alert Label indicates VCCV packets in Alert Label encapsulation mode. VCCV Verification Mode Ping None Ping l Specifies the VCCV verification mode. The VCCV verification is used for PW connectivity check. l If the VCCV-Ping test is required, do not set this parameter to None.

Control Channel Type

None Alert Label

Alert Label

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

494

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Request VLAN

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description l Set this parameter when PW Type is Ethernet Tagged Mode. l If the received packets do not carry any VLAN IDs, the PW will add VLAN IDs to the packets as required by the setting of this parameter.

TPID

-

-

The OptiX RTN 910 does not support request VLAN TPID of the PW level.

Protection Group Parameters (PW APS)
NOTE

The parameters of the PW APS protection group need to be configured if the Protection Type of PWs is set to PW APS.

Parameter Protection Type Protection Group ID Enabling Status

Value Range Disabled Enabled

Default Value Disabled

Description Specifies the protection type. Specifies the protection group ID. l Specifies the enabling status of the PW protection group. l During the creation of a protection group, set Enabling Status to Disabled. After the APS protection group is configured at both ends, set Enabling Status to Enabled.

Protection Mode

-

-

Displays the protection mode.
NOTE The OptiX RTN 910 supports 1:1 protection mode.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

495

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Working PW ID Protection PW ID Switching Mode

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description Displays the ID of the working PW. Displays the ID of the protection PW. Displays the switching mode to be used when a PW fails.
NOTE The OptiX RTN 910 supports dual-ended switching.

Revertive Mode

Non-revertive Revertive

Revertive

l This parameter specifies whether to switch services back to the original working PW after it recovers. l The value Revertive indicates that services are switched to the original working PW and the value Nonrevertive indicates that services are not switched to the original working PW. l The value Revertive is recommended.

Switchover Restoration Time(min)

1 to 12

1

l Specifies the WTR time of the protection group. l When the preset WTR time expires after the original working PW recovers, services are switched to the original working PW. l This parameter is available only when Restoration Mode is Revertive. l The default value is recommended.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

496

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Switchover Delay Time (100ms)

Value Range 0 to 100

Default Value 0

Description l Specifies the hold-off time of the protection group. l If this parameter is set to a value other than 0, the protection group does not trigger switching once it detects faults, but waits until the hold-off time expires, and then detects whether any faults persist. If any faults persist, the switching is triggered; otherwise, no switching is triggered. l The default value is recommended.

Detection mode

-

-

Displays the detection mode of the PW APS protection group.

OAM Parameters
NOTE

l The OAM parameters of the PW APS protection group need to be configured if the Protection Type of PWs is set to PW APS. l To configure PW OAM parameters, choose Configuration > MPLS Management > PW Management > PW OAM Parameter from the Function Tree.

Parameter OAM Status

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description Displays the enabling status of PW OAM.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

497

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Detection Mode

Value Range Auto-Sensing Manual

Default Value Auto-Sensing

Description l Specifies the detection mode of OAM packets. l Manual: The connectivity check (CC) packets are sent at the interval specified by the user. l Auto-Sensing: The connectivity check (CC) packets are sent at the interval of receiving PW OAM packets. l If Detection Mode is set to Manual, you need to set the PW OAM detection packets to be received and transmitted. l The value AutoSensing is recommended.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

498

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Detection Packet Type

Value Range CV FFD

Default Value CV

Description l CV: The detection packets are sent at a fixed interval. l FFD: The detection packets are sent at the interval specified by the user. l If Detection Mode is set to Auto-Sensing, this parameter specifies the PW OAM detection packets to be transmitted. l If Detection Mode is set to Manual, this parameter specifies the PW OAM detection packets to be received and transmitted. l The value FFD is assumed for PW APS and the value CV is assumed for continuous connectivity check on PWs.

Detection Packet Period (ms)

3.3 10 20 50 100 200 500

50

l Specifies the period of detection packets. l This parameter is configurable when Detection Packet Type is FFD and assumes the fixed value of 1000 when Detection Packet Type is CV. l Set this parameter to 3.3 for PW APS.

LSR ID to be Received PW ID to be Received

-

-

Specifies the LSR ID to be received. Specifies the PW ID to be received.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

499

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Protection Group Parameters (Slave Protection Pair)
NOTE

The parameters of the PW APS protection group need to be configured if the Protection Type of PWs is set to Slave Protection Pair.

Parameter Protection Mode Protection Group ID

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description Displays the protection mode. Specifies the ID of the slave protection pair. The switching of the master PW APS protection group triggers the switching of the slave PW APS protection group simultaneously. Displays the ID of the working PW in the slave protection pair. Displays the ID of the protection PW in the slave protection pair.

Working PW ID

-

-

Protection PW ID

-

-

A.6.1.2 Parameter Description: E-Line Service
This topic describes the parameters that are related to E-Line services.

Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree.

Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Service ID Value Range 1 to 4294967294 Default Value Description This parameter indicates the ID of the E-Line service. This parameter indicates or specifies the name of the E-Line service. This parameter indicates the source node.

Service Name

-

-

Source Node

-

-

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

500

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Sink Node Service Tag Role

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description This parameter indicates the sink node. The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter. This parameter cannot be queried here. This parameter indicates the transparent transmission tag of the bridge protocol data unit (BPDU) packets. This parameter is used to indicate whether the Ethernet line transparently transmits the BPDU packets. This parameter indicates whether E-Line service is deployed.

MTU(byte) BPDU

Not Transparently Transmitted Transparently Transmitted

-

Deployment Status

-

-

Parameters Associated with UNI Ports
Parameter Port Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the UNI port.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

501

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter VLANs

Value Range 1 to 4094

Default Value -

Description This parameter indicates or specifies the VLAN ID of the UNI port. l This parameter can be set to null, a number, or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l This parameter is valid only when Direction is set to UNI-UNI or UNI-NNI in the process of creating an E-Line service. l If this parameter is set to null, all the services of the UNI work as the service source or service sink. l If this parameter is not set to null, only the services of the UNI port whose VLAN IDs are included in the set value of this parameter work as the service source or service sink.

NNI Parameters (PW)
Parameter PW ID Working Status Value Range Default Value Description This parameter displays the PW ID. This parameter displays the working status of a PW.
502

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Enable Status PW Signaling Type

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description This parameter displays whether a PW is enabled. This parameter displays the PW signaling type.
NOTE The OptiX RTN 910 uses static PWs only.

PW Type PW Direction PW Encapsulation Type

-

-

This parameter displays the configured PW type. This parameter displays the direction of the PW. This parameter displays the PW encapsulation type.
NOTE The OptiX RTN 910 uses MPLS only.

PW Ingress Label/ Source Port PW Egress Label/Sink Port Tunnel Type

-

-

This parameter displays the configured PW ingress label. This parameter displays the configured PW egress label. This parameter displays the type of the tunnel that carries a PW. This parameter displays the opposite LSR ID. This parameter displays the tunnel. For ETH PWE3 services, the parameter value is always No Use. This parameter displays the control channel type. This parameter displays the VCCV mode. Displays the working status of the PW at the local end.

-

-

MPLS

MPLS

Peer LSR ID Tunnel Control Word

-

-

Control Channel Type VCCV Verification Mode Local Working Status

-

-

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

503

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Remote Working Status

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description This parameter displays the working status of the PW at the remote end. This parameter displays the comprehensive working status of the PW. This parameter displays the request VLAN. This parameter displays the deployment status. This parameter displays the automatic tunnel selection policy. The OptiX RTN 910 does not support request VLAN TPID of the PW level.

Compositive Working Status Request VLAN Deployment Status Tunnel Automatic Selection Policy TPID

-

-

-

-

-

-

Parameters Associated with NNI Ports
Parameter QinQ Link ID Value Range 1 to 4294967295 Default Value Description l This parameter indicates the QinQ link ID of the QinQ link connected to the NNI port. l This parameter is valid only when Direction is set to UNI-UNI or UNI-NNI in the process of creating an E-Line service. Port l This parameter indicates the NNI port. l This parameter is valid only when Direction is set to UNI-UNI or UNI-NNI in the process of creating an E-Line service.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

504

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter S-VLAN ID

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description l This parameter indicates or specifies the VLAN ID of the NNI port. l This parameter is valid only when Direction is set to UNI-NNI or NNI-NNI in the process of creating an E-Line service. l This parameter is preset in QinQ Link.

QoS Parameters
Parameter PW ID Direction Value Range Default Value Description This parameter displays the PW ID. l This parameter displays the direction of the PW. l Egress indicates the egress direction of the PW. l Ingress indicates the ingress direction of the PW.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

505

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Bandwidth Limit

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description This parameter displays or specifies whether the bandwidth limit function is enabled for a PW to prevent network congestion. l Regarding transmission channels, this function can be used to limit the bandwidth of one or more PWs in an MPLS tunnel. l An ETH PWE3 service corresponds to a PW. Therefore, this function can also limit the bandwidth of ETH PWE3 services in an MPLS tunnel.

Policy

-

-

The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter. This parameter displays or specifies the committed information rate (CIR) of a PW. It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value as PIR.

CIR (Kbit/s)

-

-

CBS (kbyte)

-

-

This parameter displays or specifies the committed burst size (CBS) of a PW. This parameter displays or specifies the peak information rate (PIR) of a PW. It is recommended that you set this parameter to the same value as CIR.

PIR (kbit/s)

-

-

PBS (kbyte)

-

-

This parameter displays or specifies the peak burst size (PBS) of a PW.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

506

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter EXP

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter. Pipe: When stripping MPLS tunnel labels from packets, an egress node does not update the scheduling priority for the packets.

LSP Mode

Pipe

Pipe

Parameters for the Port Attributes
Parameter Port Enable Port Value Range Default Value Description Displays the port information. l This parameter indicates whether to enable the port. l This parameter is preset in General Attributes of Ethernet Interface.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

507

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Encapsulation Type

Value Range Null 802.1Q QinQ

Default Value -

Description l This parameter indicates the encapsulation type of the port. l This parameter is valid only when Direction is set to UNI-UNI or UNI-NNI in the process of creating an E-Line service. l If this parameter is set to Null, the port transparently transmits the received packets. l If this parameter is set to 802.1Q, the port identifies the packets that comply with the IEEE 802.1Q standard. l If this parameter is set to QinQ, the port identifies the packets that comply with the IEEE 802.1 QinQ standard. l This parameter is preset in General Attributes of Ethernet Interface.

TAG

Tag Aware Access Hybrid

-

l This parameter displays the tag of the port. l This parameter is preset in Layer 2 Attributes of Ethernet Interface .

Protection Group Parameters (PW APS)
NOTE

The following parameters are available only after the PW APS protection group is configured.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

508

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Protection Group ID

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description Displays the ID of the protection group to be created. Displays the ID of the working PW. Displays the ID of the protection PW. Displays the protection mode. l Displays or specifies the enabling status of the PW protection group. l During the creation of a protection group, set Enabling Status to Disabled. After the APS protection group is configured at both ends, set Enabling Status to Enabled.

Working PW ID Protection PW ID Protection Mode Enabling Status

Enabled Disabled

-

Switchover Mode

-

-

Displays the switching mode to be used when a PW fails.
NOTE The OptiX RTN 910 supporting dual-ended switching.

Restoration Mode

Non-revertive Revertive

-

l Specifies whether to switch services to the original working PW after the fault is rectified. l The value Revertive indicates that services are switched to the original working PW and the value Nonrevertive indicates that services are not switched to the original working PW. l The value Revertive is recommended.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

509

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Switchover Restoration Time(min)

Value Range 1 to 12

Default Value -

Description l Displays or specifies the WTR time of the protection group. l When the preset WTR time expires after the original working PW recovers, services are switched to the original working PW. l This parameter is available only when Restoration Mode is Revertive.

Switchover Delay Time (100ms)

0 to 100

-

l Displays or specifies the hold-off time of the protection group. l If this parameter is set to a value other than 0, the protection group does not trigger switching once it detects faults, but waits until the hold-off time expires, and then detects whether any faults persist. If any faults persist, the switching is triggered; otherwise, no switching is triggered.

Deployment Status

-

-

Display the deployment status of the protection group. Displays the switchover status of the protection group. Displays the enabling status of the protocol. Displays the status of the current working path. Display the status of the current protection path.

Switchover Status

-

-

Protocol Status Working Path Status Protection Path Status

-

-

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

510

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Protection Group Parameters (Slave Protection Pair)
NOTE

The following parameters are available only after the slave protection pair is configured.

Parameter Protection Group ID

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description Specifies the ID of the slave protection pair. The switching of the master PW APS protection group triggers the switching of the slave PW APS protection group simultaneously. Displays the ID of the working PW in the slave protection pair. Displays the ID of the protection PW in the slave protection pair. Displays the DNI PW ID. Displays the PW type. Displays the deployment status of the slave protection pair.

Working PW ID

-

-

Protection PW ID

-

-

DNI PW ID PW Type Deployment Status

-

-

A.6.1.3 Parameter Description: VLAN Forwarding Table Items for E-Line Services_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating VLAN forwarding table items.

Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree. Click the VLAN Forwarding Table Item tab. Click New.

Parameters for VLAN Forwarding Table Item
Parameter Source Interface Type Value Range V-UNI Default Value V-UNI Description This parameter specifies the network attribute of the source interface.
511

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Source Interface Source VLAN ID

Value Range 1 to 4094

Default Value -

Description This parameter specifies the source interface. This parameter specifies the VLAN ID of the source service. This parameter specifies the network attribute of the sink interface. This parameter specifies the sink interface. This parameter specifies the VLAN ID of the sink service.

Sink Interface Type

V-UNI

V-UNI

Sink Interface Sink VLAN ID

1 to 4094

-

NOTE

l The VLAN ID of the UNI-UNI E-Line service can be converted after a VLAN forwarding table item is created. In this case, a service from Source Interface to Sink Interface carries the VLAN ID specified in Sink VLAN ID when the service is transmitted from Sink Interface. l The VLAN ID in a VLAN forwarding table item is converted unidirectionally and can be converted from Source VLAN ID to Sink VLAN ID only. The VLAN ID can be converted bidirectionally only when the other VLAN forwarding table item is configured reversely. l In normal cases, Ethernet services are bidirectional. Hence, you need to set bidirectional conversion of VLAN IDs.

A.6.1.4 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an Ethernet local area network (ELAN) service.

Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree. Click New.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

512

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Service ID Value Range 1 to 4294967294 Default Value Description l This parameter specifies the ID of the E-LAN service. l The OptiX RTN 910 supports simultaneous creation of an E-LAN service only. Service Name This parameter specifies the name of the E-LAN service. l This parameter indicates the transparent transmission tag of the BPDU packets. l In the case of an ELAN service, this parameter supports only Not Transparently Transmitted and cannot be set manually. l Not Transparently Transmitted indicates that the BPDU packets are used as the protocol packets to compute the spanning tree topology of the network.

BPDU

-

-

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

513

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Tag Type

Value Range C-Awared S-Awared Tag-Transparent

Default Value C-Awared

Description l C-Awared indicates that the packets are learnt according to CTag (the VLAN tag on the client-side). To create the 802.1q bridge, set this parameter to CAwared. l S-Awared indicates that the packets are learnt according to STag (the VLAN tag at the carrier service layer). To create the 802.1ad bridge, set this parameter to SAwared. l Tag-Transparent indicates that the packets are transparently transmitted. To create the 802.1d bridge, set this parameter to TagTransparent. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

514

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Self-Learning MAC Address

Value Range Enabled Disabled

Default Value Enabled

Description l This parameter specifies whether to enable the MAC address self-learning function. l If the MAC selflearning function of an Ethernet LAN is enabled, the Ethernet LAN learns an MAC address according to the original MAC address in the packet and automatically refreshes the MAC address forwarding table. l If the MAC selflearning function of an Ethernet LAN is disabled, a static MAC address forwarding table is recommended to be configured.

MAC Address Learning Mode

IVL SVL

-

l This parameter indicates the mode used to learn an MAC address. l When the bridge uses the SVL mode, all the VLANs share one MAC address table. If the bridge uses the IVL mode, each VLAN has an MAC address table.

Deployment Status

-

-

This parameter indicates whether E-LAN service is deployed. This parameter cannot be set here. The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter.

MTU(byte) Service Tag Role

-

-

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

515

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameters for UNIs
Parameter Port SVLAN Value Range 1 to 4094 Default Value Description This parameter indicates the UNI port. l This parameter specifies the S-VLAN ID of the UNI port. l This parameter is valid only when Tag Type is set to S-Awared. l This parameter is set according to the planning information. VLANs/CVLAN 1 to 4094 l This parameter specifies the VLAN ID of the UNI port. l This parameter can be set to null, a number, or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l If this parameter is set to null, all the services of the UNI work as the service source or service sink. l If this parameter is not set to null, only the services of the UNI port whose VLAN IDs are included in the set value of this parameter work as the service source or service sink.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

516

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameters of NNIs
Parameter Port Value Range Default Value Description l This parameter indicates the NNI port. l This parameter is valid only when Tag Type is set to S-Awared. SVLANs l This parameter specifies the S-VLAN ID of the NNI port. l This parameter is valid only when Tag Type is set to S-Awared.

Parameters for the Split Horizon Group
Parameter Split Horizon Group ID Value Range Default Value 1 Description l This parameter indicates the ID of the split horizon group. l The default split horizon group ID is 1 and cannot be set manually.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

517

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Split Horizon Group Member

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description l A split horizon group member indicates the logical port member in the split horizon group. l The port members that are added to the same split horizon group cannot communicate with each other. l The OptiX RTN 910 supports only the division of the split horizon group members according to the Ethernet physical port. l If a UNI or NNI logical port of the 802.1ad bridge is added to a split horizon group member, the physical port that is mounted with the logical port is automatically added to the split horizon group member.

A.6.1.5 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service
This topic describes the parameters that are related to E-LAN services.

Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

518

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Service ID Value Range 1 to 4294967294 Default Value Description l This parameter indicates the ID of the E-LAN service. l The supports simultaneous creation of an E-LAN service only. Service Name This parameter specifies the name of the E-LAN service. l This parameter indicates the transparent transmission tag of the BPDU packets. l In the case of an ELAN service, this parameter supports only Not Transparently Transmitted and cannot be set manually. l Not Transparently Transmitted indicates that the BPDU packets are used as the protocol packets to compute the spanning tree topology of the network.

BPDU

-

-

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

519

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Tag Type

Value Range C-Awared S-Awared Tag-Transparent

Default Value C-Awared

Description l C-Awared indicates that the packets are learnt according to CTag (the VLAN tag on the client-side). To create the 802.1q bridge, set this parameter to CAwared. l S-Awared indicates that the packets are learnt according to STag (the VLAN tag at the carrier service layer). To create the 802.1ad bridge, set this parameter to SAwared. l Tag-Transparent indicates that the packets are transparently transmitted. To create the 802.1d bridge, set this parameter to TagTransparent.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

520

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Self-Learning MAC Address

Value Range Enabled

Default Value Enabled

Description l This parameter indicates whether to enable the MAC address self-learning function. l If the MAC selflearning function of an Ethernet LAN is enabled, the Ethernet LAN learns an MAC address according to the original MAC address in the packet and automatically refreshes the MAC address forwarding table. l If the MAC selflearning function of an Ethernet LAN is disabled, a static MAC address forwarding table is recommended to be configured.

MAC Address Learning Mode

-

-

l This parameter indicates the mode used to learn an MAC address. l When the bridge uses the SVL mode, all the VLANs share one MAC address table. If the bridge uses the IVL mode, each VLAN has an MAC address table.

MTU(byte) Service Tag Role

-

-

This parameter cannot be queried here. The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter. This parameter indicates whether E-LAN service is deployed.

Deployment Status

-

-

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

521

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameters for UNIs
Parameter Port SVLAN Value Range 1 to 4094 Default Value Description This parameter indicates the UNI port. l This parameter specifies the S-VLAN ID of the UNI port. l This parameter is valid only when Tag Type is set to S-Awared. l This parameter is set according to the planning information. VLANs/CVLAN 1 to 4094 l This parameter specifies the VLAN ID of the UNI port. l This parameter can be set to null, a number, or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l If this parameter is set to null, the E-LAN service exclusively uses the corresponding UNI physical port. That is, the entire port is mounted to the bridge. l If this parameter is set to a non-null value, only the corresponding UNI port whose service packets contain this VLAN ID works as the logical port and is mounted to the bridge.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

522

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameters for NNIs
Parameter Port Value Range Default Value Description l This parameter indicates the NNI port. l This parameter is valid only when Tag Type is set to S-Awared. SVLANs l This parameter specifies the S-VLAN ID of the UNI port. l This parameter is valid only when Tag Type is set to S-Awared. l This parameter can be set to null, a number, or several numbers. When setting this parameter to several numbers, use the comma (,) to separate the discrete numbers, or use the endash (-) to represent a consecutive number. For example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

523

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameters for Static MAC Addresses
Parameter VLAN ID Value Range Default Value Description l This parameter is invalid if MAC Address Learning Mode is SVL. That is, the preset static MAC address entries are valid for all VLANs. l If MAC Address Learning Mode is set to IVL, the preset static MAC address entries are valid for only the VLANs whose VLAN ID is equal to the preset VLAN ID. l This parameter is set according to the planning information. MAC Address l This parameter indicates or specifies the static MAC address. l A static MAC address is an address that is set manually. It is not aged automatically and needs to be deleted manually. l Generally, a static MAC address is used for the port that receives but does not forward Ethernet service packets or the port whose MAC address need not be aged automatically. Egress Interface l This parameter specifies the Ethernet port that corresponds to the MAC address. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

524

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameters for Self-Learning MAC Address
Parameter VLAN ID Value Range Default Value Description l This parameter is invalid if MAC Address Learning Mode is SVL. That is, the preset self-learning MAC address entries are valid for all VLANs. l If MAC Address Learning Mode is set to IVL, the preset selflearning MAC address entries are valid for only the VLANs whose VLAN ID is equal to the preset VLAN ID. l This parameter is set according to the planning information. MAC Address l This parameter indicates or specifies the self-learning MAC address. A selflearning MAC address is also called a dynamic MAC address. l A self-learning MAC address is an entry obtained by a bridge in SVL or IVL learning mode. A self-learning MAC address can be aged. Egress Interface l This parameter specifies the Ethernet port that corresponds to the MAC address. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

525

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameters Associated with MAC Address Learning
Parameter Aging Ability Value Range Enabled Disabled Aging Time(min) 1 to 640 5 Default Value Enabled Description The OptiX RTN 910 supports enabling/ disabling of the aging function and aging time for the MAC address table. If one routing entry is not updated in a certain period, that is, if no new packet from this MAC address is received to enable the re-learning of this MAC address, this routing entry is automatically deleted. This mechanism is called aging, and this period is called aging time. The aging time of a MAC address table is 5 minutes by default.

Parameters for Disabled MAC Addresses
Parameter VLAN ID Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates or specifies the VLAN ID of the service. A disabled MAC address is valid for the VLAN whose VLAN ID is equal to the preset VLAN ID.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

526

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter MAC Address

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description l This parameter specifies or indicates the disabled MAC address. A disabled MAC address is also called a blacklisted MAC address. l This parameter is used for discarding an entry, also called a black hole entry, whose data frame that contains a specific destination MAC address. A disabled MAC address needs to be set manually and cannot be aged.

Parameters for the Split Horizon Group
Parameter Split Horizon Group ID Value Range Default Value 1 Description l This parameter indicates the ID of the split horizon group. l The default split horizon group ID is 1 and cannot be set manually.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

527

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Split Horizon Group Member

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description l A split horizon group member indicates the logical port member in the split horizon group. l The port members that are added to different split horizon groups cannot communicate with each other. l The supports only the division of the split horizon group members according to the Ethernet physical port. l If a UNI or NNI logical port of the 802.1ad bridge is added to a split horizon group member, the physical port that is mounted with the logical port is automatically added to the split horizon group member.

Parameters for Unknown Frame Processing
Parameter Frame Type Value Range Unicast Multicast Handing Mode Discard Broadcast Broadcast Default Value Description This parameter indicates the type of the received unknown frame. Selects the method of processing the unknown frame. If this parameter is set to Discard, the unknown frame is directly discarded. If this parameter is set to Broadcast, the unknown frame is broadcast at the forwarding port.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

528

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

A.6.1.6 Parameter Description: QinQ Link_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a QinQ link.

Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > QinQ Link from the Function Tree. Click New.

Parameters for the General Attributes
Parameter QinQ Link ID Value Range 1 to 4294967295 Default Value Description This parameter specifies the ID of the QinQ link.
NOTE The OptiX RTN 910 supports 1024 QinQ links, whose IDs must be different from each other.

Board

-

-

This parameter specifies the board where the QinQ link is located. This parameter specifies the port where the QinQ link is located. l This parameter specifies the VLAN ID (at the network operator side) for the QinQ link. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Port

-

-

S-Vlan ID

1 to 4094

-

A.6.1.7 Parameter Description: E-AGGR Services_Creation
This topic describes the parameters for creating E-AGGR services.

Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-AGGR Service from the Function Tree. Click New.

2.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

529

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Service ID Value Range 1 to 4294967294 Default Value Description This parameter specifies the ID of an E-AGGR service. This parameter specifies the name of an E-AGGR service. Setting this parameter is not available. Setting this parameter is not available.

Service Name

-

-

MTU(bytes) Service Tag Role

-

-

UNI Parameters
Parameter Location Value Range Sink Source Default Value Description This parameter specifies whether a port functions as a service source or sink. You can configure one or more source ports but only one sink port for an EAGGR service. Otherwise, configuration of the E-AGGR service will fail. Port This parameter displays UNI ports.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

530

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter VLANs

Value Range 1 to 4094

Default Value -

Description l This parameter specifies the VLAN ID for a UNI port. l Set this parameter to a numeral or several numerals. When you set this parameter to several numerals, use ","s to separate discrete values and use " - "s to indicate consecutive numerals. For example, 1, 3 - 6 indicates numerals 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6. l It is recommended that you do not set this parameter to null.

Priority

-

-

Setting this parameter is not available.

NNI (PW) Parameters
Table A-8 Basic attributes Parameter Location Value Range Sink Source Default Value Description This parameter specifies whether a port functions as a service source or sink. You can configure one or more source ports but only one sink port for an EAGGR service. Otherwise, configuration of the E-AGGR service will fail. PW ID PW Signaling Type 1 to 4294967295 Static Static This parameter specifies the ID of a PW. This parameter displays the signaling type of a PW. You need to allocate the same PW label for both ends of a static PW.
Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 531

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter PW Type

Value Range Ethernet Ethernet Tagged Mode

Default Value Ethernet

Description l This parameter specifies whether PTAGs will be added to Ethernet frames when the Ethernet frames are encapsulated on a PW. l If Request VLAN does not need to be added to Ethernet frames that are encapsulated on a PW, set this parameter to Ethernet. If Request VLAN needs to be added to Ethernet frames that are encapsulated on a PW, set this parameter to Ethernet Tagged Mode. Currently, this parameter can be set only to Ethernet because EAGGR services on the OptiX RTN 910 do not support PWs in Ethernet tagged mode.

PW Direction PW Encapsulation Type

MPLS

MPLS

This parameter displays the direction of a PW. This parameter displays the encapsulation type of a PW. This parameter specifies the ingress label for a PW. This parameter specifies the egress label for a PW. This parameter displays whether an existing MPLS tunnel or a new MPLS tunnel is used. This parameter displays the type of a tunnel.

PW Incoming Label PW Outgoing Label Tunnel Selection Mode

16 to 1048575 16 to 1048575 -

-

Tunnel Type

-

-

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

532

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Tunnel

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description This parameter requires you to select an existing static MPLS tunnel. If there is no static MPLS tunnel available, PW creation will fail. This parameter specifies the LSR ID for the NE at the opposite end of a PW. If an existing MPLS tunnel is used, the peer LSR ID is automatically generated based on the local LSR ID.

Peer LSR ID

-

-

Table A-9 Advanced attributes Parameter Control Word Value Range Not in use Default Value Not in use Description For ETH PWE3 services, this parameter has a fixed value of Not in use. This parameter specifies the control channel type, which determines the PW continuity check (CC) mode. l None: indicates that virtual circuit connectivity verification (VCCV) packets are not used. l l Alert Label: indicates that VCCV packets in Alert Label encapsulation mode are used.

Control Channel Type

Alert Label None

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

533

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter VCCV Verification Mode

Value Range Ping None

Default Value Ping

Description l This parameter specifies the VCCV verification mode, which is used for a PW CC test. l If the LSP ping function is used to implement VCCV, VCCV Verification Mode cannot be set to None.

Request VLAN TPID

-

-

Setting this parameter is not available. Setting this parameter is not available.

Parameters for a VLAN Forwarding Table
Parameter Source Interface Type Value Range V-UNI Default Value V-UNI Description This parameter specifies the network attribute for a source port. This parameter specifies a source port. This parameter specifies the source VLAN ID. This parameter specifies the network attribute for the sink port. This parameter specifies the sink port. This parameter specifies the sink VLAN ID.

Source Interface Source VLAN ID Sink Interface Type

1 to 4094 V-UNI

V-UNI

Sink Interface Sink VLAN ID

1 to 4094

-

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

534

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description
NOTE

A Parameters Description

l Regardless of whether VLAN ID swapping is required by an E-AGGR service, a VLAN forwarding table needs to be configured, specifying the source and sink VLAN IDs of each VLAN-based service. l A VLAN forwarding table enables VLAN ID swapping for an E-AGGR service. After a VLAN forwarding table is created, a service from Source Interface will carry the VLAN ID specified in Sink VLAN ID when leaving Sink Interface. l For an E-AGGR service, the VLAN forwarding table specifies bidirectional VLAN ID swapping relationships. This means that swapping from Sink VLAN ID to Source VLAN ID and swapping from Source VLAN ID to Sink VLAN ID will be implemented once a VLAN forwarding entry for changing Source VLAN ID to Sink VLAN ID is configured. l For service aggregation from UNI ports to an NNI port, Source VLAN ID must take any of the VLAN IDs that have been configured for UNI ports. l For service aggregation from NNI ports to a UNI port, Sink VLAN ID must take any of the VLAN IDs that have been configured for UNI ports.

QoS (PW)
Parameter PW ID Direction Value Range Default Value Description This parameter displays the ID of a PW. l This parameter displays the direction of a PW. l Egress: indicates the egress direction of a PW. l Ingress: indicates the ingress direction of a PW. PW Type This parameter displays the type of a PW.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

535

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Bandwidth Limit

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description This parameter displays or specifies whether the bandwidth limit function is enabled for a PW to prevent network congestion. l For transmission channels, the bandwidth limit function controls the bandwidth of one or more PWs as required. l For services, the bandwidth limit function controls the bandwidth of each ETH PWE3 service in an MPLS tunnel, because an ETH PWE3 service corresponds to a PW.

Policy CIR(Kbit/s)

-

-

Setting this parameter is not available. This parameter displays or specifies the committed information rate (CIR) for a PW. The CIR is recommended to be the same as the PIR.

CBS(Kbit/s)

-

-

This parameter displays or specifies the committed burst size (CBS) for a PW. This parameter displays or specifies the peak information rate (PIR) for a PW. The PIR is recommended to be the same as the CIR.

PIR(Kbit/s)

-

-

PBS(Kbit/s)

-

-

This parameter displays or specifies the peak burst size (PBS) for a PW. Setting this parameter is not available.

EXP

-

-

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

536

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter LSP Mode

Value Range Pipe

Default Value Pipe

Description Pipe: When an egress node strips off the MPLS tunnel labels in the received service packets, it does not renew the packet scheduling priorities.

A.6.1.8 Parameter Description: E-AGGR Services
This topic describes E-AGGR service parameters.

Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-AGGR Service from the Function Tree.

Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Service ID Value Range 1 to 4294967294 Default Value Description This parameter specifies the ID of an E-AGGR service. This parameter specifies the name of an E-AGGR service. Setting this parameter is not available. Setting this parameter is not available. OptiX RTN 910. This parameter displays whether an E-AGGR service has been deployed.

Service Name

-

-

MTU(byte) Service Tag Role

-

-

Deployment Status

-

-

UNI Parameters
Parameter ID Value Range Default Value Description This parameter displays the ID of a UNI port.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

537

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Location

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description This parameter displays whether a port functions as a service source or sink. This parameter displays UNI ports. This parameter displays the VLAN ID of a UNI port. Setting this parameter is not available.

Port VLANs

-

-

Priority

-

-

NNI (PW) Parameters
Table A-10 Basic attributes Parameter ID Location Value Range Default Value Description This parameter displays the ID of an NNI port. This parameter displays whether a port functions as a service source or sink. This parameter displays the ID of a PW. This parameter displays whether a PW is enabled. This parameter displays the signaling type of a PW. This parameter displays the type of a PW. This parameter displays the direction of a PW. This parameter displays the encapsulation type of a PW. This parameter displays the ingress label of a PW. This parameter displays the egress label of a PW.
538

PW ID PW Status PW Signaling Type

-

-

PW Type PW Direction PW Encapsulation Type

-

-

PW Incoming Label PW Outgoing Label

-

-

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Peer LSR ID

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description This parameter displays the LSR ID for the NE at the opposite end of a PW. This parameter displays the type of a tunnel. This parameter displays the tunnel carrying PWs. Select an existing static MPLS tunnel. If there is no static MPLS tunnel available, PW creation will fail. This parameter displays whether the control word is used. This parameter displays the control channel type. This parameter displays the VCCV verification mode. This parameter displays the PW running status at the local end. This parameter displays the PW running status at the opposite end. This parameter displays the overall PW running status. This parameter displays the request VLAN ID. This parameter displays the automatic tunnel selection policy. The OptiX RTN 910 does not allow TPIDs in request VLANs to be specified for a PW.

Tunnel Type Tunnel

-

-

Control Word

-

-

Control Channel Type VCCV Verification Mode Local Operation Status

-

-

-

-

Local Operation Status

-

-

Overall Operation Status Request VLAN Automatic Tunnel Selection Policy TPID

-

-

-

-

-

-

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

539

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameters for a VLAN Forwarding Table
Parameter Source Interface Type Value Range V-UNI Default Value V-UNI Description This parameter specifies the network attribute for a source port. This parameter specifies a source port. This parameter specifies the source VLAN ID. This parameter specifies the network attribute for the sink port. This parameter specifies the sink port. This parameter specifies the sink VLAN ID.

Source Interface Source VLAN ID Sink Interface Type

1 to 4094 V-UNI

V-UNI

Sink Interface Sink VLAN ID

1 to 4094

-

NOTE

l Regardless of whether VLAN ID swapping is required by an E-AGGR service, a VLAN forwarding table needs to be configured, specifying the source and sink VLAN IDs of each VLAN-based service. l A VLAN forwarding table enables VLAN ID swapping for an E-AGGR service. After a VLAN forwarding table is created, a service from Source Interface will carry the VLAN ID specified in Sink VLAN ID when leaving Sink Interface. l For an E-AGGR service, the VLAN forwarding table specifies bidirectional VLAN ID swapping relationships. This means that swapping from Sink VLAN ID to Source VLAN ID and swapping from Source VLAN ID to Sink VLAN ID will be implemented once a VLAN forwarding entry for changing Source VLAN ID to Sink VLAN ID is configured. l For service aggregation from UNI ports to an NNI port, Source VLAN ID must take any of the VLAN IDs that have been configured for UNI ports. l For service aggregation from NNI ports to a UNI port, Sink VLAN ID must take any of the VLAN IDs that have been configured for UNI ports.

QoS (PW)
Parameter PW ID Value Range Default Value Description This parameter displays the ID of a PW.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

540

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Direction

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description l This parameter displays the direction of a PW. l Egress: indicates the egress direction of a PW. l Ingress: indicates the ingress direction of a PW.

PW Type Bandwidth Limit

-

-

This parameter displays the type of a PW. This parameter displays or specifies whether the bandwidth limit function is enabled for a PW to prevent network congestion. l For transmission channels, the bandwidth limit function controls the bandwidth of one or more PWs as required. l For services, the bandwidth limit function controls the bandwidth of each ETH PWE3 service in an MPLS tunnel, because an ETH PWE3 service corresponds to a PW.

Policy CIR(Kbit/s)

-

-

Setting this parameter is not available. This parameter displays or specifies the committed information rate (CIR) for a PW. The CIR is recommended to be the same as the PIR.

CBS(Kbit/s)

-

-

This parameter displays or specifies the committed burst size (CBS) for a PW.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

541

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter PIR(Kbit/s)

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description This parameter displays or specifies the peak information rate (PIR) for a PW. The PIR is recommended to be the same as the CIR.

PBS(Kbit/s)

-

-

This parameter displays or specifies the peak burst size (PBS) for a PW. Setting this parameter is not available. Pipe: When an egress node strips off the MPLS tunnel labels in the received service packets, it does not renew the packet scheduling priorities.

EXP LSP Mode

Pipe

Pipe

A.6.2 Parameters for Ethernet Protocols
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet protocol.

A.6.2.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating ERPS management tasks.

Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Protection > ERPS Management. Click New.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

542

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameters
Parameter ERPS ID Value Range 1 to 8 Default Value Description l This parameter specifies the ID of the Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS) instance. l The IDs of ERPS instances on an NE must be different from each other. East Port This parameter specifies the east port of the ERPS instance. This parameter specifies the west port of the ERPS instance. l This parameter specifies whether the node on the ring is the ring protection link (RPL) owner. l Only one node on the ring can be set as the RPL owner for each Ethernet ring. l An RPL owner needs to balance the traffic on each link of an Ethernet ring. Therefore, it is not recommended that you select a convergence node as an RPL owner. Instead, select the NE that is farthest away from the convergence node as an RPL owner.

West Port

-

-

RPL Owner Ring Node Flag

Yes No

No

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

543

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter RPL Port

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description l This parameter specifies the RPL port. l There is only one RPL port and this RPL port must be the east or west port on the RPL owner node. l It is recommended that you set the east port on an RPL owner as an RPL Port.

Control VLAN

1 to 4094

-

l This parameter specifies the VLAN ID of Control VLAN. l Each node on the Ethernet ring transmits the R-APS packets on the dedicated ring APS (R-APS) channel to ensure consistency between the nodes when the ERPS switching is performed. Control VLAN is used for isolating the dedicated R-APS channel. Therefore, the VLAN ID in Control VLAN cannot be duplicate with the VLAN IDs that are contained in the service packets. l The ID of a Control VLAN must not be the same as any VLAN ID used by Ethernet services. All ring nodes should use the same Control VLAN ID.

Destination Node

01-19-A7-00-00-01

01-19-A7-00-00-01

This parameter indicates the MAC address of the destination node. The default destination MAC address in the R-APS packets is always 01-19A7-00-00-01.
544

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

A.6.2.2 Parameter Description: ERPS Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS) management.

Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Protection > ERPS Management from the Function Tree.

Parameters
Parameter ERPS ID Value Range 1 to 8 Default Value Description This parameter indicates the ID of the ERPS instance. This parameter indicates the east port of the ERPS instance. This parameter indicates the west port of the ERPS instance. This parameter indicates whether a node on the ring is the ring protection link (RPL) owner. This parameter indicates the RPL port.

East Port

-

-

West Port

-

-

RPL Owner Ring Node Flag

Yes No

-

RPL Port

-

-

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

545

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Control VLAN

Value Range 1 to 4094

Default Value -

Description l This parameter indicates or specifies the VLAN ID of Control VLAN. l Each node on the Ethernet ring transmits the R-APS packets on the dedicated ring APS (R-APS) channel to ensure consistency between the nodes when the ERPS switching is performed. Control VLAN is used for isolating the dedicated R-APS channel. Therefore, the VLAN ID in Control VLAN cannot be duplicate with the VLAN IDs that are contained in the service packets or inband DCN packets. l The Control VLAN must be set to the same value for all the NEs on an ERPS ring.

Destination Node

01-19-A7-00-00-01

-

This parameter indicates the MAC address of the destination node. The default destination MAC address in the R-APS packets is always 01-19A7-00-00-01.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

546

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Hold-Off Time(ms)

Value Range 0 to 10000, in step of 100

Default Value 0

Description l This parameter indicates or specifies the hold-off time of the ERPS hold-off timer. l The hold-off timer is used for negotiating the protection switching sequence when the ERPS coexists with other protection schemes so that the fault can be rectified in the case of other protection switching (such as LAG protection) before the ERPS occurs. When a node on the ring detects one or more new faults, it starts up the hold-off timer if the preset hold-off time is set to a value that is not 0. During the hold-off time, the fault is not reported to trigger an ERPS. When the holdoff timer times out, the node checks the link status regardless whether the fault that triggers the startup of the timer exists. If the fault exists, the node reports it to trigger an ERPS. This fault can be the same as or different from the fault that triggers the initial startup of the hold-off timer.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

547

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Guard Time(ms)

Value Range 10 to 2000, in step of 10

Default Value 500

Description l This parameter indicates or specifies the guard time of the ERPS guard timer. l The nodes on the ring continuously forward the R-APS packets to the Ethernet ring. As a result, the outdated RAPS packets may exist on the ring network. After a node on the ring receives the outdated R-APS packets, an incorrect ERPS may occur. The ERPS guard timer is an R-APS timer used for preventing a node on the ring from receiving outdated R-APS packets. When a faulty node on the ring detects that the switching condition is cleared, the node starts up the guard timer and starts to forward the RAPS (NR) packets. During this period, the R-APS packets received by the node are discarded. The received R-APS packets are forwarded only after the time of the guard timer expires.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

548

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter WTR Time(mm:ss)

Value Range 5 to 12, in step of 1

Default Value 5

Description l This parameter indicates or specifies the WTR time of the WRT timer in the case of ERPS protection. l The WTR time refers to the duration from the time when the working channel is restored to the time when the switching is released. When the working channel is restored, the WTR timer of the RPL owner starts up. In addition, a signal that indicates the operation of the WTR timer is continuously output in the timing process. When the WTR timer times out and no switching request of a higher priority is received, the signal indicating the operation of the WTR timer is not transmitted. In addition, the WTR release signal is continuously output. l The WTR timer is used to prevent frequent switching caused by the unstable working channel.

Packet Transmit Interval(s)

1 to 10

5

This parameter displays or specifies the interval for sending R-APS packets periodically. This parameter indicates or specifies the level of the maintenance entity. This parameter indicates the last switching request.

Entity Level

0 to 7

4

Last Switching Request

-

-

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

549

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter RB Status

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description This parameter indicates the RB (RPL Blocked) status of the packets received by the working node. l noRB: The RPL is not blocked. l RB: The RPL is blocked.

DNF Status

-

-

This parameter indicates the DNF status of the packets received by the working node. l noDNF: The R-APS packets do not contain the DNF flag. In this case, the packets are forwarded by the node that detects the fault on a non-RPL link, and the node that receives the packets is requested to clear the forwarding address table. l DNF: The R-APS packets contain the DNF flags. In this case, the packets are forwarded by the node that detects the fault on an RPL link, and the node that receives the packets is informed not to clear the forwarding address table.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

550

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter State Machine Status

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description This parameter indicates the status of the state machine at the working node. l Idle: The Ethernet ring is in normal state. For example, no node on the Ethernet ring detects any faults or receives the R_APS (NR, RB) packets. l Protection: The Ethernet ring is in protected state. For example, a fault on the node triggers the ERPS, or a node on the ring is in the WTR period after the fault is rectified.

Node Carried with Current Packet

-

-

This parameter indicates the MAC address carried in the R-APS packets received by the current node. The MAC address refers to the MAC address of the source node that initiates the switching request. Displays the status of the east port. Displays the status of the west port.

East Port Status West Port Status

-

-

A.6.2.3 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating MSTP port groups.

Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the Port Group Parameters tab. Click Create.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

551

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Protocol Type Value Range MSTP STP Default Value MSTP Description This parameter specifies the protocol type. l MSTP: stands for Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol. The OptiX RTN 910 supports the CIST MSTP only. l STP: stands for Spanning Tree Protocol. Enable Protocol Enabled Disabled Disabled l This parameter specifies whether to enable the protocol of the port group or a member port in the port group. l If the STP or MSTP is enabled, the spanning tree topology is automatically reconfigured. As a result, the services are interrupted.

Parameters for Application Ports
Parameter Board Value Range Default Value Description This parameter specifies the board where the member of port group is located. This parameter indicates the available port list in which a port can be added to the port group. This parameter indicates the selected ports that can be added to the port group.

Available Port List

-

-

Selected Port List

-

-

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

552

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

A.6.2.4 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Configuration
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating MSTP port groups.

Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. 4. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the Port Group Parameters tab. On the main interface, select the port group to be configured. Click Config. The Config Port Group dialog box is displayed.

Parameters for the Added Port
Parameter Board Value Range Default Value Description This parameter specifies the board where the member of port group is located. This parameter indicates the available port list in which a port needs to be added to the port group. This parameter indicates the selected ports that need to be added to the port group.

Available Port List

-

-

Selected Port List

-

-

A.6.2.5 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_ Bridge Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to MSTP bridges.

Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the Bridge Parameters tab.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

553

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Port Group ID Value Range Default Value Description l This parameter indicates the ID of the port group. l This parameter can be set to only the port group ID that is automatically allocated. MST Domain Name The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter.

Redaction Level

-

-

Mapping List

-

-

Bridge Parameters
Parameter Port Group ID Value Range Default Value Description l This parameter indicates the ID of the port group. l This parameter can be set to only the port Group ID that is automatically allocated. MST Domain Max Hop Count 20 Specifies the maximum hop count of the MSTP.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

554

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Network Diameter

Value Range 2 to 7

Default Value 7

Description l This parameter specifies the MSTP network diameter. l Network Diameter is related to the link whose number of switches is the most and is indicated by the number of switches that are connected to the link. When you set Network Diameter for the switches, the MSTP automatically sets Max Age(s), Hello Time(s), and Forward Delay(s) to the more appropriate values for the switches. l If the value of Network Diameter is greater, the network is in a larger scale.

Hello Time(s)

1 to 10

2

l This parameter specifies the interval for transmitting the CBPDU packets through the bridge. l The greater the value of this parameter, the less the network resources that are occupied by the spanning tree. The topology stability, however, decreases.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

555

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Max Age(s)

Value Range 6 to 40

Default Value 20

Description l This parameter specifies the maximum age of the CBPDU packet that is recorded by the port. l The greater the value, the longer the transmission distance of the CBPDU, which indicates that the network diameter is greater. When the value of this parameter is greater, it is less possible that the bridge detects the link fault in a timely manner and thus the network adaptation ability is reduced.

Forward Delay(s)

4 to 30

15

l This parameter specifies the holdoff time of a port in the listening state and in the learning state. l The greater the value, the longer the delay of the network state change. Hence, the topology changes are slower and the recovery in the case of faults is slower.

Port Parameters
Parameter Port Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the port in the port group.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

556

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Enable Edge Attribute

Value Range Disabled Enabled

Default Value Disabled

Description l This parameter specifies the management edge attributes of the port. l This parameter specifies whether to set the port as an edge port. The edge port refers to the bridge port that is connected to the LAN. In normal cases, this port does not receive or transmit BPDU messages. l This parameter can be set to Enabled only when the port is directly connected to the data communications terminal equipment, such as a computer. In other cases, it is recommended that you use the default value.

Actual Edge Attribute

-

-

This parameter indicates the actual management edge attributes of the port.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

557

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Point-to-Point Attribute

Value Range false true auto

Default Value auto

Description l This parameter specifies the point-topoint attribute of the port. l false: forced nonpoint-to-point link attribute l true: forced point-topoint link attribute l auto: automatically detected point-topoint link attribute l If this parameter is set to auto, the bridge determines Actual Point-to-Point Attribute of the port according to the actual working mode. If the actual working mode is full-duplex, the actual point-to-point attribute is true. If the actual working mode is half-duplex, Actual Point-to-Point Attribute is false. l Only the designated port whose Actual Point-to-Point Attribute is "True" can transmit the rapid state migration request and response. l It is recommended that you use the default value.

Actual Point-to-Point Attribute

-

-

This parameter indicates the actual point-to-point attribute of the port.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

558

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Max Transmit Packet Count

Value Range 1 to 255

Default Value 3

Description l This parameter specifies the maximum number of packets to be transmitted. l The maximum number of packets to be transmitted by the port refers to the maximum number of MSTP packets that the port can transmit within 1s. l This parameter needs to be set according to the planning information.

A.6.2.6 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_CIST Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the MSTP CIST.

Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the CIST&MSTI Parameters tab.

Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Port Group MSTI ID Value Range 0 Default Value 0 Description This parameter specifies the port group. This parameter indicates the MSTI ID. The value 0 indicates common and internal spanning tree (CIST). The OptiX RTN 910 supports only the MSTP that uses CIST.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

559

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Bridge Priority

Value Range 0 to 61440, in step of 4096

Default Value 32768

Description l The most significant 16 bits of the bridge ID indicate the priority of the bridge. l When the value is smaller, the priority is higher. As a result, the bridge is more possible to be selected as the root bridge. l If the priorities of all the bridges in the STP/ MSTP network use the same value, the bridge whose MAC address is the smallest is selected as the root bridge.

Port Parameters
Parameter Port Priority Value Range 0 to 240, in step of 16 Default Value 128 Description This parameter indicates the port in the port group. l The most significant eight bits of the port ID indicate the port priority. l When the value is smaller, the priority is higher. Path Cost 1 to 200000000 FE Port: 200000 GE Port: 20000 l This parameter indicates the status of the network that the port is connected to. l In the case of the bridges on both ends of the path, set this parameter to the same value.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

560

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

A.6.2.7 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Running Information About the CIST
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the running information about the MSTP CIST.

Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree. Click the CIST Running Information tab.

Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Port Group ID Protocol Running Mode Value Range MSTP STP Default Value Description This parameter indicates the ID of the port group. l This parameter indicates the running mode of the protocol. l MSTP: stands for Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol. The OptiX RTN 910 supports only the CIST-based MSTP. l STP: stands for Spanning Tree Protocol.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

561

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Bridge Priority

Value Range 0 to 61440, in step of 4096

Default Value 32768

Description l This parameter indicates the priority of the bridge. l The most significant 16 bits of the bridge ID indicate the priority of the bridge. l When the value is smaller, the priority is higher. As a result, the bridge is more possible to be selected as the root bridge. l If the priorities of all the bridges in the STP network use the same value, the bridge whose MAC address is the smallest is selected as the root bridge.

Bridge MAC Address

-

-

This parameter indicates the MAC address of the bridge. This parameter indicates the priority of the root bridge. This parameter indicates the MAC address of the root bridge. The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter.

Root Bridge Priority

0 to 61440, in step of 4096

32768

Root Bridge MAC Address External Path Cost ERPC Domain Root Bridge Priority Domain Root Bridge MAC Address Internal Path Cost IRPC

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

562

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Root Port Priority

Value Range 0 to 240, in step of 16

Default Value 128

Description l This parameter indicates the priority of the root port. l The most significant eight bits of the ID of the root port indicate the priority of the root port. l When the value is smaller, the priority is higher.

Root Port Hello Time(s)

-

2

This parameter indicates the root port. l This parameter indicates the interval for transmitting CBPDU packets through the bridge. l The greater the value of this parameter, the less the network resources that are occupied by the spanning tree. The topology stability, however, decreases.

Max Age(s)

6 to 40

20

l This parameter specifies the maximum age of the CBPDU packet that is recorded by the port. l The greater the value, the longer the transmission distance of the CBPDU, which indicates that the network diameter is greater. When the value of this parameter is greater, it is less possible that the bridge detects the link fault in a timely manner and thus the network adaptation ability is reduced.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

563

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Forward Delay(s)

Value Range 4 to 30

Default Value 15

Description l This parameter specifies the holdoff time of a port in the listening state and in the learning state. l The greater the value, the longer the delay of the network state change. Hence, the topology changes are slower and the recovery in the case of faults is slower.

MST Domain Max Hop Count Topology Change Count

-

-

This parameter indicates the maximum hop count of the MSTP. This parameter indicates the identifier of the topology change. This parameter indicates the duration of the last topology change. This parameter indicates the count of the topology changes.

-

-

Last Topology Change Time(s) Topology Change Count

-

-

-

-

Port Parameters
Parameter Port Enable Protocol Value Range Enabled Disabled Default Value Disabled Description This parameter indicates the port in the port group. This parameter indicates whether the protocol of the port group or a member of the port group is enabled. This parameter indicates the role of a port.

Port Role

-

Disabled

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

564

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Port Status

Value Range Discarding Learning Forwarding

Default Value Discarding

Description This parameter indicates the state of a port. l Discarding: receives only BPDU packets l Learning: only receives or transmits BPDU packets l Forwarding: forwards user traffic, and transmits/receives BPDU packets

Priority

0 to 240, in step of 16

128

l The most significant eight bits of the port ID indicate the port priority. l When the value is smaller, the priority is higher.

Path Cost

1 to 200000000

200000

l This parameter indicates the status of the network that the port is connected to. l In the case of the bridges on both ends of the path, set this parameter to the same value.

Bridge Priority

0 to 61440, in step of 4096

32768

l The most significant 16 bits of the bridge ID indicate the priority of the bridge. l When the value is smaller, the priority is higher. As a result, the bridge is more possible to be selected as the root bridge. l If the priorities of all the bridges in the STP network use the same value, the bridge whose MAC address is the smallest is selected as the root bridge.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

565

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Bridge MAC Address

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description This parameter indicates the MAC address of the bridge. l The most significant eight bits of the port ID indicate the port priority. l When the value is smaller, the priority is higher.

Designated Port Priority

0 to 240, in step of 16

0

Design Port Edge Port Attribute

Disabled Enabled

0 Disabled

This parameter indicates the designated port. l This parameter specifies the management edge attributes of the port. l This parameter specifies whether to set the port as an edge port. The edge port refers to the bridge port that is connected to the LAN. In normal cases, this port does not receive or transmit BPDU messages. l This parameter can be set to Enabled only when the port is directly connected to the data communications terminal equipment, such as a computer. In other cases, it is recommended that you use the default value.

Actual Edge Port Attribute

-

Disabled

This parameter indicates the actual management edge attributes of the port.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

566

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Point to Point

Value Range false true auto

Default Value auto

Description l This parameter specifies the point-topoint attribute of the port. l false: forced nonpoint-to-point link attribute l true: forced point-topoint link attribute l auto: automatically detected point-topoint link attribute l If this parameter is set to auto, the bridge determines Actual Point to Point Attribute of the port according to the actual working mode. If the actual working mode is full-duplex, the actual point-to-point attribute is true. If the actual working mode is half-duplex, Actual Point to Point Attribute is false. l Only the designated port whose Actual Point-to-Point Attribute is "True" can transmit the rapid state migration request and response. l It is recommended that you use the default value.

Actual Point to Point

-

-

This parameter indicates the actual point-to-point attribute of the port.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

567

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Max Count of Transmitting Message

Value Range 1 to 255

Default Value 3

Description l This parameter indicates the maximum number of packets to be transmitted. l The maximum number of packets to be transmitted by the port refers to the maximum number of MSTP packets that the port can transmit within 1s.

Protocol Running Mode

STP MSTP

-

l This parameter indicates the running mode of the protocol. l MSTP: stands for Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol. The OptiX RTN 910 supports only the CIST-based MSTP. l STP: stands for Spanning Tree Protocol.

Hello Time(s)

1 to 10

2

l This parameter indicates the interval for transmitting the CBPDU packets through the bridge. l The greater the value of this parameter, the less the network resources that are occupied by the spanning tree. The topology stability, however, decreases.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

568

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Max Age(s)

Value Range 6 to 40

Default Value 20

Description l This parameter specifies the maximum age of the CBPDU packet that is recorded by the port. l The greater the value, the longer the transmission distance of the CBPDU, which indicates that the network diameter is greater. When the value of this parameter is greater, it is less possible that the bridge detects the link fault in a timely manner and thus the network adaptation ability is reduced.

Forward Delay(s)

4 to 30

15

l This parameter specifies the holding time of a port in the listening state and in the learning state. l The greater the value, the longer the delay of the network state change. Hence, the topology changes are slower and the recovery in the case of faults is slower.

Remain Hop

-

-

The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter.

A.6.2.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation Management_LAG Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a link aggregation group (LAG).

Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Link Aggregation Group Management from the Function Tree.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 569

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

2. 3.

Click the Link Aggregation Group Management tab. Click New.

Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter LAG No. Value Range Default Value 1 Description l This parameter specifies the LAG number to be set manually. l This parameter is valid only when Automatically Assign is not selected. Automatically Assign Selected Deselected Selected l This parameter indicates whether LAG No. is allocated automatically. l When Automatically Assign is selected, LAG No. cannot be set. LAG Name This parameter specifies the LAG name.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

570

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter LAG Type

Value Range Static Manual

Default Value Static

Description l Static: You can create a LAG. When you add or delete a member port to or from the LAG, the Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) protocol is required. In a LAG, a port can be in selected, standby, or unselected state. The aggregation information is exchanged among different equipment through the LACP protocol to ensure that the aggregation information is the same among all the nodes. l Manual: You can create a LAG. When you add or delete a member port, the LACP protocol is not required. The port can be in the up or down state. The system determines whether to aggregate a port according to its physical state (UP or DOWN), working mode, and rate.

Switch Protocol

-

-

The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter. The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this parameter.

Switch Mode

-

-

Link Trace Protocol

-

-

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

571

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Revertive Mode

Value Range Revertive Mode Non-Revertive Mode

Default Value Non-Revertive Mode

Description l Revertive Mode can be set only when Load Sharing is set to NonSharing. l When Revertive Mode is set to Revertive Mode, the services are switched back to the former working channel after this channel is restored to normal. l When Revertive Mode is set to NonRevertive Mode, the status of the LAG does not change after the former working channel is restored to normal. That is, the services are still transmitted on the protection channel.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

572

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Load Sharing

Value Range Sharing Non-Sharing

Default Value Non-Sharing

Description l Set Load Sharing to the same value as the peer equipment. It is recommended that you set Load Sharing to Non-Sharing at both ends if the LAGs are used for protection and set Load Sharing to Sharing at both ends if the LAGs are used for increasing bandwidths. l Sharing: Each member link of a LAG processes traffic at the same time and shares the traffic load. The sharing mode can increase a bandwidth utilization for the link. When the LAG members change, or certain links fail, the system automatically re-allocates the traffic. l Non-Sharing: Only one member link of a LAG carries traffic, and the other link is in the standby state. In this case, a hot backup mechanism is provided. When the active link of a LAG is faulty, the system activates the standby link, thus preventing link failure.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

573

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Load Sharing Hash Algorithm

Value Range Source MAC Destination MAC Source and Destination MAC Source IP Destination IP Source and Destination IP MPLS Label

Default Value Source MAC

Description l This parameter is valid only when Load Sharing of a LAG is set to Sharing. l The load sharing computation methods include computation based on MAC addresses (based on the source MAC address, based on the destination MAC address, and based on the source MAC address + sink MAC address), computation based on IP addresses (based on the source IP address, based on the destination IP address, and based on the source IP address and sink IP address), and computation based on MPLS labels. l After the configuration data is deployed, Load Sharing Hash Algorithm takes effect for the entire NE. l For PW-carried UNINNI E-Line services, Load Sharing Hash Algorithm cannot be set to MPLS Label.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

574

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter System Priority

Value Range 0 to 65535

Default Value 32768

Description l System Priority indicates the priority of a LAG. The smaller the value of System Priority, the higher the priority. l When a local LAG negotiates with an opposite LAG through LACP packets, both LAGs can obtain the system priorities of each other. Then, the LAG of the higher system priority is considered as the comparison result of both LAGs so that the aggregation information is consistent at both LAGs. If the priorities of both LAGs are the same, the system MAC addresses are compared. Then, the comparison result based on the LAG with smaller system MAC address is considered as the result of both LAGs and is used to ensure that the aggregation information is consistent at both LAGs.

WTR Time(min)

1 to 30

10

l Specifies the WTR time for the LAG. l WTR Time(min) takes effect only when Revertive Mode is Revertive Mode.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

575

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Switch LAG upon Air Interface SD

Value Range Disabled Enabled

Default Value Enabled

Description l This parameter specifies whether to enable the switching triggered by bit errors. l If Switch LAG upon Air Interface SD is set to Enabled, the MW_BER_SD alarm will trigger the LAG switching at the air interface.

Port Settings Parameters
Parameter Main Board Value Range Default Value Description l This parameter specifies the main board in a LAG. l This parameter is set according to the planning information. Main Port l This parameter specifies the main port in a LAG. l After a LAG is created, you can add Ethernet services to the main port only. Services cannot be added to a slave port. When Load Sharing is set to NonSharing, the link connected to the main port is used to transmit the services, and the link connected to the slave port is used for protection. Board (Available Slave Ports) l This parameter specifies the slave board in a LAG. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

576

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Port (Available Slave Ports)

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description l This parameter specifies the salve port in a LAG. l The slave ports in a LAG are fixed. Unless they are manually modified, the system does not automatically add them to or delete them from the LAG.

Selected Standby Ports

-

-

This parameter indicates the selected slave ports.

A.6.2.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Link Aggregation
This section describes the parameters for port priorities and system priorities.

Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface Management > Link Aggregation Group Management from the Function Tree. Click the Port Priority tab.

Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Port Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the port whose priority can be set. l This parameter indicates the priorities of the ports in a LAG as defined in the LACP protocol. The smaller the value, the higher the priority. l When ports are added into a LAG, the port of the highest priority is preferred for service transmission.

Port Priority

0 to 65535

32768

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

577

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

A.6.2.10 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Point-to-Point LPT
This topic describes the parameters that are related to point-to-point LPT.

Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > LPT Management > LPT from the Function Tree. Click the Point-to-Point LPT tab.

Parameters on the main interface
Parameter Binding Status Value Range Default Value Description This parameter displays the binding status of pointto-point services. This parameter displays the port where the primary point of point-to-point LPT resides. This parameter displays the type of secondary point for point-to-point LPT. This parameter displays the port where the secondary point of pointto-point LPT resides. This parameter displays the status of point-to-point LPT. This parameter displays or specifies the enabling status of point-to-point LPT. The LPT function can take effect only when LPT Enabled is set to Enabled. Recovery Times(s) 1-600 1 This parameter displays or specifies the recovery time of point-to-point LPT. This parameter displays or specifies the hold-off time of point-to-point LPT.

Primary Function Point

-

-

Secondary Function Point Type

-

-

Secondary Function Point

-

-

LPT Instance Status

-

-

LPT Enabled

Enabled Disabled

Disabled

Hold-Off Times(ms)

0-10000

1000

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

578

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Switching Mode

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description This parameter displays the switching mode of point-to-point LPT. Pointto-point LPT is available only in strict mode. This parameter displays the fault detection mode of point-to-multipoint LPT. l LPT-enabled NEs periodically transmit LPT OAM packets in specific formats to check the status of an L2 service network or QinQ service network. If the LPT OAM packets are absent for 3.5 fault detection periods or the number and contents of received LPT OAM packets are incorrect, the NEs consider that a network-side fault occurred and the LPT switching is triggered. l To detect a networkside fault on a PSN, LPT OAM or PW OAM packets can be used. Note that the PW OAM function must be enabled on NEs before usage of PW OAM packets.

Fault Detection Mode

PW OAM LPT OAM

LPT OAM

Fault Detection Period (100ms)

10-100

10

This parameter displays or specifies the fault detection period of pointto-point LPT. This parameter displays the status of a user-side port. This parameter displays the NET IDs of LPT packet out ports at both ends.

User-Side Port Status

-

-

L2 net ID-L2 Peer net ID

-

-

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

579

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

A.6.2.11 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creating Point-to-Point LPT
This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating point-to-point LPT.

Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. 4. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > LPT Management > LPT from the Function Tree. Click the Point-to-Point LPT tab. Click Bind in the lower right corner of the pane based on the type of service network. Choose PW+QinQ or L2 net from the shortcut menu based on the type of service network.

Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter L2 net ID Value Range 1-4294967295 Default Value Description This parameter specifies the NET ID of LPT packet out port at the local end. This parameter specifies the NET ID of LPT packet out port at the opposite end. This parameter specifies the port where the primary point of point-to-point LPT resides. This parameter specifies the VLAN ID that is carried by a point-to-point LPT packet to traverse an L2 network. This parameter specifies the out port of a point-topoint LPT packet.

L2 Peer net ID

1-4294967295

-

Primary Function Point

-

-

VLAN ID

1-4094

-

LPT package out port

-

-

A.6.2.12 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Point-to-Multipoint LPT
This topic describes the parameters that are related to point-to-multipoint LPT.

Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > LPT Management > LPT from the Function Tree. Click the Point-to-Multipoint LPT tab.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

580

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameters of Primary Point
Parameter Primary Function Point Type Value Range Default Value Description This parameter displays the type of primary point for point-to-multipoint LPT. This parameter displays the port where the primary point of point-tomultipoint LPT resides. This parameter displays the status of point-tomultipoint LPT. This parameter displays the enabling status of point-to-multipoint LPT. This parameter displays or specifies the recovery time of point-to-multipoint LPT. This parameter displays or specifies the hold-off time of point-to-multipoint LPT. This parameter displays the switching mode of point-to-multipoint LPT. Point-to-point LPT is available only in strict mode. l Strict mode A primary point triggers LPT switching when all its secondary points detect faults. l Non-strict mode A primary point triggers LPT switching when anyone of its secondary points detects a fault.

Primary Function Point

-

-

LPT Instance Status

-

-

LPT Enabled

Enabled Disabled

Disabled

Recovery Times(s)

1-600

1

Hold-Off Times(ms)

0-10000

1000

Switching Mode

Strict mode Non-strict mode

Strict mode

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

581

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Fault Detection Mode

Value Range PW OAM LPT OAM

Default Value LPT OAM

Description This parameter displays the fault detection mode of point-to-multipoint LPT. l LPT-enabled NEs periodically transmit LPT OAM packets in specific formats to check the status of an L2 service network or QinQ service network. If the LPT OAM packets are absent for 3.5 fault detection periods or the number and contents of received LPT OAM packets are incorrect, the NEs consider that a network-side fault occurred and the LPT switching is triggered. l To detect a networkside fault on a PSN, LPT OAM or PW OAM packets can be used. Note that the PW OAM function must be enabled on NEs before usage of PW OAM packets.

Fault Detection Period (100ms)

10-100

10

This parameter displays or specifies the fault detection period of pointto-multipoint LPT. This parameter displays the status of a user-side port. This parameter displays the NET IDs of LPT packet out ports at both ends, when the service network is an L2 network.

User-Side Port Status

-

-

L2 net ID-L2 Peer net ID

-

-

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

582

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameters of Secondary Point
Parameter Access Point Type Value Range Default Value Description This parameter displays the type of second point for point-to-multipoint LPT. This parameter displays the port or PW ID for the secondary point of pointto-multipoint LPT. This parameter displays the status of a user-side port. This parameter displays the NET IDs of LPT packet out ports at both ends, when the service network is an L2 network.

Access Point

-

-

User-Side Port Status

-

-

L2 net ID-L2 Peer net ID

-

-

A.6.2.13 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creating Point-to-Multipoint LPT
This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating point-to-multipoint LPT.

Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. 4. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > LPT Management > LPT from the Function Tree. Click the Point-to-Multipoint LPT tab. Click New in the lower right corner of the pane based on the type of service network. Choose PW, QinQ, or L2 net from the shortcut menu based on the type of service network.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

583

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameters of primary point
Parameter Point Type Value Range UNI PW QinQ L2 net Default Value Description This parameter specifies the type of primary point for point-to-multipoint LPT. The value range of this parameter pertains to the type of service network. If the primary point is on the access side, select UNI; if the primary point is on the network side, set the parameter as follows. l If the service network is a PSN, select PW. l If the service network is a QinQ network, select QinQ. l If the service network is an L2 network, select L2 net. Board This parameter specifies the board where the primary point of point-tomultipoint LPT resides. This parameter is valid only when Point Type is set to UNI. Port This parameter specifies the port where the primary point of point-tomultipoint LPT resides. This parameter is valid only when Point Type is set to UNI. Point ID This parameter specifies the service ID for the primary point of point-tomultipoint LPT. This parameter is valid only when Point Type is set to PW or QinQ.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

584

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter L2 net ID

Value Range 1-4294967295

Default Value -

Description This parameter specifies the NET ID of a local NE. This parameter is valid only when Point Type of the primary point is set to UNI, and when Point Type of the secondary point is set to L2 net.

L2 Peer net ID

1-4294967295

-

This parameter specifies the NET ID of an opposite NE. This parameter is valid only when Point Type is set to L2 net.

VLAN ID

1-4094

-

This parameter specifies the VLAN ID that is carried by an LPT packet to traverse an L2 network. This parameter is valid only when Point Type is set to L2 net.

LPT package out port

-

-

This parameter specifies the out port of an LPT packet. This parameter is valid only when Point Type is set to L2 net.

Parameters of secondary point
Parameter Point Type Value Range UNI PW QinQ L2 net Default Value Description This parameter displays or specifies the type of secondary point for pointto-multipoint LPT.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

585

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Board

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description This parameter specifies the board where the secondary point of pointto-multipoint LPT resides. This parameter is valid only when Point Type is set to PW, QinQ, or L2 net.

Available Points

-

-

This parameter displays the available ports where the secondary point of point-to-multipoint LPT can reside. This parameter is valid only when Point Type is set to PW, QinQ, or L2 net.

Selected Points

-

-

This parameter displays the selected port where the secondary point of pointto-multipoint LPT resides. This parameter is valid only when Point Type is set to PW, QinQ, or L2 net.

L2 net ID

1-4294967295

-

This parameter specifies the NET ID of a local NE. This parameter is valid only when Point Type is set to UNI.

L2 Peer net ID

1-4294967295

-

This parameter specifies the NET ID of an opposite NE. This parameter is valid only when Point Type of the primary point is set to UNI, and when Point Type of the secondary point is set to L2 net.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

586

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter VLAN ID

Value Range 1-4094

Default Value -

Description This parameter specifies the VLAN ID that is carried by an LPT packet to traverse an L2 network. This parameter is valid only when Point Type of the primary point is set to UNI, and when Point Type of the secondary point is set to L2 net.

LPT Package out port

-

-

This parameter specifies the out port of an LPT packet. This parameter is valid only when Point Type of the primary point is set to UNI, and when Point Type of the secondary point is set to L2 net.

A.6.3 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet operation, administration and maintenance (OAM).

A.6.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Domain Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating maintenance domains.

Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree. Click the Maintenance Association tab. Choose New > New Maintenance Domain.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

587

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Maintenance Domain Name Value Range Default Value default Description l This parameter specifies the name of the maintenance domain. l The maintenance domain refers to the network for the Ethernet OAM. l This parameter can contain a maximum of eight bytes. Maintenance Domain Level 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 4 l Maintenance Domain Level specifies the level of the maintenance domain. l The values 0 to 7 indicates maintenance domain levels in an ascending order. l MEPs transparently transmit OAM protocol packets if the packets have a higher level than the parameter value. l MEPs discard OAM protocol packets if the packets have a lower level than the parameter value. l MEPs respond to or terminate OAM protocol packets based on the packet type if the packets have the same level as the parameter value.

A.6.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Association Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating maintenance associations.

Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree. Click the Maintenance Association tab. Select the maintenance domain in which a maintenance association needs to be created. Choose New > New Maintenance Association.

Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Maintenance Domain Name Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the maintenance domain of the created maintenance association.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

588

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Maintenance Association Name

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description l This parameter specifies the name of the maintenance association, which is a domain related to a service. Through maintenance association division, the connectivity check (CC) can be performed on the network that transmits a service instance. l This parameter can contain a maximum of eight bytes.

Relevant Service

-

-

This parameter specifies the service instance that is related to the maintenance association. l This parameter specifies the interval for transmitting packets in the CC. l The CC is performed to check the availability of the service.

CC Test Transmit Period

1s 10s 1m 10m

1s

A.6.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MEP Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a maintenance association end point (MEP).

Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree. Click the Maintenance Association tab. Select the maintenance association in which an MEP needs to be created. Choose New > New MEP Point.

Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Maintenance Domain Name Maintenance Association Name Board Port Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the maintenance domain of the created MEP. This parameter indicates the maintenance association of the created MEP. This parameter specifies the board where the MEP is located. This parameter specifies the port where the MEP is located.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

589

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter VLAN MP ID

Value Range 1 to 2048

Default Value 1

Description This parameter indicates the VLAN ID of the current service. l This parameter specifies the MEP ID. l Each MEP needs to be configured with an MP ID, which is unique in the maintenance association. The MP ID is required in the OAM operation.

Direction

Ingress Egress

Ingress

l Direction specifies the direction of the MEP. l Ingress indicates the direction in which the packets are transmitted to the port, and Egress indicates the direction in which the packets are transmitted from the port.

CC Status

Active Inactive

Active

l This parameter specifies whether to enable the CC function of the MEP. l In the case of the tests based on the MP IDs, CC Status must be set to Active.

AIS Active Status

Active Inactive

Active

l This parameter specifies the AIS active status. l If several MDs exist on a link, to locate a fault accurately, set AIS Active Status to Active and Client Layer Level that functions to suppress the AIS information. l After a fault is detected by an MP, if this MP activates the AIS, it sends the AIS packet to a higher level MP, informing the higher level MP of the fault information; if this MP does not activate the AIS, it does not report the fault.

Client Layer Level

1 to 7

1

l Normally, if an MP is set to level n, Client Layer Level that functions to suppress the AIS information should be set to n+1. l Client Layer Level is valid only if AIS Active Status is Active.

A.6.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Remote MEP Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a remote MEP.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

590

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. 4. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree. Click the Maintenance Association tab. Choose OAM > Manage Remote MEP Point. The Manage Remote MEP Point dialog box is displayed. Click New.

Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Maintenance Domain Name Maintenance Association Name Remote Maintenance Point ID(e.g:1,3-6) Value Range 1 to 2048 Default Value Description This parameter indicates the maintenance domain of the MEP. This parameter indicates the maintenance association of the created MEP. l This parameter specifies the ID of the remote MEP. l If other MEPs will initiate OAM operations to an MEP in the same MA, set these MEPs as remote MEPs.

A.6.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MIP Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a maintenance association intermediate point (MIP).

Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree. Click the MIP Point tab. Select the maintenance domain in which an MIP needs to be created, and then click New.

Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Maintenance Domain Name Board Port Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the maintenance domain of the MIP. This parameter specifies the board where the MIP is located. This parameter specifies the port where the MIP is located.
591

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter MP ID

Value Range 1 to 2048

Default Value 1

Description l This parameter specifies the MIP ID. l Each MIP needs to be configured with an MP ID, which is unique in the maintenance domain. The MP ID is required in the OAM operation.
NOTE To create MEPs and MIPs in a service at a port, ensure that only one MIP can be created and the level of the MIP must be higher than the level of the MEP.

A.6.3.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LB Enabling
This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LB.

Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. 4. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree. Click the Maintenance Association tab. Select the maintenance domain and maintenance association for the LB test. Choose OAM > Start LB.

Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Destination Maintenance Point ID Destination Maintenance Point MAC Address Maintenance Domain Name Maintenance Association Name Source Maintenance Point ID Value Range Selected Deselected Selected Deselected Selected Default Value Deselected Description This parameter needs to be selected if the LB test is performed on the basis of Destination Maintenance Point IDs. This parameter needs to be selected if the LB test is performed on the basis of MAC addresses. This parameter indicates the name of the maintenance domain for the LB test. This parameter indicates the name of the maintenance association for the LB test. l This parameter specifies the source maintenance point in the LB test. l Only the MEP can be set to the source maintenance point.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

592

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Destination Maintenance Point ID

Value Range -

Default Value -

Description l This parameter specifies the destination maintenance point in the LB test. l Only the MEP ID can be set to the Destination Maintenance Point ID. l Destination Maintenance Point ID can be set only when MP ID is selected.

Destination Maintenance Point MAC Address

-

00-00-00-00-00-00

l This parameter specifies the MAC address of the port where the destination maintenance point is located in the LB test. l Only the MAC address of the MEP can be set to the MAC address of the Destination Maintenance Point MAC Address. l Destination Maintenance Point MAC Address can be set only when Sink Maintenance Point MAC Address.

Transmitted Packet Count

1 to 255

3

l This parameter specifies the number of packets transmitted each time in the LB test. l When the value is greater, the required duration is longer.

Transmitted Packet Length

64 to 1400

64

l This parameter specifies the length of a transmitted LBM packet. l If the packet length is different, the test result may be different. In normal cases, it is recommended that you use the default value.

Transmitted Packet Priority

0 to 7

7

l This parameter specifies the priority of transmitting packets. l 0 indicates the lowest priority, and 7 indicates the highest priority. In normal cases, this parameter is set to the highest priority.

Detection Result

-

-

This parameter indicates the relevant information and result of the LB test.

A.6.3.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LT Enabling
This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LT.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

593

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Navigation Path
1. 2. 3. 4. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree. Click the Maintenance Association tab. Select the maintenance domain and maintenance association for the LT test. Choose OAM > Start LT.

Test Node Parameters
Parameter Destination Maintenance Point ID Destination Maintenance Point MAC Address Maintenance Domain Name Maintenance Association Name Source Maintenance Point ID Value Range Selected Deselected Selected Deselected Selected Default Value Deselected Description This parameter needs to be selected if the LT test is performed on the basis of MP IDs. This parameter needs to be selected if the LT test is performed on the basis of MAC addresses. This parameter indicates the name of the maintenance domain for the LT test. This parameter indicates the name of the maintenance association for the LT test. l This parameter specifies the source maintenance point in the LT test. l Only the MEP can be set to the source maintenance point. l This parameter specifies the destination maintenance point in the LT test. l Only the MEP ID can be set to the Destination Maintenance Point ID. l Destination Maintenance Point ID can be set only when MP ID is selected. Destination Maintenance Point MAC Address 00-00-00-00-00-00 l This parameter specifies the MAC address of the port where the destination maintenance point is located in the LT test. l Only the MAC address of the MEP can be set to the MAC address of the Destination Maintenance Point MAC Address. l Destination Maintenance Point MAC Address can be set only when Sink Maintenance Point MAC Address.

Destination Maintenance Point ID

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

594

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameters for the Detection Result
Parameter Source Maintenance Point ID Destination Maintenance Point ID/MAC Response Maintenance Point ID/MAC Hop Count Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the source maintenance point in the LT test. This parameter indicates the MAC address of the port where the destination maintenance point is located in the LT test. This parameter indicates the MAC address of the port where the responding maintenance point is located in the LT test. l This parameter indicates the number of hops from the source maintenance point to the responding maintenance point or to the destination maintenance point in the LT test. l The number of hops indicates the adjacent relation between the responding maintenance point to the source maintenance point. The number of hops increases by one when a responding point occurs on the link from the source maintenance point to the destination maintenance point. Test Result This parameter indicates the result of the LT test.

-

-

-

-

1 to 64

-

A.6.3.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Enabling Service Loopback Detection
This topic describes the parameters for enabling E-LAN service loopback detection.

Navigation Path
1. 2. In the NE Explorer, select the desired NE and choose Configuration > Ethernet Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree. Click New.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

595

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameters for Enabling Service Loopback Detection
Parameter Vlans/CVLAN Value Range 1 to 4094 Default Value 1 to 4094 Description Vlans/CVLAN displays the VLAN ID of a loopback service. Loopback detection can be performed for only one service one time. Loopback detection stops if no loopback detection packets are received until Packet Timeout Period (s) expires. This parameter displays the loopback detection packet length. This parameter displays the intervals for transmitting different VLAN packets. Disable Service When Loopback is Detected displays whether a loopback service will be deactivated.

Packet Timeout Period (s)

3 to 10

3

Packet Length

-

-

VLAN Packet Sending Interval(s)

-

-

Disable Service When Loopback is Detected

No Yes

No

A.6.3.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Parameter
This topic describes the OAM parameters that are related to Ethernet ports.

Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Port OAM Management from the Function Tree. Click the OAM Parameter tab.

Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Port Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the corresponding port.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

596

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Enable OAM Protocol

Value Range Enabled Disabled

Default Value Disabled

Description l This parameter indicates or specifies whether to enable the OAM protocol. l After the OAM protocol is enabled, the current Ethernet port starts to use the preset mode to create the OAM connection with the opposite end.

OAM Working Mode

Active Passive

Active

l This parameter indicates or specifies the working mode of the OAM. l The port whose OAM working mode is set to Active can initiate the OAM connection. l The port whose OAM working mode is set to Passive can only wait for the opposite end to send the OAM connection request. l The OAM working mode of the equipment at only one end can be Passive.

Link Event Notification

Enabled Disabled

Enabled

l This parameter indicates or specifies whether the local link events can be notified to the opposite end. l If the alarms caused by link events can be reported, that is, if the number of performance events (for example, error frame period, error frame, error frame second, and error frame signal cycle) at the local end exceeds the preset threshold, these performance events are notified to the port at the opposite end through the link event notification function. l This parameter is set according to the planning information.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

597

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Remote Side Loopback Response

Value Range Disabled Enabled

Default Value Disabled

Description l This parameter indicates or specifies whether the port responds to the remote loopback. l Remote loopback indicates that the local OAM entity transmits packets to the remote OAM entity for loopback. The local OAM entity can locate the fault and test the link performance through loopback data analysis. l If a port does not support remote loopback response, this port does not respond to the loopback request from the remote port regardless of the OAM port status.

Loopback Status

Non-Loopback Initiate Loopback at Local Respond Loopback of Remote

-

This parameter indicates the loopback status at the local end.
NOTE Loopback Status is valid only after you choose OAM > Enable Remote Loopback.

OAM Discovery Status Port Transmit Status Port Receive Status

-

-

This parameter indicates the OAM discovery status at the local end. This parameter indicates the status of transmitting packets at the local end. This parameter indicates the status of receiving packets at the local end.

A.6.3.10 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Error Frame Monitoring
This topic describes the parameters that are used for monitoring the OAM error frames at the Ethernet port.

Navigation Path
1. 2. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet OAM Management > Ethernet Port OAM Management from the Function Tree. Click the OAM Error Frame Monitor tab.

Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Port Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the corresponding port.
598

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter Error Frame Monitor Window (ms) Error Frame Monitor Threshold (frames)

Value Range 1000 to 60000, in step of 100 1 to 4294967295, in step of 1

Default Value 1000

Description This parameter specifies the duration of monitoring error frames. l This parameter specifies the threshold of monitoring error frames. l Within the specified value of Error Frame Monitor Window(ms), if the number of error frames on the link exceeds the preset value of Error Frame Monitor Threshold(frame), an alarm is reported.

1

Error Frame Period Window (frame) Error Frame Period Threshold (frames)

1488 to 892800000, in step of 1 1 to 892800000, in step of 1

892800000

This parameter specifies the window of monitoring the error frame period. l This parameter specifies the threshold of monitoring the error frame period. l Within the specified value of Error Frame Period Window(frame), if the number of error frames on the link exceeds the preset value of Error Frame Period Threshold(frame), an alarm is reported.

1

Error Frame Second Window(s) Error Frame Second Threshold (s)

10 to 900, in step of 1 10 to 900, in step of 1

60 1

This parameter specifies the time window of monitoring the error frame second. l This parameter specifies the threshold of monitoring error frame seconds. l If any error frame occurs in one second, this second is called an errored frame second. Within the specified value of Error Frame Second Window(s), if the number of error frames on the link exceeds the preset value of Error Frame Second Threshold(s), an alarm is reported.

A.6.4 QoS Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to QoS.

A.6.4.1 Parameter Description: Diffserv Domain Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing DiffServ domains.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

599

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Diffserv Domain Management > Diffserv Domain Management from the Function Tree.

Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Mapping Relation ID Value Range 1 to 8 Default Value 1 Description This parameter indicates the ID of the mapping relation between DiffServ domains. This parameter indicates the name of the mapping relation between DiffServ domains.

Mapping Relation Name

-

Default Map

NOTE

If one default DiffServ domain exists on the OptiX RTN 910 equipment, Mapping Relation ID is set to 1, and Mapping Relation Name is set to Default Map. If these parameters are not set, all the ports belong to this domain.

Parameters for Ingress Mapping Relation
Parameter CVLAN Value Range 0 to 7 Default Value Description l This parameter indicates the priority of the C-VLAN of the ingress packets. l C-VLAN indicates the client-side VLAN, and the value 7 indicates the highest priority. SVLAN 0 to 7 l This parameter indicates the priority of the S-VLAN of the ingress packets. l S-VLAN indicates the server-side VLAN, and the value 7 indicates the highest priority.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

600

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter IP DSCP

Value Range 0 to 63

Default Value -

Description l This parameter indicates the DSCP priority of the IP addresses of the ingress packets. l The differentiated services code point (DSCP) refers to bits 0-5 of the differentiated services (DS) field in the packet and indicates the service class and discarding priority of the packet.

MPLS EXP

0 to 7

-

l Displays the MPLS EXP value of ingress packets. l When a packet in an egress queue leaves an NNI port, the NNI port obtains the packet priority value according to the mappings between PHB service classes of egress queues and egress packet priorities (MPLS EXP values), and writes the obtained priority value into the EXP field of the egress MPLS packet.
NOTE The MPLS EXP value can be modified in the default Diffserv domain (Default Map) only.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

601

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter PHB

Value Range BE AF1 AF2 AF3 AF4 EF CS6 CS7

Default Value -

Description l This parameter indicates the per-hop behavior (PHB) service class of the DiffServ domain. l The PHB service class refers to the forwarding behavior of the DiffServ node on the behavior aggregate (BA) operation. The forwarding behavior can meet the specific requirements. l The PHB service classes are BE, AF1, AF2, AF3, AF4, EF, CS6, and CS7. The priorities (C_VLAN priority, S_VLAN priority, DSCP value, and MPLS EXP value) contained in the packets of the DiffServ domain and the eight PHB service classes meet the requirements of the specified or default mapping relation.
NOTE The AF1 is classified into three sub service classes, namely, AF11, AF12, and AF13, only one of which is valid. It is the same case with the AF2, AF3, and AF4.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

602

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameters for Egress Mapping Relation
Parameter PHB Value Range BE AF1 AF2 AF3 AF4 EF CS6 CS7 Default Value Description l This parameter indicates the PHB service class of the DiffServ domain. l The PHB service class refers to the forwarding behavior of the DiffServ node on the behavior aggregate (BA) operation. The forwarding behavior can meet the specific requirements. l The PHB service classes are BE, AF1, AF2, AF3, AF4, EF, CS6, and CS7. The priorities (C_VLAN priority, S_VLAN priority, DSCP value and MPLS value) contained in the packets of the DiffServ domain and the eight PHB service classes meet the requirements of the specified or default mapping relation.
NOTE The AF1 is classified into three sub service classes, namely, AF11, AF12, and AF13, only one of which is valid. It is the same case with the AF2, AF3, and AF4.

CVLAN

0 to 7

-

l This parameter indicates the priority of the C-VLAN of the egress packets. l C-VLAN indicates the client-side VLAN, and the value 7 indicates the highest priority.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

603

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter SVLAN

Value Range 0 to 7

Default Value -

Description l This parameter indicates the priority of the S-VLAN of the egress packets. l S-VLAN indicates the server-side VLAN, and the value 7 indicates the highest priority.

IP DSCP

0 to 63

-

l This parameter indicates the DSCP priority of the IP addresses of the ingress packets. l The DSCP refers to bits 0-5 of the DS field in the packet and indicates the service class and discarding priority of the packet.

MPLS EXP

0 to 7

-

l Displays the MPLS EXP value of egress packets. l When a packet arrives at an NNI port, the NNI port obtains the packet priority value depending on its trusted priority type (MPLS EXP value) and specifies the PHB service class of the packet according to the mappings between packet priorities and PHB service classes.
NOTE The MPLS EXP value can be modified in the default Diffserv domain (Default Map) only.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

604

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameters for Application Ports
Parameter Port Value Range Default Value Description This parameter indicates the port that uses the DiffServ domain. The packets trusted by the OptiX RTN 910 are the C_VLAN, S_VLAN and IP DSCP packets that contain the C_VLAN priority, S_VLAN priority, DSCP value or MPLS value. By default, the untrusted packets are mapped to the BE service class for best-effort forwarding.
NOTE l The trusted packet priorities of a UNI port include DSCP value, CVLAN priority, and SVLAN priority. For the E-Line services that are transparently transmitted end to end (UNI-UNI), a UNI port only trusts DSCP value. l An NNI port carrying MPLS/PWE3 services trusts only packets with MPLS EXP values. l The trusted packet priorities of a QinQ link NNI port are configured according to the planning information.

Packet Type

CVLAN SVLAN IP-DSCP MPLS-EXP

CVLAN

A.6.4.2 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Management_Create
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating DiffServ (DS) domains.

Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS Management > Diffserv Domain Management > Diffserv Domain Management from the Function Tree. Click New.

2.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

605

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameters on the Main Interface
Parameter Mapping Relation ID Value Range 2 to 8 Default Value Description This parameter specifies the ID of the mapping relationship of a DS domain. This parameter specifies the name of the mapping relationship of a DS domain.

Mapping Relation Name

-

-

Parameters for Ingress Mapping Relation
Parameter CVLAN Value Range 0 to 7 Default Value Description l This parameter specifies the C-VLAN priority of the ingress packets. l C-VLAN indicates the client-side VLAN, and the value 7 indicates the highest priority. SVLAN 0 to 7 l This parameter specifies the S-VLAN priority of the ingress packets. l S-VLAN indicates the server-side VLAN, and the value 7 indicates the highest priority.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

606

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter IP DSCP

Value Range 0 to 63

Default Value -

Description l This parameter specifies the DSCP priority of the IP addresses of the ingress packets. l The differentiated services code point (DSCP) refers to bits 0-5 of the differentiated services (DS) field in the packet and indicates the service class and discarding priority of the packet.

MPLS EXP

-

-

l Displays the MPLS EXP value of ingress packets. l When a packet in an egress queue leaves an NNI port, the NNI port obtains the packet priority value according to the mappings between PHB service classes of egress queues and egress packet priorities (MPLS EXP values), and writes the obtained priority value into the EXP field of the egress MPLS packet.
NOTE The MPLS EXP value can be modified in the default Diffserv domain (Default Map) only.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

607

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameter PHB

Value Range BE AF1 AF2 AF3 AF4 EF CS6 CS7

Default Value -

Description l This parameter indicates the PHB service class of the DS domain. l The PHB service class refers to the forwarding behavior of the DS node on the behavior aggregate (BA) operation. The forwarding behavior can meet the specific requirements. l The PHB service classes are BE, AF1, AF2, AF3, AF4, EF, CS6, and CS7. The priorities (C_VLAN priority, S_VLAN priority, DSCP value and MPLS EXP value) contained in the packets of the DS domain and the eight PHB service classes meet the requirements of the specified or default mapping relationship.
NOTE The AF1 is classified into three sub service classes, namely, AF11, AF12, and AF13, only one of which is valid. It is the same case with the AF2, AF3, and AF4.

Issue 01 (2011-10-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

608

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System IDU Hardware Description

A Parameters Description

Parameters for Egress Mapping Relation
Parameter PHB Value Range BE AF1 AF2 AF3 AF4 EF CS6 CS7 Default Value Description l This parameter indicates the PHB service class of the DS domain. l The PHB service class refers to the forwarding behavior of the DS node on the behavior aggregate (BA) operation. The forwarding behavior can meet the specific requirements. l The PHB service classes are BE, AF1, AF2, AF3, AF4, EF, CS6, and CS7. The priorities (C_VLAN priority, S_VLAN priority, DSCP value and MPLS EXP value) contained in the packets of the DS domain and the eight PHB service classes meet the requirements of the specified or default mapping relationship.
NOTE The AF1 is classified into three sub service classes, namely, AF11, AF12, and AF13, only one of which is valid. It is the same case with the AF2, AF3, and AF4.

CVLAN

0 to 7

-

l This parameter specifies the C-VLAN priority of the egress packets. l C-VLAN indicates the client-side VLAN priority, and the value 7 indicates the